Skip to main content

Full text of "CSUF Course Catalogs 1959-2007"

See other formats






76-77 

GISNISRAI. 

CATALOG 

CALIFORNIA 

STATE 

UNIVERSITY 

FULLERTON 


THIS CATALOG 


Within this catalog may be found general academic and administrative information as well as specific 
descriptions of the departments, their majors and the courses offered in each. The first major part 
contains orienting information such as the calendar, materials on The California State University and 
Colleges, an overview of Cal State Fullerton and facts about student services and activities on the 
campus. 

The subsequent sections of the catalog are concerned with: admission, registration, records and 
regulations; academic advisement; and university courses. The next sections, organized by schools 
and divisions, describe' the departments and the programs of study and courses they offer. The final 
part of the catalog contains directories: a listing of individuals and groups participating in the 
governance of the university and with information on advisory councils, auxiliary organizations, and 
the faculty and administration. An index can be found at the end to help the reader locate specific 
items he needs or wishes to know about. 

Because this catalog must be prepared well ahead of the academic year it covers, changes in some 
programs and rules occur. The Class Schedule and subsequent errata sheets are the final authority 
in regard to classes offered, instructors and revisions of regulations. This publication can be bought 
for a small fee from the Titan Bookstore. 

Through the assistance of the Department of Art, Perry Preece has done the graphic work on this 
catalog. Douglas C. Pizac was responsible for the photography. The final organizing and editing was 
done by Kay Adams-Hernandez in the Office of Information Systems, and Ruth Pecsok and Jerry 
Keating in the Office of Public Affairs. 


NOTICE 


The Board of Trustees of The California State University and Colleges, in Section 43800 of Title 5 
of the California Administrative Code, has reserved the right to add, amend or repeal any of its 
regulations, rules, resolutions, standing orders, and rules of procedures in whole or in part, at such 
time as it may choose. None shall be construed, operate as or have the effect of an abridgement 
or limitation of any rights, powers or privileges of the Trustees. The chancellor reserves the right to 
add, amend or repeal any of his executive orders, at such time as he may choose, and the president 
of California State University, Fullerton reserves the right to add, amend or repeal provisions of this 
catalog and rules of the university, including handbooks, at such time as he may choose. No 
executive order shall be construed, operate as or have the effect of an abridgement or limitation 
of any rights, powers or privileges of the chancellor nor shall any catalog provision or rule of the 
university be construed, operate as, or have the effect of an abridgement or limitation of any rights, 
powers, or privileges of the president. 

Every effort has been made to assure the accuracy of the information in this catalog. Students are 
advised, however, that such information is subject to change without notice. Therefore, they should 
consult the appropriate instructional departments, schools or administrative offices for current 
information. Effective date: August 30, 1976 



NONDISCRIMINATION IN PROGRAMS AND ACTIVITIES 

Title IX of the Education Amendments of 1972, as amended, and the 
administrative regulations adopted by the U. S. Department of Health, 
Education and Welfare pursuant thereto, prohibit discrimination on the 
basis of sex in education programs and activities operated by California 
State University, Fullerton. Such programs and activities include admission 
of students and employment. Inquiries concerning the application of Title 
IX to programs and activities of California State University, Fullerton may 
be referred to Everett Winters, the campus officer assigned the administra- 
tive responsibility of reviewing such matters. 


3 


TABLE OF CONTENTS 


GENERAL INFORMATION— Cal State Fullerton Calendar 6, The California 
State University and Colleges 9, Cal State Fullerton: An Overview 10, Stu- 
dent Services 22. 

ADMISSION, REGISTRATION, RECORDS AND REGULATIONS— Admis- 
sion to the University 34, Registration 45, Records and Regulations 50. 

DEGREE REQUIREMENTS— Bachelor's Degree 62, Master's Degrees 65. 

ACADEMIC ADVISEMENT— 74. 

UNIVERSITY CURRICULA— 82 

CROSS-DISCIPLINARY UNIVERSITY PROGRAMS— 90. 

SCHOOL OF THE ARTS— 96. 

SCHOOL OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION AND ECONOMICS— 132. 

SCHOOL OF HUMAN DEVELOPMENT AND COMMUNITY SERVICE- 

162. 

SCHOOL OF HUMANITIES AND SOCIAL SCIENCES— 208. 

SCHOOL OF MATHEMATICS, SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING— 338. 

DIRECTORIES — Trustees 410, Office of the Chancellor 411, Campuses 412, Cal 
State Fullerton 41 5, Auxiliary Organizations 427, Cooperating Teachers 431, 
Faculty and Administration 433, Index 461 . 











. 





















GliNISRAI. 

INFORMATION 


6 


CAL STATE FULLERTON CALENDAR 
FOR 1976-77 


1976 


JUNE 

S M T W T F S 

JULY 

SMTWTFS 

AUGUST 

SMTWTFS 

SEPTEMBER 

SMTWTFS 

1 2 3 4 5 

6 7 8 91011 12 
13141516171819 

20 21 22 23 24 25 26 

27 28 29 30 

1 2 3 
4Q] 6 7 8 9 10 

11 1213 14151617 

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 

8 91011 121314 

15 16 17 18 1920 21 

22 23 24 25 26 27 28 

29 30 31 

12 3 4 
5(T ) 7 8 91011 
12131415161718 

19 20 21 22 23 24 25 

26 27 28 29 30 

OCTOBER 

M T W T F S 

NOVEMBER 

S M T W T F S 

DECEMBER 

SMTWTFS 

JANUARY 

SMTWTFS 

1 2 

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 
1011 1213141516 

17 18 1920 21 22 23 

24 25 26 27 28 29 30 

31 

1 2 3 4 5 6 

7 8 9 1011 12 13 
14151617181920 

21 22 23 24|25 26|27 

28 29 30 

12 3 4 

5 6 7 8 91011 
12131415161718 

19 20 21 22 23 24 25 

26 27 28 29 30 31 

1 

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 
91011 12131415 

16 17 18 1920 21 22 

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 
30 31 

FEBRUARY 

SMTWTFS 

MARCH 

S M T W T F S 

APRIL 

SMTWTFS 

MAY 

SMTWTFS 

1 2 3 4 5 

6 7 8 91011 12 
13141516171819 
20(2j]22 23 24 25 26 

27 28 

1 2 3 4 5 

6 7 8 91011 12 
13141516171819 

20 21 22 23 24 25 26 

27 28 29 30 31 

1 2 

3| 4 5 6 7 8| 9 
1011 12 13141516 

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 

24 25 26 27 28 29 30 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 

8 91011 1213 14 

15 1617 181920 21 

22 23 24 25 26 27 28 

29 30 31 

JUNE 

SMTWTFS 

JULY 

SMTWTFS 

AUGUST 

SMTWTFS 


12 3 4 

5 6 7 8 91011 
12131415161718 

19 20 21 22 23 24 25 

26 27 28 29 30 

1 2 

3[4] 5 6 7 8 9 
1011 1213141516 

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 

24 25 26 27 28 29 30 

31 

1 2 3 4 5 6 

7 8 91011 12 13 
14151617181920 

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 

28 29 30 31 


1977 


] CLASSES 
□ HOLIDAYS 



7 


SUMMER SESSION 1976 

june 7, Monday 

july 5, Monday 

August 1, Sunday 


August 27, Friday 


FALL SEMESTER 1976 


.Twelve weeks of instruction begin. Registration and classes 

.Independence Day holiday — campus closed 

.Filing period opens for applications to the spring semester 
1977 

.Summer session instruction ends; effective date of graduation 
for those completing requirements 


November 1, 1975 

Initial period for filing applications for admission to the fall semester 1976 began for all 
new students and former students not in attendance during the spring semester 1976. 


August 30, Monday Academic year begins. Advisement, orientation and registra- 

tion begin. See Class Schedule for details 

September 3, Friday Last day to register without late registration fee. Application 

deadline for baccalaureate degree candidates for graduation, 
june 1977 and August 1977, and for January 1977 master's 
degree candidates to request a graduation check 


September 6, Monday Labor day holiday — campus closed 

September 7, Tuesday Instruction begins 

September 9, Thursday Admission Day — campus open 

September 25, Saturday Rosh Hashanah — campus open 

October 4, Monday Yom Kippur — campus open 

October 11, Monday Columbus Day — campus open 

November 1, Monday Filing period opens for applications to the fall semester 1977 

November 11, Thursday Veterans' Day — campus open 

November 25-26, Thursday, Friday ....Thanksgiving recess — campus closed 

December 17, Friday Last day of classes 

December 20-23, Monday-Thursday.. Semester examinations 

December 24, Friday Winter recess begins 

January 3, Monday Winter recess ends. Grade reporting 

January 4, Tuesday Semester ends; effective date of graduation for those com- 

pleting requirements. All grade reports due. 


8 


SPRING SEMESTER 1977 


August 1, 1976 

Initial period for filing applications for the spring semester 1977 begins for all new students 
and former students not in attendance during the fall semester 1976. 


january 20, Thursday 
January 24, Monday . 
January 28, Friday 


January 31, Monday 

February 21, Monday 

April 1, Friday 

April 4, Monday 

April 11, Monday 

May 20, Friday 

May 23, Monday 

May 24-27, Tuesday-Friday .... 
May 28, 29, Saturday, Sunday 

May 30, Monday 

May 31, Tuesday 

June 1, Wednesday 

SUMMER SESSION 1977 

June 6, Monday 

July 4, Monday 

August 26, Friday 


Semester begins. Departmental and faculty meetings through 
Friday, January 21 

Advisement, orientation and registration begin. See Class 
Schedule for details 

.Last day to register without late registration fee. Application 
deadline for baccalaureate degree candidates for graduation 
January 1978, and for June 1977 and August 1977 master's 
degree candidates to request a graduation check 

.Instruction begins 

.Washington's Birthday holiday — campus closed 

.Martin Luther King, Jr., Memorial Observance Day — campus 
open 

.Spring recess begins 
.Instruction resumes 
Last day of classes 
.Examination study day 
.Semester examinations 
.Commencement Exercises 
.Memorial Day holiday — campus closed 
.Grade reporting 

.Semester ends. Effective date of graduation for those com- 
pleting requirements. End of academic year. All grade reports 
due. 


.Twelve weeks of instruction begin. Registration and classes 

Independence Day holiday — campus closed 

.Summer session instruction ends; effective date of graduation 
for those completing requirements. 


THE CALIFORNIA 

STATE UNIVERSITY AND COLLEGES 


The individual California State Colleges were brought together as a system by the Donohoe Higher 
Education Act of 1960. In 1972 the system became The California State University and Colleges and 
14 of the 19 campuses received the title University. 

The oldest campus — San Jose State University — was founded in 1857 and became the first institution 
of public higher education in California. The newest campus — California State College, Bakersfield — 
began instruction in 1970. 

Responsibility for The California State University and Colleges is vested in the Board of Trustees, 
whose members are appointed by the governor. The trustees appoint the chancellor, who is the chief 
executive officer of the system, and the presidents, who are the chief executive officers on the 
respective campuses. 

The trustees, the chancellor and the presidents develop systemwide policy, with actual implementa- 
tion at the campus level taking place through broadly based consultative procedures. The Academic 
Senate of The California State University and Colleges, made up of elected representatives of the 
faculty from each campus, recommends academic policy to the Board of Trustees through the 
chancellor. 

Academic excellence has been achieved by The California State University and Colleges through 
a distinguished faculty, whose primary responsibility is superior teaching. While each campus in the 
system has its own unique geographic and curricular character, all campuses, as multipurpose 
institutions, offer undergraduate and graduate instruction for professional and occupational goals as 
well as broad liberal education. All of the campuses require for graduation a basic program of 
' General Education-Breadth Requirements" regardless of the type of bachelor's degree or major 
field selected by the student. A limited number of doctoral degrees are offered jointly with the 
University of California. 

Presently, under the system's "New Approaches to Higher Education," the campuses are imple- 
menting a wide variety of innovative programs to meet the changing needs of students and society. 
Among pilot programs under way are instructional television projects, self-paced learning plans, 
minicourses, and credit-by-examination alternatives. The Consortium of The California State Univer- 
sity and Colleges fosters and sponsors local, regional, and statewide external degree and certificate 
programs to meet the needs of individuals who find it difficult or impossible to attend classes on 
a campus. 

Enrollments in fall 1975 totaled approximately 297,000 students, who were taught by a faculty of 
1 6,000. Last year the system awarded over 57 percent of the bachelor's degrees and 36 percent of 
the master's degrees granted in California. Over 525,000 persons have been graduated from the 19 
campuses since 1960. 


10 


CAL STATE FULLERTON: AN OVERVIEW 


GOVERNANCE 

Governance on the campus level at California State University, Fullerton is the responsibility of the 
president and his administrative staff. Working closely with the president are a number of faculty 
and student groups which initiate, and review and recommend for approval university programs, 
policies and procedures. Although the president is vested with the final authority on all university 
activities, maximum faculty and staff participation in campus decision-making and governance have 
become traditional. Increasingly, students are becoming actively involved and student representa- 
tives are found on almost all university, school, and departmental committees and policy-making 
bodies. 


ADVISORY BOARD 

The California State University, Fullerton Advisory Board consists of community leaders interested 
in the development and welfare of the university. The board serves the president in an advisory 
capacity, particularly in matters which affect university and community relations. Members are 
appointed by the president for terms of four years. 

PHILOSOPHY AND OBJECTIVES 

The main functions of an institution of higher learning are to disseminate and advance knowledge. 
The philosophy which guides an institution can limit or promote the successful achievement of these 
objectives. Therefore, from its inception, Cal State Fullerton has directed its educational program 
toward the fullest possible development of participants. For both faculty and student this entails a 
commitment to high standards of scholarship, a comprehensive rather than a narrow approach to 
major areas of study, and a concern with research and other creative activity. 

The university believes that an enduring educational experience must be founded upon exploration 
of one's cultural heritage, through basic studies in the liberal arts and sciences, and that it can and 
should at the same time prepare for success in a chosen occupation or profession. Accordingly, the 
required general education program has as its objective the development in each student of: 

1 . The effecitve use and interpretation of the written and spoken language. 

2. An understanding of the wide range of human endeavor and accomplishments in liberal arts 
and sciences, their interrelationships, and the various choices and values they represent. 

3. An understanding of information and principles in some areas of the liberal arts and sciences 
in sufficient depth to encourage critical and creative thought and expression. 

4. A spirit of inquiry into the past and into the future, in order to cope with conditions in the 
continually changing world. 

5. An understanding of the rights, privileges and responsibilities of citizenship in the community 
and nation, and of effective participation in today's world. 

In addition, the university requires of all students who are candidates for a degree — whatever their 
special purpose — the pursuit of a subject major. 

RETROSPECT AND PROSPECT 

In 1957 Cal State Fullerton became the 12th State College in California to be authorized by the 
Legislature. The following year a site was designated in northeast Fullerton. It was purchased in 1959, 
when Dr. William B. Langsdorf was appointed as founding president, the first staff was selected and 
plans for opening the new college were made. Orange County State College started classes for 452 
full- and part-time students in September, 1959, using leased quarters for its administrative offices 
on the Fullerton Union High School campus and for its classrooms at Fullerton's Sunny Hills High 
School. In the fall of 1960, the college opened classes on its own campus, where it occupied 12 
temporary buildings. The name changed to Orange State College in July, 1962, to California State 
College at Fullerton in July, 1964, to California State College, Fullerton in July, 1968 and to California 
State University, Fullerton, in June, 1972. The first permanent building, the six-story Letters and 
Science Building, was occupied in 1963. 


Human and Natural Environment 11 


Today, there are many dramatic evidences of additional, rapid growth. Ten large and modern 
permanent buildings have been completed, and enrollment has climbed to approximately 22,000. 
Since 1963 the curriculum has expanded to include lower division work and many graduate pro- 
grams. More than $60 million already has been invested in land, buildings and equipment — a sum 
expected to increase appreciably by the 1980's when the university is due to reach its projected peak 
enrollment of nearly 27,000. 

During this rapid growth, the university also has achieved a growing reputation for academic 
excellence. Cal State Fullerton began this spectacular development at a period when the citizens and 
government of California were revising and greatly expanding their commitments to quality public 
higher education. The Donahoe Higher Education Act of 1960 established the California State 
Colleges as a system under an independent Board of Trustees, redefined the functions of the State 
Colleges, and related them to both the cpmmunity colleges and to the University of California 
system. In this atmosphere of public support, Cal State Fullerton was the first of the State Colleges 
to submit and secure approval for a five-year master curricular plan and one of the first three to 
secure approval of a master building plan. It also was a university that was able to think in terms 
of its ultimate enrollment objectives from the beginning. During the same period, Orange County 
also was experiencing its own unprecedented growth. 

In 1969-70, it became apparent that colleges and universities statewide and nationally were entering 
a new period of development. Growing financial problems on all levels of government, mounting 
criticisms of contemporary educational policies and practices, and a loss of much public support 
for education were symptomatic of much deeper and more widespread problems and changes in 
American society and schools. In the context of what increasingly seemed to be the emergence of 
a new, and in many ways, different type of culture and world, the colleges and universities (like other 
major institutions) were acutely experiencing the confusions and conflicts such basic and rapid 
cultural transformations generate. 

On May 26, 1971, Dr. L. Donald Shields, who had served as acting president for seven months, was 
appointed the second president of Cal State Fullerton. Under his leadership, the university is rethink- 
ing and improving the functions it serves in higher education even as it also is pursuing more effective 
working relationships with the community. 

THE HUMAN AND NATURAL ENVIRONMENT 
OF THE UNIVERSITY 

Fullerton a city of approximately 90,000 inhabitants, is located in northern Orange County, about 
30 miles southeast of central Los Angeles. It is in the center of the new Southern California population 
center and within easy freeway access of all the diverse natural and cultural attractions of this region. 
Orange County, with an area of 782 square miles, is the 48th in size of California's 58 counties, but 
it is second largest county in population (1.6 million), and in total personal income. Orange County 
has experienced during the last 20 years almost unprecedented growth as communities continue to 
occupy the diminishing expanses of open land. 

Today, there co-exists an interesting mixture of the old and new economic and life styles in Orange 
County. Underneath the soil, archeologists and bulldozers uncover traces of the hunting and gather- 
ing Indian bands which flourished at least as early as 4,000 years ago in what was a benign and 
bountiful region. More visible traces remain of the Spanish and Mexican periods and cultures: 
Mission San Juan Capistrano, which began the agricultural tradition in Orange County, and subse- 
quent adobes from the great land grants and ranches that followed. Additionally, both customs and 
many names persist from this period, and so does some ranching. The architectural and other 
evidences of the subsequent pioneer period are still quite visible: farmsteads, old buildings from the 
new towns that then were established in the late 1800's, mining operations, and traces of early resort 
and other types of promotional activities. For about 100 years, farming was the main economic 
activity with products such as grapes, walnuts, vegetables, and increasingly oranges, replacing the 
older wheat and cattle ranches. Today, agriculture still is very important. Orange County ranks high 
among California's counties in mineral production with its oil, natural gas, sand and gravel, and clay 
mining and processing activities. 

The extensive development of the 42 miles of beaches in Orange County and the development of 
such attractions as Disneyland, Knott's Berry Farm, the Laguna Festival of Arts and Pageant of 
Masters, and the Anaheim Stadium and Convention Center continue to make tourism an increasingly 
important activity. So does the Mediterranean-type climate with: rainfall averaging 14 inches per 


12 Campus and Buildings 

year; and generally mild days (with either freezing or 100-degree temperatures uncommon) with 
frequent morning fogs during the summer. Both downtown Los Angeles and the Pacific Ocean can 
be reached by car in half an hour, and mountain and desert recreation areas are as close as an hour's 
drive from the campus. 

THE CAMPUS AND ITS BUILDINGS 

Once part of a vast orange grove, Cal State Fullerton's attractively landscaped campus now consists 
of 225 acres bounded on the south by Nutwood Avenue, on the west by State College Boulevard, 
on the north by Yorba Linda Boulevard and on the east by the Orange Freeway. 

The portion of Orange County immediately surrounding the campus is predominantly suburban; it 
includes housing tracts, apartment complexes, shopping centers, space-age industrial firms and still 
remaining orange groves and undeveloped hills and fields. 

Other educational institutions also are part of the immediate environment. The new campus of the 
Southern California College of Optometry, with its four modernistic buildings, opened in the spring 
of 1973. It is just north of Cal State Fullerton. To Cal State's immediate south is Pacific Christian 
College, a liberal arts school with a Bible emphasis, where students started classes in the fall of 1973. 
The Western State University College of Law, California's largest law school, occupied its new 
campus to the immediate west of Cal State in january, 1975. 

The Cal State Fullerton campus itself has a high density urban layout of buildings and facilities 
developed to serve a predominantly commuting public The university's modern buildings were 
planned so that no student should need more than 10 minutes to go from one class to another. The 
campus is surrounded with landscaped parking facilities. 

Even though most of the campus has been devoted to modern buildings, facilities for athletic 
activities, parking lots or attractively landscaped areas, there still remain over 20 acres of the original 
orange grove, land of which will become an arboretum within the next few years. Several older 
buildings also remain, including one which has been converted into the attractive University Club 
and another into the Foundation headquarters. 

The first permanent building, the Letters and Science Building, was occupied in 1963. This imposing 
structure, master planned to serve ultimately as a facility for undergraduate and graduate science 
instruction and research, has been used to house other programs until they could warrant new 
facilities of their own. 

Since 1963, growth has been rapid. The Music-Speech-Drama Building was completed in 1964, the 
Physical Education Building in 1965, the Library Building in 1966, the Commons cafeteria facility in 
1967, the Humanities-Social Sciences Building and Art Center in 1969, and William B. Langsdorf Flail 
(Administration-Business Administration) and the Engineering Building in 1971, and the Student 
Health Center in 1974. Langsdorf Hall and the Engineering Building reflect a commitment to pro- 
grams with high community involvement. In addition to the many undergraduate students who study 
and learn in these buildings, many professional engineers and local businessmen also use these very 
advanced facilities to continue their educations. 

New buildings are being planned to keep pace with university enrollment increases. The Education- 
Classroom Building and the University Center (Student Union) will be available for use in 1976. Next 
on the construction schedule is an addition to the Art Center. 

Planned for the northeast corner of the campus is a 20-acre Arboretum. It will include a 1 5-acre 
contoured botanical garden, a three-acre organic garden and a two-acre experimental plot. The 
ecologically arranged floras will depict habitat from the desert to the tropics. Upon completion, the 
Arboretum will include Heritage House, a 19th-century dwelling currently being restored, as well 
as an outdoor amphitheater. Plans call for Heritage House to serve as a cultural museum for North 
Orange County as well as an Arboretum office, while the amphitheater will seat 400 persons and 
feature Shakespearean and children's summer theater productions. 

The ample freeway and surface street accommodations that approach the main entrance to the 
university's modern campus also provide comparatively easy access to the great and diverse learning 
resources available in Southern California: many other colleges and universities; museums, libraries, 
art galleries; zoos; and the wide variety of economic governmental, social, and cultural activities and 
experiments that may be found in this dynamic and complex region of California and the United 
States. 


Academic Instruction 13 


STUDENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY 

Much of the distinctive character and learning atmosphere of any campus comes from the nature 
and vitality of its students. Diversity, the synthesis of academic with work and family interests, strong 
high school records and relative maturity are some of the predominant characteristics of the student 
body at Cal State Fullerton. The campus is both a large and a still rapidly growing one despite its 
comparative newness. Nearly 22, OCX) students were enrolled in 1975-76 and this year s total is 
expected to be 23,000. 

The university is a commuter institution. Less than one percent of the students live in university- 
affiliated housing. Twenty-four percent work 35 hours or more a week, and yet nearly 52 percent 
take 12 or more units of coursework each semester. Seventy-seven percent come from a radius of 
15 miles from the campus, but many have lived elsewhere before coming to Orange County. 
Twenty-nine percent are lower division students, 47 percent are university juniors and seniors, and 
another 24 percent are doing post baccalaureate or graduate work. Over seven-eighths of the upper 
division students are transfers from other institutions, principally community colleges. Fifty-six per- 
cent are men, and the median age is 24. Forty-four percent are women, and the median age is 23. 
Thirty-four percent are married. One-fourth of the students participate in both the day and evening 
programs during the regular semesters and 17 percent are involved only in the late afternoon or 
evening program. 

Many students already have clearly defined disciplinary, professional and artistic interests. One- 
fourth still are searching for a meaningful vocation and are in the process of exploring different fields 
of knowledge and the work that might develop from them. Most are trying to understand themselves 
and their world so that they can become more effective human beings and citizens. 

THE FACULTY 

Central to the effectiveness of any institution of higher learning is the quality and dedication of its 
faculty. Cal State Fullerton is proud of the high caliber of its faculty and of the commitments of its 
individual faculty members to teaching and scholarship. 

In the fall of 1975 there were 712 full-time and 461 part-time faculty members teaching on the 
campus. For the full-time faculty members, the median age was 38 and almost all had some previous 
college or university teaching experience before coming to Fullerton. Faculty members also have 
a wide variety of experiences and accomplishments in research, the arts, professional work, consult- 
ing and other creative activities. Seventy-four percent of the full-time faculty have earned their 
doctorate degrees, and these have come from more than 100 major colleges and universities. 
Criteria for selection to the faculty include mastery of knowledge in an academic specialty, demon- 
strated skill and experience in teaching, and continuing interest in scholarly study and research. 
Retention and promotion criteria also include service to the university and to the community. 

FACULTY DEVELOPMENT CENTER 

The goals of the Faculty Development Center are to foster faculty excellence and to provide services 
for those faculty who believe their own teaching, instructional^ related research and other profes- 
sional activities may benefit from various kinds of instruction with their colleagues. 

The director of the Faculty Development Center may be contacted through the Office of the 
Associate Vice President for Academic Programs. 

ACADEMIC INSTRUCTION 

The university offers a full four-year program of freshman through senior work as well as credential 
programs for teachers and graduate, master's level work in many disciplines and professional fields. 
The university provides a diversity of educational opportunities to satisfy the broad range of back- 
grounds and interests of its students. Over 4,000 courses have been developed to provide learning 
from introductory to highly specialized, in-depth and advanced, work in a wide variety and growing 
number of fields of study. 

Fullerton currently awards the baccalaureate degree in 40 fields of knowledge. More advanced work 
and the master's degree are awarded in 34 programs. Many of the baccalaureate and master s degree 
programs offer a choice of specializations (or options or emphases). Additionally, at least a few 
courses are given in many fields or subject matter areas in which some other colleges and universities 
offer full degree programs. Often these courses are given by a number of different departments. Such 


14 Continuing Education 

an interdisciplinary trend fits not only with broader, cultural integration of knowledge but also with 
the recent development of a growing number of interdisciplinary efforts, including some new degree 
programs, at Fullerton. 

Certain traditions have developed with the academic programs at Cal State Fullerton. One is that 
of relative balance in strength of the programs in the physical sciences, the social sciences, the 
humanities and the fine arts. Another is that of academic excellence in the various specializations 
offered by the university and the comparative freedom given to departments and professional 
schools to develop the depth programs for their majors. Another pattern is the great freedom given 
to most students in selecting courses to satisfy their general education or breadth requirements. Still 
other tendencies include the encouragement of: a diversity of approaches to teaching; experimenta- 
tion and innovation in courses and programs; and student participation in curricular planning and 
decision-making. 

ACCREDITATION 

Cal State Fullerton is fully accredited by the Western Association of Schools and Colleges. Specific 
programs have been accredited by the American Assembly of Collegiate Schools of Business, the 
American Chemical Society, the American Council on Education for Journalism, the American 
Speech and Hearing Association, the Engineers' Council for Professional Development, the National 
Association of Schools of Art, the National Association of Schools of Music, the National Assocation 
of Schools of Theater, the National Council for Accreditation of Teacher Education and the Board 
of Directors of the National Athletic Trainers Association. Cal State Fullerton is a member of the 
Council of Graduate Schools in the United States and the Western Association of Graduate Schools. 

SCHEDULE OF CLASSES 

The regular, educational program of the university is offered continuously from 8 a.m. until 10 p.m. 
Monday through Friday. The Class Schedule, listing all classes meeting during these hours, is pre- 
pared for each semester and can be purchased at the Titan Bookstore. 

The classes held during the late afternoon and evening hours are part of the regular university 
program. Students enrolling in these classes must have met all admission requirements of the 
university, including the filing of an official application for admission, the filing of complete official 
transcripts from other schools, colleges and universities and in the case of lower-division applicants, 
the completion of required tests for admission. 

The classes which are offered during the summer sessions and by means of extension do not require 
admission to the university, but some courses do require specific prerequisites. Special schedules 
are provided for the summer sessions and extension programs. 

CONTINUING EDUCATION— SUMMER SESSION 

The summer session is designed to meet the needs of students who are interested in the enrichment 
of their educational background as well as completing requirements for a degree or credential. 
Summer session courses are the equivalent of university courses offered in the fall and spring 
semesters, and apply toward graduation and residence requirements as well as a teaching credential 
requirements. Both day and evening classes are scheduled. Some courses have prerequisite require- 
ments which students must meet. Master's degree work is also offered. 

The dates for the 1976 summer session are June 7 through August 27. Also offered are wide varieties 
of course durations; with a number of two- and three-week workshops, intensified courses, and 
expanded eight-week courses. In addition to much of the regular curriculum, summer offerings 
include many unique and innovative programs for teachers and other professional groups. 

A summer session class schedule is usually available by February, and may be obtained by writing 
the Office of Continuing Education. This schedule contains information on matters such as costs and 
registration. 

Admission to the Summer Session 

Although the quality of the program and most of the course offerings are the same as in the regular 
session, the university does not require an advance application or transcripts from students register- 
ing for credit courses in the summer session. However, students are expected to have satisfied the 


International Programs 15 


prerequisites for the course in which they register. Admission to summer session does not grant 
admission to the regular session. Admission to the summer sessions is completed at registration. 

Authorized Student Load 

A normal full-time program of study in the summer session is 1 % units of coursework per week of 
instruction. 


CONTINUING EDUCATION— EXTENSION 
PROGRAMS AND SERVICES 

The resources of Cal State Fullerton are made availatfle through extension programs to those who 
are unable to take university work in residence but who wish to pursue university-level study for 
purposes of resuming an interrupted or incompleted education, to enhance professional or vocation- 
al abilities, or for personal growth and fulfillment. 

Extension offerings include regularly established university courses as well as courses, workshops, 
and conferences designed to meet the needs of particular groups and communities, and may be 
initiated at various times during the year. Any adult may enroll in an extension course; it is not 
necessary to be enrolled in the university. 

The maximum extension credit which will be accepted toward baccalaureate degrees is 24 semester 
units. Nine semester units of extension credit may be applied toward a master's degree with 
appropriate approvals. Extension credit may not be used to fulfill the minimum residence require- 
ments for graduation. 

Veterans may use the educational benefits available to them under federal and state laws to enroll 
in university extension courses provided the classes are part of their prescribed and recognized 
objectives as approved by the Veterans Administration. 

For information about establishing an extension course, or for current offerings, write or telephone 
the Extension Office. 

INTERNATIONAL PROGRAMS 

An overseas study program is offered by The California State University and Colleges International 
Programs, under which students may enroll for a full academic year simultaneously at their home 
campus, where they earn academic credit and maintain campus residency, and at a distinguished 
foreign university or a special program center. 

Cooperating universities abroad include the University of Provence, France; the University of Heidel- 
berg, Germany; the University of Florence, Italy; the Universidad Ibero-Americana, Mexico; the 
University of Granada and the University of Madrid, Spain; the University of Uppsala, Sweden; and 
Waseda University, Japan. In the United Kingdom, cooperating universities, which may vary from 
year to year, include Dundee, Leicester, London, Oxford, Liverpool, Lampeter and Sheffield. In 
addition, California State University and Colleges students may attend a special program in Taiwan, 
Republic of China, an architectural program in Copenhagen, Denmark, and Lincoln College and 
Massey University, New Zealand. 

Eligibility is limited to students who will have upper division or graduate standing during their year 
of participation, who have a 2.5 overall grade-point average (3.0 for the United Kingdom program), 
who show ability to adapt to a new environment, and, who in the cases of France, Germany, Mexico 
and Spain, are proficient in the language of instruction at the foreign university. Selection is made 
by a faculty committee on the student's home campus and by a statewide faculty committee. 
The International Programs are supported by state funds to the extent that such funds would have 
been expended had the student concerned continued to study in California. Students assume costs 
for predeparture orientation, insurance, transportation, housing and meals. Home campus registra- 
tion fees, tuition on the home campus for out-of-state students (if the student is not a California 
resident) and personal incidental expenses or vacation travel costs while abroad are also paid by 
the student. The Office of International Programs collects and administers funds for those items 
which the program must arrange or can negotiate more effectively, such as home campus fees, 
orientation costs, insurance, outbound transportation, and, in some centers, housing. Students ac- 
cepted in the International Programs may apply for any financial aid available in their home campus, 
except work-study. 


16 Instructionally Related Services 


Application for the 1977-78 academic year must be submitted before February 11, 1977 (except for 
New Zealand and United Kingdom applicants, who must submit applications by May 14, 1976, and 
January 7, 1977, respectively). Applicants are notified of acceptance by April 1, 1977 (New Zealand 
by June 3, 1976). Detailed information may be obtained from the International Education Office on 
campus or by writing to The California State University and Colleges International Programs, 400 
Golden Shore Drive, Long Beach, California 90802. 

INSTRUCTIONALLY RELATED SERVICES 

The university provides an extensive program of instructionally related services for its students and 
faculty. These include the universitywide services of the university Library, the Instructional Media 
Center, Academic Advisement, Learning Assistance Resource Centers, and the Computer Center 
described in the following sections. Four offices, Academic Programs, Academic Administration, 
Information Systems, and Institutional Research, make studies on university programs and assist in 
coordinating, planning educational operations and sharing information on educational trends and 
innovations on the Fullerton campus with those going on elsewhere. 

The Library 

The Library Building was completed in 1966. The lower level is occupied by the Instructional Media 
Center; the first and the third through sixth floors are occupied by the Library; the second floor is 
presently devoted to offices and classrooms. Designed presently to seat approximately 1,600 persons 
and to house about 300,000 books as well as related materials, the building contains group study 
and seminar rooms, study carrels for graduate students and facilities for individual listening, for the 
reading of microform materials and for copying materials in book and microform. 

The main book collection will contain about 450,000 volumes at the beginning of the 1976-77 
academic year. During that year about 25,000 volumes will be added. Besides attempting to build 
a balanced collection of basic works, the Library has concentrated its efforts in several subject areas. 
As a result relatively strong collections are now available in such fields as World War II, international 
relations since 1870, Kant, Shakespeare, Melville, ichthyology, angling, historiography and historical 
bibliography, library science, mathematics and British, United States, California history, and the 
history of cartography. A selective depository for U.S. government documents since 1963, the library 
will house about 155,000 U.S. documents by the beginning of the 1976-77 academic year. The 
Library has, in addition, some 20,000 reels of microfilmed U.S. government documents, chiefly State 
Department Archives, but also such items as the Congressional Record and the papers of various 
presidents as well as microfiche copies of the material in Project ERIC. The Library is a depository 
for California state documents and for California curriculum materials, and includes current samples 
of state adopted texts, curriculum guides from all over the United States, and non-book instructional 
materials. 

The Library subscribes to about 4,400 periodicals. It has some 28,000 volumes of bound periodicals 
and has extensive microform holdings in backfiles of periodicals and of local, national and interna- 
tional newspapers. Titles held exceed 10,000. 

Among its major holdings are the Human Relations Area Files, the British 19th-Century Parliamentary 
Papers, the Parliamentary Debates, a microfilm edition of the Published Colonial Records of the 
American Colonies, 1619-1800, and in conjunction with the Patrons of the Library, the Langsdorf 
Anniversary Collection of Grabhorn Press and Book Club of California books. 

Library hours are posted in the lobby and listed, with other key information about the Library in the 
Library Guide, which is available at the information desk in the lobby as well as at the circulation 
and reference desks. Assistance in the use of the card catalog and other Library facilities may be 
obtained at the first floor information desk. Librarians with various subject backgrounds are on duty 
at the reference desk on the third floor to aid students and faculty in further use of the library's 
resources. Library tours are available at the beginning of each semester, and a course in bibliographic 
research is conducted each semester. 

Learning Centers 

Under the administrative guidance of an all-university board, there are two centers at present. 
Located on the fourth floor of the Library Building, a Learning Assistance/ Resource Center (LARC) 


Instructional !y Related Services 1 7 


is for all university students who need to bring about improvement in their present learning skills, 
particularly in the areas of reading, writing, computation and study skills. This center also serves as 
a resource center, containing special study materials, collateral textbooks and taped programs that 
supplement regular course offerings. Individual tutoring is available to students after their needs have 
been properly assessed through LARC on request and through faculty or peer counselor referrals. 
All tutors are first selected on the basis of ability in their particular area of concentration. Prior to 
tutoring, they are assigned to a series of education courses designed to give the prospective tutor 
a greater understanding and awareness of the nature of his role in the learning process. 

There is a Science Learning Center on the second floor of the Science building which is available 
for use by the campus community upon approval by the staff of the center. 

Instructional Media Center 

The Instructional Media Center, located in the lower level of the Library building, includes both 
extensive audiovisual and instructional television services. 

Services to the faculty and students include encouragement and use of all types of audiovisual 
equipment and materials, rental of films from major rental libraries, and for faculty: production of 
transparencies, charts, graphs, diagrams, audiotapes and cassettes, tele-lectures plus all types of still 
and motion picture photography. Instructional television services include distribution of off-the-air 
or videotaped programs from master control to selected classrooms, videotaping facilities and 
playback both in the studio or classroom and off the campus. 

The center is responsible for the coordination and development of instructional applications of 
media, and the improvement of programs and materials designed for instructional use. Liaison and 
service relations are maintained with other media learning-oriented units on the campus. Personnel 
of the center are prepared to assist the faculty in their analysis of media needs as related to the 
procurement or production of materials pertinent to instructional development. 

Computer Center 

The Computer Center, located on the second floor of Lansdorf Hall, serves as the central computing 
facility for all of the university. As the central campus computing facility, it provides support for 
instruction, research and administrative computing services. 

The computing system at Fullerton is integrated into the State Distibuted Computer Network which 
provides a wide range of computing services. The local campus computers is a CDC 31 50 with 48,000 
words of memory, card reader, card punch, printer tape drives and disk drives. As a component 
of the network, the Computer Center can communicate with a large-scale CDC 3300 Computer 
located at the Division of Information Systems in Los Angeles. The Distributed Computer Network 
also provides time-sharing services on a CDC 3170 and access to an IBM 360/91 at UCLA. Keypunch, 
teletype terminals, a sorter and an interpreter for student use are available in an open shop area 
located in the Computer Center. 

In the School of Mathematics, Science and Engineering, the Computer Science Department offers 
both the B.S. and M.S. degrees in Computer Science. Many other departments, including Sociology, 
Geography and Accounting, use the computer facility in their coursework. Students' jobs receive 
the highest priority of all work bath-processed on the CDC 3150. The Computer Center maintains 
a library of application programs for general use. Such languages offered by the system include 
FORTRAN, COBAL, ALGOL, BASIC and COMPASS (the assembly language for CDC). 

Office of Academic Administration 

The Office of Academic Administration coordinates the following instructional^ related activities: 
Academic Advisement; Academic Services; Admissions and Records; Computer Services; Informa- 
tion Systems; Institutional Research, and Library. 

Office of Academic Services 

The Office of Academic Services is responsible for the preparation of the Class Schedule and the 
Faculty Handbook. The office coordinates all changes and adjustments to these documents, adminis- 
ters and prepares the staffing formula for the university, and has a primary responsibility for course 
section and facilities utilization reporting during and after registration. 


18 Research Organizations 


Office of Information Systems 

The Office of Information Systems has responsibility for the maintenance and operation of all 
academic and administrative data systems. In addition, the Office of Information Systems coordi- 
nates the activities of the Office of Academic Services, the Office of Institutional Research, and the 
Computer Center. 

Office of Institutional Research 

The Office of Institutional Research serves as an information center and a problem-solving agency 
which collects, interprets and disseminates information. These data include enrollment histories and 
projections, distributions of data according to selected factors (e.g., level, type of instruction, unit 
value), summaries of student characteristics, and other statistics related to student population, 
course offerings and resources. Most of the data collection and analysis is related to the reporting 
requirements of The California State University and Colleges and other agencies. However, the office 
evaluates data, provides assistance in design of specialized studies and also conducts analytic studies 
to serve the decision-making and policy-formulating needs of Cal State Fullerton. 

Office of Academic Programs 

The Office of Academic Programs is responsible for coordinating the development of educational 
programs; providing an all-university perspective on educational activities at the campus; and 
stimulating academic innovations. The office also is responsible for providing leadership for the 
cross-school programs (non-degree programs: Interdisciplinary Center, technological studies; de- 
gree programs: Special Major, B.A., M.A.). The office provides administrative assistance and coordi- 
nation with all-university pilot proposals for special funding by the Chancellor's Office and for 
minigrants to support innovative projects. 

Particular responsibilities include leadership with the Curriculum Committee, the General Education 
Committee, the Committee for Educational Development and Innovation, the Faculty Development 
Center, and other individuals and groups concerned with changing and improving the educational 
programs of this institution. Responsibilities relating to the Chancellor's Office include regular review 
and updating of the Academic Master Plan; Cal State Fullerton Coordination of program perform- 
ance review; and staff reports for the Chancellor's Office relating to academic planning. 

Careful liaison is maintained with the Office of Academic Administration for university-level ap- 
proval of all new courses in the programs and preparation of the university catalog. 

RESEARCH ORGANIZATIONS AND SERVICES 
AND SPECIAL STUDY CENTERS 

Much and varied research is going on at Cal State Fullerton. Most of this is being done by individual 
faculty members and students as part of their scholarly and professional development activities. 
Research training is an important part of the education for more advanced work in most disciplines 
and professions, and many of our students are encouraged and assisted to learn and apply research 
skills in either independent or team projects. 

The Research Committee of the Faculty Council and the Contracts and Grants Office provide 
stimulus, coordination and direction to the research efforts of the university. 

A Student Research Fellowship program and a Faculty Research Grant program award "seed grants" 
to promising research projects every year. Services supporting research are given by the Cal State 
Fullerton Foundation, the university Computer Center, and the university Library. Augmenting the 
on-campus aids to research are the great and diverse resources available for study in the Southern 
California area. 

The university is particularly appreciative of the support money provided for faculty each year by 
the Friends of the State University. 

A number of special centers with specific research objectives are operating at the university. These 
include the Center for Research in Business, Economics and the Community (with its affiliated 
Center for Economic Education and the Real Estate Research Institute), the Center for Governmental 
Studies, the Urban Research Institute, the Institute for Molecular Biology, the Institute for Reading, 
the Laboratory for Phonetic Research, the Special Education Clinic, the Speech and Hearing Clinic 
and the Tucker Wildlife Sanctuary. 


Research Organizations 19 


Center for Research in Business , Economics and the Community 

The Center for Research in Business, Economics and the Community provides: 

1 . School of Business Administration and Economics and other faculty with additional opportunity 
to partiipate in research activities in order to improve and reinforce teaching and professiona 

competence; „ . , , , . 

2. Professional research and consultation services to the local area normally considered as being 
serviced by the university, including private business, labor, agriculture, and local government 

3. Educational services, e.g., seminars and conferences, to improve the level of understanding and 
competence of local decision-makers in specialized areas relating to business administration 

and economics; and , . . . 

4. A focus, through research, for the education of students and citizens in the business and 
economic problems of the local community, and for the involvement of faculty in such 
educational programs. 

The operations of the center are carried out by constituent institutes, programs, and projects for 
which the center provides overall leadership and coordination. The institutes are long-term continu- 
ing organizations designed to operate in selected major problem and functional areas of strategic 
significance and concern to the school. Programs and projects within the center are organized to 
carry on work outside the institute's area of interest, which are a smaller scale and for a shorter 
time-span. 

Currently included within the Center for Research in Business, Economics and the Community are 
the affiliated Center for Economic Education and the Real Estate Research Institute. 

Center for Economic Education 

The Center for Economic Education is one of many such centers at colleges and universities in the 
United States working with the national Joint Council on Economics Education to expand economic 
understanding. Center programs include (1 ) services to schools and colleges, individual educators, 
and the community; (2) research and professional training; and (3) operation of an economic, 
education information center. The center consists of a broadly based executive policy board; an 
administrative staff; and formally organized groups of participating users. Although operating autono- 
mously, the center is affiliated with the Center for Research in Business, Economics and the Commu- 
nity. 

Real Estate Research Institute 

The Real Estate Research Institute conducts a continuing research program, with special emphasis 
on urban development in Orange County. Studies are undertaken in cooperation with various public 
and private agencies, but primary funding is from the California State Department of Real Estate. 
Opportunities exist for student involvement. 


Center for Governmental Studies 

The Center for Governmental Studies was established and organized in 1965 under the direction of 
the Department of Political Science. Its purpose is to promote research and scholarship among both 
faculty and students, and to assist academic, governmental, professional and civic groups in the goa s 
and programs. This is accomplished by offering assistance in the study of local governmenta 
problems, providing instruction and experience in research techniques and methodology, an 
sponsoring community institutes and seminars. 

Urban Research Institute 

The Urban Research Institute is a joint venture between local government and the university. The 
institute has an advisory board representing governments and academic institutions in the area. The 
research on local problems is done by teams consisting of practitioners, elected officials, community 
representatives and academicians selected for their expertise in the areas under study. It is an attempt 
to fuse the experience and reality orientation of practitioners with the resources, knowledge and ski s 
of the academic community in solving problems facing the residents and governments in Orange 
County. 


20 Research Organizations 

Institute for Molecular Biology 

The Institute for Molecular Biology was established for the purpose of promoting an atmosphere 
congenial to research and creative activity in the molecular biological sciences. It is an interdiscipli- 
nary organization comprised of certain faculty from the Departments of Biological Science, Chemis- 
try and Physics. The institute is dedicated to the pursuit of problems of human welfare, utilizing an 
approach at the cellular and molecular level of inquiry. Its purposes are: ( 1 ) to foster and encourage 
communication of ideas and information among its membership for mutual professional improve- 
ment; (2) to encourage students to adopt affiliation with the membership and to adopt an interdisci- 
plinary understanding of their particular areas of emphasis; (3) to foster an active research program 
on the part of the membership on problems best approached by the integration of chemistry, physics 
and biology; and (4) to seek ways of improving the individual teaching performance of its member- 
ship through interdisciplinary communication at all levels of instruction. 

It is intended that the institute will function as a service to the departments that it represents. The 
institute sponsors a series of special seminars devoted to topics in the molecular biological sciences, 
featuring speakers from its own personnel and from other campuses. 

Institute for Reading 

In 1971, the Institute for Reading was established for the purpose of promoting an atmosphere 
congenial to research and creative activity for development of reading and related programs. In the 
fulfillment of this purpose, the institute is dedicated to the pursuit of issues encountered in teaching 
of reading to children and adults, using an interdisciplinary approach whenever feasible. 

It ( 1 ) fosters and encourages communication of ideas and information among its membership for 
mutual professional improvement; (2) encourages students to adopt affiliation with members and 
to adopt an interdisciplinary understanding of their particular areas of emphasis; (3) seeks ways of 
improving the teaching performance of its membership through interdisciplinary communication at 
all levels of instruction; and (4) fosters research activities on the part of the membership. 

The Reading Center is located in the School of Education. Its primary purpose is to serve as a clinic 
and laboratory for graduate students in the reading option of the Master of Science in Education. 
Children from the university community schools attend the Reading Center for diagnosis and 
remediation. The center houses materials and equipment relating to reading instruction. 

Laboratory for Phonetic Research 

The Laboratory for Phonetic Research is a research and training facility in the Department of 
Linguistics. It is equipped with electromechanical facilities for the acoustical, psychoacoustical, and 
physiological study of human speech. Its objectives are twofold: 

Instruction. To provide teaching, training and experience for students who will serve during their 
professional lives to assist the language handicapped. 

Research. To provide advanced students and faculty with facilities for research on language 
function and dysfunction. 

Special Education Clinic 

The primary purpose of the Special Education Clinic is to provide intensive experiences for students 
with children referred by schools and other agencies in the community. The experiences involve 
educational assessment, instructional methodology and evaluation. All students participating in the 
clinic attend clinic seminars and prepare cases for presentation at the seminars. 

Speech and Hearing Clinic 

The Speech and Hearing Clinic operates as a nonprofit California State University, Fullerton Founda- 
tion agency. In addition it is an off-campus clinical program for graduate students that involve 
experiences within medical and paramedical settings. The primary purpose of the clinics both on 
campus and off campus is to provide opportunities for teaching, service and research. University 
students receive clinical experience and opportunity for observation. The on-campus clinic is ac- 
credited by the Board of Examiners of the American Speech and Hearing Association and the 
California State Department of Education. 

Tucker Wildlife Sanctuary 

The Tucker Wildlife Sanctuary operates as a nonprofit California State University, Fullerton Founda- 


Titan Shops 21 


tion agency. The sanctuary provides for a program of continuing educational service to the commu- 
nity; a research center for biological field studies; a facility for teacher education in nature interpreta- 
tion and conservation education; and a center for training students planning to enter into the public 
service field of nature interpretation. 

Center for Internships and Cooperative Education 

The Center for Internships and Cooperative Education was established to offer students the opportu- 
nity to combine their academic experience with periods of professional employment directly related 
to their academic major. The student, the university and the employer all benefit from the involve- 
ment in cooperative education. 

Students gain a clearer understanding of their career objectives through the application of their 
academic studies in the "world of work." Learning while working outside the classroom, students 
obtain a broader perspective of themselves. Most of the departments offer an internship course 
which carries academic credit. Some of the internships are salaried and consequently assist students 
in meeting the cost of living. 

The employing agency receives the services of individuals who are highly motivated, eager to learn 
and aware of theoretical developments in their field. The employer also finds participation in 
cooperative education to be one of the most reliable means of recruiting personnel for full-time 
employment upon graduation. 

The university through the establishment of the Center for Cooperative Education, has provided a 
means for students to enhance their academic program. The center also serves as a feedback 
mechanism to keep the curriculum current and bring the campus and the community closer together. 
Cooperative education is a program which offers innovative and expanded dimensions to the total 
education received by students at the university. The center provides services to students, faculty 
and employers to better implement this program. 

CALIFORNIA STATE UNIVERSITY, 

FULLERTON FOUNDATION 

The California State University, Fullerton Foundation was established and incorporated in October 
1959 to provide essential student, faculty and staff services which cannot be provided from state 
appropriations; to supplement the program and activities of the university in appropriate ways; and 
to assist otherwise the university in fulfilling its purposes and in serving the people of the State of 
California — especially those of the area in which the university is located. 

Services provided by the foundation include administration of scholarship and student loan funds; 
sponsored research programs; Tucker Wildlife Sanctuary; and certain institutes. 

The foundation's overall policies are administered by a board of trustees composed of members of 
the university faculty, administration and students as well as community leaders. 

TITAN SHOPS, INC. 

Titan Shops, Inc., is comprised of the Titan Bookstore and food services. Established in July 1971, 
it is administered by a board of trustees composed of members of the university faculty, administra- 
tion, students and community business leaders. 

Titan Bookstore 

Students are able to purchase or order books and supplies as needed for classes from the on-campus 
bookstore, owned and operated by the Titan Shops, Inc. The Titan Bookstore is a nonprofit operation: 
its proceeds are used to further the educational aims of the university. It is located directly east of 
the Letters and Science Building and is closely adjacent to Langsdorf Hall. 

Food Service 

On the campus, Titan Shops Inc., provides food in Commons, in the University Center (Student 
Union) and a fast food service adjacent to Langsdorf Hall. Vending machines and mobile carts also 
are located at other locations. A variety of restaurants and eating places also may be found within 
a short walking or driving distance from the university. 


22 


STUDENT SERVICES 


While classroom activity is devoted to the academic development of the learner, Student Services 
offers programs which simultaneously provide students with services and opportunities for personal 
growth. Some Student Services programs such as housing and financial aid emphasize their service 
and educationally supportive roles; others, like counseling, accentuate their developmental aspects. 
The opportunities offered by the university's Student Services program vary from the traditional 
"student activity" of fraternity and sorority "rush" to the establishment of a coffee house complete 
with weekly entertainment. More developmental in nature is the investigating of vocational and 
personal life styles through group and/or individual counseling and testing. 

The Student Services program includes: counseling and testing, student activities, Associated Stu- 
dents government, housing, health services, financial aid, programs for the handicapped, internation- 
al education, placement alumni affairs, educational opportunity for the culturally different, special 
projects, and services for women, minorities and veterans. 

OFFICE OF THE DEAN 

While each department within Student Services has its specific function and staff, the Dean of 
Student Services coordinates and administers the university's Student Services program. Additional- 
ly, the dean is an advocate for students to the faculty and administration and as such develops and 
maintains procedures within Student Services and the university which will increase the general 
welfare of the students and enhance their educational success at the university. Information regard- 
ing any of the Student Services programs may be obtained in the Dean of Student Services Office. 

COUNSELING AND TESTING SERVICES 

Counseling 

Students will find all kinds of counseling at this university. There is advice and counsel available from 
a variety of thoughtful and experienced persons about a variety of activities and questions. Each of 
these persons may give them counseling. 

In the Counseling Center, "counsel" is devoted to a particular set of needs: the need to clarify or 
understand their struggles — crises, dilemmas, alternatives, perplexities, uncertainties; the need to 
plan or the need to be listened to — or to sort out what's troubling them when they feel uneasy and 
don't know why. 

To the counselors in the center, counseling is a special kind of conversation. It is an opportunity for 
a student to sit down with a professionally trained counselor who cares about the student's growth 
and development, his individuality, his dignity, his goals. It is concerned with questions of work, 
study, vocation, and through all of these his relations with others, himself, life and growth. Everything 
said during counseling is confidential. It is private. It is not administrative. The center keeps no 
records of conversations. There is no charge for these services; students have prepaid them through 
their student fees. 

Counseling in the center is devoted to "listening." The center's goal is to listen and to provide 
substance; to aid a student in wrestling with his own choices, decision or plans; to face and deal 
with his knots and hard places with his own resources. No matter what his question or concern is 
and no matter how big or small a problem may be, counselors will listen to them. 

If students want to talk with someone of a special background or experience, ethnic or cultural, ask 
for that. There are, for example, Black counselors available, Asian, men, and women counselors, 
and .... One of the center's newer developments is the availability of informed, trained peer 
counselors. Peer counselors are students trained as listeners, facilitators, clarifiers and guides. They 
can empathize, understand and see a student's experience with a unique immediacy. They know 
this campus well. 

The center has a wide variety of counseling groups, too: personal exploration groups, couples groups, 
career planning groups, women's groups, workshops on relaxation, reducing test anxiety, mind-body 
coordination, and others. 

Most counselors at the center prefer to spend the time talking with a student rather than having him 


Student Activities 23 


take tests. However, when tests or inventories have the possibility of providing a student with useful 
information, the counselor will help him select them and then take time to discuss the results with 
him. 

Sometimes counsel, as defined here, is simply not enough. Students may want more and may need 
more. The center may not be able to supply it. Counselors realize they cannot be all things to all 
people. Counseling will help students find other alternatives. 

These services are available to all Cal State Fullerton students. The decision to come to the center 
is entirely up to them. Counselors are glad to have people suggest the center as a source of help, 
but information about their visits to the center is completely confidential. If coming into the center 
poses problems for a student, he may call and a counselor will talk with him about his concerns. 

Testing and Student Research 

Universitywide testing programs are coordinated and administered by the Testing Center. These 
include university admissions tests and general tests for graduate school admission. In addition, the 
Testing Center provides advice and consulting services to instructional departments in the develop- 
ment and administration of admission, selection, and placement tests for use by a specific depart- 
ment or program. 

The Testing Center conducts ongoing research on the validity and appropriateness of tests used in 
unversity testing programs. It also designs and conducts surveys of student needs, attitudes, and other 
characteristics. 

Testing requirements for students seeking admission are listed in the admissions section of this 
catalog. Students seeking information about testing requirements for specific instructional programs 
should inquire in the appropriate instructional division or the Counseling and Testing Center. 

STUDENT ACTIVITIES 

The university recognizes the important role of extracurricular and cocurricular activities. An exten- 
sive organization of clubs, interest groups and committees exists within the study body and university 
structure. Opportunities for involvement are available to every student according to interest, ability 
and available time. In addition, each academic department has a student department association 
which provides informal contact with faculty, and opportunities for cocurricular acitivites related to 
a student's major or career interest. 

University Activities Center 

The primary goal of the University Activities Center is to provide an opportunity for students to share 
in the exploration of educational, cultural and social activities at the university. The professional staff 
advises individual students as well as organizations in planning, budgeting and publicizing programs 
such as lectures, culture weeks, symposia, special events and projects. The office charters all student 
organizations, advises individual students/organizations of university policies and procedures and 
assists students in arranging for use of university services and facilities. General services include 
publishing a monthly calendar of events, and maintaining a master calendar of events. 

Student Organizations 

Student organizations are recognized as vital to the total educational process. They are chartered 
to encourage and facilitate use of university resources and integrate activities with a goal of sustaining 
a viable university community. Any group of students may become a chartered organization, 
provided the goals and activities are consistent with university rules and regulations by applying 
through the University Activities Center. Organizations are classified under the following headings: 
(1 ) Academic (organizations which share learning goals with a specific department); (2) Religious; 
(3) Professional; and. (4) Special Interest. More than 100 organizations are now recognized includ- 
ing six national social fraternities, five national social sororities, a number of departmental associa- 
tions and many special interest groups. 

Associated Students 

All students are members of the Associated Students, Inc., and are represented by the Associated 
Students Board of Directors and executive officers, who develop and maintain extracurricular 


24 Student Activities 


programs of every type. Each year a budget is adopted in the spring which allocates anticipated 
activity fees and all other income to be derived from all programs during the following year. Directors 
are elected from various academic disciplines. One recent development is the Departmental As- 
sociation Council, which is assigned a certain portion of the budget by the Board of Directors. The 
many departmental associations are established to promote closer relationships among students and 
faculty of their departments and bring programs to the departments that might not be possible 
without the funding provided by the Board of Directors. Most departments have established very 
active associations and participation by all students is solicited enthusiastically. 

Student Government 

The Associated Students, Inc., is governed through the executive, legislative, and judicial branches 
of the Associated Students organization. The president and commissioners constitute the executive 
branch which has the responsibility for the development and administration of the program, includ- 
ing such activities as publications, intercollegiate athletics, intramural athletics, forensics, and music. 
The Associated Students Board of Directors has full responsibility for legislation by which this 
program is directed and for the allocation of student funds for the program. The judicial branch 
serves as a legal body for interpretation of the constitution and enforcement of Associated Student 
policies. 

Student Publications 

The university newspaper, the Daily Titan, is published as a product of communications classes and 
financed by the Associated Students. In addition, a handbook is available for use by organizations 
in the development and operation of their program. 

Men's Athletics 

The intercollegiate athletic program consists of teams in baseball, basketball, football, golf, gymnas- 
tics, soccer, tennis, fencing and wrestling. A year-round program of intramural activities includes 
basketball, badminton, flag football, handball, softball, tennis and wrestling, swimming and weight 
lifting. 

The university is a member of the Pacific Coast Athletic Association (PCAA). All men's athletic 
teams compete under rules of the National Collegiate Athletic Association (NCAA). 

Intramural Activities 

The University Recreation Program offers a wide variety of team, dual and individual intramural 
activities designed to meet the competitive and recreational needs of students, faculty and staff 
members. Rules and regulations governing participation in the intramural program are available in 
the Recreation Office, located in the Physical Education Building. 

Women's Athletics 

Participation by women in intercollegiate volleyball, basketball, tennis, gymnastics, and golf is 
provided through membership in the Southern California Women's Intercollegiate Athletic Confer- 
ence, the Western Association for Intercollegiate Athletics for Women, and the American Associa- 
tion for Intercollegiate Athletics for Women. 

Recreational Activities 

A recreational activities program is offered to students, faculty, staff, affiliated, and community 
members, and their families who wish to use the recreational facilities on an unstructured, noncom- 
petitive basis. Such activities as swimming, badminton, volleyball, basketball, tennis, table tennis, 
racquetball, jogging, handball and weight training are provided. Special instructional programs and 
club sports are also available in various activities. 


Family Planning Services 

Birth control counseling at the Student Health Center has been supplemented by a birth control 
information service, financed and operated by the Associated Students under the direction ot the 
university medical director. A part-time coordinator is available in the Student Health Center to make 


Housing 25 

appointments with a Student Health Center physician. The physician advises the patient on the 
advantages and disadvantages of the various methods of birth control as well as giving the necessary 
physical examination. 

Campuswide Events 

Student boards, organized by the Associated Students, sponsor many campuswide events. The 
lecture series, pop concerts, film series and special events are part of the ongoing program. All 
recognized student organizations frequently cosponsor events in the area of their interests. 

Child Care Center 

Sponsored by the Associated Students, Inc., is the Children's Center which provides daytime nursery 
care for children of Cal State Fullerton studfents for a nominal fee. The professionally staffed center, 
located near the campus, is licensed by the State of California. 

Legal Information and Referral 

This unique office provides assistance to students on matters pertaining to law and makes referrals 
in cooperation with the Orange County Bar Association and the Legal Aid Society. A full-time law 
student attending a recognized school of law maintains scheduled office hours in the University 
Center. 

Mutual Ticket Agency 

The Associated Students, through its business office, operates a ticket agency for the benefit of all 
students. Purchases for drama, music, shows and sporting events may be made during regular office 
hours. The agency is located in the University Center. 

Student News Bureau 

The Student News Bureau was organized in 1960 to provide the outside press with news of student 
activities on the campus. It is financed by a budgeted allocation from the Associated Students, Inc. 

University Center 

Funded and operated entirely by student fees, the University Center offers a broad range of services 
and programs to the university community. Specific facilities include an eight-lane bowling center, 
craft center, main lounge, secondary lounge, games lounge, billiard parlor, meeting rooms, television 
room, organizational work space, multipurpose room, small theater, music-listening room, informa- 
tion center, two retail shops, Associated Students offices, sunken plaza, courtyard and snack bar. 
The Associated Students has delegated authority for policy-making decisions which guide the 
operation of the facility to the University Center governing board. The board is comprised of 10 
members, six of whom are students. 

HOUSING OFFICE 

The Housing Office has a staff whose primary concern is to insure that every student's housing needs 
are measured and every attempt is made to satisfy these needs. 

In order to meet these primary concerns, the office provides the following: 

• List of off-campus housing, rooms and apartments. These listings are continuously updated. 

• Summer orientations designed to find housing for students well in advance of the fall semester. 
The orientations generally bring together groups of students who share similar interests because 
of their housing needs. 

• Model rental agreements are available to all students. This agreement has been carefully 
reviewed by legal counselors and represents the university's best recommendations to students. 

• Information is available for students with questions about the rights and responsibilities of being 
a tenant. 

• Bulletin boards are available for students requesting roommates or needing an apartment. 

• A free computerized car pool service is available to students with transportation difficulties and 
students attempting to improve our ecology. 


26 Financial Aid 


THE HEALTH CENTER 

The Student Health Center is located on Gymnasium Campus Drive between the Physical Education 
Building on the wst and the Engineering Building and the Geodesic Dome on the east. The center 
is open from 8 a.m. to 6 p.m., Monday through Thursday, and 8 a.m. to 5 p.m. Friday. 

The doctors and nurses, laboratory and x-ray technologists, pharmacists,, a physical therapist and 
aides are there to care for patients felt medical needs. No one has access to a patient s medical 
records unless the patient gives permission for the transfer of records, or in the rare case, by court s 
subpoena. 

Most of the doctors are generalists who have wide experience and interest in the health needs of 
students. In addition, there are psychiatrists, an orthopedist and gynecologists. The center has a 
pharmacy (not for outside prescriptions), a laboratory, an x-ray service, physical therapy, and 
hearing clinic. 

The cost of care given in the Health Center, except for a few specific fees, already has been paid 
through student fees and by the State of California. Every registered student is eligible for care. 
However, the Health Center cannot meet all medical needs. Students are urged to obtain health 
insurance if they do not already have adequate private insurance. A good, inexpensive policy is 
offered through the Associated Students Office. 

FINANCIAL AID 

The Financial Aid Office provides guidance and assistance in financial matters to all students. 
Financial aid administers all scholarships, emergency loans, grants, National Direct Loans and the 
work-study programs. 

One application for aid covers all programs for which a student may be eligible. Deadlines for 
applications are as follows: March 1 for the fall semester; November 15 for the spring semester; and 
April 1 for the summer sessions. 

Dependent students, defined as those who are dependent upon their parents for support, must 
submit the following documents: (1) application; (2) Parent's Confidential Statement of the College 
Scholarship Service; and (3) copy of parents form 1040. 

Independent students, defined as those who are not dependent upon their parents for support, must 
provide the following documents: (1 ) application; (2) Student's Financial Statement of the College 
Scholarship Service; (3) copy of their own form 1040 and spouse's, when applicable; and (4) 
Independent Student Certificate. 

Early submission of documents is advised, as funds are limited and demand is great. 

Scholarships 

A limited number of scholarships is available for outstanding students. Qualified students should 
obtain scholarship applications from the Financial Aid Office, and return by April 15 for the fall 
semester. Scholarship applications are evaluated by the university Scholarship Committee. Awards 
are based on scholastic record, financial need and personal qualifications. Some scholarships are 
limited to students majoring in specified disciplines. Departmental recommendations weigh heavily 
in such cases. 

Scholarships offered by Cal State Fullerton are made possible by interested organizations, business 
firms and indviduals. Recent contributors to the scholarship program include: 

American Association of University Women (Placentia-Yorba Linda Branch) 

California Congress of Parents and Teachers, Inc. 

California Retired Teachers Association 

Delta Delta Delta East Orange County Alumnae Chapter 

Ebell Club of Fullerton 

Fourth District, California Parents and Teachers Association 
Fullerton Rotary Club 

Gamma Phi Beta Sorority (Orange County Alumnae) 

Kappa Phi Sigma Sorority 

Mu Phi Epsilon Scholarship Fund 

Orange County Engineering Council Scholarship 




Roberta Kind Maxwell Memorial Scholarship Fund 
Sadie Landon Memorial Music Scholarship Fund 
Sheryl Cummings Memorial Scholarship Fund 


International Education 27 


Loans 

The generosity of organizations and individuals enables the university to offer short-term loans to 
students who meet unexpected financial difficulties of a temporary nature. Loans from these funds 
are made for various periods of time and to specified categories of students, according to university 
regulations and the wishes of the donors. The prime purpose of these loans is to meet educationally 
related expenses, and thus loans cannot be made for the purposes which are normally financed by 
private lending institutions. Application for a short-term loan may be made at any time during the 
school year. 

The following is a listing of the loan funds available during the 1976-77 school year: 

Altrusa Club of Fullerton Loan Fund 

Brea Rotary Club Loan Fund 

California Retired Teachers Association 

Carrie Lou Sutherland Memorial Fund 

Cal State Fullerton Faculty Women's Club Loan Fund 

Don Miller Memorial Fund 

Gamma Epsilon Chapter of Delta Kappa Gamma Loan Fund 

James Merrick Memorial Fund 

Junior Ebell Club of Anaheim Loan Fund 

Laguna Beach Pan-Hellenic Loan Fund 

Laura E. Imhoff Memorial Fund 

Mary Virginia Lopez Memorial Fund 

Memorial Loan Fund 

I Newport Harbor Children's Theatre Loan Fund 
Newport Harbor Pan-Hellenic Loan Fund 
Pierre Guyette Memorial Fund 

Alan Pattee Scholarship (Children of Deceased Peace Officers or Firemen) 
Surviving children, natural or adopted, of California peace officers or firemen killed in the line of 
duty are not charged fees or tuition of any kind while enrolled at any California State University or 
College, according to the Alan Pattee Scholarship Act and Section 23762, California Educational 
Code. Students qualifying for these benefits are known as Alan Pattee scholars. 

INTERNATIONAL EDUCATION 

The Office of International Education and Exchange is the principal office for information and 
assistance for all foreign nationals and those students who plan to study overseas. 

Foreign Students 

Special services for foreign students include assistance with academic and personal problems, as well 
as governmental and legal requirements for visa status. The office provides documents to enter the 
United States and applications for extension of stay and changes of status, as well as letters of 
standing for consulates and embassies. 

All foreign students are required to have the proficiency in the use of the English language required 
for successful academic work and sufficient funds to cover all expenses of the first year at the 
university, including adequate health insurance coverage. 

Study Abroad 

Information concerning study opportunities for American students in foreign universities is available 
in the International Student Office. The director of international education and exchange coordinates 
the selection of students applying for admission to one of the international programs operated by 
the California State University and Colleges. (See also section on International Programs.) 

A library of current programs sponsored by other institutions is maintained for student reference. 


28 Educational Opportunity Program 

HANDICAPPED STUDENT SERVICES 

Located on the first floor of the Library, this office provides assistance and offers services to all 
handicapped /disabled students. The goal of this program is to make full educational, cultural, social 
and physical facilities of the university available to students with orthopedic and/or perceptual 
handicaps/disabilities. 

A full range of services is available in cooperation with other university departments a learning 
resource center and lounge, priority registration, orientation, attendant/reader/note-taker services, 
counseling, career planning, academic advisement, housing, transportation, handicapped medical 
parking and job placement. The purpose is to provide necessary services and assistance that will 
eliminate or significantly reduce barriers resulting from the mobility and perceptual problems en- 
countered by most handiapped /disabled students. The program serves as a centralized source of 
information and provides individual attention to students. It is staffed by personnel experienced in 
the particular needs of the handicapped and disabled. 

Supplemental funding is expected from the state beginning 1976-77 which will provide for more 
continuity of services, help augment the large percentage of the budget previously supplied by the 
Associated Students, Inc., and enable this office to maintain its present full-time operation. However, 
this office perceives a need for input from the students it serves and solicits suggestions for new 
and/or improved services and programs. The director of handicapped student services may be 
contacted in the Handicapped Student Center. 

EDUCATIONAL OPPORTUNITY PROGRAM 

The Educational Opportunity Program is an innovative educational program designed to provide 
comprehensive services for educationally, disadvantaged and/or culturally different students. These 
services include the identification, selection, counseling and retention of students who would not 
normally acquire a university education because of academic, ethnic, financial or motivational 
barriers. 

EOP gives each of the students in its program individual attention. It also uses knowledge of the 
student's distinctive patterns of social behavior, learning styles, motivations, and aspirations to assist 
students in realizing their full potentialities. Additionally, EOP strives to develop a sense of commu- 
nity among its students through a variety of creative and identity-seeking activities. 

Students are encouraged not only to understand the background and strengths of their own particular 
ethnic groups, but also to work together in support of central, universal human values. EOP is keenly 
interested in advancing the understanding of different cultural groups on this campus by promoting 
an awareness of their concerns and potentialities. 

The services offered by the Educational Opportunity Program include: Project Upward Bound, 
Student Special Services, Bilingual Education (Title VII), National Project II (FIPSE), recruiting, 
counseling, tutoring, and supporting secretarial services. These EOP support services are designed 
to ensure a progressive rate of student achievement and to provide the opportunity for realizing 
success in the fullest sense. 

Project Upward Bound 

This program is directed to high school students with good potential and the ability to complete 
college work, but who are underachieving. Upward Bound provides these students with supplemen- 
tal academic and counseling support to motivate them to complete high school and assist them in 
entering higher education. 

Recruiting 

EOP recruiting teams visit high schools and colleges within a specified service area and advise 
students of the benefits of higher education at Cal State Fullerton. Utilizing Affirmative Action 
guidelines, a special attempt is made to recruit students with high academic potential. Assistance 
with admissions and financial aid procedures is an important service of this component. 

Counseling Service 

The counseling component is one key to the effectiveness of the entire EOP. Peer counselors, 
working under the direction of professional counselors, are the important liaisons between each 


Placement Services 29 








individual EOP student and the university as a whole. Assistance and guidance is provided to help 
the student resolve academic, social, financial and personal problems. The EOP Counseling Center 
also acts as a referral point to direct students to the appropriate support services, e.g., financial aid, 
housing, Learning Assistance Center, tutorial services, health services, etc. 

PLACEMENT SERVICES 

A centralized Career Planning and Placement Center is maintained with responsibilities for assisting 
students in career planning and in finding both part-time and career employment. The university 
believes that it best serves both the student and employers only when its graduates have been placed 
in the professions for which they are prepared and trained. All registered students are welcome to 
use the services of the Placement Center without cost and are also eligible for career counseling and 
placement. 

Part-Time Placement 

All registered students wishing part-time jobs either on or off campus are eligible to receive the 
assistance of the office. New students may receive service after August 1 for the fall semester or after 
January 1 for the spring semester. Secretarial skills are in great demand, but calls for drivers, 
custodians, teacher aides, draftsmen, waiters, clerks, youth and recreation leaders, sitters, gardeners, 
etc., are received. Entering freshmen who must augment their resources while going to school are 
encouraged to limit their work hours to approximately 1 5 per week. 

Business , Industry and Government Placement 

Through personal interviews the career placement counselor assists graduating seniors, graduate 
students, and alumni seeking career employment in business, industry, or public service in defining 
occupational preference, providing active job leads and writing resumes. 

In addition, the Placement Center makes arrangements for the on-campus recruitment program 
which brings the employers to the students. Also available through this office is the Job Bank service. 
The center is a member of the regional Job Bank, and a computerized listing of more than 1,000 job 
opportunities is received daily. 

Located in the Placement Center is a Career Library with an ever-expanding selection of resource 
materials on career opportunities. Federal, state, county, city and armed forces brochures and 
applications are also available for student access. One section of the Career Library is devoted to 
information on nontraditional or alternative vocations. 

The Placement Center serves as liaison office for the military and Action/Peace Corps-VISTA offering 
counseling and information brochures to any interested student. 

Educational Placement 

Students in the teacher education, pupil personnel services, or administration curriculum of the 
university, who are in the final semester of a credential program, or who are in student teaching or 
directed field work, are eligible to register and receive the services of the Placement Center, chief 
of which is help in establishing a professional employment file. Such registrants are supplied informa- 
tion on openings and helped to establish their candidacies in the school districts and educational 
institutions. 

Students who are not in the teaching program but who are completing their credential program at 
the university are also eligible for service. This includes those about to receive their master's degree 
in library science or academic areas, who plan to apply for community college credential. Certain 
specified services are available to alumni as well. 

Coordinator of Minority Relations 

The coordinator of minority relations has the responsibility for broadening awareness in the entire 
community of placement services available to all minorities and for encouraging minority students 
to register with the center for career counseling and placement services. The coordinating officer 
works cooperatively with colleagues responsible for other specialized functions, e.g. teaching, 
part-time jobs, business, industry and government, and does not serve as the sole placement 
counselor for all minority students. 


30 Veterans' Services 


Special Project and Publications 

In the face of a depressed job market, the center has stepped up its special offerings in the areas 
of resume writing, job hunting and interview techniques as well as types of alternative careers for 
teachers and liberal arts students unable to find employment. Research in areas of teacher supply 
and demand, job attrition and employment practics, and a periodic follow-up of graduates to 
determine adequacy of educational and professional preparation is now an important aspect of our 
activities. A program of videotaping, involving actual as well as simulated interviews and workshop 
presentations, has been inaugurated. 

Regular and occasional publications include Paragraph Communication, a newsletter published 
three times a year and distributed widely in the business community; the Career Monograph series 
which includes academic requirements for all majors offered at the university and potential careers 
to which such majors lead, combined with employment information in related fields; a Referral 
Register of career jobs in education and business; a bulletin of administrative openings in education, 
and a twice-a-year compilation of corporate and agency recruitment on campus. 

Students and graduates unable to check with the center in person also have access to two dial-a-job 
telephone numbers which they may call for information about current openings in education, 
business and industry. 

SPECIAL PROJECTS 

The Office of Special Projects is concerned with formulating and adjudicating student rights, griev- 
ances and reponsibilities. The office coordinates both the student grievance and the student discipli- 
nary procedures. Additionally, the office carries out special projects related to Student Services as 
assigned by the dean. 

ALUMNI AFFAIRS 

The Alumni Association was established to strengthen the bond between the alumni and the 
university. The association is directed by a board which acts as an informal advisory council in its 
biannual meetings with the university president. 

In an attempt to keep Cal State Fullerton's graduates creative and productive, continuing education 
programs, cultural enrichment, and social activities are scheduled by the Alumni Association 
throughout the year. 

On the threshhold of a new era of expansion, the Alumni Association is currently in the process of 
developing "satellite" alumni sections for each academic department to supplement and diversify 
the activities of association members. In addition, these groups will provide opportunities for gradu- 
ates and former students to work with faculty and present students in areas of their own educational 
and career backgrounds. 

Further information regarding membership and programs can be obtained by calling the Office of 
Alumni Affairs. 

OFFICE OF MINORITY SERVICES 

The Office of Minority Services offers information regarding the opportunities available to the 
minority student for graduate studies. This resource encompasses financial aid, application filing, 
recruitment sessions and personal contact with those involved in minority programs on other 
campuses. 

Maintaining student awareness of deadline dates, requirements, etc., hopefully will increase enroll- 
ment of minorities into programs of higher education. 

Another step in increasing the number of minorities in graduate school is to give attention to the 
needs of the undergraduate, through study-related work, tutoring and referrals to other agencies 
which would be useful to the student. 

OFFICE OF VETERANS' SERVICES 

The Office of Veterans' Service was established to aid and assist all veterans, especially Vietnam-era 
veterans, who are not now participating in a postsecondary educational experience. Functioning 


; 


Women's Center 31 


under an institutional award from the U.S. Department of Health, Education and Welfare, the office 
is charged with the responsibilities of (1 ) outreach, (2) recruitment, (3) special programs and (4) 
counseling. In addition, it assists and aids veterans in registration, tutoring, benefit advisement, 
educational opportunities, housing and job placement (both on and off campus). 

The program director of veterans' services may be contacted in the Veterans' Services Office. 


WOMEN'S CENTER 


The Women's Center is designed to serve specific needs of women. It provides personal, educational 
and career counseling for students as well as community women interested in returning to school. 
The programs reflect a concern for sharing experiences and problem solving through the use of 
groups, field trips, extensive referrals, lectures, films, speakers and conferences. The women's library 
and research facilities are available for student and staff use. 

The program director of the Women's Center may be contacted in the Women's Center. 




' 



34 


ADMISSION TO THE UNIVERSITY 


ADMISSIONS PROCEDURES AND POLICIES 

The Office of Admissions and Records is responsible for the administration of the admission, 
registration, records, and relations with schools and colleges programs and services for undergradu- 
ate and graduate students in the regular sessions of Cal State Fullerton. These programs and services 
are to provide preadmission guidance to prospetiv students; to provide current information about 
the university's curricula and requirements to school and college counselors; to admit and readmit 
students within enrollment categories, quotas and priorities; to evaluate the applicability of under- 
graduate transfer credit toward all-university requirements of the curriculum; to provide liaison in 
the identification and resolution of articulation problems of transfer students; to register student 
programs of study, including enrollment into classes; to maintain academic records; to administer 
academic probation and disqualification policies; to provide enrollment certifications on student 
request, including transcripts of academic records, certificates for Selective Service, Veterans Admin- 
istration and other purposes; to certify the completion of degree and credential requirements; to 
review and act on petitions for exceptions to academic regulations; and to provide information about 
these programs and services. 

Requirements for admission to Cal State Fullerton are in accordance with Title 5, Chapter 1, Subchap- 
ter 3, of the California Administrative Code. A prospective applicant who is unsure of his status under 
these requirements is encouraged to consult a high school or college counselor or the Admissions 
Office. Applications may be obtained from the Admissions Office at any of the campuses of The 
California State University and Colleges or at any California high school or community college. 

Undergraduate Application Procedures 

Prospective undergraduates, whether applying for part-time or full-time programs of study, in day 
or evening classes, must file within the appropriate filing period, a complete application including 
all the required forms and fees as described in the application booklet. The $20 nonrefundable 
application fee should be in the form of a check or money order payable to The California State 
University and Colleges. Undergraduate applicants may file only at their first choice campus. Alter- 
nate choice campuses and majors may be indicated on the application, but an applicant should list 
as alternate campuses only those campuses of The California State University and Colleges that he 
will attend if his first choice campus cannot accommodate him. Generally, alternate degree majors 
will be considered at the first choice campus before an application is redirected to an alternate 
choice campus. Applicants will be considered automatically at the alternate choice campus if the 
first choice campus cannot accommodate them. Transcripts and other supporting documents should 
not be submitted until requested by the campus. 

Post-Baccalaureate and Graduate Application Procedures 

All applicants for any type of post-baccalaureate status (e.g., master's degree applicants, those 
seeking credentials, and those interested in taking courses for professional growth, etc.) must file, 
within the appropriate filing period, a complete application including all of the required forms and 
fees described in the application booklet. Post-baccalaureate applicants who completed under- 
graduate degree requirements and graduated the preceding term are also required to complete and 
submit an application and the $20 nonrefundable fee. Since applicants for post-baccalaureate pro- 
grams may be limited to the choice of a single campus on each application, redirection to alternative 
campuses or later changes of campus choice will be minimal. In the event that a post-baccalaureate 
applicant wishes to be assured of initial consideration by more than one campus, it will be necessary 
to submit a separate application (including fee) to each. 

Post-baccalaureate applicants seeking second baccalaureates are considered undergraduate appli- 
cants for purposes of application and admission procedures, categories, and quotas. 

Application materials may be obtained from the Office of Admissions or the Graduate Studies Office 
of any campus within the system and must be filed with the campus of first choice. 




Admissions Procedures 35 


Admission Categories and Quotas; Systemwide impacted Programs 

Admission quotas have been established by some campuses, in some majors, where the number 
of applicants is expected to exceed campus resources. At Cal State Fullerton, categories have been 
established for students who are: first-time freshmen; freshmen and sophomore undergraduate 
transfer applicants; junior and senior undergraduate transfer applicants; special program applicants; 
hardship applicants; and foreign students. Also, there is a quota for most graduate level programs. 
All applications received in the first month of the filing period will receive equal consideration for 
such categories. A few undergraduate programs are impacted throughout the 19-campus system, and 
applicants to such programs are expected to meet supplementary admission criteria for admission 
to these programs. Applicants to these major programs will be sent further information by the 
campuses about the supplementary criteria to be used, and how and when applicants must meet 
them. Impacted programs are identified and announced each fall. Applicants to impacted programs 
must apply during the first month of the filing periods. 

After admission to Cal State Fullerton, requests for change to a different (i.e., a new) academic 
objective involving established admission categories and quotas will be evaluated following policies 
and procedures parallel to those for new students. 


Application Filing Periods 



Terms in 1976-77 

First Accepted 

Filing Period Duration 

Student 

Notification Begins 

Summer quarter 1976 

February 1, 1976 

Each campus accepts 

March 1976 

Fall semester or 

November 1, 1975 

applications until capacities 
are reached. Most campuses 

December 1975 

quarter 1976 

Winter quarter 1977 

June 1, 1976 

accept applications up to a 
month prior to the opening 

July 1976 

Spring semester or 

August 1, 1976 

day of the term. Some cam- 
puses will close individual 

September 1976 

quarter 1977 


programs as they reach 
capacity. 


Space Reservations 

Applicants who can be accommodated will receive a space reservation notice. A space reservation 
notice is not a statement of admission but is a commitment by Cal State Fullerton to admit the student 
once eligibility has been established. The space reservation directs the applicant to arrange to have 
appropriate records forwarded promptly to the Admissions Office. Applicants should not request 
that any records be forwarded until they have received a space reservation notice. 

Hardship Petitions 

Each college or university has established procedures to consider qualified applicants who would 
be faced with an extreme hardship if not admitted. Prospective hardship petitioners should contact 
the campus regarding specific policies governing hardship admission. 

How to Apply 

1 Submit a completed application for admission within the announced filing period accompanied 
by the required application fee to: 

Office of Admissions and Records 
California State University, Fullerton 
Fullerton, California 92634 

2. Request required transcripts of record of all previous scholastic work from each school or 
college attended when asked to do so by the Admissions Office. The transcripts required at 
Fullerton are: 

— for undergraduates — 

(a) the high school transcript, and 

(b) a transcript from each college or university attended. Undergraduate applicants for a 
teaching credential must submit two copies of the transcript from each college or 
university attended. 


36 Undergraduate Admission Requirements 


(a) applicants for unclassified post-baccalaureate standing with no degree or credential 
objective must submit a transcript from the college or university where the baccalaure- 
ate was earned. Further, one transcript from other institutions attended are required as 
necessary so that the university has a complete record of the last 60 semester units 
attempted prior to enrollment at Cal State Fullerton. 

(b) applicants for a master's degree or teaching credential, or both, must submit two copies 
of the transcript from each college or university attended. 

All students are advised that they should also have a complete set of college transcripts for their 

personal use at all times of advisement. . . 

All transcripts must be received directly from the issuing institution to be considered officia 
and cannot be returned to the student. Foreign language transcripts must be accompanied by 

certified English translations. . . . ^ .. _ 

3. If required, submit the scores from either the Scholastic Aptitude Test or the American College 
Test. Scores are required for all undergraduate applicants with fewer than 56 completed 
transferable semester units of study (84 quarter units) . Applicants to classified graduate curric- 
ula must submit the scores of any qualifying examinations required in their prospective program 
of study. 

UNDERGRADUATE ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS 

First-time Freshmen 

Applicants who have completed no college work after high school graduation will be co " sl( *f r ^ 
for admission as first-time freshmen under one of the following provisions. Results of either the CEEB 
Scholastic Aptitude Test (SAT) or the American College Testing program examination (ACT) are 
acceptable in establishing eligibility. 

Exceptions: College credit earned concurrent with high school enrollment; college credit earned 
in summer session after high school and prior to regular matriculation in college; college credit 
granted for the CLEP or advanced placement programs, or military or USAFI courses; or college 
credit granted for some nontraditional learning experience, will affect the applicant's status 
as a first-time freshman for application quota purposes as well as admission. Further, the accelerat- 
ed student, who completes his high school program mid-year, who has applied to The California 
State University and Colleges for the following fall term, but chooses to attend a local community 
college in the spring term, will be considered a first-time freshman for application Quota purposes 
as well as admission. All such college or advanced standing credit, if fully acceptable as transfer 
credit, will be granted the student after admission. 

California high school graduates or legal residents for tuition purposes must have a grade-point 
average and total score on the SAT, or composite score on the ACT, which together provide an 
eligibility index placing them in the upper one-third of California high school graduates. The mini- 
mum eligibility index is 3,072 using the SAT or 741 using the ACT. 

High school graduates from other states or possessions who are nonresidents for tuition Purposes 
must present an eligibility index which places them in the upper one-sixth of California high school 
graduates. The minimum eligibility index is 3,402 using the SAT or 826 using the ACT. 

The eligibility index is computed either by multiplying the grade-point average by 800 and adding 
it to the total SAT score, or multiplying the grade-point average by 200 and adding it to 10 times 
the composite ACT score. Grade-point averages are based on work completed in the last three years 
of high school, exclusive of physical education and military science. 

As an alternative, the following table may be used to determine the eligibility of graduates of 
California high schools (or California legal residents) for freshman admission to a California State 
University or College. This table is based on the eligibility index. Scores shown are the SAT Total 
and the ACT Composite. Students with a given CPA must present the corresponding test score. 
Conversely, students with a given ACT or SAT score must present the corresponding CPA in order 
to be eligible. 


Undergraduate Admission Requirements 37 


ADMISSIONS TABLE FOR CALIFORNIA HIGH SCHOOL GRADUATES 
OR CALIFORNIA LEGAL RESIDENTS 



ACT 

SAT 

GPA 

Score 

Score 

l ) 

3.20 

11 

512 

3.19 

11 

520 

3.18 

11 

528 

3.17 

11 

536 

3.16 

11 

544 

3.15 

12 

552 

3.14 

12 

560 

3.13 

12 

568 

3.12 

12 

576 

3.11 

12 

584 

3.10 

13 

592 

3.09 

13 

600 

3.08 

13 

608 

3.07 

13 

616 

3.06 

13 

624 

3.05 

14 

632 

3.04 

14 

640 

3.03 

14 

648 

3.02 

14 

656 

3.01 

14 

664 

3.00 

15 

672 

2.99 

15 

680 

2.98 

15 

688 

2.97 

15 

696 

2.96 

15 

704 

2.95 

16 

712 

2.94 

16 

720 

2.93 

16 

728 

2.92 

16 

736 

2.91 

16 

744 

2.90 

17 

752 

2.89 

17 

760 

2.88 

17 

768 

2.87 

17 

776 

2.86 

17 

784 

2.85 

18 

792 

2.84 

18 

800 

2.83 

18 

808 

2.82 

18 

816 

2.81 

18 

824 



ACT 

SAT 

GPA 

Score 

Score 

2.80 

19 

832 

2.79 

19 

840 

2.78 

19 

848 

2.77 

19 

856 

2.76 

19 

864 

2.75 

20 

872 

2.74 

20 

880 

2.73 

20 

888 

2.72 

20 

896 

2.71 

20 

904 

2.70 

21 

912 

2.69 

21 

920 

2.68 

21 

928 

2.67 

21 

936 

2.66 

21 

944 

2.65 

22 

952 

2.64 

22 

960 

2.63 

22 

968 

2.62 

22 

976 

2.61 

22 

984 

2.60 

23 

992 

2.59 

23 

1000 

2.58 

23 

1008 

2.57 

23 

1016 

2.56 

23 

1024 

2.55 

24 

1032 

2.54 

24 

1040 

2.53 

24 

1048 

2.52 

24 

1056 

2.51 

24 

1064 

2.50 

25 

1072 

2.49 

25 

1080 

2.48 

25 

1088 

2.47 

25 

1096 

2.46 

25 

1104 

2.45 

26 

1112 

2.44 

26 

1120 

2.43 

26 

1128 

2.42 

26 

1136 

2.41 

26 

1144 

2.40 

27 

1152 



ACT 

SAT 

GPA 

Score 

Score 

2.39 

27 

1160 

2.38 

27 

1168 

2.37 

27 

1176 

2.36 

27 

1184 

2.35 

28 

1193 

2.34 

28 

1200 

2.33 

28 

1208 

2.32 

28 

1216 

2.31 

28 

1224 

2.30 

29 

1232 

2.29 

29 

1240 

2.28 

29 

1248 

2.27 

29 

1256 

2.26 

29 

1264 

2.25 

30 

1272 

2.24 

30 

1280 

2.23 

30 

1288 

2.22 

30 

1296 

2.21 

30 

1304 

2.20 

31 

1312 

2.19 

31 

1320 

2.18 

31 

1328 

2.17 

31 

1336 

2.16 

31 

1344 

2.15 

32 

1352 

2.14 

32 

1360 

2.13 

32 

1368 

2.12 

32 

1376 

2.11 

33 

1384 

2.10 

33 

1392 

2.09 

33 

1400 

2.08 

33 

1408 

2.07 

33 

1416 

2.06 

33 

1424 

2.05 

34 

1432 

2.04 

34 

1440 

2.03 

34 

1448 

2.02 

34 

1456 

2.01 

34 

1464 

2.00 

35 

1472 

(-) t 




* Students earning grade-point averages above 3.20 are eligible for admission, 
t Students earning grade-point averages below 2.0 are not eligible for admission. 


Graduates of Secondary Schools in Foreign Countries 

Applicants who are graduates of foreign secondary schools must have preparation equivalent to that 
required of eligible California high school graduates. The university will carefuly review the previous 
record of all such applicants and only those with promise of academic success equivalent to that of 
eligible California high school graduates will be admitted. 


38 Admission of Post-Baccalaureate and Graduate Students 

Non-High School Graduates 

Applicants over 18 years of age, but who have not graduated from high school will be considered 
for admission as first-time freshmen only when preparation in all other ways is such that >he university 
believes promise of academic success is equivalent to that of eligible California high school gradua 

High School Students 

Students still enrolled in high school will be considered for enrollment in certain special P r °8™" s ' 
including summer session, if recommended by their principal and if in the judgment of the university 
their preparation is equivalent to that required of eligible California high school graduates. Su 
admission is only for a given course or program and does not constitute the right to continued 
enrollment. 

Recommended Preparation 

Overall excellence of performance in high school subjects and a test score giving evidence of academic 
potential provide the best bases for predicting success at Cal State Fullerton. While no specific course 
pattern is required, prospective students are strongly encouraged to include the following subjtxts in 
their preparation for work at Cal State Fullerton: college preparatory English; another language, math- 
ematics; laboratory science; history or social science (or both); and study in speech, music, art 
other subjects contributing to a well-rounded academic background. Students who anticipate '"tensive 
study in science are urged to take four years of mathematics and three years of foreign language in 
high school. 

ADMISSION OF UNDERGRADUATE TRANSFER STUDENTS 

Applicants for admission as undergraduate transfers in good standing at the last institution attended 
will be considered for admission under one of the following provisions: 

1 He is eligible for admission in freshman standing (see First-Time Freshman requirements) and 
has earned an average grade of "C" (2.0 on a scale where A equals 4.0) or better ,n all 
transferable college units attempted. 

2 He has completed at least 56 transferable semester units or 84 transferable quarter units with an 
average grade of "C" (2.0 on a scale where A equals 4.0) or better if a California resident. 
Nonresidents must have a grade-point average of 2.4 or better. 

The California community college transfer student should consult the community college counseling 
office for information on transferability of courses. 

De Novo Admissions Program 

The de novo admissions program has been approved by the Chancellor's Office of The California State 
University and Colleges as a two-year experimental program, beg,nn,ng |anuary 1976 o denti^ 
return to undergraduate studies those individuals who are ready to begin anew their studies in higher 

education. , 

The program is designed for the mature individual possessing sound academic ability but who because 
of any number of reasons (illness, immaturity, folly) performed poorly in college, and because o that 
performance was discouraged from continuing an academic career. For further information, write to 
the dean of admissions and records. 


Other Applicants 

Applicants not admissible under one of the above provisions should enroll in a c °™™n*y 

other appropriate institution. Only under the most unusual circumstances, and then only by special 

action, will such applicants be permitted to enroll in the university. 


ADMISSION OF POST-BACCALAUREATE AND 
GRADUATE STUDENTS 


Post-Baccalaureate Standing. Unclassified. 

For admission to unclassified post-baccalaureate standing, a student must: hold an acceptable bacca- 


Admission of Students from Other Countries 39 


laureate degree from an institution accredited by a regional accrediting association or have completed 
equivalent academic preparation as determined by an appropriate campus authority; have attained a 
grade point of at least 2.5 (on a five-point scale) in the last 60 semester (90 quarter) units attempted; 
and have been in good standing at the last college attended. 

An applicant ineligible for admission under these provisions may be admitted by special action if on 
the basis of acceptable evidence he is judged by appropriate university authority to possess sufficient 
academic, professional or other potential pertinent to his educational objectives to merit such action. 
Admission to a California State University or College with post-baccalaureate unclassified standing 
does not constitute admission to graduate degree curricula. 

Post-Baccalaureate Standing. Classified. 

A student who is eligible for admission to a California State University or College in unclassified 
standing may be admitted to classified post-baccalaureate standing for the purpose of enrolling in a 
particular post-baccalaureate credential or certificate program; provided, that such additional profes- 
sional, personal, scholastic, and other standards, including qualifying examinations, as may be pre- 
scribed for the particular program by the appropriate campus authority are satisfied. 

Graduate Standing. Conditionally Classified. 

A student who is eligible for admission to a California State University or College under unclassified 
post-baccalaureate standards above, but who has deficiencies in prerequisite preparation which in the 
opinion of the appropriate campus authority can be met by specified additional preparation, including 
qualifying examinations, may be admitted to an authorized graduate degree curriculum with condition- 
ally classified graduate standing. 

Graduate Standing. Classified. 

A student who is eligible for admission to a California State University or College in unclassified or 
conditionally classified standing may be admitted to an authorized graduate degree curriculum of the 
campus as a classified graduate student if he satisfactorily meets the professional, personal, scholastic 
or other standards for admission to the graduate degree curriculum, including qualifying examinations, 
as the appropriate campus authority may prescribe. Only those applicants who show promise of 
success and fitness will be admitted to graduate degree curricula, and only those who continue to 
demonstrate a satisfactory level of scholastic competence and fitness shall be eligible to proceed in 
such curricula. 

ADMISSION OF STUDENTS FROM OTHER COUNTRIES 

Normally, the university accepts for consideration only two categories of applicants from other coun- 
tries: 

1 . Those who have completed, with a good academic record, a two-year program in an accredited 
institution of higher education. 

2. Those who have completed a bachelor's degree or its equivalent, with a good academic record, 
in an accredited institution and wish to enroll as graduate students. 

Persons applying from their home countries are normally considered for admission to the fall semester 
only. Those transferring from U.S. institutions may apply to the fall or spring semesters. 

All applicants whose native language is other than English are required to present a satisfactory score 
on the Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL). Applicants should obtain the TOEFL Bulletin 
of Information and registration forms well in advance. Copies of this bulletin and registration forms are 
often available at American embassies and consulates, offices of the United States Information Service, 
United States educational commissions and foundations abroad, bi-national centers, and several pri- 
vate organizations. Those who cannot obtain locally a TOEFL Bulletin of Information should write to: 
Test of English as a Foreign Language, Box 899, Princeton, New Jersey, U.S. A. 08540. 

Application procedures in other respects are the same as for other students, except that transcripts of 
educational documents in languages other than English must be accompanied by approved translations 
into English. 


40 General Information About Admission 


SUMMER SESSION STUDENTS 

Although the quality of the program and most of the course offerings are the same as in the regular 
session, the university does not require an advance application or transcripts from students register- 
ing for credit courses in the summer session. However, students normally must be high school 
graduates and are expected to have satisfied the prerequisites for the courses in which they register. 
In addition, students are expected to file a request to register in the summer session. Admission to 
summer session does not grant admission to the regular session. 

READMISSION OF FORMER STUDENTS 

A student previously enrolled in the university, planning to return after an absence of one or more 
semesters, must file a new application for admission in accordance with procedures set forth below. 
The application fee is required if the student was not enrolled in either of the two semesters prior 
to the semester to which he is seeking admission or if he was enrolled in another institution during 
his absence from Cal State Fullerton. Unless a leave of absence was granted, catalog requirements 
at the time of readmission will apply. 

Former Students in Good Standing 

A student who left the university in good standing will be readmitted provided any academic work 
attempted elsewhere since the last attendance does not change his scholastic status. Transcripts of 
the record of any work attempted in the interim are required. 

Former Students Who Were on Probation 

A student on probation at the close of his last enrollment will be readmitted on probation provided 
he is otherwise eligible. The student must furnish transcripts of any college work taken during his 
absence. 

Former Students Who Were Disqualified 

The readmission of a previously disqualified student is by special action only. Ordinarily the univer- 
sity will consider an application for reinstatement only after the student has remained absent for a 
minimum of one year following disqualification and has fulfilled all recommended conditions. In 
every instance, readmission action is based on evidence, including transcripts of study completed 
elsewhere subsequent to disqualification, which in the judgment of the university warrants such 
action. If readmitted, the student is placed on scholastic probation. 

GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT ADMISSION 

Determination of Residence 

New and returning students of The California State University and Colleges are classified for the 
purpose of determining the residence of each student for nonresident tuition purposes. The residence 
questionnaire and, if necessary, other evidence furnished by the student is used in making these 
determinations. A student may not register and enroll in classes until his residence questionnaire has 
been received by the Admissions Office. 

The following statement of the rules regarding residency determination for nonresident tuition 
purposes is not a complete discussion of the law, but a summary of the principal rules and their 
exceptions. The law governing residence determination for tuition purposes by The California State 
University and Colleges are found in Education Code Sections 22800-22865, 23753.1, 23754- 
23754.4, 23758.2, 23752, and in Title 5 of the California Administrative Code, Article 4 (commencing 
with Section 41901 ) of Subchapter 5 of Chapter 1, Part V. A copy of the statutes and regulations 
is available for inspection at the campus Admissions Office. 

Legal residence may be established by an adult who is physically present in the state while, at the 
same time, intending to make California his permanent home. Steps must be taken at least one year 
prior to residence determination date to evidence the intent to make California the permanent home 
with concurrent relinquishment of the prior legal residence. Some of the relevant indicia of an 
intention to establish and maintain California residence may be established by registering to vote 
and voting in elections in California; satisfying resident California state income tax obligations on total 
income, ownership of residential property or continuous occupancy or letting of an apartment on 
a lease basis where one's permanent belongings are kept; maintaining active resident memberships 
in California professional or social organizations; maintaining California vehicle plates and operator's 


General Information About Admission 41 


license; maintining active savings and checking accounts in California banks; and maintaining perma- 
nent military address and home of record in California if one is in the military service. 

The student who is within the state for educational purposes only does not gain the status of resident 
regardless of the length of his stay in California. 

In general, the unmarried minor (a person under 18 years of age) derives legal residence from his 
parents, or, in the case of permanent separation of the parents, from the parent with whom the minor 
maintains his place of abode. The residence of a minor cannot be changed by act of the minor or 
that of the minor's guardian, so long as the minor's parents are living. 

A man or a woman may establish his or her residence; marriage is not a governing factor. 

The general rule is that a student must have been a California resident for at least one year 
immediately preceding the residence determination date in order to qualify as a "resident student" 
for tuition purposes. At the Fullerton campus, the residence determination date for fall terms is 
September 20, and for spring terms is January 25. 

There are several exceptions for nonresident tuition. Some of the exceptions provided for: 

1 . Persons below the age of 1 9 whose parents were residents of California but who left the state 
while the student was still a minor. When the minor reaches age 18, the exception continues 
for one year to enable the student to qualify as a resident student. 

2. Persons below the age of 19 who have been present in California for more than a year before 
the residence determination date, and entirely self-supporting for that period of time. 

3. Persons below the age of 19 who have lived with and been under the continuous direct care 
and control of an adult, not a parent, for the two years immediately preceding the residence 
determination date. Such adult must have been a California resident for the most recent year. 

4. Dependent children and spouses of persons in active military service stationed in California 
on the residence determination date. This exception applies only for the minimum time 
required for the student to obtain California residence and maintain that residence for a year. 
The exception, once attained, is not affected by transfer of the military person directly to a 
post outside the 50 states and the District of Columbia. 

5. Military personnel in active service stationed in California on the residence determination date 
for purposes other than education at state-supported institutions of higher education. This 
exception applies only for the minimum time required for the student to obtain California 
residence and maintain that residence for a year. 

6. A student who is an adult alien is entitled to residence classification if the student has been 
lawfully admitted to the United States for permanent residence in accordance with all applica- 
ble provisions of the laws of the United States for permanent residence in accordance with 
all applicable provisions of the laws of the United States; provided, however, that the student 
has had residence in California for more than one year after such admission prior to the 
residence determination date. A student who is a minor alien shall be entitled to residence 
classification if both the student and the parent from whom residence is derived have been 
lawfully admitted to the United States for permanent residence in accordance with all applica- 
ble laws of the United States, provided that the parent has had residence in California for more 
than one year after acquiring such permanent residence prior to the residence determination 
date of the term for which the student proposes to attend the university. 

7. Certain credentialed, full-time employees of school districts. 

8. Full-time California State University and Colleges employees and their children and spouses. 
This exception applies only for the minimum time required for the student to obtain California 
residence and maintain that residence for a year. 

9. Certain exchange students. 

10. Children of deceased public law enforcement or fire suppression employees, who were 
California residents, and who were killed in the course of law enforcement or fire suppression 
duties. 

1 1 . A person in continuous full-time attendance at an institution who had resident classification 
on May 1, 1973, shall not lose such classification as a result of adoption of the uniform student 
residency law on which this statement is based, until the attainment of the degree for which 
currently enrolled. 

Any student, following a final decision on campus on his residence classification, may make 
written appeal to: Office of General Counsel, 5670 Wilshire Boulevard, Suite 1 260, Los Angeles 
90036, within 1 20 calendar days of notification of the final decision on campus of his classifica- 
tion. The Office of General Counsel may make a decision on the issue, or it may send the 


42 Evaluations of Academic Records 


matter back to the institution with instructions for a further review on campus. Students 
classified incorrectly as residents or incorrectly granted an exception from nonresident tuition 
are subject to reclassification as nonresidents and payment of nonresident tuition in arrears. 
If incorrect classification results from false or concealed facts, the student is subject to 
discipline pursuant to Section 41301 of Title 5 of the California Adinistrative Code. Resident 
students who become nonresidents, and nonresident students qualifying for exceptions whose 
basis for so qualifying changes, must immediately notify the Admissions Office. Applications 
for a change in classification with respect to a previous term are not accepted. 

The student is cautioned that this summation of rules regarding residency determination is by 
no means a complete explanation of their meaning. The student should also note that changes 
may have been made in the rate of nonresident tuition, in the statutes, and in the regulations 
between the time this catalog is published and the relevant residence determination date. 


Admission to Credential Programs 

Admission to the university as a student does not constitute admission to the teaching credential 
program. Students who plan to work toward teaching credentials must apply to the School of 
Education following procedures available from the School of Education. 

Cancellation of Admission 

A student who is admitted to the university for a given semester but who does not register in the 
specified semester will have his admission canceled. The student must file a new application form 
when he again seeks admission and must follow the complete application procedure and meet the 
then current admission requirements. 

Honors at Entrance 

Honors at entrance are awarded to both freshman and transfer students who have demonstrated 
outstanding achievement in past academic work. For first-time freshmen who have no previous 
college units earned, a grade point of 3.5 on a five-point scale must be earned in the coursework 
considered for admission to the university. Students who have completed fewer than 56 transferable 
semester units of credit must meet the grade-point average criteria for first-time freshmen and must 
also have earned a 3.5 grade-point average on all college work attempted. Students who have 
attempted 56 or more transferable semester units are eligible if a grade-point average of 3.5 is earned 
in all college work completed. 

Undergraduate Entrance Testing Requirements 

All undergraduate students, who have completed fewer than 56 semester or 84 quarter units of 
transferable work, are required to submit scores from either one of two national testing programs 
before eligibility for admission to the university can be determined. This requirement does not affect 
undergraduate students who have previously attended Cal State Fullerton and who have submitted 
ACT or SAT scores at the time of their first admission. 

Registration forms and test dates for either test may be obtained from school or college counselors, 
from the address below, or from the campus testing offices. For either test, submit the registration 
form and fee at least one month prior to the test date. 

ACT Address SA T Address 

American College Testing Program, Inc. College Entrance Examination Board 

Registration Unit, P.O. Box 168 P.O. Box 592 

Iowa City, Iowa 52240 Princeton, New Jersey 08540 

EVALUATIONS OF ACADEMIC RECORDS 

Evaluation of Transfer Credits 

The Office of Admissions will evaluate previous college work in terms of its relationship to the 
requirements of Cal State Fullerton. All degree candidates will be issued a credit summary during 
the first semester of attendance which serves as a basis for determining specific remaining require- 
ments for the student's specific objectives. 

Once issued to a student, the evaluation remains valid as long as the student enrolls at the date 


Evaluations of Academic Records 43 


specified, pursues the objective specified, and remains in continuous attendance. The student will 
not be held to additional graduation requirements unless such requirements become mandatory as 
a result of changes in the California Administrative Code or the California Education Code. If the 
student does not remain in continuous attendance and has not applied for and been granted a formal 
leave of absence, the evaluation issued upon readmission will specify the remaining requirements 
for the student's specific objectives. 

In view of the foregoing regulations, the student should notify the Office of Admissions immediately 
if he changes the objective specified in his evaluation. While the evaluation for a student remains 
valid, the student is held responsible for complying with all changes in regulations and procedures 
which may appear in subsequent catalogs. 

Acceptance of Credit 

Credit for work completed at accredited institutions, other than coursework identified by such 
institutions as remedial or in other ways as being nontransferable, will be accepted toward the 
satisfaction of degree and credential requirements at the university within limitations of residence 
requirements and community college transfer maximums. 

Transfer of Credit From a Community College 

Upper division credit is not allowed for courses taken in a community college. Credential credit is 
not allowed for courses in professional education taken in a community college. This does not 
invalidate credit for preprofessional courses taken at a community college, such as introduction to 
education, art or design, arithmetic, or music for classroom teachers. After a student has completed 
70 units of college credit at a community college, no further community college units will be 
accepted for unit credit. 

Credit for Military Service 

Students who have been in active military service for at least a year may be granted six units of 
undergraduate credit. Courses taken in service schools may be given credit on the basis of an 
evaluation which determines that they are of university level. Any credit for military experience will 
be given only upon request. Records verifying such experience must be filed with the Office of 
Admissions. 

Credit for Extension and Correspondence Courses 

The maximum amount of credit through correspondence and extension courses which may be 
allowed toward the bachelor's degree is 24 units, if otherwise applicable. 

Credit by Advanced Placement 

Students who have successfully completed courses in the advanced placement program of the 
College Entrance Examination Board (defined as receiving a score of 3, 4 or 5) shall be granted six 
units of credit for each advanced placement course toward graduation, advanced placement in the 
university's sequence courses, and credit for curriculum requirements. 

Credit by Examination 

Students may be granted credit for a course toward graduation and to meet curriculum requirements 
by the satisfactory completion of a challenge examination in that course requirement. The examina- 
tions are to be comprehensive and administered by the department in which the course is offered. 
Well in advance of the challenge examination the student will secure written approval of his major 
adviser and the chair of the department in which the course is offered. Upon the successful 
completion of the examination, the notation on the permanent record of the student will be made 
as "CR" for the course. "CR" is to indicate credit for the course with a passing grade. Credit by 
examination may not be used to fulfill the minimum residence requirements. The challenge examina- 
tion for any course may be attempted only once. A maximum of 30 credits can be earned by 
challenge examination, including those achieved by advanced placement. 


44 Evaluations of Academic Records 


College Level Examination Program 

The university shall accept three semester units of credit for each of the following College Level 
Examination Program (CLEP) examinations, subject to achievement of the scores indicated, pro- 
vided the examination was not taken previously within one calendar year and that degree credit has 
not been granted for previous coursework at the equivalent or at a more advanced level than for 
the examination in question. 


Examination 

Mathematics General Exam (1973 edition) 
College Algebra-Trigonometry 
Introductory Calculus (including essay) 
Statistics (including essay) 


Passing score 

50 (on both parts of the examination) 
49 

48 

49 


Operating under an interim policy, Cal State Fullerton may grant additional credit and advanced 
standing based upon CLEP examination results using as minimum standards: 


General Examinations 

1 . That the student achieve a score at or above the 50th percentile, college sophomore norms. 

2. That no unit credit be granted for any test in the general examinations, but that six units of 
general education requirements be waived for each test completed with the appropriate score. 


Subject Examinations 

1 . That the student submit a score at or above the 50th percentile of those in the norming group 
who earned a mark of C or better. 

2. That equivalency to Cal State Fullerton courses be determined by the appropriate academic 
department in conjunction with the Office of Admissions and Records. 

3. That university credit shall have not been previously earned in the courses in question. 

In no case will credit so awarded count towards residence creditl. 


English Equivalency Examination 

Students passing the California State University and Colleges English Equivalency Examination shall 
be awarded six semester units of credit provided credit has not been granted previously at the 
equivalent or at more advanced level. 


45 


REGISTRATION 


Orientation 

Various opportunities are provided for new students to obtain information relating to academic 
programs, student services and activities, and other aspects of university life. Information about 
specific programs will be published separately. 

Registration 

Class Schedule: A complete listing of courses offered will be found in the Class Schedule published 
prior to the start of each semester. This publication, which may be purchased in the Titan Bookstore, 
also states detailed information pertaining to the semester including class enrollment and fee pay- 
ment procedures. 

It is important that each student familiarize himself not only with the academic policies stated in this 
catalog but also with the requirements and procedures in the Class Schedule as both are used in 
the selection of classes for the semester. 

Registration: Registration is made up of two steps — class enrollment and fee payment. At registration, 
every student is required to file a study program with the Office of the Registrar. The filing of a 
program by the student and its acceptance by the university obligates the student to perform the 
designated work to the best of his ability. It is emphasized that registration does not become official 
until fees have been paid. 

Computerized Records System 

The student records system, including the registration process, is computer based. This means that 
records and reports are produced from files maintained in the university Computer Center. It is a 
fact of life in a large institution such as Cal State Fullerton that use of the computer is essential. Thus, 
there is a requirement for data cards, code numbers, student file numbers and for meeting precise 
criteria for data input, which introduces an element of the impersonal in the student records system. 
Despite these conditions, every effort is made to provide courteous, efficient and personalized 
service to students and the entire university community. To assist in providing this service, students 
are urged to be extremely careful and accurate in preparing forms, especially the official program 
and change of program forms. Accurate input of information will assure each student of error-free 
records. 

Controlled Entry Classes 

In general, all courses listed in the semester Class Schedule shall be available to all matriculated 
students except for appropriate academic restrictions as stated in the General Catalog. These restric- 
tions, including special qualifications and other academic limitations, on class entry shall be pub- 
lished in the Class Schedule as appropriate footnotes to the designated class or class section and 
shall be consistent with the General Catalog. 

Late Registration 

The last day to register late each semester will be announced in the Class Schedule. Late registrants 
will find themselves handicapped in arranging their programs and must pay a $5 late registration fee 
in addition to regular fees. 

Changes in Program 

Each student is responsible for the program of courses he lists when he registers. Changes may not 
be made thereafter without the filing of a change of program (add-drop) form in the Office of the 
Registrar following procedures announced in the Class Schedule. 

Failure to file an official change of program request in the case of dropped classes may result in a 
penalty mark being recorded. Through the fourth week of instruction in the semester no record of 
enrollment is made of dropped classes. After four weeks students are expected to complete all 
courses in which they are enrolled. However, for reasons of ill health or reasons involving other 
serious and unforeseen problems, the student may drop a class or classes and receive a W (With- 


46 Fee Schedule 


drawal) by obtaining the approval and signature(s) involved and filing the change with the registrar 
on the form provided. 

No classes may be dropped during the last three weeks of instruction, although complete withdrawal 
from the university is still possible. 

Concurrent Enrollment 

A student enrolled at the university may enroll concurrently for additional courses at another 
institution only with advance written approval from the student's academic adviser on official forms 
filed in the Office of the Registrar. Permission will not be granted when the study load in the 
proposed combined program exceeds the units authorized at this university. 

Auditors 

A properly qualified student may enroll in classes as an auditor. The student must meet the regular 
university admission requirements and must pay the same fees as other students. An auditor may 
not change his registration to obtain credit after the last date to add courses to the study list. An 
auditor is not permitted to take examinations in the course. 

Handicapped Students 

Students physically handicapped who require assistance should get in touch with the Handicapped 
Student Services Center prior to the announced semester registration period so that special arrange- 
ments for them can be made. 


VETERANS 

Cal State Fullerton is approved by the Bureau of School Approvals, State Department of Education, 
to offer programs to veterans seeking benefits under state and federal legislation. All students seeking 
veterans' benefits must have a degree or credential objective. 

Applications for benefits should be filed well in advance of the semester in which the veteran plans 
to use these benefits in order to have the authorization at the time of registration. 

RESERVE OFFICERS' TRAINING CORPS 

Cal State Fullerton does not have a Reserve Officers' Training Corps program. However, through 
arrangements with the University of Southern California, two-, three- and four-year Air Force 
Reserve Officers Training Corps (AFROTC) programs are available to all qualified undergraduate 
students for the university. 

Further, in cooperation with the University of California, Los Angeles, California State University, 
Long Beach, and The Claremont Colleges, Army ROTC programs are available to Fullerton students 
at these three institutions. Academic units earned in these programs are counted as elective credit 
towards the baccalaureate. Additional information may be obtained from the Office of Admissions 
and Records. 


FEE SCHEDULE 

Tuition is not charged to legal residents of California. The following are the fees and expenses 
currently assessed. 


All Students 

Application fee (nonrefundable) 

Payable by check or money order at time of applying $20 

Student services fee Semester 

Fewer than 4 units $51 

At least 4 but fewer than 8 units $ 57 

At least but fewer than 12 units $03 

1 2 or more units $72 

Facilities fee $3 

Associated Students fee $10 

University Union fee $10 


Fee Schedule 47 


Nonresident and Foreign Visa Students 

Nonresident tuition fee (in addition to fees required of all students, except for enrollment in 


extension or summer session) 

15 or more units, maximum $650 

Fewer than 15 units, per unit $43 

Per academic year $1,300 

Summer Session 

Course fee per unit $33-60 

Associated Students fee $4 

University Union fee $5 

Extension Fees 

Per unit or fraction of unit $28 to $56 

Other Fees or Charges 

Campus service card $1 

Late registration fee (in addition to other fees listed above) $5 

Check returned from bank for any cause $5 

Transcript fee $1 

Graduation and diploma fee $7 

Failure to meet administratively required appointment or time limit $2 

Auditors pay the same fees as others. 


Fees are subject to change by the Trustees of The California State University and colleges without 
advance notice. 

Alan Pattee Scholars 

Children of deceased public law enforcement or fire suppression employees, who were California 
residents and who were killed in the course of law enforcement or fire suppression duties, are not 
charged fees or tuition of any kind at any California State University or College, according to the 
Alan Pattee Scholarship Act, Education Code Section 23762. Students qualifying for these benefits 
are known as Alan Pattee scholars. For further information, contact the Admissions/ Registrar's 
Office which determines eligibility. 

Waiver of Fees 

Section 10652 of the California Education Code provides for the waiver of certain fees other than 
nonresident tuition, for certain veterans' dependents. Those who meet one or more of the following 
criteria should present to the university registrar a certificate of eligibility obtained from the Division 
of Educational Assistance, California Department of Veterans Affairs on or before the date of 
registration. 

A. Widows or dependents of deceased veterans killed in action or because of a service-connected 
disability who have resided in California for five years immediately preceding application. Also 
covers wives of totally disabled veterans and dependents of POW's and MIA's. Dependents must 
apply between the ages of 16 and 21. Benefits for dependents are terminated at completion of 
education or age 27, whichever comes first. 

B. Children of veterans who have service-connected disabilities and whose annual income not 
including governmental compensation for such service-connected disability, does not exceed 
$5,000. 

C. Children of veterans killed in action or because of a service-connected disability, where the 
annual income of such children, including the value of any support received from parents and 
the annual income of surviving parents, does not exceed $5,000. No limitations on age or length 
of residency. 

Refund of Fees 

Fees may be refunded only as authorized by Sections 41802, 41803 and 41913 of Title 5, California 
Administrative Code and other pertinent provisions of law. Whether a fee may be refunded and the 
circumstances under which a fee or any part of a fee may be refunded, may vary depending on the 
particular fee involved. Requirements governing refund may include such matters as the reason for 
seeking a refund (for example, death, disability, compulsory military service), the number of days 
of instruction which have elapsed before application for refund is made, and the degree to which 
the campus has provided the services for which the fee has been charged. Details concerning the 


48 Average Annual Costs and Sources of Funds 

fees which may be refunded, the circumstances under which fees may be refunded, and the 
appropriate procedure to be followed in seeking a refund may be obtained from the appropriate 
campus authority. 

Parking Fees 

Semester pass (non reserved spaces): 

Regular and limited students (4-wheeled vehicle) 

Regular and limited students (2-wheeled vehicle) 

Coin operated gate (Lot B), per exit 

Summer session,- each six-week period (4-wheeled vehicle).... 

Summer session, each six-week period (2-wheeled vehicle) 


$15.00 

3.75 

.25 

6.00 

1.50 


Typical Student Expenses 

Typical school year budgets for California residents living at home or making other housing arrange- 
ments will vary widely. It is estimated that, including a $1,300 yearly allowance for room and board, 
the cost will approximate $2,300. Nonresident students must also allow for nonresident tuition. 

The Student Services Fee 

The student services fee was established in 1974 by the Board of Trustees of The California State 
University and Colleges in lieu of the materials and service fee. The amount of the fee was not 
changed at the time, but remained $144 for 12 or more units for the academic year. It is intended 
that this fee provide financing for the following student services not covered by state funding. 

1 . Social and Cultural Development. Provides for the coordination of various student activities, 
student organizations, student government and cultural programs. 

2. Counseling. Includes the cost of counselors' salaries and clerical support, plus operating 
expenses and equipment. 

3. Testing. Covers the cost of test officers, psychometrists, clerical support, operating expenses 
and equipment. 

4. Placement. Provides career information to students and faculty for academic program plan- 
ning and employment information to graduates and students. 

5. Financial Aids Administration. Includes the cost of the counseling and business services 
provided in connection with the financial aid programs. 

6. Health Services. Provides health services to students and covers the cost of salaries of 
medical officers and nurses and related clerical and technical personnel, as well as operating 
expenses and equipment. 

7. Housing. Supports personnel who provide housing information and monitor housing services 
available to students. 

8. Student Services Administration. Covers 50 percent of the cost of the Office of the Dean of 
Students, which has responsibility for the overall administration of student services. 

The previous materials and service fee covered not only the above expenditures but also the cost 
of instructional and audiovisual supplies and contractual services, but a task force recommended 
that the responsibility for financing these expenditures be transferred to the state. It also suggested 
that the basis for the student services fee be fully and clearly communicated to students and campus 
staff. 

The 1976-1977 student services fee is subject to change by Board of Trustees action as necessitated 
by budget actions of the executive and legislative branches of government. 

AVERAGE ANNUAL COSTS AND SOURCES OF FUNDS 

The 19 campuses of The California State University and Colleges are financed primarily through 
funding provided by the taxpayers of California. For the 1975-76 year, the total cost of operation 
is $657.2 million, which provides continuing support for 230,005 full-time equivalent ( FTE* ) students. 
This results in an average cost per FTE student of $2,857 per year. Of this amount, the average student 
pays $262. Included in this average student payment is the amount paid by nonresident students. 
The remaining $2,595 in costs are funded by state and federal taxes. 

Averages do not fit all students alike or even any specific student. To arrive at an average figure that 
is meaningful, the costs outlined above exclude "user fees" for living expenses, housing, and parking, 
as well as costs for extension and summer session work. Computations are based on full-time 


A verage Annual Costs and Sources of Funds 49 


equivalent students, not individuals, and costs are prorated by system totals, not by campus. The 
average costs for a full-time equivalent student in the system are depicted in the following chart: 

1975/76 PROJECTION OF TOTAL COSTS OF CAMPUS OPERATION 
(Including Building Amortization) 

Projected Enrollment: 230,005 FTE 


Source Amount 

State appropriation (support) $538,523,643 

State funding (capital outlay) t 29,138,200 

Student charges 60,374,319 

Federal (financial aids) 29,192,461 

Total $657,228,623 

•For budgetary purposes, full-time equivalent (FTE) translates total head count into total academic 
student load. The term assumes that a full-time student in The California State University and Colleges 
is enrolled for 15 units of academic credit. Some students enroll for more than 15 units; some students 


Average Cost Per 
Student (FTE *) Percentage 
$2,371 82.0 

127 4.4 

262 X 9.2 

127 4.4 

$2,857 100.0 


enroll for fewer than 15 units. . 

f The system’s wide range of facilities and equipment on the 19 campuses is currently valued at approxi- 
mately $1.16 billion, excluding the cost of land. Amortized over a 40-year period, they are valued at 
$127 per FTE student. 

t The average costs paid by a student include the student services fee, health facilities fee, college union 
fee, student body fee, and the nonresident tuition. This amount is derived by taking the total of all 
student fees and dividing by the total full-time equivalent student enrollment. Individual students may 
pay more or less than $262 depending on whether they are part-time, full-time, resident or nonresident 
students. 


50 


RECORDS AND REGULATIONS 


ENROLLMENT DEFINITIONS AND REGULATIONS 

Unit of Credit 

Each semester unit represents three hours of university work per week for one semester. Courses are 
of three types: 

(1) Lecture — one hour in class plus two hours of study. 

(2) Activity — two hours of class plus one hour of study. 

(3) Laboratory — three hours in class. 

Some courses may combine two or more of these types. All required courses carry unit credit. 

Classification in the University 

Undergraduate students who have completed 0-29 y 2 semester units of work are classified as freshmen, 
30 - 59 % semester units as sophomores, 60-89y 2 semester units as juniors, and 90 or more as seniors. 

Maximum Number of Course Units 

Undergraduate students' requests to carry units beyond 18 (19 for engineering majors) must be 
approved by the student's adviser and the department chair of the major. If such requests are denied, 
appeals may be made to the appropriate school dean. Undeclared majors must receive the approval 
of the director of academic advisement to carry over 18 units of work. The minimum full-time load 
is 12 units. 

A student whose academic record justifies a study list in excess of the normal may request to be 
allowed to carry extra units. Request forms may be obtained from the Office of the Registrar and are 
submitted during the first week of instruction. In general, only students with superior academic records 
are allowed to enroll for more than the maximum unit load. In addition, the need to carry an overload 
must be established. Factors such as time spent in employment or commuting, the nature of the 
academic program, extracurricular activities and the student's health should be considered in planning 
a study load. Students who are employed or have outside responsibilities are advised to reduce their 
program of study. 

The minimum full-time program of study for graduate students is defined in the "Graduate Policies and 
Procedures" section of this catalog. 

Undergraduate Students Taking Graduate Level Courses 

Graduate level (500) courses are organized primarily for graduate students. Undergraduate students 
may be permitted to enroll in a graduate level (500) course if: 

1. They are within nine units of completion of graduation requirements, or 

2. They are exceptionally qualified seniors whose undergraduate work in the related field or fields 
has been of 3.5 grade-point average or better, and whose cumulative overall grade-point average 
is at least 3.25. 

Such cases shall require specific approval by the instructor and also the chair of the department or 
dean of the school in which the course is offered and by the chair or dean of the student's major 
department or school. 

Graduate level (500) courses taken under 1 . above may be applied to a graduate program if approved 
under graduate studies policies. 

Graduate level (500) courses taken under 2. above may be applied to the undergraduate program only. 

Class Attendance 

While class attendance is not recorded officially by the university, regular attendance in class is often 
essential to success in a course. The policy on class attendance is within the discretion of the individual 
faculty member and shall be announced by the faculty member at the first class meeting of the 
semester. 


Grading Policies 51 


Initial Class Meeting 

It is especially important that students attend the first meeting of a class. Students who are absent from 
the first meeting and fail to notify the instructor or departmental office no later than 24 hours after the 
class meeting may be denied admission to the class. Instructors may deny admission to absentees in 
order to admit any persons on waiting lists in their places. 

Instructor-Initiated Drops 

A student who registers for a class and whose name appears on the first-day-of-class list should attend 
all class meetings in the first week or the first two class meetings, whichever alternative covers the 
longer time span. If the student is absent without notifying the instructor or departmental office within 
24 hours after any meeting missed, the student may then be dropped administratively from the class 
by the instructor. This administrative withdrawal shall be without penalty and must be filed by the 
instructor with the registrar no later than the 20th day of instruction. 

GRADING POLICIES 

Grading System 

Every student of the university will have his coursework reported by the faculty in terms of letter grades 
or administrative symbols. 

When, because of circumstances, a student does not complete a particular course, or withdraws, 
certain administrative symbols may be assigned by the faculty. Grades and symbols are listed in the 
chart below together with grade-point values. The chart also illustrates the academic bookkeeping 
involved for all grades and symbols used. 

The university utilizes a combination of traditional and nontraditional grading options as follows. 
Traditional 

Option 1 . Letter Grades: A, B, C, D, F 
Nontraditional 

Option 2. Letter Grades: A, B, C and NC (No Credit) for undergraduate courses; A, 

B, and NC for graduate level courses. 

Option 3. CR (Credit) for satisfactory and NC (No Credit) for less than satisfactory 
work. 


Grade or Symbol 

Units 

Units 

Grade 

Point 

Progress 

Point 

Full 

Option 1 Option 2 

Attempted 

Earned 

Value 

Value 

Credit 

Satisfactory Grade 

A A 

.... Yes 

Yes 

4 

4 

Yes 

A B 

.... Yes 

Yes 

3 

3 

Yes 

c C 

.... Yes 

Yes 

2 

2 

Yes 

Unsatisfactory Grade 

D 

.... Yes 

Yes 

1 

1 

NO 

NC 

* 

No 

None 

0 

No 

F 

Yes 

No 

0 

0 

No 

Option 3 

CR 

* 

Yes 

0 

2 

Yes 

NC 

* 

No 

0 

0 

No 

Administrative Symbols 

1 (Incomplete) 

t 

No 

None 

None 

NO 

W (Withdrawal) 

No 

No 

0 

0 

No 

AU (Audit) 

No 

No 

0 

0 

No 

SP (Satisfactory Progress) . 

No 

No 

0 

0 

No 

RD (Report Delayed) 

No 

No 

0 

0 

No 

totals 

Used 

Counted 

Used 

Counted 



In 

Toward 

in 

Toward 



CPA Objective GPA Progress 

* Credit /No Credit course units are not included in grade-point computations; however Credit /No Credit 
course units attempted are included in progress-point computations, 
t If not completed within one calendar year the “I” will be counted as an “F” (or “NC”) for grade-point 
and progress-point calculation, 
t Undergraduate courses only. 


52 Grading Policies 

Selection of a grading option, with certain exceptions, is the responsibility of the student. Graduate 
students must use Option 1 for courses that are on study plans leading to master's degrees. 
Exceptions are those courses designated by the faculty to be graded solely on either an Option 2 or 
Option 3 basis. These courses will be so designated in the Class Schedule (and shall not be changed 
by the faculty after publication of the Class Schedule ) for each semester and may be included in major, 
core, or special program requirements. 

The instructor shall grade all students using the traditional A, B, C, D, or F grades except in Credit/ No 
Credit courses, and the registrar shall make the necessary changes from A, B, C, D or F, converting 
A, B, C to Credit and D, F to No Credit in undergraduate courses; and A, B to Credit and C, D, F to 
No Credit in graduate level courses. In those courses offered only on a Credit /No Credit basis, the 
instructor shall assign grades of "Credit" or "No Credit" or appropriate administrative symbols, i.e., 
"I" (Incomplete), "SP" (Satisfactory Progress). 

Nontraditional Grade Options 

Nontraditional grading options are available to undergraduate students, nonobjective graduate stu- 
dents, and to classified graduate students for courses not included in the approved study plan. Any 
student attempting a course using either of the nontraditional grading options must meet the prerequi- 
sites for that course. Each student shall be permitted to select courses in subjects outside of the major 
requirements for enrollment on a Credit/ No Credit basis (grading Option 3). The phrase "major 
requirements" shall be taken to include core plus concentration (or option) requirements in depart- 
ments using such terms, and professional course requirements in teacher education curricula. A student 
in any one term may take a maximum of two courses under Option 2, or one course from Option 2 
and one course from Option 3 (but not two courses under Option 3). In addition, he may enroll in 
a required course offered only under Option 3; however, a maximum of 36 units of Credit /No Credit 
(or pass/fail) courses including those transferred from other institutions may be counted toward the 
baccalaureate. 

Students shall inform the registrar up to the end of the fourth week of classes regarding the selection 
of grading options in designated courses. If a student does not do so, he shall be graded under Option 
1 . 

A, B, C, No Credit (Option 2) 

There is no difference in grade-point values or other essentials between letter grades in this option and 
the traditional letter grades. The principal differences are that NC (No Credit) replaces both the D and 
F as an "unsatisfactory grade" and has "O" progress-point value in undergraduate courses, and 
replaces C, D and F graduate courses. No Credit grades are included in progress computations. 

Credit/ No Credit (Option 3) 

Under Option 3 the term "Credit" signifies that the student's academic performance was such that 
he was awarded full credit in undergraduate courses with a quality level of achievement equivalent 
to a "C" grade or better. In all graduate level courses "Credit" signifies academic performance 
equivalents to "B" or "A" grades. "No Credit" signifies that the student attempted the course but that 
his performance did not warrant credit toward his objective. As in Option 2, No Credit (NC) grades 
are included in progress point computations. 

Ordinarily, a student shall be limited to one non-major course per term using this option, exclusive 
of courses offered only on a Credit/ No Credit basis. 

When an undergraduate student changes his major field of study to one where he has completed 
courses on a Credit basis, such lower division courses shall be included in his major requirements. 
Upper division courses may be included at the option of the department upon petition by the student. 


ADVISORY CAUTION: Undergraduate students who plan to pursue graduate or profes- 
sional studies later are advised to be selective in opting for courses on a Credit/ No Credit 
basis. As a general rule (advisory only), coursework that is preparatory or prerequisite 
to advanced specialized study should be completed and evaluated on a letter grade basis 
and not Credit/ No Credit. 


Administrative Symbols 53 


ADMINISTRATIVE SYMBOLS 

Incomplete (I) 

A grade of Incomplete ( I ) may be given only when, in the opinion of the instructor, a student cannot 
complete a course during the semester of enrollment for reasons beyond his control. Such reasons 
are assumed to include: illness of the student or of members of his immediate family; extraordinary 
financial problems; loss of outside position; and other exigencies. In assigning a grade of "I", the 
instructor will file with his department, a statement of the specific requirements for completion of 
coursework. Such requirements will not include or necessitate retaking the course. This statement 
will also include a provisional grade indicating the quality of work completed at that time, and the 
instructor's designation of the time limit, allowed for completion of course requirements. Upon later 
completion of the course requirements, the instructor shall initiate a change to a grade of A, B, C, 
D or F, or CR (Credit), NC (No Credit) if the course was offered only for such grades. When the 
instructor is no longer available, instructional departments will determine procedures for completion 
of course requirements and assigning grades for such completed coursework. 

An Incomplete (I) signifies that a portion of required coursework has not been completed and 
evaluated in the prescribed time period and that there is still possibility of earning credit. It is the 
responsibility of the student to bring pertinent information to the instructor and to reach agreement 
on the means by which the remaining course requirements will be satisfied. A final grade is assigned 
when the work agreed upon has been completed and evaluated. 

An "Incomplete" must be made up within one calendar year immediately following the end of the 
term in which it was assigned. This limitation prevails whether or not the student maintains continu- 
ous enrollment. Failure to complete the assigned work will result in an "Incomplete being counted 
as equivalent to an "F" (or an "NC") for grade-point average and progress-point computations. 

Withdrawal (W) 

The symbol "W" indicates that the student was permitted to drop the course after the 20th day of 
j instruction (university census date) with the approval of the instructor and department chair. It 
carries no connotation of quality performance and is not used in calculating grade point averages 
or progress points. Withdrawal is permitted during the first 20 days of classes without record of 
enrollment. 

After the first 20 days of classes, students are expected to complete all courses in which they are 
enrolled. However, for serious and compelling reasons, such as illness, the student may, by obtaining 
appropriate authorizations, withdraw from a class or classes and receive the symbol W (with- 
drawal). Authorization to withdraw after the census date and prior to the last three weeks of 
instruction, shall be granted only with the approval of the instructor and the department chair or 
school dean. All requests for permission to withdraw under these circumstances and all approvals 
shall be made in writing on the "Change of Program" form and shall briefly state the reason for the 
withdrawal. The completed change of program form shall be filed at the Registrar s Office by the 
student or his proxy. 

Withdrawals shall not be permitted during the final three weeks of instruction except in cases such 
as accident or serious illness where the assignment of an "Incomplete" is not practicable. Ordinarily, 
withdrawals in this category will involve total withdrawal from the campus, except that Credit, or 
an Incomplete may be assigned for courses in which sufficient work has been completed to permit 
an evaluation to be made. Requests for permission to withdraw from all classes under these circum- 
stances, with authorizations as described above, shall be made on the change of program form and 
shall be filed by the student, or his proxy, with the registrar. 

Unofficial Withdrawal 

A student who discontinues course participation without formal filing of a withdrawal (drop) notice 
with the university as described in this catalog shall be considered to have unofficially withdrawn 
from the course. Such action by the student will result in a final grade of F or NC depending on the 
grade option elected by the student. 


54 Administrative Symbols 

A student may petition for a retroactive withdrawal provided the student can document both the 
serious and compelling reason or circumstances that required the withdrawal and the date of such 
withdrawal. Such a petition must be filed within 30 days after the first class day of the following 
semester. 

Petitions for retroactive withdrawal may be submitted for withdrawal in individual courses. 


ADVISORY NOTE: Students who unofficially withdraw and who are receiving financial 
aid or benefits which are dependent on completion of specified course units are advised 
that they may have such benefits suspended and may be subject to repayment of allow- 
ances received after date of unofficial withdrawal. 


Audit (AU) 

The symbol "AU" is used by the registrar in those instances where a student has enrolled in a course 
either for information or other purposes not related to the student's formal academic objective. An 
auditor may not change his registration to obtain credit after the last date to add courses to the study 
list. An auditor is not permitted to take examinations in the course; therefore, there is no basis for 
evaluation and a formal grade report. 

Satisfactory Progress (SP) 

The "SP" symbol is used in connection with thesis, project or similar courses that extend beyond 
one academic term. It indicates that work is in progress, and has been evaluated and found to be 
satisfactory to date, but that assignment of a final grade must await completion of additional 
coursework. Cumulative enrollment in units attempted may not exceed the total number applicable 
to the student's educational objective. Work is to be completed within a stipulated time period which 
may not exceed one year except for graduate degree thesis or project for which the time may be 
up to two years, but may not exceed the overall time limit for completion of all master's degree 
requirements. Any extension of time limit must receive prior authorization by the dean of the school 
(or the dean's designee) in which the course is offered. 

Report Delayed (RD) 

The "RD" symbol is used in those cases where a delay in the reporting of a final grade is due to 
circumstances beyond the control of the student. The symbol is assigned by the registrar and should 
be replaced by a more appropriate grading symbol as soon as possible. An "RD" shall not be 
included in calculations of a grade-point average or in determination of progress points. 

Grade Reports to Students 

A report of the final grades assigned in classes is sent to each student at the end of each semester. 
Many students also leave self-addressed post cards for instructors of specific courses to send them 
earlier reports. 

Examinations 

Final examinations, if required by the instructor, will be given at times scheduled by the university. 
Once established, the final examination schedule may not be changed unless approved by the dean 
of the school. No makeup final examination will be given except for reason of illness or other verified 
emergencies. 

Grade-Point Averages: Repetition of Courses 

Each undergraduate student shall complete with a grade-point average of 2.0: 

A. All units accepted toward a degree, including those accepted by transfer from another institu- 
tion, 

B. All units in the major, 

C. All units attempted at the university. 

The numerical grade-point values in the grading system chart are intended to give an exact determi- 
nation of a student's scholarship. To compute the grade-point average for coursework at Cal State 
Fullerton, the point value of each grade within the exception noted below is multiplied first by the 
unit value of the course to obtain a total of all grade points earned. The total is then divided by the 



Transcripts 55 

total units attempted in all courses in which grades of A, B, C, D or F were received. The resulting 
figure is the grade-point average (CPA). 

The exception in grade-point computations is as follows: Undergraduate students may repeat, using 
the traditional grading system ( A, B, C, D, F), those courses for which grades of D or F were earned. 
In computing the grade-point average of a student who repeats courses in which he received D or 
F, only the most recently earned grades and grade points shall be used for the first 16 units repeated. 
Nevertheless, the original grade on the academic record shall not be changed or eradicated. 

In the case of any additional repetition (beyond the 16 unit limitation), both grades are considered 
in computing grade-point averages. However, successful repetition of a course originally passed 
carries no additional unit credit toward a degree or credential except for certain courses such as 
independent study or practicum (specified in this catalog as "may be repeated for credit"). 

Grade Changes 

All grades except Incomplete ( I ) are final when filed by the instructor in his end-of-term course grade 
report. Each student is notified by mail of the grades earned during the term. These grades become 
a part of the official record and may be changed only upon official authorization by the instructor 
and department chair. 

ACADEMIC RENEWAL 

Under certain circumstances, the university may disregard up to two semesters or three quarters of 
previous undergraduate coursework taken at any college from all considerations associated with 
requirements for the baccalaureate degree. These circumstances are: 

1 • The student has requested the action formally and has presented evidence that work completed 
in the term(s) under consideration is substandard and not representative of present scholastic 
ability and level of performance; and 

2. The level of performance represented by the term(s) under consideration was due to extenuating 
circumstances; and 

3. There is every evidence that the student would find it necessary to complete additional terms in 
order to qualify for the baccalaureate if the request were not approved. 

Final determination that one or more terms shall be disregarded in termination of eligibility for 
graduation shall be based upon a careful review of evidence by the Review Committee for Academic 
Renewal and shall be made only when: 

1. Five years have elapsed since the most recent work to be disregarded was completed; and 

2. The student has completed at Cal State Fullerton, since the most recent work to be disregarded 
was completed, 15 semester units with at least a 3.0 CPA, or 30 semester units with at least a 
2.5 GPA, or 45 semester units with at least a 2.0 GPA. Work completed at another institution 
cannot be used to satisfy this requirement. 

When such action is taken, the student's permanent academic record shall be annotated so that it 
is readily evident to all users of the record that no work taken during the disregarded term(s), even 
if satisfactory, may apply toward baccalaureate requirements. However, all work must remain legible 
on the record ensuring a true and complete academic history. 

transcripts 

Official transcripts of courses taken at the university are issued only with the written permission of 
the student concerned. Partial transcripts are not issued. A fee of $1 for each transcript issued must 
be received before the record can be forwarded. 

Normally transcripts are available within three working days, except at the end of the semester when 
the student should allow about 10 days after the last day of the semester. 

Transcripts from other institutions, which have been presented for admission or evaluation, become 
a part of the student's permanent academic file and are not returned or copied for distribution. 
Students desiring transcripts covering work attempted elsewhere should request them from the 
institutions concerned. 


56 Student Honors 

CONTINUOUS RESIDENCY REGULATIONS 

Good Standing 

"Good standing" indicates that a student is eligible to continue and is free from financial obligation 
to the university. A student under academic disqualification, disciplinary suspension or disciplinary 
expulsion is not eligible to receive a statement of "good standing" on transcripts issued by the 
university or on other documents. 

Choice of Catalog Regulations for Meeting Degree Requirements 
A student remaining in continuous attendance in regular sessions and continuing on in the same 
curriculum in any California State University or College, in any of the California community colleges 
or in any combination of California community colleges and The California State University and 
Colleges may, for purposes of meeting graduation requirements, elect to meet the graduation 
requirements of The California State University or College from which he will graduate in effect either 
at the time of his entering the curriculum or at the time of his graduation therefrom, except that 
substitutions for discontinued courses may be authorized or required by the proper college authori- 
ties. 

Continuous Enrollment for Graduate Students 

A graduate student with a degree objective is expected to maintain continuous enrollment in the 
university (summer sessions and extension excluded) until completion of the degree. If a student 
pursuing an advanced degree finds it impossible to attend during a certain semester, and is not 
eligible for a leave of absence, as detailed elsewhere in this catalog, he may request permission to 
register in Graduate Studies 700, a course with no unit credit, which does not require class attend- 
ance. 

If a graduate student who has completed student teaching and is pursuing a standard elementary 
or secondary teaching credential finds that he cannot enroll in courses leading to the credential 
during a certain semester, he may enroll in Credential Studies 701 . This course is a course with no 
unit credit, which does not require class attendance. Students may not enroll in Credential Studies 
701 for a third consecutive semester. 

A graduate student who fails to register each semester has discontinued enrollment in the university. 

Leave of Absence 

A student may petition for a leave of absence and if approved may upon his return continue under 
the catalog requirements that applied to his enrollment prior to the absence. A leave of absence may 
be granted for a maximum of one year. Illness is the only routinely approved reason for a leave of 
absence. Students should realize that an approved leave of absence does not reserve a place for 
them in the university; they must reapply. 

Complete Withdrawal from the University 

Students who wish to withdraw from the university must complete a change of program form. See 
section on refund of fees for possible refunds. No student may withdraw after the date shown on 
the university calendar as the last day of instruction. Complete withdrawal from the university is 
accomplished by following the procedures for dropping classes. 

STUDENT HONORS 

Dean's Honor List 

Academic achievement is recognized with the publication each semester of a list of undergraduate 
students whose grade-point average for the previous term has been 3.5 or better. Students are 
notified in writing when they have earned this distinction. Eligibility is based on a minimum of 12 
units of graded coursework. 

Honors at Graduation 

Honors at graduation have been defined by the Faculty Council in three classifications: 


With honors GPA 3.5 

With high honors GPA 3.85 

With highest honors GPA 4.0 


Academic Progress, Probation and Disqualification 57 

ACADEMIC PROGRESS, PROBATION AND 
DISQUALIFICATION 

For purposes of determining a student's ability to remain in the university both quality of perform- 
ance and progress towards his educational objective will be considered. 

Academic Probation 

An undergraduate student shall be placed on academic probation if in any semester his cumulative 
grade-point average or his grade-point average at Cal State Fullerton falls below 2.0 (grade of C on 
a five-point scale), or if he fails to earn twice as many progress points as all units attempted during 
that semester. The student shall be advised of probation status promptly and, except in unusual 
instances, before the start of the next consecutive enrollment period. 

An undergraduate student shall be removed from academic probation and restored to clear standing 
when he earns a cumulative grade-point average of 2.0 (C) in all academic work attempted, in all 
such work attempted at Cal State Fullerton, and in making satisfactory progress towards his educa- 
tional objective by achieving at least twice as many progress points as units attempted during each 
semester. 

A graduate student enrolled in a graduate degree program in either conditionally classified or 
classified standing shall be subject to academic probation if he fails to maintain a cumulative grade 
point average of at least 3.0 (grade of B on a five-point scale) in all units attempted after admission 
to the program. 

Academic Disqualification 

An undergraduate student on academic probation shall be subject to academic disqualification if: 

1 . As a lower division student (fewer than 60 semester hours of college work completed) he falls 
15 or more grade points below a 2.0 (C) average on all college units attempted or in all units 
attempted at this institution, or fails to earn during any semester twice as many progress points 
as all units attempted in that semester. 

2. As a junior (60 to 89% semester hours of college work completed) he falls nine or more grade 
points below a 2.0 (C) average on all college units attempted or in all units attempted at this 
institution, or fails to earn during any semester twice as many progress points as all units 
attempted in that semester. 

3. As a senior (90 or more semester hours of college work completed) he falls six or more grade 
points below a 2.0 (C) average on all college units attempted or in all units attempted at this 
institution, or fails to earn during any semester twice as many progress points as all units 
attempted in that semester. 

A graduate student enrolled in a graduate degree program shall be subject to disqualification if while 
on probation he fails to earn sufficient grade points to remove himself from probationary status. 
Disqualification may be either from further registration in a particular program or from further 
enrollment in the university, as determined by appropriate campus authority. 

A post-baccalaureate student (unclassified or classified) shall be disqualified if he falls below a 2.0 
(C) average in all units attempted at this institution as a post-baccalaureate student, or fails to earn 
during any semester twice as many progress points as all units attempted in that semester. 

Student Conduct 

The university properly assumes that all students are in attendance to secure a sound education and 
that they will conduct themselves as mature citizens of the campus community. Compliance with 
all regulations of the university is therefore expected. If, however, on any occasion a student or an 
organization is alleged to have compromised accepted universities or standards , appropriate judici- 
ary procedures shall be initiated through the established university process. Every effort will be made 
to encourage and support the development of self-discipline and control by students and student 
organizations. The dean of student services, aided by all members of the faculty and advised by the 
Student Affairs Committee of the faculty, is responsible to the president of the university for the 
behavior of students in their relationships to the university. The president in turn is responsible to 
the Chancellor and the Trustees of The California State University and Colleges who themselves are 
governed by specific laws of the State of California. 

A list of specifically prohibited behavior is available upon request from the dean of student services 


58 Privacy Rights 

and also is posted on the administrative bulletin boards in the breezeway of the Letters and Science 
Building and in the second-floor lobby of Langsdorf Hall. Prohibited behavior includes hazing, now 
defined as acts likely to cause physical or emotional harm. 

Students have the right to appeal certain disciplinary actions taken by appropriate university authori- 
ties. Regulations governing original hearings and appeal rights and procedures have been carefully 
detailed to provide maximum protection to both the indivisual charged and the university commu- 
nity. Information about the operation of the judicial system involving student discipline may be 
obtained in the Office of Special Projects. 

Debts Owed to the University 

From time to time the student may become indebted to the university. This could occur, for example, 
when the student fails to repay money borrowed from the university. Similarly, debts occur when 
the student fails to pay library fees, or when the student fails to pay for other services provided by 
the university at the request of the student. Should this occur, Sections 42380 and 42381 of Title 5 
of the California Administrative Code authorize the university to withhold "permission to register, 
or use facilities for which a fee is authorized to be charged, to receive services, materials, food or 
merchandise or any combination of the above from any person owing a debt" until the debt is paid. 
For example, under these provisions the university may withhold permission to register, and may 
withhold other services such as grades and transcripts. If a student feels that he or she does not owe 
all or part of a particular fee or charge, the student should contact the business office. 

RIGHT OF PETITION 

Students may petition for review of certain university academic regulations when unusual circum- 
stances exist. It should be noted, however, that academic regulations when they are contained in 
Title 5, California Administrative Code, are not subject for petition. 

Petition forms are available in the Office of Admissions and Records and must first be reviewed and 
signed by the student's advisor. Action will then be taken on the petition and the student will be 
notified of this decision. A copy of the action will also be placed in the student's folder in the Office 
of the Registrar. 

RIGHT OF NONCOMPLIANCE, RISK ACTIVITIES 

Certain university activities either within or outside of the classroom may involve varying degrees 
of risk to the participants. It is university policy that the instructor directing such activities divulge 
fully to all potential participants the specific nature of such risks and obtain from them their expressed 
or implied consent prior to undertaking activities. 

The student who at any time comes to believe that the risks to himself, whether physical or 
psychological, are excessive has the responsibility to withdraw from participation at the time and 
to inquire of the instructor if there are alternative means of fulfilling the requirements without penalty. 
If there is none, the student may petition for withdrawal from the course without penalty or appeal 
for an appropriate modification of the activity. The appeal may be made either to the chair of the 
department concerned, or to the chair of the Committee on Activities Involving Human Subjects, 
or both. 

RIGHT OF ACADEMIC APPEAL 

The student who believes he has been graded capriciously or treated with obvious prejudice by 
faculty members or administrators may initiate steps for an academic appeal. In all cases the student 
should first make an effort to resolve the issue by consulting the faculty member or administrator 
concerned. If the issue cannot be resolved, the student should consult with the dean of student 
services or director of special projects. 

PRIVACY RIGHTS OF STUDENTS 

The federal Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act of 1974 (20 U.S.C. 1232g) sets out require- 
ments designed to protect the privacy of parents and students. Specifically, the statute governs 
access to records maintained by the campus, and the release of such records. In brief, the statute 
provides that the campus must provide students access to official records directly related to the 
student and an opportunity for a hearing to challenge such records on the grounds that they are 


Privacy Rights 59 

inaccurate, misleading or otherwise inappropriate; the right to a hearing under the act does not 
include any right to challenge the appropriateness of a grade as determined by the instructor. The 
act generally required that written consent of the student be received before releasing personally 
identifiable data about the student from records to other than a specified list of exceptions. 

An office and review board has been established by the Department of Health Education and 
Welfare to investigate and adjudicate violations and complaints under the act. The office designated 
for this purpose may be contacted at the following address: Thomas S. McFee, Room 5660, Depart- 
ment of Health, Education and Welfare, 330 Independence Avenue, S. W„ Washington, D. C. 20201 . 
The campus is authorized under the act to release public directory information concerning students. 
Directory information includes the student's name, address, telephone listing, date and place of birth, 
major field of study, participation in officially recognized activities and sports, weight and height of 
members of athletic teams, dates of attendance, degrees and awards received, and the most recent 
previous educational agency or institution attended by the student. The above designated informa- 
tion is subject to release by the campus at any time unless the campus has receive a prior written 
objection from the student specifying information which the student requests not be released. 


' 

' 

































IDIEGKIEIE 

KIEGUIMEMIENTS 


62 


GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS FOR 
THE BACHELOR'S DEGREE 


A student is eligible if he is in good standing and fulfills the following requirements: 


1. General Education 

To be eligible for a baccalaureate degree from Cal State Fullerton, the student shall have completed 
a minimum of 45 semester units of general education courses selected in accordance with the pattern 
designated below. Such courses may be lower division courses or upper division courses for which 
the student qualifies 


/. Basic Subjects 

A. Writing Skills in English Minimum: three units 

The student shall demonstrate competence in writing standard English by successfully com- 
pleting (with a grade of C or better) no fewer than three units of work chosen from among 
the following: 

Communications 101 Communications Writing (3) 

Communications 102 Communications Writing (3) 

Communications 103 Applied Writing (3) 

English 100 Composition (3) 

English 103 Seminars in Writing (3) 

English 105 Introduction to Creative Writing (3) 


(4) 


( 2 ) 


B. Logical and Mathematical Skills Minimum: three units 

The student shall demonstrate competence by completing (with a grade of C or better) no 
fewer than three units of work chosen from among the following: 

Engineering 205 Digital Computation (3) 

Mathematics 100 Precalculus Mathematics (4) 

Mathematics 110 Mathematics for Liberal Arts Students (3) 

Mathematics 120 Introduction to Probability and Statistics (3) 

Mathematics 130 A Short Course in Calculus (4) 

Mathematics 150A Analytic Geometry and Calculus 
Philosophy 210 Logic (3) 

Philosophy 368 First Course in Symbolic Logic (3) 

Quantitative Methods 264 Computer Programming 
Quantitative Methods 289 Computer Methods in Social Science (3) 

C. Language Skills Minimum: three units 

The student shall demonstrate competence by successfully completing (with a grade of C 
or better) no fewer than three units of work chosen from among the following: 
Afro-ethnic Studies 104 Fundamental Swahili (4) 

Fundamental Swahili (4) 

Critical Reading Skills (3) 

Vocabulary Building (3) 

Fundamental Foreign Languages (3-5) 

Fundamental Foreign Languages (3-5) 

Library 300 Elements of Bibliographic Investigation (3) 

Linguistics 301 Sanskrit (3) 

Speech Communication 100 Introduction to Personal Communication (3) 

Speech Communication 102 Public Speaking (3) 

Speech Communication 200 Personal Communication Theory (3) 

Theater 211 Introduction to Oral Interpretation (3) 

* Note: The fundamental courses in any language offered by the Foreign Languages and Litera- 
tures Department will fulfill this requirement. 


Afro-ethnic Studies 105 
Education-Reading 201 
Education-Reading 202 
Foreign Languages* 101 
Foreign Languages* 102 


Bachelor's Degree 63 


II. General Subjects 

A. Natural Sciences Minimum: nine units 

The student shall select a minimum of two courses, one from each of two fields which shall 
include the following: biological sciences, chemistry, earth sciences, physics and physical 
science. 

B. Social Sciences Minimum: nine units 

The student shall select a minimum of three courses, one from each of three fields which 
shall include the following: anthropology, economics, geography, history, political science, 
psychology and sociology. 

Note: Of the courses taken to meet the requirements in U.S. history, Constitution, state and 
local government (California Administrative Code, Section 40404 ) , a maximum of three units 
may be applied for credit in Section II. 

C. Arts — Humanities Minimum: nine units 

The student shall select a minimum of three courses, one from each of three fields which 
shall include the following: art, drama, language (English, intermediate or advanced courses 
in foreign languages), literature (American, comparative, English, foreign), music, philoso- 
phy and speech. 

D. General Education Electives 

The student may fulfill any remaining units required for general education by selecting any 
undergraduate course offered by the university for credit except courses which apply to the 
student's major or credential program. Transfer students certified under provisions of Cali- 
fornia Administrative Code, Title V, as having met the 40-unit minimum general education 
requirements will be required to complete the five additional units selected from two or 
more subsections, A-D of this general education requirement. 

2. Statutory Requirements in American Institutions and Values 
In addition to general education-breadth requirements California Administrative Code, Section 
4 °404, states that for graduation the student is required "to demonstrate competence in the Constitu- 
tion of the United States, and in American history including the study of American institutions and 
'deals, and of the principles of state and local government established under the Constitution of this 
state." To meet this requirement, the student may select the following alternatives: (1) pass a 
comprehensive examination in these fields, (2) pass Political Science 100 and a course in U. S. 
history or American Studies 201, (3) pass a combination of Political Science 300 and History 170A 
or 170B. 

Note. Coursework completed to satisfy Section 40404 may be applied in the social sciences area 
0 general education to a maximum of three units. 

3- Electives 

After fulfilling the requirements in general education, American institutions and values, and a specific 
ma jor (and possibly a minor), each student is free to choose the rest of the courses needed to 
complete the 1 24 semester units required for graduation. Different majors vary considerably in both 
e num ber of units they require in their own and related fields. They also vary considerably in the 
amount of latitude or choice they permit in selecting courses to satisfy the major requirement. The 
general education requirement encourages great freedom of choice within the broad categories of 
e natural sciences, social sciences, arts and humanities, and basic subjects. Students at the univer- 
Sl V use their electives to broaden their general educations, deepen some aspect of their specialties, 
Pursue work in related fields, and satisfy curiosities and enthusiasms for particular subjects or areas 
°f interest. 

Advisement on general education and electives is provided by the Office of Academic Advisement. 


Units 

(a ) Total units 

A minimum of 124 semester units is required for graduation with a bachelor of arts degree. 
, Bachelor of Science in Engineering requires a minimum of 132 semester units, 
ib) Upper division units 

Completion of a minimum of 40 units of upper division credit is required. 


64 Bachelor's Degree 

(c) Completion of a minimum of 24 semester units in residence is require^ At least onfrJnKof 
these units must be completed among the last 20 semester! jnrts .counted toward the tdegee. 
Extension credit, or credit by examination, may not be used to fulfill the minimum residence 
requirement. 

5. Scholarship . . 

(a) A grade-point average of 2.0 or better is required on all units attempted, including those 
accepted by transfer from another institution. 

(b) A grade-point average of 2.0 or better is required on all units in the major 

(c) A grade-point average of 2.0 or better is required on all units attempted at Cal State Fullerto 

6. Major . . . 

Completion of all requirements for a major as specified by appropriate un, verity **horrty « 
required At least 24 units, including 12 at the upper division level, must be applied exclusively to 
the major requirements and may not be used to meet the requirements of general education. 

7. Multiple Majors and Second Baccalaureate Degrees 

Within the units required for the baccalaureate it is possible for a student to complete the require- 
mentefoT more than one major within a degree program when the addit.ona major -s withm the 
decree of the first major At least 24 units, including 12 at the upper division level, in each ma t or 
must be applied exclusively to the respective major and may not be used to meet requirements in 
other maTors or in general education. The student shall declare the additional ma,orw*h the 
appropriate department not later than the beginning of the student s final year ofstudy^Theco p 
tion of additional majors will be noted at the time of graduation by appropriate entries on the 
academic record and in the commencement program. 

Second baccalaureate _ 

(a) First degree completed elsewhere, second at Cal State Fullerton 

Students seeking a bachelor's degree from Cal State Fullerton after having received a bacca- 
laureate from another institution may qualify for graduation with the approval and recom- 
mendation of the faculty upon completion of the following: 

(1) general education requirements 

(2) all requirements in the major field of study 

(3) residence and scholarship requirements 

(b) Two baccalaureates from Cal State Fullerton c ^_ nrl 

With the approval and recommendation of the faculty, a student may qualify for a second 

baccalaureate under the following circumstances: . . . , rt . 

(1) The second field of study is offered in a different degree (e.g., bachelor of arts to 

bachelor of science) ( . oro _ 

(2) At least 24 units are earned in residence after the conferral of the first degree 

(3) All requirements of the major are fulfilled 

Units included in second baccalaureate programs may not apply to graduate degrees or credential 
programs. 

8. Minor 

Completion of a minor field is not required for the baccalaureate degree at this time. 

9. Graduation Requirement Check 

A candidate for graduation must file an application for a graduation requirements check during 

The graduation and diploma fee is required when the application if filed. Apphcat on forms are 
available ast the Admissions and Records information desk ( Lobby-Langsdorf Hall) and in th 
Registration Center. . . , , 

Candidates for the baccalaureate degree should refer to the semester Class Schedule lor application 
hltngdates.A s^nit^should have completed at least 100 units (including the current work in 
progress) and a substantial portion of his major requirements beforerequesnngagra^ 

If the candidate does not complete the requiremkents in the semester indicated, he must file a change 
of graduation date in the Office of the Registrar. 

JO. Approval and Recommendation by the Faculty of the University 


65 

THE PROGRAM OF MASTER'S DEGREES 


Master's degree programs offered at Cal State Fullerton are listed on page 82 and described in the 
appropriate sections of this catalog under "University Curricula." Program descriptions and addi- 
tional information are contained in the Graduate Bulletin copies of which are available in the Office 
of Admissions and the Graduate Office. 

Master's degrees in other areas are under consideration and will be announced when approved. 

STANDARDS FOR GRADUATE STUDY 

Graduate study deals with more complex ideas and demands more sophisticated techniques, search- 
ing analysis, and creative thinking than undergraduate study. The research required is extensive in 
both primary and secondary sources and the quality of writing expected is high. The student is 
advised to consider these factors when deciding upon the amount of coursework to be undertaken 
during any one semester. 

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MASTER'S DEGREE 

General requirements for the master's degree include a study plan consisting of a minimum of 30 
semester units of approved upper division and graduate (500-level) coursework taken after t e 
baccalaureate and completed with a 3.0 (B) minimum grade-point average. The coursework should 
normally be completed within five years (see "Time Limit for Completion"). For specific require- 
ments of particular programs, please see the descriptions elsewhere in this catalog. 

In the degree program: 

1. Not less than 21 semester units shall be completed in residence. 

2. Not less than one-half of the units required for the degree shall be in graduate (500-level) 

courses. . 

3. Not more than six semester units shall be allowed for a thesis if a thesis is required. 

Some type of final evaluation, near the end of the student's work toward the master s degree, is 
required. It may be a thesis, a project, a comprehensive examination, or any combination of these. 
Each student's program for a master's degree (including eligibility, classified standing, candidacy, 
and award of the degree) must be approved by the graduate program adviser, the graduate commit- 
tee, and the dean of graduate studies. 

graduate regulations 

The following are in addition to other policies and procedures applying to both undergraduates and 
graduates described elsewhere in this catalog and in the appropriate Class Schedule. Requirements 
of individual programs are shown in the appropriate sections of this catalog. Also, individual academ- 
ic areas may have established particular rules governing programs offered. 

Students are advised to consult the Graduate Bulletin for detailed instructions concerning steps in 
the master's degree program. It is the student's responsibility to initiate the requests for classified 
standing, advancement to candidacy, and for a graduation check at the appropriate times. e 
deadline for requesting the graduation check appears in the official calendar for each semester. 
Since all policies and procedures are subject to change, by appropriate authority students should 
consult class shedules and other official announcements for possible revision of policies and proce- 
dures stated herein. 

Post-Baccalaureate and Graduate Application Procedures 

All applicants for any type of post-baccalaureate or graduate standing (e.g., master s degree appli- 
cants, those seeking credentials, and those interested in taking courses for professional growth etc.) 
must file a complete application within the appropriate filing period. Second baccalaureate degree 
aspirants should apply as undergraduate degree applicants. A complete application for post-bacca- 
laureate or graduate standing includes all of the materials required for undergraduate applicants plus 
the supplementary graduate admissions application. Applicants who completed undergraduate de- 
gree requirements and graduated the preceding term are also required to complete and submit an 
application and the $20 nonrefundable application fee. Since applicants for post-baccalaureate and 
3—88930 


66 Master's Degrees 

graduate programs may be limited to the choice of a single campus on each application, redirection 
to alternative campuses or later changes of campus choice will be minimal. In the event that an 
applicant wishes to be assured of initial consideration by more than one campus, it will be necessary 
to submit a separate application (including fee) to each. Applications may be obtained from t e 
graduate studies office of any California State University or College campus in addition to the sources 
noted for undergraduate applicants. 

Applicants should consult the section of this catalog, "Admission to the University," for information 
concerning "Admission Categories Systemwide Impacted Programs," "Application Filing Periods, 
"Space Reservations" and "Hardship Petitions." 


Admission of Post-Baccalaureate and Graduate Students 

Post-Baccalaureate Standing: Unclassified , 

For admission to unclassified post-baccalaureate standing, an applicant must: (a) hold an acceptable 
baccalaureate degree from an institution accredited by a regional accrediting association (e.g., 
Western Association of Schools and Colleges for California) or have completed equivalent academic 
preparation as determined by an appropriate campus authority; (b) have attained a grade-point 
average of at least 2.5 (on a scale in which A equals 4) in the last 60 semester (90 quarter) units 
attempted; and, (c) have been in good standing at the last college attended. 

An applicant who does not qualify for admission under the provisions of (a) or (b), or both, as in 
the preceding, may be admitted by special action if on the basis of acceptable evidence it is 
determined by appropriate campus authority that the applicant possesses sufficient academic, pro- 
fessional and other potential pertinent to the educational objectives to merit such action. Admission 
to a California State University or College with post-baccalaureate unclassified standing does not 
constitute admission to graduate degree curricula. 

Graduate Standing: Conditionally Classified 

An applicant who is eligible for admission to a California State University or College under unclassi- 
fied post-baccalaureate standards as above, but who has deficiencies in prerequisite preparation 
which in the opinion of the appropriate campus authority can be met by specified additional 
preparation, including qualifying examinations, may be admitted to an authorized graduate degree 
curriculum with conditionally classified graduate standing. There may be additional requirements for 
admission with conditionally classified standing in particular programs. Consult the program descrip- 
tions. 


Graduate Standing: Classified , ., . . _ 

A student who is eligible for admission to a California State University or College in unclassified or 
conditionally classified standing may be admitted to an authorized graduate degree curriculum of 
the campus as classified if the graduate student satisfactorily meets the professional, personal, 
scholastic or other standards for admission to the graduate degree curriculum, including qualifying 
examinations, as the appropriate campus authority may prescribe. Consult the program descriptions. 
Only those applicants who show promise of success and fitness will be admitted to graduate degree 
curricula, and only those who continue to demonstrate a satisfactory level of scholastic competence 
and fitness shall be eligible to proceed in such curricula. 


Advancement to Candidacy 

A student who has been classified (as above) may, upon application and with subsequent approvals, 
be advanced to candidacy, following the satisfactory completion of a minimum of 12 units of 
coursework on the approved study plan. A minimum grade-point average of 3.0 (B) in all course- 
work on the study plan is required; other scholastic, professional and personal standards, the passing 
of examinations, and other qualifications, may be prescribed. Only those who continue to demon- 
strate a satisfactory level of scholastic competence and fitness shall be eligible to continue in the 
curriculum. 


Admission From Nonaccredited Schools 

An applicant who is a graduate of a nonaccredited school must apply for admission as an under- 
graduate to complete requirements for a bachelor's degree from this institution. However, once 
admitted, a student in this category who gives evidence of unusual promise and superior background 
may petition the academic area concerned for conditionally classified graduate standing. If the 


Master's Degrees 67 


petition is granted, the student may then proceed in the graduate program. 

Residence Requirement 

A student is considered to be in residence when registered during regular semesters at Cal State 
Fullerton. Of the minimum of 30 semester units of approved coursework required for the master's 
degree, not less than 21 shall be completed in residence at this institution. Approved units earned 
in summer sessions may be substituted for regular semester unit requirements on a unit for unit basis. 
Extension credit and credit by examination may not be used to fulfill the minimum residence 
requirement and are not normally acceptable as part of the six units of approved transfer work 
permitted. See also "Continuous Enrollment," below. 

For a modification of this requirement, see the concentration in elementary curriculum and instruc- 
tion under the Master of Science in Education. In addition, all courses taken in the Master of Public 
Administration external degree program, conducted at the Santa Ana Civic Center, are considered 
residence courses for those admitted to that program. 

Election of Curriculum Requirements 

A student remaining in continuous attendance in regular semesters and continuing in the same 
curriculum may elect to meet the degree requirements in effect either when entering the curriculum 
or at the time of completion of degree requirements, except that substitutions for discontinued 
courses may be authorized or required by the proper authorities. 

Continuous Enrollment 

A graduate student with a graduate degree objective should maintain continuous enrollment during 
regular semesters (summer sessions and extension excluded) until award of the degree. 

A graduate student who fails to register each semester has discontinued enrollment in this institution 
and in the graduate degree program. If the student wishes to resume studies, it will be necessary 
to reapply for admission to Cal State Fullerton and to the degree program. This policy is designed 
to eliminate the need for readmission to the university, provide opportunity for continuous use of 
facilities, including the Library, and assure the development of an integrated program, adequately 
supervised, and effectively terminated within the time limitations allowed by regulations. 

Students who may have completed all coursework, but who may not have satisfactorily completed 
a comprehensive examination or other requirement, are expected to maintain continuous enroll- 
ment. 

Students admitted to the external degree program in public administration are not subject to this 
requirement. 

If a graduate student pursuing an advanced degree finds it impossible to attend during a certain 
semester, permission may be requested from the academic area sponsoring the graduate degree 
sought to register in Graduate Studies 700, a credit/ no credit course with no units of credit, which 
does not require class attendance. Registration in Graduate Studies 700 will normally be restricted 
to graduate students who have been classified or who are in a prescribed prerequisite program for 
a specific graduate degree (conditionally classified). 

For a student whose only objective is a credential, a similar course, Credential Studies 701, is 
available. Consult the School of Education for further details. 

Applicability of Courses Taken During Summer Sessions 

Cal State Fullerton normally conducts a 12-week summer session. Appropriate courses taken during 
the summer session may be applied to a graduate degree program, providing the courses are 
approved in advance by the appropriate authorities. Since the funding of graduate work during the 
summer months does not include the necessary advisement and supervision, appropriate advisers 
ar »d committees may not be available. 

A normal full-time program of study in the summer session is up to 1 y 3 units of coursework per week 
°f instruction. 

It should be noted that enrollment in a summer session does not constitute admission to the 
university (matriculation). Any student desiring a master's degree must be admitted to a regular 
semester (fall or spring) and is expected to be enrolled continuously until award of the degree (see 
Continuous Enrollment"). 


68 Master's Degrees 


Grade-Point A verage Standards 

A minimum grade-point average of 2.5 in the last 60 semester units attempted is required for 
admission of all students for enrollment beyond the baccalaureate level, except that, under certain 
conditions, an applicant who does not meet this requirement may be admitted by special action. 
See "Post-Baccalaureate Standing: Unclassified," under "Admission of Post-Baccalaureate and 
Graduate Students." 

Minimal grade-point average requirements for admission to graduate degree programs with condi- 
tionally classified graduate standing are shown in the descriptions of graduate programs elsewhere 
in this catalog. For further information, consult the appropriate graduate adviser, the Office of 
Admissions or the Graduate Office. 

The grade-point average required for prerequisites prior to the granting of classified graduate stand- 
ing varies, according to the particular program. Consult descriptions of programs in this catalog and 
in the Graduate Bulletin. However, a student is expected to have earned a 3.0 grade-point average 
in all post-baccalaureate coursework taken at this university plus such transfer courses as are applied 
to the study plan. No student may be granted classified standing with less than a "B" average for 
courses on the study plan. 

Students in conditionally classified and classified graduate standing are subject to academic proba- 
tion and, subsequently, disqualification if they do not maintain a cumulative grade-point average of 
at least 3.0 in all units attempted subsequent to admission to the program. Progress points are not 
computed for students in graduate standing. 

Advancement to candidacy requires the completion of a minimum of 1 2 units on the study plan with 
a minimum grade-point average of 3.0, and whatever additional requirements there may be in a 
particular program. 

The 30 semester units of approved study plan coursework required for the degree must be completed 
with a 3.0 (B) minimum grade-point average. If a student approaches the completion of the degree 
requirements with less than a 3.0 average, a request may be made to change the study plan to add 
no more than six units of coursework in order to achieve at least a 3.0 average (see Changes in 
Study Plan," as follows). If a student's average at any time falls below such a level that it cannot 
be raised to a 3.0 within the prescribed limits of coursework, the student has in effect withdrawn 
from the master's program. 

Tests 

An applicant for admission with graduate standing in conditionally classified or classified graduate 
standing and declaring the objective of a Master of Business Administration is required to submit 
the test scores from the Graduate Management Admissions Test (Educational Testing Service). 
Similarly, an applicant for admission to the Master of Arts in Biology must submit test scores from 
the GRE Aptitude test and the Advanced test in biology and an applicant for the Master of Arts in 
Communications must submit test scores from the GRE Aptitude test. 

Other applicants may be admitted in contitionally classified graduate standing without test scores. 
However, test scores are required for admission to classified standing in many of the master s degree 
programs. See program descriptions in this catalog for the appropriate requirements and types of 
tests required. 

The Graduate Record Examinations are nationally administered and are given only a few times a 
year on specified dates. A current list of these dates is available at the Office of Counseling and 
Testing, and the Graduate Office. The student must make written application for the tests on a form 
available at the above offices which must be submitted to the particular testing service office by the 
applicable deadline. Since test results are measured against those of students who normally take the 
tests in their senior year and since they are required before the student can become a classified 
student, the taking of the tests should not be deferred. 

Limitation on Preclassification Coursework 

No more than nine units of postgraduate work taken at Cal State Fullerton prior to classified standing 
may be applied to a student's master's degree study plan. Any acceptable transfer work is excluded 
from the nine units permitted. Students who receive postgraduate credit for courses taken during 
their final semester as a senior may accumulate as many as 12 units. 


Master's Degrees 69 


Inapplicable Courses and Grades 

Courses numbered 100 to 299 and in the 700 series may not be included in a master's degree study 
plan. Courses numbered 300 to 399 do not give graduate credit unless included on an approved 
graduate study plan. 

Courses taken to meet baccalaureate degree requirements, or postgraduate coursework taken to 
satisfy quantitative or qualitative deficiencies, may not be used on a master's degree study plan. 
Credit by examination and correspondence credit are not acceptable. 

Workshop, extension, and institute coursework offered either at this institution or by other colleges 
or universities is not normally acceptable as part of a master's degree study plan. A student who 
desires to utilize such coursework should obtain approval from the graduate adviser and committee, 
and from the dean of graduate studies. When such coursework has been taken elsewhere, the 
student should provide evidence that the college or university concerned would consider such 
coursework acceptable toward a comparable graduate degree. Any such courses offered by other 
institutions, but which are not acceptable for their own graduate degrees, may not be accepted by 
this university for a graduate degree. 

Graduate students must use the traditional letter grading. Option 1, for courses on the master s 
degree study plan (see the section of this catalog on "Grading Policies"). Any course taken at this 
university with a grade of CR, P, S or similar cannot be accepted on a master's degree study plan. 
A course taken at another college or university with a grade of CR, P, S or similar cannot be accepted 
on a master's degree study plan unless such a course with such a grade is acceptable at that college 
or university for a graduate degree. 

Also see the section following on "Time Limit for Completion." 

Declassification 

Graduate students in classified standing may be declassified upon the recommendation of the 
appropriate academic unit, with a change to post-baccalaureate standing (unclassified), when one 
or more of the following conditions exist: 

1 . The student's request for declassification has been recommended for approval by the graduate 


committee. 


2. The student fails to maintain the grade-point average required in the master s degree program. 

3. The student has failed to demonstrate a satisfactory level of scholastic competence and fitness. 

4. The student fails to complete the degree within the time limit. 

Time Limit for Completion 

All coursework on the master's degree study plan should normally be completed within five years. 
The university, at its option, may further extend the time if warranted by individual circumstances 
and if the outdated work is validated by comprehensive examination, in the relevant additional 
course or subject field work or such other demonstration of competence as may be prescribed. 
Requests to take such comprehensive examinations, or accomplish updating by alternative means, 
should be made to appropriate graduate studies committees through the graduate program adviser. 
Students may obtain a form for this purpose, "Petition for Validating Outdated Coursework, in the 
university graduate office. 

When an examination is administered or the alternative completed, a report of successful completion 
will be made to the dean of graduate studies. The grade received on the original course will be used 
on the master's degree study plan, rather than the CR grade used for challenge examinations. If an 
additional course is prescribed, the units and grades for both courses will be applied to the study 
plan. 

The following shows the dates of expiration of courses according to the five-year limitation. 


Courses taken in 


Will expire in 


1971 

1972 

1973 

1974 

1975 

1976 

1977 


1976 

1977 

1978 

1979 

1980 

1981 

1982 


70 Master's Degrees 

The five-year period is computed as the time between the actual date of completion of the earliest 
course and the month arid year the degree is granted. 

Changes in Study Plan 

The student must complete the courses shown on the approved study plan on file in the Graduate 
Office and in the particular academic unit with at least a 3.0 (B) grade-point average. If a student 
wishes to make a change in the study plan, a request may be made on the appropriate form (copies 
available in the Graduate Office, and graduate program offices) in the academic unit offering the 
master's degree prior to registration for the coursework to be substituted or added. The recommen- 
dation for a change must be signed by the adviser. No course for which a grade has been assigned 
may be removed from a study plan. See also "Grade-Point Average Standards and Time Limit 
for Completion." 

Minimum Full-Time Course Unit Load 

The minimum full-time unit load for a graduate student is either 12 units of coursework a semester 
or nine units of which six are in 500-level courses. Students who are enrolled in thesis, project or 
similar activities, and who feel the unit count does not adequately reflect the intensity of academic 
activities, may request a review. 

Maximum Course Unit Load 

Twelve units is considered to be a maximum course load for graduate students, but, on the approval 
of an adviser, in exceptional cases, a student may take more. 

Theses and Projects 

According to the definition approved by the university, a thesis is a systematic study of a significant 
problem. The problem, its major assumptions, its significance, the methods and sources for gathering 
data, the analysis of data, and the conclusions and recommendations, should be clearly stated. A 
project is defined as either ( 1 ) the systematic development of a plan for, or the critical evaluation 
of a significant undertaking, or (2) a creative work such as a novel, a musical composition or a group 
of paintings. Quality of work accomplished is a major consideration in judging the acceptability of 
any thesis or project. The finished product must evidence originality, appropriate organization, 
clarity of purpose, critical analysis, and acuracy and completeness of documentation where needed^ 
Mere description, cataloging, compilation or other superficial procedures are not adequate. Critical 
thinking and independent thinking should characterize every thesis and every project. 

Of the minimum of 30 semester units of approved coursework required for the master's degree, no 
more than six are allowed for a thesis. 

When a thesis is required the Library must be provided with the approved original copy, or a fully 
acceptable duplicated copy, in the approved binding, and a microfilm of it. An abstract, of not more 
than 1 50 words, must accompany the thesis, and will be published in the journal, Master s Abstracts. 
Arrangements for the binding, microfilming and publication of the abstract are made through the 
Titan Bookstore and include the execution of a publication agreement. The current fee (subject to 
change) for microfilming, publication of the abstract, and the archival copy is $26 (plus tax), plus 
$1 for postage. The fee (subject to change) for binding is $8.50 (plus tax). 

When a project is required, it will be filed with the academic unit offering the degree program. Some 
record of the project, or the project itself, is preserved in the academic unit and, when appropriate, 
in the Library. When the appropriate authority recommends, a project or its written record may be 
treated as a thesis. 

Title to theses (and projects, when treated as theses, as above) passes to the university upon their 
acceptance by the evaluating faculty. 

The thesis and, where appropriate, the project, must conform in matters of style and format to the 
rules in the section on "Theses and Projects" in the Graduate Bulletin. Since adherence to these rules 
must be checked and approved, and valuable assistance can be given with problems associated with 
illustrations, etc., students are advised to consult the Library adviser (in the reference area) well in 
advance of the final typing of the thesis. In addition, schools, divisions, departments, and programs 
have adopted particular style manuals which are to be followed in matters of documentation and 
bibliography (see the chart in the Graduate Bulletin ox consult the Graduate Office, or appropriate 


Master's Degrees 71 


academic area). Some graduate programs use style manuals or guides designed for journal articles. 
Although these are helpful for abbreviations, tables, figures and footnoting, as well as other purposes, 
students should be aware of the difference between a thesis and an article and make appropriate 
adaptations, approved by the graduate program adviser. Theses from the Library shelves should not 
be used as examples of correct format. 

It is the student's responsibility to become acquainted with the appropriate rules and regulations and 
to make all necessary arrangements for the typing of the thesis, including instruction of the typist, 
if other than the student. An experienced typist is strongly advised, although the university does not 
endorse or recommend typists. Adequate time should be allowed for reading and criticism by the 
adviser, the committee members, and the library clerk, for revisions, as needed, and for completion 
of the final edition of the thesis, including approvals. No changes or additions will be allowed after 
the final signatures have been obtained. 

The deadline for submission of the completed thesis to the adviser and committee is six weeks in 
advance of the last day of classes of the semester in which the student hopes to be awarded the 
degree, unless other arrangements are made with the school or department. The deadline for 
submission to the Library adviser is the last day of classes. The deadline for depositing the 
approved copy of the thesis in the Titan Bookstore and making the arrangements for binding, 
microfilming and publication of the abstract, is the last day of final examinations for the 
semester or session in which the degree is to be awarded. If a student s program requires a thesis, 
or if the project has been determined to be regarded as a thesis, the master's degree cannot be 
awarded unless the notification that the student has completed this final step is received by the dean 
of graduate studies. 

Graduation Requirements Check 

It is the student's responsibility to file an application for a graduation check for award of the master's 
degree during registration for the final semester. The last date to file this application is listed in the 
academic calendar of the Class Schedule for each regular semester. Candidates for August gradua- 
tion must file their requests during registration for the spring semester. 

A graduation and diploma fee must be paid when the request for graduation check is filed. Applica- 
tion forms are available at the Admissions and Records information desk (Lobby of Langsdorf Hall) 
and in the Registration Center. 

Graduate Assistantships, Fellowships and Financial Aids 

A limited number of appointments as graduate assistants are available to outstanding graduate 
students who are in graduate standing in graduate degree programs. These may pay up to $1,690 
per semester. If interested, consult the dean or chair of the appropriate academic area. Teaching 
fellowships are not currently available. 

Each year the State of California may award a certain number of graduate fellowships (payment of 
fees only) to qualified students who are residents of California. Applications may be obtained from 
the Financial Aid Office or the Graduate Office. 

The Graduate Office maintains a file of scholarship and fellowship opportunities offered by other 
educational institutions and foundations. 

For information concerning other financial aids and part-time placement services, see the appropri- 
ate sections of this catalog. 


International Study 

Cal State Fullerton participates in The California State University and Colleges' program of study 
abroad. Under this program, limited studies taken at designated foreign universities, when arranged 
in advance, may be applied toward the requirements of a graduate degree awarded by Cal State 
Eullerton. It is important that plans be completed several months before starting such a program. For 
details see elsewhere in this catalog and consult the director of international education and ex- 
change. 

Second Master's Degree 

A graduate student desiring to work for a second master's degree at Cal State Fullerton must request 
Permission to apply for admission to a second master's degree program. A letter should be sent to 


72 Master's Degrees 

the dean of graduate studies requesting approval, giving supportive reasons, and indicating the 
university awarding the first master's degree, the major and year of award. If the request is granted, 
the student must as a minimum satisfy all prerequisites and all requirements of the new degree 
program. Units used for the first degree may not be applied to the second. Approval of classified 
standing for the second degree will be given only after the first degree has been awarded. Please 
consult the Graduate Office for further details. 

Postgraduate Credit 

Petitions for postgraduate credit for coursework taken in excess of baccalaureate degree require- 
ments at Cal State Fullerton are obtained and filed in the Office of Admissions and Records. If 
approved, the appropriate notations will be entered upon the permanent record of the student. 

If a graduate student has not, while an undergraduate, received permission to consider coursework 
which was not required for the baccalaureate as postgraduate, a petition may be filed for such credit 
to be granted retroactively. 

If, following admission in graduate standing with a master's degree objective, approval is given by 
the appropriate graduate program adviser, the committee and the dean of graduate studies, such 
coursework may be included as a part of the student' study plan, within existing regulations concern- 
ing applicable coursework and requirements for the degree. See also "Inapplicable Courses and 
Grades." 

Enrollment in 500-Level Courses by Seniors 

Under certain circumstances, a senior may take a 500-level course. If the student is not within nine 
units of graduation, postgraduate credit is not given for such courses. The senior must have a 
minimum grade-point average of 3.25 overall and of 3.5 in the field or fields of the intended graduate 
program, and the specific approval of the dean or chair of the academic area in which the course 
is offered and the chair or dean of the student's major area. 

If the senior is within nine units of completion of graduation requirements and has been given 
approval, as above, the student may petition for postgraduate credit for these units as provided under 
"Postgraduate Credit." 



74 


ACADEMIC ADVISEMENT 


The Office of Academic Advisement provides assistance to students in the choice of an undergradu- 
ate major and in the selection of elective and general eduction courses. It also coordinates initial 
interview sessions for special majors and is the administrative center for undeclared majors, i.e., 
those students who have not yet decided upon a major. 

The Office of Academic Advisement is located in Room 112 of the Humanities Social Sciences 
Building. No appointment is necessary to engage the assistance of an adviser about various aspects 
of the academic life at the university. For more specific information about the office, the student 
should consult the Class Schedule. 

Undeclared Majors 

Lower division students who are uncertain about their primary educational or vocational goals may, 
and probably should, enroll as undeclared majors. Then, and during their freshman and sophomore 
years, such students should explore the possibilities open to them that will meet their interests and 
potentialities. 

Their "home department" is the Office of Academic Advisement and the director of academic 
advisement performs the functions of a chair of a department. Consequently all individual problems 
encountered by the undeclared major student and requests which normally require the assistance 
of a chair, are handled by the director of academic advisement. 

Especially for choosing general education courses and choosing an undergraduate major, undeclared 
major students should seek the advice of the director or of an adviser in the Office of Academic 
Advisement. 

Choosing an Undergraduate Major 

Every student is expected to choose a major or field of concentration by the beginning of the junior 
year. The majors currently offered at this university are described in the next sections of this catalog. 
Most major requirements allow students the freedom to take a number of courses in fields other than 
in their majors or closely related fields. 

To help students in their searching and selecting, the university has available a number of useful 
resources: the Office of Academic Advisement; advisement session and orientation programs that 
are given every year; a variety of counseling and testing services provided by the Counseling and 
Testing Centers; and the different department and school offices for information and advice on 
particular fields, departmental brochures and manuals describing their programs of study and later 
work opportunities. There also is a collection of college and university catalogs available in the 
Library. Additionally, there is a growing number of student organizations organized in terms of 
disciplinary and professional interests. The Career Planning and Placement Center also has much 
useful information on vocations and specific work opportunities. 

Most students have general ideas about some subjects in which they might like to major, and almost 
all students are aware of the fields in which they do not wish to major. The task of selecting a major 
(and often a minor or other complementary specialization) then becomes one of crystallizing these 
earlier ideas on the basis of experiences in specific courses, discussions with other students and 
faculty, etc. Before commitment to a specific major, students should be sure that they have not 
rejected a field of study because of some wrong preconceptions or inaccurate information. Students 
also should not overlook interests and potentialities that they previously may not have discovered. 
The option of taking a limited number of courses on a Credit/ No Credit basis often will be helpful 
in these pursuits. "Minicourses" also provide an excellent opportunity to explore the multiple areas 
of knowledge. 

Students, however, must be very careful to plan freshman or sophomore programs which will permit 
their entering or taking advanced courses in fields they think they may want to be their majors. Such 
students should check such major requirements as mathematics, chemistry and foreign language 
which must be taken before the junior year or perhaps even begun during the freshman year. 
Students anticipating graduate or professional study in a certain field should exercise special care 
in planning their undergraduate programs, and they should seek faculty counseling in the fields 
concerned. Such choices do not have to be made during the first two years, and may or may not 
be made during the second two. However, careful and advance examination of the possibilities of 


Academic Advisement 75 


graduate or professional study often will be helpful to students who have fairly clear ideas of the 
educational and vocational objectives they would like to seek. 

Students also should be careful about concentrating so heavily in a particular field that they cannot 
change majors to a different field should they wish to do so. Some students come to the campus 
with no clear idea of the field in which they would like to major. Such students, and others, whose 
goals and objectives have not yet firmly crystallized, will have opportunities to take courses in 
various fields and make up their minds during their lower division work. They should, however, take 
full advantage of the opportunities that exist on and outside the campus to learn more about available 
fields of study and occupational fields. 

Planning a Major Program 

When students have selected a major field, they should study carefully all the requirements which 
are specified in this catalog under their chosen degree program. Then they should make a tentative 
semester by semester plan for completing the requirements, with careful regard for courses which 
are prerequisite to others. They should discuss this plan with their major advisers who will be able 
to help them with any problems. 

In addition to courses in the major department, related courses in other fields and supporting courses 
in basic skills also may be required. These, too, should be included in the tentative semester by 
semester plan. These auxiliary requirements are described in the degree program for each major. 
Some departments require placement tests prior to admission to classes. The time and place for such 
tests is given in the class schedule, often before registration. Students should purchase a copy of the 
Class Schedule at the Titan Bookstore well before registration for classes begins. 

Choosing General Education Courses and Electives 

In keeping with the liberal arts tradition, the university requires its graduates to have sampled a 
variety of disciplines as part of their general education. The broad categories of general education 
courses are presented in the catalog section on "Graduation Requirements for the Bachelor s 
Degree." Through these requirements students are introduced to the worlds of values, ideas, and 
beauty, to mankind and his problems, to the natural world in which man lives, and to skills essentia 
for a meaningful life and scholarship. 

To many students the selection of general education courses and electives poses many difficult 
choices. With well over 3,000 classes to choose from and over 50 fields of specialization that can 
be sampled, some demanding decisions must be made. Various aids or resources are available^ 
Among these are: this catalog and the Class Schedule with their descriptions of regular and new and 
experimental courses; informal consultations with other students and faculty members; and advisers 
in the Office of Academic Advisement. 

The reasons for selecting particular general education courses and electives include: 

• A meaningful and adequate preparation for a selected field of study for those students w o ave 
decided on their major. 

• The need to explore potential major or vocational interests. 

• Curiosity about or enthusiasm for a particular subject. . , . .,. 

• The desire to clarify thinking and values on problems and issues of personal and social signm- 

• The urge to broaden and synthesize work in a specialization with perspectives and skills from 

other fields. , , . ... 

• The desire to deepen understanding and improve skills for such central human ac ivi les as 
personal relationships, family and community life, citizenship activities and leisure pursuits 

• The interest in experiencing the various approaches and teaching methods of di eren , a en e 
teachers. 

• Sharing learning experiences with friends. 

Communication Skills 

Skills in written, oral and gestural communication are very important tools and marks of well 
educated men and women. Great competencies in both articulation and advocacy are arts well- 
worth attaining for living effective, full and civic lives and for achieving excellence in vocational 
careers. 

A variety of experiences at the university provides opportunities to practice and develop communi- 


76 Preprofessional Programs 

cations skills. The acts of written and oral expression also serve to consolidate, synthesize, and 
develop thinking and personality. 

Students will be required to demonstrate, in all classes where written expression is appropriate, their 
ability to write clearly and correctly about the materials of the course. Ability of a student to 
demonstrate writing proficiency shall be used as part of the final grade determination in any course. 

Change of Major, Degree or Credential Objective 

A student who wishes to change his/her major, degree, or credential objective must obtain the 
required form in the Office of Admissions and Records or the Office of Academic Advisement. Such 
a change is not official until the form has been signed and filed in the Registrar's Office. A student 
should be aware that he/she will be responsible for the requirements for the new choice of major, 
degree, or credential that are in the catalog in effect at the time he/she files a change. 

DEPARTMENTAL ACADEMIC ADVISEMENT 

According to the established practice at the university, each department follows the advisement 
system which it finds the most appropriate for its majors. 

Each undergraduate student is assigned or may request an adviser who will help the student plan 
an academic program. The adviser is a resource person who can provide valuable information and 
suggestions and who can assist the student to find the most desirable ways to meet the requirements 
for graduation and for his major or credential. Although the adviser is consulted, the final choice 
of courses and the responsibility for the program lies with the student himself. 

Academic program advisers are able to offer better advice when consulted if students come pre- 
pared with lists of courses they already have taken and their own copies of transcripts from colleges 
previously attended (if students are new to Cal State Fullerton). 

Those seeking a credential will also be assigned a professional adviser by the School of Education. 
Students who have not yet decided upon a major (undeclared majors) or who are not seeking a 
degree will be advised in the Office of Academic Advisement. 

Undergraduate advisement coordinators are appointed by each department (for the School of 
Business Administration and Economics see below) in order to facilitate communication between 
students and faculty. They coordinate advisement in each department and act as resource persons 
for the students and the faculty of the department in all matters of advisement. Their names, room 
and telephone numbers and office hours are listed in the Academic Advisement Resource Handbook 
which is available for consultation in every department office of the university. 

The School of Business Administration and Economics provides advisement concerning educational 
goals, curriculum, major requirements, administrative procedures in the advisement center of the 
school. 

Graduate students will be assigned a major adviser in their fields of specialization, except in educa- 
tion where all will have a professional adviser from the School of Education. Those students seeking 
a credential for teaching in secondary schools will be assigned both a professional and a major 
adviser. 

PREPROFESSIONAL PROGRAMS 

The academic programs of the university provide appropriate preparation for graduate work in a 
variety of fields. Students who have made tentative decisions about institutions in which they may 
wish to pursue graduate work should consult the catalogs of those graduate schools as they plan 
their undergraduate programs. Students planning to undertake graduate work should supplement 
their undergraduate programs by anticipating language requirements at major graduate schools and 
by intensive work in areas of special relevance to their intended graduate work. Professional schools 
in many universities either require or recommend that applicants complete four-year programs for 
admission. Although the professional schools do not always require a bachelor's degree, they 
generally encourage basic preparation and a broad general education leading to that degree before 
beginning specialization. 

The university offers a number of professional programs through the master's degree. These include 
programs in the fine arts, business administration, communications, education, engineering, health 
education and physical education and recreation, library science, public administration, and speech 
pathology-audiology. Students interested in preparing for professional careers in these areas, either 
here or in other educational institutions, are encouraged to seek assistance and guidance from our 
faculty members in these fields. 


Health Professions 77 


Prelegal Preparation 

Students planning to enter law school may elect any one of several majors. In general, the better 
law schools require that an applicant hold a baccalaureate degree. Although there is no uniform 
prelegal course of study or specific university major required, it is recommended that prospective 
law students prepare themselves in such fields as English, American history, economics, political 
science (particularly the history and development of English and American political institutions) and 
such undergraduate courses as judicial process, administrative law, constitutional law and interna- 
tional law, philosophy (particularly ethics and logic), business administration, anthropology, psy- 
chology and sociology. 

The major chosen and many of the courses selected should demand a high level of performance 
in reading difficult material, understanding abstract and complex concepts, and speaking and writing 
clearly and persuasively. Prelegal students are advised to take the minimum program to meet the 
requirements of their chosen major and courses beyond the introductory survey level in other 
selected fields. A distribution of course sequences among the social sciences, the natural sciences 
and the humanities is desirable. Students with interest in becoming lawyers should contact the 
Prelaw Society. Some faculty members in the School of Business Administration and Economics and 
Departments of American Studies, History and Politicial Science, also can provide advice and 
assistance. ✓ 

HEALTH PROFESSIONS 

Health Professions Committee 

Student counseling with respect to preprofessional programs in medicine, dentistry and other health 
sciences as well as professional school admission problems are the concern of this committee. (See 
membership listing, page 421). All students wishing to prepare for careers in the Health Professions 
should register in the Office of the Vice President for Academic Affairs. 


Predental Preparation 

Dental schools are seeking applicants with broad preparation. Although admission is possible follow- 
ing 60 or 90 units of college work including basic science requirements, most successful applicants 
in California complete their baccalaureate degree prior to admission to dental school. Dental schools 
vary with respect to their requirements, thus the student is advised to consult the admission require- 
ments of the individual schools to which he anticipates making application. The basic program listed 
below under premedical preparation, although more extensive than required for many individual 
dental schools, would meet the requirements for all of the California dental schools and the majority 
of the others in the United States. The prospective dental student should take the Dental College 
Admission Test (DAT) one year prior to the date at which he plans to enter dental school. 
Application blanks for the test may be obtained from the Office of the Vice President for Academic 
Affairs. 


Premedical Preparation 

Medical schools are currently seeking applicants with as broad and liberal an educational experience 
as possible. They recommend that applicants pursue collegiate major programs which are of vita 
interest to the student. However, all medical schools require a basic minimal training in the natural 
sciences and English. The Health Professions Committee, upon review of the medical school admis- 
sion requirements, recommends the following coursework which satisfies this minimum training: 

one year of English 

five semesters of biology: lower division biology courses in general zoology and general botany, 

upper division biology courses in microbiology, embryology and genetics 

one year of general chemistry 

one year of organic chemistry with laboratory 

one year general biochemistry lectures 

one year of college physics with laboratory 

one year of calculus 


78 Health Professions 


Most medical school applicants complete a baccalaureate degree program prior to beginning their 
medical training. However, applications to medical school are processed normally at the termination 
of the sixth semester (junior year). The Medical College Admission Test (MCAT), required of all 
medical school applicants, is taken normally during the spring of the sixth semester (junior year). 
The prospective medical school applicant should therefore normally plan to complete the above 
natural science minimal requirements by the end of the junior year. Thus he should begin general 
chemistry in his freshman year in order to satisfy the prerequisite requirements for the advanced 
courses in chemistry. 

Since medical school admissions are limited, the best prepared applicants are likely to have an 
advantage. Many medical schools recommend certain courses in the natural sciences in addition 
to those listed above in the minimal requirements. 

The prospective applicant is advised to consult the catalogs of those medical schools to which he 
anticipates applying for additional recommended preparatory subjects. He is further advised to 
consult the chair or any member of the Health Professions Committee for assistance in planning his 
total collegiate program. Application forms for the MCAT can be obtained from the Office of the 
Vice President for Academic Affairs. 

Preoptometry v 

The study and practice of optometry requires a high degree of responsibility, devotion, intellectual 
curiosity and social commitment. The individual's education prior to optometry school should 
demonstrate and strengthen these qualities. 

Academic requirements for admission to colleges of optometry are based on standards provided by 
the California Optometry Law, the accrediting bodies and the judgment of the College Admissions 
Committee. 

At the college level, completion of a minimum of 60 semester units or 90 quarter units is required 
for admission; however, the accumulation of more units of attainment of any undergraduate degree 
is suggested. The ratio of applicants to available places is disproportionate; therefore, a student 
without a degree must demonstrate exceptionally high scholastic achievement, intellectual capacity 
and motivation in order to gain admission. 

The following courses must be completed prior to enrollment and are the minimum requirements 
for most colleges of optometry: 

Analytical geometry or calculus (3 semester units or 4 quarter units) 

General biology or zoology to include laboratory (8 semester units or 12 quarter units) 
Microbiology or bacteriology to include laboratory (no substitutions are allowed) (3 semester 
units or 4 quarter units) 

General physics to include laboratory (8 semester units or 12 quarter units) 

General chemistry to include laboratory (8 semester units or 12 quarter units) 

Psychology (Statistics will not meet this requirement) (6 semester units or 8 quarter units) 
English — composition or literature (6 semester units or 8 quarter units). 

Other Health Professions 

Preprofessional preparation for osteopathy, pharmacy, pharmacology, podiatry and veterinary 
medicine should be arranged in consultation with the chair of the Health Professions Committee. 
No specific bachelor's degree programs are available at Cal State Fullerton in professional areas such 
as dental technician, occupational therapy, physical therapy. Preparatory work for such programs 
is available. Students should register their specific interest preference in either the Office of the Vice 
President for Academic Affairs or the department offices in biological science or chemistry. 

Medical Technology 

A concentration in medical technology is available under the B.A. in Biological Science program. 
Students interested in pursuing this field of study should select appropriate elective courses in their 
study plan. A concentration in medical technology is also available under the M.A. in biology. For 
further details, consult the coordinator of medical technology in the Department of Biological 
Science or the chair of the Health Professions Committee. 


Health Professions 79 


Nursing 

A B.S. in Nursing is offered for those who are currently licensed registered nurses. For information 
concerning the program consult the chair of the nursing program. (See nursing program listing in 
this catalog.) 

Social Welfare 

Full preprofessional training usually consists of two years of graduate training leading to the degree 
of Master of Social Welfare. Students who plan to seek employment in social work or social welfare 
should prepare themselves in the fields of human services, psychology (particularly child and 
adolescent psychology), sociology, anthropology, political science, economics and research meth- 
ods in social science. 

Students who intend to enter a professional school following undergraduate training should learn 
about the specific prerequisites for admission to the graduate school of their choice. Ordinarily a 
major in one of the social sciences, and some additional work in at least several other social sciences, 
is recommended. Students with interests in pursuing careers in the fields of social welfare should 
contact the Department of Sociology for advice and assistance. 

Pretheological 

Students who might be interested in pursing careers in counseling, social work, the teaching of 
religion, and the ministry and associated fields should take some courses in religion, psychology, 
anthropology, sociology, philosophy, education, communications, history, English, speech com- 
munication and a foreign language. Students desiring assistance and counseling regarding advanced 
work or professional careers may seek help from the faculty in the Department of Religious Studies. 





•r ;: .n 






82 


UNIVERSITY CURRICULA 


DEGREE PROGRAMS 

California State University, Fullerton offers the following baccalaureate degree programs which are 
described on the pages listed: 


Page 

B.A. American Studies 213 

B.A. Anthropology 216 

B.A. Art 96 

B.A. Biological Science 339 

B.A. Business Administration (including 
concentration in management 

information systems) 133 

B.A. Chemistry 353 

B.S. Chemistry 351 

B.S. Child Development 162 

B.A. Communications 227 

B.A. Comparative Literature 235 

B.S. Computer Science 361 

B.A. Criminal justice 240 

B.A. Earth Science 365 

B.A. Economics 141 

B.S. Engineering 370 

B.A. English 243 

B.A. Ethnic Studies 208, 223 

B.A. French 249 

B.A. Geography 262 

B.A. German 249 

B.A. History 268 


Page 


B.S. Human Services 167 

B.A. Latin American Studies 280 

B.A. Liberal Studies 282 

B.A. Linguistics 287 

B.A. Mathematics 391 

B.A. Music 110 

B.M. Music 112 

B.S. Nursing 169 

B.A. Philosophy 293 

B.S. Physical Education 185 

B.A. Physics 399 

B.A. Political Science (including 

concentration in 

public administration) 298 

B.A. Psychology 307 

B.A. Religious Studies 314 

B.A. Russian and East European 

Area Studies 318 

B.A. Sociology 321 

B.A. Spanish 249 

B.A. Special Major 90 

B.A. Speech Communication 328 

B.A. Theatre Arts 123 


The following master's degree programs are offered: 


Page 

M.A. American Studies 214 

M.A. Anthropology 217 

M.A. Art 99 

M.A. Biology 342 

M.B.A. Business Administration (including 
concentration in international 

business) 139 

M.A. Chemistry 355 

M.A. Communications 229 

M.A. Comparative Literature 236 

M.S. Computer Science 363 

M.S. Counseling 164 

M.A. Economics 142 

M.S. Education (with emphases in 
elementary education, reading, school 
administration and special 

education) 171, 177, 180, 198 

M.S. Engineering 374 

M.A. English 244 

M.S. Environmental Studies 389 


Page 


M.A. French 250 

M.A. Geography 263 

M.A. German 250 

M.A. History 269 

M.S. Library Science 283 

M.A. Linguistics 287 

M.A. Mathematics 392 

M.A. Music 114 

M.S. Physical Education 186 

M.A. Political Science 299 

M.A. Psychology 308 

M.S. Psychology (concentration 

in clinical community) 309 

M.A. Social Sciences 320 

M.A. Sociology 322 

M.A. Spanish 250 

M.A. Special Major 91 

M.A. Speech Communication 330 

M.A. Theatre Arts 125 


The university is accredited by the National Council for Accreditation of Teacher Education for 
programs leading to credentials and master's degrees. 


Subject Finder 83 


SUBJECT FINDER 

The listing of degree programs does not include all of the fields or subject matter areas in which 
some courses currently are being offered at Cal State Fullerton. Additionally, different colleges and 
universities differ in the names they assign to degrees, curricular programs, and the academic units 
offering courses. The following "subject finder" lists some of the most commonly used terms for 
fields with information on where courses or programs on these subjects can be located at Fullerton 
and in this catalog. 


Subject 

Accounting 

African Studies (See Afro-Ethnic Studies, Anthropology, Geography, History, Politi- 
cal Science) 

Afro-Ethnic Studies 

American Indian Studies 

American Studies 

Anthropology 

Arabic 

Art 

Art Education 

Art History ; 

Asian Studies (See Anthropology, Comparative Literature, Geography, History, Po- 
litical Science) 

Astronomy 

Biological Science 

Business Administration 

Chemistry 

Chicano Studies 

Child Development 

Chinese 

Classics (See Comparative Literature, History and Latin) 

Communications. 

Comparative Literature 

Computer Science 

Counseling 

Criminal Justice 

Dance 

Drama (See Theatre) 

Drama Education (See Theatre Education) 

Earth Science 

Economics 

Engineering 

English 

English Education 

Environmental Education..! 

Environmental Studies 

Ethnic Studies (See Afro-Ethnic Studies and Chicano Studies) 

Finance 

Folklore (See Anthropology and Comparative Literature) 

Foreign Languages and Literatures 

Foreign Languages Education 

French 

Geography 

Geology (See Earth Science) 

German 

Graduate Studies 

Greek 

Health Education 

Hebrew 

History 

Human Services 


Page 

143 


208 

212 

213 

216 

252 

96 
106 

97 


338 

338 

146 

350 

223 

162 

252 

227 

235 

360 

163 

240 

106 


365 

146 

370 

242 

249 

389 

389 

149 

249 

251 

252 
262 

254 

87 

257 

184 

257 

268 

167 


84 Subject Finder 

International Relations (See Political Science, Economics, History) 

Italian 257 

Japanese 257 

journalism (See Communications) 

Journalism Education 235 

Latin 258 

Latin American Studies 280 

Law (See Political Science, Management) 

Library Science 283 

Liberal Studies 282 

Linguistics 286 

Management 1 52 

Marketing 1 54 

Mathematics 590 

Mathematics Education 397 

Meteorology 293 

Medical Biology Courses 350 

Mexican- American Studies (See Chicano Studies) 

Music 109 

Music Education 1 22 

Mythology (See Anthropology and Comparative Literature) 

Native American Studies (See American Indian Studies) 

Nature Interpretation 405 

Nursing 169 

Oceanography 398 

Philosophy 293 

Photography (See Art and Communications) 

Physical Education 1 88 

Physical Science 398 

Physics 398 

Political Science 298 

Portuguese 258 

Psychology 307 

Psychometry 1 63 

Public Administration (See Political Science) 

Public Relations (See Communications) 

Quantitative Methods 156 

Radio (See Theatre and Communications) 

Reading 171 

Recreation 192 

Religious Studies 314 

Russian 259 

Russian and East European Area Studies 318 

Sanskrit (See Linguistics) 

School Administration 177 

School Psychology 1 63 

Science Education 405 

Social Sciences 319 

Social Work (See Social Welfare) 

Sociology 321 

Spanish 260 

Special Education 180 

Special Major 90 

Speech (See Speech Communication) 

Speech Communication 328 

Speech Communication Education 336 

Sports (See Physical Education) 

Statistics (See Mathematics and Quantitative Methods) 

Student-to-Student Tutorial 87 


Genera! Course Numbering 85 


Swahili 

Teacher Education 

Technological Studies 

Television (See Theatre and Communications) 

Theatre 

Theatre Education 


262 

192 

91 

123 

130 


COURSE DESCRIPTIONS 

Course descriptions briefly describe the content or subject matter to be covered and provide 
additional information on units of credit, the level of instruction (general course numbering code), 
prerequisites and the type of course (lecture, laboratory, activity, seminar and individually super- 
vised work). Information on specific offerings of courses (times, rooms, instructors) will be found 
in the class schedule which is printed in advance of the fall and spring semesters. Information on 
additional (new, special or experimental) courses for each semester also can be found in these class 
schedules. 

Some of the courses listed in the catalog are not taught every year. Many are taught once only every 
year. Others are taught every semester, and often in many sections. Advance information regarding 
the plans for offering particular courses may be obtained from the offices of the departments teaching 
them. 

The forms and methods of teaching vary widely in specific classes, depending on the subject matter 
and purposes and the particular instructor and students. The more traditional methods of lecturing, 
discussion, laboratory work, and individually supervised research or projects increasingly are being 
supplemented by such learning resources as group and individual exercises, television, and films and 
records, videotaping, and the use of the computer. Modern specialized facilities and equipment are 
used in many courses in different fields. These include: laboratories for teaching the sciences; studios 
for teaching the fine arts; a small museum and archaeology /physical anthropology laboratory; a 
variety of facilities for teaching communications; a language laboratory for teaching foreign lan- 
guages and linguistics courses; a speech and hearing clinic; and the Tucker Wildlife Sanctuary. 
Cal State encourages experimentation and innovation in teaching and welcomes a diversity of 
approaches. Increasingly, and with growing help from students, efforts are being made on the 
campus to examine and evaluate and improve the learning experiences in some classrooms in more 
scholarly ways. Students also are being provided more opportunities to learn through teaching 
experiences in activities such as tutoring. 

SCHEDULES 

A new Class Schedule r published in advance of the fall and spring semesters. This general, university 
schedule contains not only detailed information on times, places, and instructors for specific courses, 
but also materials on registration, new courses that are not in the catalog, the times for final 
examinations, and many other useful items for course and program planning. The Class Schedule 
may be purchased at the Titan Bookstore. Special schedules, which may be obtained from the Office 
of Continuing Education, are provided for the summer sessions and the extension curriculum. 

general course numbering code 

100-299 Lower division courses of freshman and sophomore level, but open also to upper division 
students. 

300-399 Upper division courses of junior and senior level, which do / 70 /give graduate credit unless 
included on an approved graduate study plan (such as a credential or graduate degree 
program) for a specific graduate student. 

400-499 Upper division courses of junior and senior level which give graduate credit when taken 


86 Independent Study 

by a graduate student. (Note limitations in specific graduate programs.) 

500-599 Graduate courses organized primarily for graduating students.* 

700-799 Graduate professional courses in the postgraduate program, not applicable to graduate 
degrees. 

DEPARTMENTAL COURSE NUMBERING CODE 

Because of the differences in the organization and content of the various disciplines and professions, 
there is no uniform, reasonable way of numbering courses that would be equally useful for all fields 
of knowledge. Some of the departments explain the logic of their own course numbering system in 
this catalog. 

In general it may be assumed that increases in class (freshman, sophomore, junior, senior, or 
graduate) and certainly division level (lower, upper, graduate) correlate with more difficult and 
challenging academic work. Sometimes, however, disciplines organize their course numbering partly 
in terms of criteria other than degree of difficulty: e.g., anthropology numbers its area courses in t e 
300's and its theoretical or institutional courses in the 400's. It should be noted, too, that some 
students find introductory courses to be more demanding than advanced, specialized courses, in 
such courses, a more comprehensive approach and the first exposure to new ways of thinking may 
be harder for some individuals than covering a smaller, more familiar area, in much greater detail. 


SPECIAL COURSE NUMBERS 

For uniformity, certain types of courses have been listed by all departments and schools with the 
same numbers: 499 and 599 are used for undergraduate and graduate "independent study"; 196 or 
496 for "student-to-student tutorials"; 597 for a graduate "project"; and 598 for a graduate thesis. 
The course numbers for senior seminars are not so uniform but they tend to be numbered 485, 490, 
491 or 495. 

EXPLANATION OF COURSE NOTATIONS 

Certain notations are uniformly used in the course descriptions in this catalog. 

1 . The figure in parentheses following the course title indicates the number of semester units for the 
course. Courses offered for varying units are indicated as (1-3) or (3-6). 

2. A course listing such as Anthropology 416 (3) (Same as Interdisciplinary Center 403) indicates 
that the course is "cross-listed" by both departments, i.e. a student can choose to take the course 
and count it as either an anthropology, or an Interdisciplinary Center course; if the complete 
course description is found with the Interdisciplinary Center courses, it should be followed by 

"(Same as Anthropology 416)." . . , 

3. A notation such as (Formerly 433) following the course title and the number of units indicates 
the same course previously was numbered 433. 

PREREQUISITES 

Students are expected to meet stated prerequisites for all courses. However, in exceptional cases, 
and at the discretion of the division in which the course is taught, students may be allowed to meet 
prerequisites by examination. 

INDEPENDENT STUDY 

Under the independent study program, the upper division student can pursue topics or problems 
of special interest beyond the scope of a regular course under the supervision of a faculty advisor. 
The work is of a research or creative nature, and normally culminates in a paper, project, compre- 
hensive examination, or performance. Before registering, the student must get his topic approved 
by the instructor who will be supervising independent study. The catalog numbers of independent 
study in departments are 499 and 599. Independent study courses may be repeated. A student 
wishing to enroll in more than six units of independent study in any one semester must have the 
approval of his major adviser and of the chair of the department (s) in which the independent study 
is to be conducted. 


• Note exceptions on page 50. 


Student-to-Student Tutorials 87 


INTERNATIONAL STUDY COURSES 

Cal State Fullerton students under The California State University and Colleges International Study 
Programs register concurrently at Cal State Fullerton and at the host institution abroad, with credits 
assigned to the student which are equivalent to courses offered at Cal State Fullerton. Undergraduate 
students who discover appropriate study opportunities at the host Institution but no equivalent 
course at Cal State Fullerton may use Independent Study 499 and International Study 292 or 492. 
Graduate students may use Independent Graduate Research 599 and International Study 592. 

292 Projects in Study Abroad (Subject): (1-6 lower division units) 

Open to students enrolled in California State University and Colleges International Programs. Study 
undertaken in a university abroad under the auspices of The California State University and 
Colleges. 

492 Projects in Study Abroad (Subject): (1-3 upper division units) 

Open to students enrolled in California State University and Colleges International Programs. Study 
undertaken in a university abroad under the auspices of The California State University and 
Colleges. 

592 Projects in Study Abroad (Subject): (1-3 graduate units) 

Open to students enrolled in California State University and Colleges International Programs. Study 
undertaken in a university abroad under the auspices of The California State University and 
Colleges. 

LIBRARY COURSES 

201 Introduction to Library Resources (1) 

A practical introduction to library materials and methods enabling undergraduate students to locate 
information for course-related, as well as independent, study and research. 

300 Elements of Bibliographic Investigation (3) 

An investigation of the elements of bibliographic research which will enable students to become 
sophisticated library users. Will discuss such topics as: the organization of knowledge in librar- 
ies, a survey of important research materials in various fields found in American libraries; how 
to prepare bibliographies and assemble information for term papers; and style manuals. 

302 Library Research Methods for Specific Majors (1) 

An intensive study of library research methodology in special subject areas such as science and 
music. 

GRADUATE STUDIES 700 

A credit/no credit course with no (0) units of credit, which is designed to ensure continuous 
registration for those graduate students with an advanced degree objective who find that they are 
unable to enroll in regularly scheduled coursework. This course does not require class attendance. 
Permission to register in Graduate Studies 700 may be requested from the academic area sponsoring 
the graduate degree sought. 

Registration in Graduate Studies 700 normally will be restricted to graduate students who have been 
classified or who are in a prescribed prerequisite program (conditionally classified) for a specific 
graduate degree. 

STUDENT-TO-STUDENT TUTORIALS 

The university has begun a program of experimentation with and development of "student-to- 
student tutorials." One of the fastest and profoundest ways to learn is to teach. The "student-to- 
student tutorial" will provide a formal way to encourage students to learn through teaching. It will 
expand significantly the opportunities for students to have meaningful experiences as teachers. At 
the same time, it greatly will increase the amount of tutoring available and will extend tutoring to 
all of the kinds of students who need and want tutorial assistance. 

Students electing to be tutors not only will increase their mastery of particular subject matters but 
also will have practice in developing their communication, cooperation and interpersonal relation- 
ship skills. Most important adult roles and jobs also involve a teaching dimension and the tutorial 
experience will provide opportunities to develop awareness of teaching problems and competence 
' n teaching techniques. 

Each department will decide whether or not it wishes to offer this course. Departments choosing 


88 Cross-disciplinary University Programs 

to offer the student-to-student tutorial course will follow the rules listed in the following course 
description. 

The course numbers will be 196 or 496, and one to three units of credit can be given for each course. 
Prerequisites: A 3.0 or more grade-point average and/or consent of instructor and simultaneous 
enrollment in the course or previous enrollment in a similar course or its equivalent. The tutor and 
his tutee or tutees will work in mutually advantageous ways by allowing all involved to delve more 
carefully and thoroughly into the materials presented in this specific course. One to three students 
may be tutored by the tutor unless the instructor decides that special circumstances warrant increas- 
ing the usual maximum of three tutees. Three hours of work are expected for each unit of credit, 
and this work may include, apart from contact hours with tutees, such other activities as: tutorial 
preparations; consulting with instructors; reporting, analysis and evaluation of the tutorial experi- 
ences; and participation in an all-university orientation and evaluation program for tutors. A max- 
imum of three units can be taken each semester and nine units of any combination of 196 and 496 
for an undergraduate program. This course must be taken as an elective and not counted toward 
general education, major or minor requirements. The course can be taken on a credit/ no credit basis 
by the tutor. Requests for tutors must be initiated by tutees and can be initiated up until the official 
university date for dropping a class with a W. Tutors electing to respond to such requests will receive 
credits at the end of the semester and can register in the course until the official university date for 
dropping a class with a W. Both tutors and tutees must submit written reports, analyses and 
evaluations of their shared tutorial experience, and both must participate in an all-university orienta- 
tion program as well as in any conference or critiques that the instructor of the course may require. 
Further information can be obtained from the department in which the student is interested in 
' 'student-to-student tutorials." 

CROSS-DISCIPLINARY UNIVERSITY PROGRAMS 

There are two types of cross-disciplinary university programs: joint degree programs and non-degree 
programs. The joint degree program is an endeavor involving two or more existing academic 
departments which need not be within the same school. Such programs are administered by program 
councils composed of representatives elected by participating departments. The joint Degree Pro- 
grams are housed in administration units as follows: 

School of Education 

Human Services, B.S. 

School of Humanities and Social Sciences 

Latin American Studies, B.A. 

Liberal Studies, B.A. 

Rqssian and East European Area Studies, B.A. 

Social Sciences, M.A. 

School of Mathematics, Science, and Engineering 

Computer Science, B.S., M.S. 

Environmental Studies, M.S. 

The degree descriptions are located with the appropriate schools. 



90 


CROSS-DISCIPLINARY UNIVERSITY 
PROGRAMS 


BIUNGUAL/CROSS-CULTURAL STUDIES 

The Board of Bilingual /Cross-Cultural Studies was developed in 1974 as a result of interest in, and 
concern for, bilingual /cross-cultural studies both on the university campus and within the commu- 
nity. Its purposes are: (1 ) to provide a forum for the exchange of ideas pertaining to bilingual /cross- 
cultural education; (2) to promote the development of programs of study with a bilingual /cross- 
cultural focus, both for teacher candidates and for all majors who desire such an emphasis; (3) to 
conduct research and planning operations leading to the development of such programs. 

In 1975 an Institute for Bilingual/Cross-Cultural Studies was established to coordinate with existing 
programs of bilingual /cross-cultural studies; to help in the implementation of new programs; to 
implement seminars, publications and conferences; to maintain archives; and to conduct further 
research in all areas of bilingual /cross-cultural studies. 

As a result of the efforts of these two bodies, it is now possible for students, other than teacher 
candidates, to pursue a course of study with a bilingual /cross-cultural emphasis. Such students (i.e., 
international business, history, engineering, humanities, etc.) may complete their general education 
requirements by choosing courses from a selected outline which gathers together listings of all 
currently available courses with appropriate emphases. 

Complete course listings and details are available from the Department of Foreign Languages and 
Literatures, the Department of Chicano Studies, and Educational Opportunity Program advisers. 

SPECIAL MAJOR PROGRAM 

From the total curriculum of the university, students may wish to plan a specially designed program 
of study that does not duplicate significantly any existing major or concentration at Cal State 
Fullerton. The special major (B.A. or M.A.) provides opportunities for selected students to pursue 
individualized programs of study leading to a degree when legitimate academic and professional 
goals can be satisfied by a judicious selection of courses from two or more fields; and these aims 
cannot be satisfied by the authorized standard degree majors that are available on the campus. This 
major, designed for exceptional cases of individual students only, provides an opportunity to develop 
concentration or specializations outside the framework of existing majors. (It is not intended as a 
means of bypassing normal graduation requirements or as a means by which students may graduate 
who fail to complete the degee in which they are enrolled. ) 

GUIDELINES FOR THE B.A. IN THE SPECIAL MAJOR PROGRAM 

1 . Initial counseling, record-keeping and faculty referrals for the program will be the responsibility 
of the Office of Academic Advisement. 

2. Students desiring to work for a bachelor's degree in a special major will prepare a proposal 
in writing. Forms for the proposal are available in the Office of Academic Advisement. Students 
are advised to initiate the proposal well in advance. Normally the proposal should be presented 
for approval during the beginning of the semester prior to the student commencing work on 
his/her special major. 

3. A faculty member, the special major adviser, will work with the student to develop a suitable 
plan of coursework for approval. 

4. A special major faculty advisory committee, appointed by the Curriculum Committee, will 
review the requests for admission and make recommendations regarding each proposed pro- 
gram to the Office of the Associate Vice President, Academic Programs. The formal request 
for admission to the special major program should include: the academic and professional 
reasons for wanting the program; a list of specific courses, which may include alternatives and 
electives, that has been developed with and approved by the faculty adviser (the relevance 
of each course to the special major should be explained); and justification that the program 
of courses being proposed does not significantly duplicate any existing degree programs. 
Programs which give indication of a jurisdictional conflict, whether by virtue of their title or 
course content, shall require consultation of concerned departments. Evidence of such ap- 
proval shall be attached to the proposal. In case of disagreement, the dispute will be resolved 


Technological Studies 91 

in accordance with University Policy Statement (UPS) 411.102. 

5. Final approval for a student to be admitted to the special major will rest with the Office of the 
Associate Vice President, Academic Programs. 

6. Following approval of the special major plan, the faculty adviser will be responsible for 
subsequent counseling and graduation certification. 

7. Entrance to the special majors is normally at the beginning of the junior year ( 60 units remaining 
for graduation). Under no conditions may a student enter the special major with less than 30 
units remaining for graduation. 

8. The minimum requirements for a special major degree should be a program of at least 24 
semester units of upper division work recommended by the student's faculty adviser. 

9. Neither lower division nor upper division courses applied to general education-breadth require- 
ments will be applicable toward the minimum, special major degree requirements. 

GUIDELINES FOR THE M.A. IN THE SPECIAL MAJOR PROGRAM 

1. A graduate student desiring to work for a master's degree with a special major will prepare a 
proposal in writing, including justification for the request. Special major application forms are 
available in the University Graduate Office. 

2. This proposal, accompanied by statements from the three professors who agree to serve on 
the student's graduate advisement committee, will be submitted for approval to the Special 
Major Advisory Committee, to the appropriate academic offers in the areas where coursework 
will be taken and to the dean of graduate studies (representing the vice president, academic 
affairs). 

Programs which give indication of a jurisdictional conflict, whether by virtue of their title or 
course content, shall require consultation of concerned departments. Evidence of such ap- 
proval shall be attached to the proposal. In case of disagreement, the dispute will be resolved 
in accordance with UPS 411.102. 

3. Upon approval of the general plan, the student and the committee will develop a formal and 
detailed program of study which may include prerequisites. The study plan must conform to 
all university regulations governing graduate work. 

4. The dean of graduate studies then will approve the program of study and grant classified 
standing in accordance with existing policies. 

5. After admission (classified standing), the student will follow all university policies and proce- 
dures for graduate work as outlined in the Graduate Bulletin and this catalog. 

6. Upon completion of requirements for the master's degree (including a thesis, project or 
comprehensive examination), the master's degree with a special major may be awarded in 
conformity with university policy. 

The non-degree programs are administered by the Office of the Associate Vice President for 
Academic Programs. 

interdisciplinary center 

In order to facilitate communication and interaction among faculty in different disciplines, as well 
jjs exploration of those areas of knowledge which substantively or methodologically involve more 
an one academic department or joint degree program, the Interdisciplinary Center was established. 

, 6 ^ oa * s ^is center are to foster academic community and to promote academic excellence 
encoura 8' n 8r coordinating, and when necessary negotiating: (a) multidisciplinary teaching 
ar ! scholarship; (b) development of interdisciplinary perspectives among those individual faculty 
^ o find them appropriate for their academic disciplines; (c) departmental and joint degree pro- 
gram interaction with Interdisciplinary Center activities; and (d) development of Interdisciplinary 
Center courses. 

In the future the curriculum will be planned with a three- year lead time so that every year the 
curriculum revision shall be planned for the following three years. 

nT aUS H^ e ,nterdisci P ,inar y Center concept has been revised, the plans for the current cycle are 
0 ready for the current catalog issue and will be published in supplement. 

TECHNOLOGICAL studies program 

fACULTY 

lames F. Woodward 
Am ro 8 ram Coordinator 

ert Baker (Library Science), Fenton Calhoun (Communications), John Cronquist (Philosophy), 


92 Technological Studies 

Roger Dittman (Physics), Jack Elenbaas (History), Barbara Finlayson (Chemistry), Barry Ger- 
ber (Political Science), Judith Kandel (Biology), Merrill Ring (Philosophy), Ted Smyth (Com- 
munications), Ed Sowell (Engineering), Michael Tang (Liberal Studies). 

The general focus of the technological studies program is on the interdisciplinary examination of the 
impact of science and technology on society. The program provides an area for special study within 
recognized major fields of studies. Students may take separate courses or develop an individualized 
program of studies based on courses, directed readings and research participation. Wherever possi- 
ble, courses are conducted as seminars and bring together lecturers from relevant disciplines includ- 
ed in the sciences and humanities. Through independent studies students are encouraged to pursue 
topics or problems of special interest beyond the scope of regular courses under the supervision of 
a faculty adviser. The technological studies program is directly coordinated with the activities of 
departments and other programs of the university. 

The Man and Technology Program 

Man and Technology, a program developed jointly between the technological studies program and 
the Division of Engineering, directed to the study of man in the man-made world, the relationship 
between technology and the human condition. The program: (1) enables engineering students to 
meet social science and general education requirements of the Division of Engineering by engaging 
in studies closely akin to their major studies; (2) provides a general course of study for students of 
other technologically oriented disciplines of the university; (3) makes available to nonengineering 
students a set of general education courses in the analysis and solution of engineering problems; and 
(4) provides a meeting ground for faculty and students concentrating in different fields of study 
through participation in interdisciplinary studies of technology. 


TECHNOLOGICAL STUDIES COURSES 

100 Introduction to Technological Studies (3) 

An examination of technology as a distinctive human activity comparable in significance to the arts 
and politics. The evolution and current revolutions in technology (examples: transportation and 
energy) are studied with emphasis on the logic and impact of innovation. 

102 Graphical Communications (3) 

(Same as Engineering 102) 

103 The Computer Revolution (3) 

(Same as Engineering 103) 

205 Digital Computation (3) 

(Same as Engineering 205) 

207 Pollution and Politics (3) 

(Same as Engineering 207) 

208 Current Technological Problems in Southern California (3) 

(Same as Engineering 208) 

210 Logic (3) 

(Same as Philosophy 210) 

220 New Energy Sources (3) 

(Same as Engineering 220) 

250 People and Machines (3) 

(Same as Philosophy 250) 

334 Design Graphics (3) 

(Same as Engineering 334) 

380 Human Factors in Design (3) 

(Same as Engineering 380) 

384 Philosophy of the Natural Sciences (3) 

(Same as Philosophy and Physics 384) 

430A History of Science: Ancient to Renaissance (3) 

(Same as History 430A) 

430B History of Science: Copernicus to the Present (3) 

(Same as History 430B) 


Technological Studies 93 


435 Philosophy of Science 

(Same as Philosophy 435) 

474 America in the Age of the Industrial Revolution (1876-1914) (3) 

(Same as History 474) 

479 The Emergence of Urban America (3) 

(Same as History 479) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Students can pursue topics of special interest beyond the scope of regular courses under the 
supervision of a faculty adviser. The work is of a research or creative nature, and normally 
culminates in a paper, project, comprehensive examination or performance. May be repeated; 
however, consent of supervising instructor is required. 

(Recommended by the Technological Studies Program) 

Anthropology 
462 Culture Change (3) 

Communications 

101 Communications Writing (3) 

102 Communications Writing (3) 

403 Technical Writing (3) 

428 Communications and Social Change (3) 

Economics 

370 Economics of Research and Development and Technological Change (3) 




■ 









96 


SCHOOL OF THE ARTS 

Dean: Jerry Samuelson 
Associate Dean: Donald R. Henry 


DEPARTMENT OF ART 

FACULTY 

C. Ray Kerciu 

Acting Department Chair 

Robert Baron, Alvin Ching, Susan Clover, Eileen Cowin, Darryl Curran, Naomi Dietz, Henry Evjenth, 
Robert Ewing, Dextra Frankel, Carmel Goode, Maurice Gray, Ray Hein, Thomas Holste, George 
James, Claude Kent, Ruth Kline, Donald Lagerberg, Clinton MacKenzie, Robert Meganck, Robert 
Partin, Albert Porter, Leo Robinson, Jerry Rothman, Jerry Samuelson,* Victor Smith, Jon Stokesbary, 
Vincent Suez. 

The Department of Art offers a program which includes the several fields of art history, theory and 
appreciation; drawing, painting, sculpture; design and crafts; and art education. The broadest objec- 
tive of the program is to contribute to the intellectual, social, and creative development of the student 
as he prepares for citizenship in a democratic society. More specifically, the art program provides 
opportunities for students: ( 1 ) to develop a knowledge and understanding of those general principles 
of visual organization and expression basic to all forms and fields of art; (2) to develop a critical 
appreciation and understanding of historical and contemporary art forms through a study of these 
principles as they relate to the range of artistic production of mankind; (3) to use these general 
principles as a means to express more clearly their ideas, thoughts, and feelings in the creation of 
visual forms; (4) to develop those understandings and skills needed to pursue graduate studies in 
the field, to teach art in the schools, or to qualify for a position in business and industry as an art 
specialist. 

Undergraduate curricula leading to the bachelor of arts degree have been designed to meet the 
specialized needs of the following groups: (1 ) students who wish to study art as an essential part 
of their personal and cultural development; (2) students seeking preprofessional preparation in art; 
and (3) students planning to teach art in grades K-12. 

To qualify for a baccalaureate degree with a major in art, students must have a C or better in all 
courses required for the degree. No credit toward the major will be allowed for specific major 
courses in which a grade of D is obtained. As is customary, the Art Department reserves the right 
to hold projects completed by a student for class credit for a period of three years. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN ART 

Three course programs have been planned to meet the individual needs and interests of students 
working for the bachelor of arts degree with a major in art. In the development of specific course 
offerings which make up these programs, it has been the concern of the art faculty to see that each 
program contains: (1 ) basic courses in art history, theory, appreciation, and studio practice which 
have as their primary focus the study of those general principles of visual organization and expression 
underlying all fields of art: (2) more specialized courses which provide for adequate preparation 
in depth in a single field of art. The teaching of art history, theory, and criticism is not confined to 
courses bearing that title. Rather, each studio course involves theory as well as the practice of art, 
includes as part of its content the study and reference to related historical art forms, and has as part 
of its purpose the development of those critical abilities which are necessary to a valid evaluation 
and appreciation of the art expressions of man. 

Plan I provides for an emphasis in the area of art history, theory, and appreciation and is particularly 
recommended for those students who wish to pursue graduate studies in art history or museology 
Plan II is designed for those students who prefer a studio-type program with a preprofessional 
orientation and an area of specialization selected from the following: (1 ) drawing and painting; (2) 
printmaking; (3) sculpture; (4) crafts; (5) ceramics; (6) graphic design; (7) illustration; (8) environ- 
mental design; or (9) creative photography. 


• University administrative officer 


Art 97 


Plan III is for those students who wish to meet the requirements for single subject instruction (Ryan 
Act) for teaching art in grades K-12. 

Plan I requires a minimum of 60 units in art or approved related courses with a minimum of 36 units 
of upper division in art. Plan II requires a minimum of 60 units in art with a minimum of 33 units 
of upper division in art. Plan III requires a minimum of 54 units of art including a minimum of 27 
units of upper division art. 

In addition to the requirements listed below for the major, students must meet the other university 
requirements for a bachelor of arts degree (see page 62). Students following Plan III also must meet 
any specific requirements for the desired teaching credential (see section in catalog for School of 
Education). 

PLAN I: ART HISTORY EMPHASIS Units 

Preparation for the Major: Art history 201 A, B (6 units); 6 units of studio courses; 
approved electives (12 units) in art, anthropology, drama, foreign languages, 

history, literature, music or philosophy 24 

The Major: Art history (18 units) including one course from each of the following six 
groups: 301 -302; 41 1 -41 2; 341 -421 -422; 431-432; 451-452; 461 ; an additonal three 
courses (9 units) to add depth in three of the above groups; and three courses 

(9 units) of approved electives 36 

Reading knowledge of one modern foreign language 

PLAN II: STUDIO EMPHASIS 
Drawing and Painting 

Preparation for the Major: Art 201 A, B; 107 A, B; 103; 104; 117 (3 units) and 207A,B 27 

The Major: Art 316A,B; 486 (6 units); 6 units of upper division art history and 9 units 

of art electives 33 

Crafts 

Preparation for the Major: Art 201 A, B; 107A,B; 103; 104; 205 A; and 6 units selected 

from Art 206A, 123B, 205B, 216A, or 117 (3 units) 27 

The Major — General Concentration: Art 305A, 31 5A; 330 or 355A or 365A; 6 units of 
upper division art history and 15 units selected from Art 305B, 31 5B, 31 6A, 325B, 

338A, 485A, 485B, 485C, 485D or 485E 33 

The Major— Jewelry /Metalsmithing Concentration: Art 305 A; 31 5 A, B; 325 A, B; 6 units 
of upper division art history; 6 units selected from Art 305B, 330, 355A, 365A or 

338A; and 6 units selected from 485A or 485C 33 

The Major — Fibers Concentration: Art 355A,B; 6 units selected from 330, 485D or 385E; 

6 units of upper division art history; and 9 units of art electives 33 

Ceramics 

Preparation for the Major: Art 201 A,B; 107A,B; 103; 104; 206A,B; 117 (3 units) 27 

The Major: Art 306A,B; 326A,B, or 426A,B; 484 (6 units); 6 units of upper division art 

history and 9 units of art electives 33 

Graphic Design 

Preparation for the Major: Art 201 A, B; 107 A, B; 103; 104; 223A,B; 117 (3 units) 27 

The Major: Art 323 A, B; 483A (6 units); 338A; 363A; 6 units of upper division art history; 

and 9 units of art electives 33 

••lustration 

Preparation for the Major: Art 201 A, B; 107A,B; 103; 104; 123A; 117 (3 units); and 3 

units of art electives 27 

The Major: Art 363A,B; 483C (6 units); 317A,B; 323A; 6 units of upper division art 

history; and 6 units of art electives 33 

Environmental Design 

Preparation for the Major: Art 201 A, B; 107A,B; 103; 104; 213A; 123B; and 3 units of 

art electives 27 

'he Major: 3 1 3 A, B; 333A,B; 483B (6 units); 453A; 6 units of upper division art history 

and 6 units of art electives 33 

Creative Photography 

^reparation for the Major: Art 201A,B; 103; 104; 107A,B; 117 (3 units); 247; and 3 units 

Th art e * ect ‘ ves 27 

e Major: 338A,B; 489 (6 units); 347 A; 6 units of upper division art history; and 6 units 
selected from 323A, 363A, 307 A, 347B, or 443A; and 6 units of art electives .... 33 

4 —88930 


98 Art 


PLAN III: TEACHING EMPHASIS 
Single Subject Instruction — Ryan Act 
(Qualifies for teaching Art in grades K-12) 

Preparation for the Major: Art 1 03; 1 04; 206A; 1 07 A, B; 3 units of 1 1 7; 201 A,B; and 205 A 27 

The Major: (Select one of the following) 

Drawing and Painting: 307 A,B; 31 6A, 31 7A; 338A; 347A; 402, 41 1 or 41 2; and 441 A,B 27 

Crafts: 305A; 306A,B; 307 A; 31 5A; 330; 402, 411 or 412; and 441 A, B 27 

Graphic Design and Photography: 307 A; 323 A, B; 338A,B, 363 A, 402, 41 1 or 412; and 

441 A, B 27 

Professional Preparation 

Art Ed 442 3 

Education coursework 9 

Student teaching (one semester full time) 12 


Program Requirements: 

1 . Assignment by the Art Department chair to a faculty adviser in art education. 

2. Fulfill credential requirements listed in this catalog within the School of Education 
for the curriculum pertinent to the Ryan Act provisions. 

3. Meet the requirements listed under Plan III, Teaching Emphasis for the bachelor's 
degree in art. 

4. Completion of major and education course requirements prior to enrolling in 
student teaching. 

5. Admission to teacher education through the School of Education is required prior 
to enrollment in Art Ed 442 and student teaching. 

6. Acceptance for student teaching is based on candidate quotas, a review of a 
candidate's portfolio of art work, and evidence of success in university course- 
work completed. 

7. Recommendation by the faculty adviser in art education. 

Upon completion of the above program and the bachelor of arts degree, the student 
is eligible for a partial credential, which meets state requirements for teaching in grades 
K-12. Within a specified period of time from the beginning of a teaching assignment, 

30 units of coursework must be completed at an accredited college or university to 
qualify for a full credential. Credentials are issued from the institution where this unit 
requirement has been completed. 

Multiple Subject Instruction — Ryan Act 

The following three courses are recommended for all students intending to teach in 
the elementary schools in multiple subject classrooms: 

Units 


Art 380 3 

Music 333 3 

Theatre 402 3 


9 

The following additional list of courses would be strongly recommended for any student who wishes 
to expand his knowledge in any or all of the arts: 

Art 100, 101, 103, 104, 107A, 201A,B, 310A,B, 330, 380, and 441A,B 
Dance 100, 112, 122, 125A,B, 132, 142, 152, 162, 206A,B, 316A,B, 323, 422 
Music 1 1 1 A,B, 184A,B, 251, 281A,C,E,G, 283A, 381 B, 435 
Theatre 100A,B, 211, 263A, 276A, 277, 370A,B, 402, 403, 41 1C 
MINOR IN ART FOR THE BACHELOR OF ARTS DEGREE 

A minimum of 24 units is required for a minor in art for the bachelor of arts degree of which a 
minimum of 10 units must be in upper division courses. Included in the program must be a basic 
course in each of the following areas: ( 1 ) art history and appreciation; (2) design; (3) drawing and 
painting; and (4) crafts. Those students planning to qualify for a standard teaching credential with 
specialization in elementary or secondary teaching and art for a minor must obtain approval from 
the Art Department for the courses selected to meet the upper division requirements for a minor 
in art. 


Art 99 


MASTER OF ARTS IN ART 

The program of studies leading to the master of arts degree in art provides a balance of theory and 
practice for those who desire to teach art or wish to develop a sound basis for continued advanced 
work in this field. The program offers each student the opportunity to expand his intellectual and 
technical resources and to acquire greater richness and depth in terms of creative understanding and 
achievement in one of the following areas of concentration: (1 ) drawing and painting (including 
printmaking); (2) crafts (including ceramics); (3) design; (4) sculpture; and (5) art history. 
Prerequisites 

1. Conditionally classified standing 

A. A baccalaureate degree from an accredited institution. 

B. GPA minimum of 2.5 in the last 60 semester units attempted. 

C. Special requirements: 

(1) Studio emphasis: review of preliminary portfolio by department chair. 

(2) Art history emphasis: satisfactory score on the Educational Testing Service Undergradu- 
ate Record Exam — Area Tests and preliminary interview by art history coordinator. 
Also note statement below concerning the portfolio review. 

2. Classified standing 

A. A baccalaureate degree from an accredited institution. 

B. GPA minimum of 2.5 in the last 60 semester units attempted. 

C. Special requirements: 

( 1 ) An undergraduate major in art of 24 units of upper division art including at least 1 2 units 
of upper division study in the elected area of concentration with a GPA of 3.0 or better. 
In the art history emphasis a satisfactory score on the Educational Testing Service 
Undergraduate Record Exam — Area Tests is also required. 

(2) Portfolio review — before any units may apply to the approved study program for the 
degree, the student must arrange for a faculty committee evaluation of the student's 
background, including a statement of purpose by the student and review of creative 
work; or, for art history applicants, submission of an assigned research topic. Portfolio 
review dates are the first Friday in April for the following fall semester, and the first 
Friday in November for the following spring semester of each year. Arrangements may 
be made through the Art Department office to meet these deadlines prior to admission. 

D. Development of an approved study plan. 

Study Plan 

The degree program requires 30 units of graduate study approved by the student's graduate commit- 
tee of which 15 must be 500-level courses. The 30 units are distributed as follows: 

Units 

1 . Core courses in art history, philosophy, analysis and criticism 9 

A. Art 500A Graduate Seminar in Major Field (3 units) (admission for students 
with classified standing only) 

B. Art 500B Graduate Seminar in Major Field (3 units) (admission for students 
with classified standing only) 

C. Art 481 Seminar in Art History (3 units), or substitute of a 400-level art history 
course, or Philosophy 311, Aesthetics, on the recommendation of the major 
adviser. 

2. 500- and/or 400 level courses in the area of concentration selected from one of 

the following areas (minimum of six units at 500-level) 12 

A. Drawing and painting 

B. Crafts 

C. Design 

D. Sculpture 

E. Art history 


3. Additional coursework in area of concentration approved electives 3-6 

4. Project or thesis 3-6 

Total 30 


AH courses must be completed with a B average, and all courses in the area of concentration must 
be graded B or better. The Department of Art requires the candidate for the Master of Arts in Art 
degree to exhibit his or her project in the department upon completion of the degree and the art 
faculty reserves the right to retain an example from the student's master's exhibit for the university 
collection. 


100 Art 


For further information, consult the Department of Art. 

See also "The Program of Master's Degrees' in this catalog and the Graduate Bulletin. 


ART COURSES 

100 Exploratory Course in Art (3) 

Exploration and creative use of a variety of art materials, processes, and concepts. Field trips 
required. Not open to art majors for credit except by permission of Art Department. (6 hours 
activity) 

101 Introduction to Art (3) 

A course for the general student designed to develop an understanding of historical and contempo- 
rary art forms. Illustrated with examples of painting, sculpture, architecture, and design. Field 
trips required. Not open to art majors for credit except by permission of Art Department. 

103 Two-dimensional Design (3) 

The inventive use of materials, tools and elements of plastic organization as related to a two- 
dimensional surface (6 hours activity) 

104 Three-dimensional Design (3) 

The inventive use of materials, tools and elements of plastic organization as related to three- 
dimensional form. (6 hours activity) 

107A,B Beginning Drawing and Painting (3,3) 

Beginning work in the creative use of the materials of drawing and painting with emphasis on visual 
concepts, use of medium, individual exploration, and growth, planning and craftsmanship. 107A 
emphasizes drawing; 107B emphasizes painting. (9 hours laboratory) 

117 Life Drawing (1) 

Drawing from the live model. May be repeated to a maximum of 4 units. (3 hours laboratory for 
each unit) 

123A,B Descriptive Drawing (3,3) 

An intensive study of traditional and contemporary drawing techniques and theories. Emphasis in 
123A on representation of nature forms and in 123B on manmade and mechanical forms 
including linear perspective. (9 hours laboratory) 

201A,B Art and Civilization (3,3) 

A comparative survey of the basic ideas, forms and styles of the visual arts as they developed in 
various cultures from prehistoric time to the present day. 

205A Beginning Crafts (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 104. Art 104 may be taken concurrently. A study and evaluation of craft 
concepts, processes and materials as they relate to the development of aesthetic forms based 
on function. (6 hours activity) 

205 B Beginning Crafts: Wood (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 104. Art 104 may be taken concurrently. A study and evaluation of 
woodworking concepts and processes as they relate to the development of wood into aesthetic 
form based on function. (6 hours activity) 

206A Beginning Ceramics (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 103. A basic course in the study of form as related to ceramic materials, tools, 
processes, and concepts including kiln loading and firing, hand building, wheel throwing and 
raku. (6 hours activity) 

206B Beginning Ceramics (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 206A. A basic course in the study of form as related to ceramics, with an 
emphasis on glaze batching, and its practical application, and the presentation of a ceramic 
technique. (6 hours activity) 

207A,B Drawing and Painting (Experimental Methods and Materials) (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 117, 107A,B or equivalents. An intensive study of traditional and contemporary 
methods and materials as they relate to current approaches in drawing and painting. (9 hours 
laboratory) 

213A Beginning Environmental Design (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 104. An introduction to design methodology and communication skills 
related to the environmental design field. 

216A,B Beginning Sculpture (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Art 1 04. An introductory course in sculpture with emphasis on the creative use of wood 
and metal, power equipment and hand tools. (6 hours activity) 


Art 101 


223A,B Lettering, Typography and Rendering (3,3) . . 

Prerequisite- Art 103. A study of the history, design and use of letter forms including techniques for 
rough and comprehensive layouts and the use of both hand-lettered forms and handset type. 

(6 hours activity) 

Prerequisite: Art 107A,B. An introductory course of all printmaking forms to include litho, etching, 
woodcut and serigraphy. (6 hours activity) 

288 Design for the Theatre (3) 

(Same as Theatre 288) 

301 Ancient Art (3) , . . . 

A study of the developments in art from the Paleolithic to the period of late antiquity. 

302 Medieval Art (3) , , _ . . 

A study of the developments in art from the period of late antiquity through the Gothic. 

305 A Advanced Crafts (3) . , . „._ f _ 

Prerequisite: Art 205A. Study and evaluation of craft concepts, processes, and materials as they relate 
to the development of aesthetic forms based on function. (9 hours laboratory) 

305B Advanced Crafts: Wood (3) , . . 

Prerequisite: Art 205B. A study and evaluation of craft concepts and processes as they relate to the 
development of wood into utilitarian and aesthetic form. (9 hours laboratory) 

306A,B Advanced Ceramics (3,3) , . , . .. 

Prerequisite: Art 206A,B. Further experiences in the study and evaluation of forms as related to the 
creative use of ceramic concepts and materials including design, forming, glazing and firing. (6 
hours activity) 

307 A,B Drawing and Painting (3,3) , 

Prerequisites- Art 1 17, 107A,B, 207A,B or equivalents. The study, evaluation and creative use ot the 
concepts and materials of drawing and painting with emphasis on individual exploration, 
growth, planning and craftsmanship. (9 hours laboratory) 

310A,B Painting for Teachers: Watercolor Media (3,3) ... . 

Prerequisite. Art 100. The study and development of painting and drawing materials and approaches 
as they relate to elementary and secondary education. (6 hours activities) 

311 Art and the Modern Mind (3) . A , . 

The visual arts in the context of modern thought. A general approach for the non-art major. A slide 
lecture and discussion approach to art and the ideas and influences of McLuhan, Freud, jung, 
Wittgenstein, Levi-Straus, Skinner, etc. 

312 History of Architecture (3) ...... . . . 

Architecture from antiquity to the present. Buildings will be studied in terms of their relationship to 
the societies which produced them, their symbolic content and their contributions to the 
evolution of western architectural tradition. 

313A Environmental Design: Unit Concepts (3) , . # 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104 and 213. Environmental design projects related to the study ot unit 

concepts. (6 hours activity) 

313B Environmental Design: Systems Concepts (3) /a 

Prerequisite: Art 31 3A. Environmental design projects related to the study of systems concepts. 

hours activity) 

Prerequisite Art 205A and 305A. Art 305A may be taken concurrently. Design and creation of 
jewelry. (9 hours laboratory) 

316A,B Sculpture (3,3) , . . 

Prerequisites: Art 104 and 21 6A. A study of basic sculptural processes using a variety of materials 

and processes. (9 hours laboratory) 

317A,B Advanced Life Drawing (3,3) , / Q 

Prerequisite: three units lower division life drawing. Drawing and painting from the live model. (9 

hours laboratory) 

323A,B Graphic Design (3,3) , , . , 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 223A. Development and projection of ideas in relation to the techmca , 
aesthetic, and psychological aspects of advertising art. (6 hours activity) 


102 Art 


325 A, B Metalsmithing (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 205A and 305A. Art 305A may be taken concurrently. A study and evaluation of 
fundamental metalsmithing concepts, processes and materials as they relate to the aesthetic 
development of utilitarian forms, raising, silversoldering, forging, casing, engraving, chasing and 
repousse. (9 hours laboratory) 

326 A, B Ceramic Sculpture (3,3) 

Development of basic ceramic technology into individual sculptural forms and techniques. (6 hours 
activity) 

327A,B Supergraphics (3,3) 

The design and production of environmental painting. Team and individual projects. A variety of 
advanced technical means are employed. Studio and lecture. A historical survey of environmen- 
tal painting, concepts and techniques is included. (6 hours activity) 

329A,B Art and Technology (3,3) 

Creative activity in the context of modern technology. (9 hours laboratory) 

330 Fibers and Fabrics, Non-woven Techniques (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104 or 205A or B, or consent of instructor. Exploration of concepts of design 
using knotting, crochet, fabric manipulation, basketry, stitchery and applique as techniques 
applied to the creation of art works. 

333A Environmental Design: Space and Structure (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 213. Architecturally oriented projects to develop concepts of exterior-interior design 
and planning. (6 hours activity) 

333B Environmental design: Space and Structure (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 333A. Architecturally oriented projects to develop experimental spaces and struc- 
tures. (6 hours activity) 

336 A, B Casting Techniques and Theories of Cast Sculpture (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Art 31 6A. Projects in various waxing, molding and metal casing techniques. Media with 
emphasis on aluminum and bronze and the lost wax process. (9 hours laboratory) 

3 38 A Creative Photography (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 103 or its equivalent. Exploration of the photographic media as a means of personal 
expression. Historical attitudes and processes are discussed in relationship to new materials and 
contemporary aesthetic trends. Field trips required. (9 hours laboratory) 

338B Creative Photography (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 338A. Further exploration of the photographic medium as a means of personal 
expression. Historical and new processes introduced as a vehicle toward the individual stu- 
dent's personal goal. Field trips required. (9 hours laboratory) 

341 Art of India (3) 

A survey of the art and architecture of India which includes Hindu, Buddhist and Muslim influences 
from the pre-Indus Valley civilization to the decline of Muslim rule. 

347A Printmaking — Etching (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 107A,B, 247, and 117. Development of concepts and exploration of materials 
involved in printmaking including etching and aquatint. (9 hours laboratory) 

347B Printmaking — Lithography (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 107A,B, 247, and 117. Development of concepts and exploration of materials and 
techniques involved in lithography printing. (9 hours laboratory) 

355A,B Fibers: Fabric Printing and Dyeing (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 107A or B or consent of instructor. Exploration of concepts of design as they 
relate to fabric surfaces with emphasis on various printing techniques and dyeing techniques 
applied to the creation of art works. (6 hours activity) 

363A,B Illustration (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 107A,B and 117. Development and projection of ideas relative to the needs 
of story, book, magazine, and film illustration. (6 hours activity) 

365A,B Fibers: Weaving (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 1 03, 1 04 or 205A,B or consent of instructor. Exploration of concepts of design using 
various weaving techniques and learning the uses of a loom applied to the creation of art works. 
(6 hours activity) 

380 Art and Child Development (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 100 or equivalent. The study and evaluation of art concepts, materials, and proc- 
esses as they relate to and promote child development. (6 hours activity) 


Art 103 


381 Early Childhood Development in Art (3) 

A variety of studio activities as they relate to early child art based on research of the behavioral 
sciences having relevance for the understanding of the child's artistic development. (6 hours 
activity) 

401 Criticism of the Arts (3) . _ , . 

Prerequisite: senior or graduate standing in the School of Arts or consent of instructor. Deve opment 
of criteria and vocabulary for criticism of the visual and performing arts through lectures, 
readings, discussions, and exhibit and performance attendance. Emphasis on descriptive and 
evaluative skills in music, art, theatre, dance and cinema criticism. 


402 Contemporary Art (3) 

An exploration of critical perspectives and esthetics in 


terms of specific works of art and the 


relationship between art and society. 

411 Foundations of Modern Art (3) . . 

Basic problems of painting and sculpture of the realism, impressionism, post-impressionism periods. 


412 Art of the 20th Century— 1900 to Present (3) 

Fundamentals of modern painting, graphics and architecture. 


421 Oriental Art; China (3) ... , 

A study of the historical development of the arts of China and their relation to Chinese philosophy 

and culture. 

423 Film Animation (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104, 107A,B and 117. Aesthetic and technical considerations of animation 
applied in the production of film. (6 hours activity) 

426A,B Glass Forming (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 206A,B, 306A, and consent of instructor. A course in the chemistry, handling and 
manipulation of glass and its related tools and equipment for the ceramic artist. (6 hours 
activity) 

431 Renaissance Art (3) 

Basic problems of painting, sculpture and architecture of the Renaissance period. Lectures, discus- 
sion and field trips. 

432 Baroque and Rococo Art (3) 

Basic problems of painting, sculpture and architecture of the Baroque and Rococo period. Lectures, 
discussion and field trips. 

441A,B Media Exploration for Teaching Art (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104, 107A,B, 205A or consent of instructor. Provides a wide range of oppor- 
tunities for exploring the art media used in secondary school art programs today. Deals with 
materials appropriate for secondary art curriculum. Offers creative investigation of two and 
three dimensional media in a variety of subject matter applications. 


443A,B Film Making (3,3) 

Development of film as a visual art form. 

451 Oceanic Art (3) . 

An introductory survey of the styles of the aborginal people of the following regions: Australia, 

Melanesia, Micronesia, Polynesia and Indonesia. 

452 Art of Sub-Saharan Africa (3) , A . c , 

An introduction by region and tribal group to the art forms of West Coastal Africa and the Sudan, 
Niger River kingdoms, Yoruba kingdoms, Cameroon chieftainships, Congo tribes, Central Africa 
and East Coastal Africa. 

453A,B Display and Exhibition Design (3,3) 

A course in the appropriate and creative use of materials, processses, and design concepts as they 
relate to the special problems involved in the planning and preparing of displays exhibit, bu etin 
boards, wall cases and art portfolios. (More than 6 hours laboratory) 

481 Seminar in Art History (3) . , 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Opportunities for intensive study and evaluation in one area of 

art history and appreciation. 


104 Art 


483 Special Studies in Design (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Opportunity for intensive study in the design areas listed below. 
Each area listed may be repeated to a maximum of 12 units, but no more than 3 units of credit 
may be obtained in any one area in a single semester. 

483A Graphic Design (2 hours activity for each unit) 

483 B Environmental Design (2 hours activity for each unit) 

483C Design and Composition (2 hours activity for each unit) 

483D Display Design (More than 3 hours laboratory for each unit) 

484A Special Studies in Ceramics (3) 

Prerequisite: a minimum of six upper division units in ceramics. Course may be repeated to a 
maximum of 12 units, but not more than three units of credit may be obtained in any one area 
in a single semester. (2 hours activity for each unit) 

484B Special Studies in Glass (3) 

Prerequisite: A minimum of six upper division units in glass. Course may be repeated to a maximum 
of 12 units, but not more than three units of credit may be obtained in any one area in a single 
semester. (2 hours activity for each unit) 

485 Special Studies in Crafts (3) 

Prerequisite: a minimum of six upper division units in designated area or consent of instructor. 
Opportunity for intensive study in the craft areas listed below. Each area listed may be repeated 
to a maximum of 12 units, but no more than three units of credit may be obtained in any one 
area in a single semester. (2 hours activity for each unit) 

485A Jewelry 

485B General Crafts 

485C Metalsmithing 

485D Fibers — Weaving 

485E Fibers — Fabric Printing and Dyeing 

485F Fibers and Fabrics 

486 Special Studies in Sculpture (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 316A,B and consent of instructor. Opportunity for intensive study in the following 
sculptural processes. May be repeated to a maximum of 12 units but no more than three units 
of credit may be obtained in a single semester. (2 hours activity for each unit) 

486A Modeling and Fabrication 
486 B Casting 

487 Special Studies in Drawing and Painting and Printmaking (3) 

Prerequisites: a minimum of six upper division units and consent of instructor. Opportunity for 
intensive study in the drawing and painting areas listed below. Each area listed may be repeated 
to a maximum of 12 units, but no more than three units of credit may be obtained in any one 
area in a single semester. (3 hours laboratory for each unit) 

487A Painting 
487 B Life Drawing 
487C Drawing 
487 D Printmaking 

489 Special Studies in Creative Photography (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 338A,B. Advanced projects in photography as a means of personal expression. May 
be repeated to a maximum of 12 units but no more than three units of credit may be obtained 
in a single semester. (2 hours activity for each unit) 

498 Internship in Art (3) 

Practical work experience in a specific art field in business or industry. Must be senior standing. 

499 Independent Research (1-3) 

Open to advanced students in art with consent of department chair and written consent of instructor. 
May be repeated for credit. 

500A Graduate Seminar in Major Field (3) 

Prerequisite: classified standing. Selected advanced problems and issues in art. Emphasis is on 
intellectual clarification and verbal articulation of individual intent as an artist. Each student will 
develop oral and written material in support of his master's project. 


Art 105 


500B Graduate Seminar in Major Field (3) . 

Prerequisite: Art 500A. Directed research in the area of major emphasis. Each student will develop 
oral and written material on historical backgrounds and developments in art as they relate to 
his intent as an artist (stated in Art 500A) and in support of his master's project. 

502 Seminar in Contemporary Art (3) 

Selected advanced problems and directed research in relation to the contemporary art form. 

503 Graduate Problems in Design (3) . 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Intensive study with emphasis on planning, development, and 
evaluation of individual projects in the design areas listed below. May be repeated to a max- 
imum of 12 units in each area, but no more than three units of credit may be obtained in any 
one area in a single semester. 

503A Graphic Design (2 hours activity for each unit) 

503B Environmental Design (2 hours activity for each unit) 

503C Design and Composition (2 hours activity for each unit) 

503D Display Design (More than 3 hours laboratory for each unit) 

504 Graduate Problems in Ceramics (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Intensive study with emphasis on planning, development and 
evaluation of individual projects in ceramics. May be repeated to a maximum of 12 units but 
no more than three units of credit may be obtained in a single semester. (2 hours activity for 


each unit) 

505 Graduate Problems in Crafts (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Intensive study with emphasis on planning, development, and 
evaluation of individual projects in the crafts areas listed below. May be repeated to a maximum 
of 12 units but no more than three units of credit may be obtained in a single semester. (2 hours 
activity for each unit) 

505A Jewelry 
505B General Crafts 
505C Metalsmithing 

505D Fibers — Weaving, Fibers and Fabrics 
505E Fibers — Fabric Printing and Dyeing 

5% Graduate Problems in Sculpture (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Intensive study with emphasis on planning, development, and 
evaluation of individual projects in sculpture. May be repeated to a maximum of 12 units but 
no more than three units of credit may be obtained in a single semester. (2 hours activity for 
each unit) 


507 Graduate Problems in Drawing and Painting (3) 

Prerequisite: 12 units of upper division drawing and painting. Intensive study with emphasis on 
planning, development and evaluation of individual projects in the drawing and painting areas 
listed below. May be repeated to a maximum of 1 2 units but no more than three units of credit 
may be obtained in a single semester. (3 hours laboratory for each unit) 

507A Painting 
507B Life Drawing 
507C Drawing 
507D Printmaking 

597 Project (3-6) , . , . . 

Prerequisites: Art 500A,B, written consent of instructor and recommendation of the student s gradu- 
ate committee. Art 500B may be taken concurrently with Art 597 on approval of instructor 
Development and presentation of a creative project in the area of concentration beyond 
regularly offered coursework. 

598 Thesis (3-6) . . r . 

Prerequisites: Art 500A,B, written consent of instructor and recommendation of the student s gradu- 
ate committee. Art 500B may be taken concurrently with Art 598 on approval of instructor 
Development and presentation of a thesis in the area of concentration beyond regularly offered 
coursework. No more than three units may be taken in any one semester. 


599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Open to graduate student in art with consent of department chair and written consent of instructor. 
May be repeated for credit. 


106 Dance 


ART EDUCATION COURSES 

442 Teaching Art in the Secondary School (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. Objectives, methods, and materials including audiovis- 
ual instruction for teaching art in secondary school. Required before student teaching of student 
presenting majors in art for the standard teaching credential. 

449A Student Teaching Secondary School, Art (10) 

For candidates who have declared for the Ryan Act credential. See description and prerequisites 
under Division of Teacher Education. Concurrent enrollment in Art Education 449B is required. 

449 B Seminar in Secondary School Student Teaching, Art (2) 

Seminar for student teachers in art dealing with the practical aspects of art instruction in secondary 
schools. Concurrent enrollment in Art Education 449A is required. 

749 Student Teaching in Art in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 

See description and prerequisite under Division of Teacher Education. 


FACULTY IN DANCE 

FACULTY 
Araminta Little 
Faculty Chair 

Wilson Barrilleaux, M. E. Daenecke Lawlor, 

PART-TIME 

John Dougherty, Al Gilbert, Lois Grayston, Lynne Hachten, Jannine Livingston, Bob Regger Lynn 
Rogers, Janet Sanderson, Mel Sims, Bruce Terry, Sylvia Turner 

The Dance Faculty offers a program which includes the several fields of history, theory, criticism, 
notation, therapy, ethnology, choreography, performance and production in addition to instruction 
in technique in various movement forms. The curriculum is designed in accordance with the 
following three objectives: ( 1 ) to provide the general university student the opportunity for a 
personal involvement in dance as an art form and as a basic movement experience: (2) to provide 
basic experiences in dance for those who wish to pursue dance as a career; (3) to promote interest 
in all dance and artistic endeavors in the university and surrounding community. 

A dance concentration is currently offered in the B.A., M.A. degree programs in the Department of 
Theatre. Please see the listing under Plan II in the Theatre section for detailed requirements of this 
concentration. * 


DANCE COURSES 

Dance concert attendance required for all courses listed. 

100 Introduction to Dance (3) 

Designed to develop an understanding of historical and contemporary dance forms. Illustrated with 
experiences in various dance forms such as ballet, modern, jazz, folk, Afro, mime. 

112 Beginning Classical Ballet (2) 

A study of the fundamental structure and technique of classical ballet. (4 hours activity) 

122 Beginning Modern Dance (1) 

Basic movement experience for dance, drama, art, music as well as the general student. Develop- 
ment o proficiency in modern dance technique, and development of understanding and 
appreciation for modern dance as an art form. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

126A,B Improvisation (2,2) 

Prerequisite. Dance 126A is prerequisite for 126B. Theory and practice of improvisation in move- 
ment. The student will be taught to overcome inhibitions, to move freely and naturally and to 
improvise imaginatively in movement. (1 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

132 Beginning Jazz Dance (1) 

Designed to introduce the student to the beginning technique of modern jazz dance and basic 
choreography. (2 hours activity) 


Dance 107 


142 Beginning Tap Dance (1) 

Fundamental structure and technique of tap dance. Designed to equip students with the technique 
of tap and tap choreography. (2 hours activity) 

152 Ballroom Dance (1) 

Development of fundamental skills in ballroom dance with specific attention to basic steps and 
variations of dances in the major categories: fox-trot, waltz, swing, Latin-American and novelty 
dances. (2 hours activity) 

156 Soul Dance (1) 

Development of fundamental knowledges and skills in current fad and discotheque dances. ( 2 hours 
activity) 

162 Beginning Folk Dance (1) , , „ , _ , . ttc 

Designed to include both traditional and contemporary forms of folk dance. Dances of various 
countries are studied, with emphasis on the development of proficiency in folk dance skills and 
stylization. (2 hours activity) 

200 Dance and the Related Arts (3) 

The similarities and uniqueness of dance as an art form via experiences in various media in art, music 
architecture, poetry, theatre and film. Includes field trips to galleries, museums, concerts and 
various environments. 

206A,B Mime and Pantomime (2,2) , 

Prerequisite: Dance 206A is prerequisite for 206B. Theory and practice of mime and pantomime or 
drama, dance and education (expression and gesture). Historical and contemporary knowl- 
edge and techniques with emphasis on individual development of creative skill in mime and 
pantomime. (4 hours activity) 

212 Intermediate Classical Ballet (2) 

Prerequisite: Dance 112 or consent of instructor. A study of the intermediate level technique of 
classical ballet (4 hours activity) 

222 Intermediate Modern Dance . , , , 

Prerequisite: Dance 122 or consent of instructor. Development of intermediate level modern dance 
technique and movement vocabulary in terms of composition and communication. (4 hours 
activity) 

226 Rhythmic Analysis (3) „ , 

Knowledge and understanding of musical form and structure; practice in musically notating dance 
rhythms and in percussion accompaniment for dance. 

232 Intermediate Jazz Dance (1) 

Prerequisite: Dance 1 32 or consent of instructor. The development of intermediate level skills in jazz 
technique and choreography. (2 hours activity) 

242 Intermediate Tap Dance (1) , . .. _ . ; ,. c 

Prerequisite: Dance 142 or consent of instructor. Designed to equip students with intermediate s 
in tap technique and tap choreography. (2 hours activity) 

262 Intermediate Folk Dance (1) , ... , , 

Prerequisite: Dance 162 or consent of instructor. An in-depth study of both traditional and conte - 
porary forms of folk dance. Emphasis is on stylization and performance. (2 hours activity) 

312 Advanced Classical Ballet (2) ...... th _ tfir hniniip 

Prerequisite; Dance 212, audition, or consent of instructor. Advanced study in the technique, 

stylization and performance of classical ballet. (4 hours activity) 

Prwequ^eM C 02 A,BTc<.n 2 s ) ent of instructor. Basic character dances such as 

Friska, Polonaise, Fandango, Tarantella, along with the Court Dances : such is Minuet 
Galliard. Designed for students who aim to be professional performers or choreographers, 
well as for actors and directors of theatre. (4 hours activity) 

Prerequisite? DanTeT^or equivalent. Study of basic elements and forms of dance composition. (2 
hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

<******■ 

o. w™w. The development .1 advanced ,echn«,,„ 


108 Dance 


through grade three of professional jazz dance. The relation of jazz to other forms of dance. 
History of jazz dance. Choreography of jazz dance. (4 hours activity) 

336A,B Dance for Musical Theatre (2,2) 

Prerequisite: Dance 102A,B or consent of instructor. 336A is prerequisite to 336B. Theories, ap- 
proaches and techniques of dance utilized in the musical comedy. A — Emphasis on the ensem- 
ble and individual approaches to the style. B — Introduced is the concept of basic choreography 
in the style of musical comedy. (4 hours activity) 

342 Advanced Tap Dance (2) 

Prerequisite: Dance 242 or consent of instructor. Advanced structure and technique of tap dance. 
Designed for students aimed to be professional performers or choreographers on stage, film or 
television. (4 hours activity) 

366 Afro-American Dance (2) 

Study of primitive and tribal rhythm including jazz and other derivational dances of Africa. (1 hour 
lecture, 2 hours activity) 

372 Kinesthetics (3) 

Study of structural aspects of the human body and factors that affect human movement. 

375 Dance in Cultural Perspective (3) 

History of dance from primitive times to the 20th century. Covers development of dance in Europe, 
the Orient, Asia, America in its general relation to culture. 

383 Dance Theatre Production (3) 

The theory and practice of the technical aspect of dance production. Students direct the technical 
aspects of dance performance. 

422 Advanced Modern Dance (3) 

Prerequisite: Dance 22 or consent of instructor. Development of advanced level modern dance 
techniques. Emphasis on development of individual technique in dance. (6 hours activity) 

423 Advanced Dance Composition (3) 

Prerequisite: Dance 323 or equivalent. Application of elements and forms in dance composition 
leading to the choreographing of dances of concert quality. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

426 Experimental Dance Theatre (3) 


Environmental and sensorial experiences in dance. Includes studies in creativity sensitivity and 
perception Experiments in composition using improvisation, happenings, geographic design 
and special effects. Field trips. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

462 Ethnic Dance (3) 


Prerequisite: advanced preparation and/or experience in dance or consent of instructor Theoretical 
and practical study of folk, square and social forms of dance in terms of cultural and environ- 
activ'ity j n uences (includln g geography, music, costumes, customs). (2 hours lecture, 2 hours 

471 Creative Dance for Children (3) 

Methods and materials for teaching creative dance/movement to children. Interrelated arts tech- 
niques ( movement, music, drama, visual art ) for teaching in the classroom and the dance class 

475 Forces and Figures in 20th-Century Dance (3) 

Intensive study of the development of dance forms (ballet, social, modern from 1900 to the present 
with emphasis on their general relation to culture. M 

483 Dance Repertory (1-3) 

Learning and rehearsing major dance works leading toward performance. 


4% Special Studies in Dance (1-3) 

Opportunity for intensive study in theory and practice in dance theatre and production May be 
repeated to a maximum of eight units but no more than three units of credit may be obtained 
in a single semester. (More than 3 hours production per unit) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Directed reading, reports, creation and performance according to predetermined arrangements with 
instructor and faculty chair. 8 


Music 109 


DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC 

FACULTY 
Leo Kreter 

Department Chair 

Roger Ardrey, Charles Baker, Martha Baker, john Benham, David Berfield, Carole Chadwick, An- 
drew Charlton, john Cooksey, M'lou Dietzer, John Farrer, Rita Fuszek, ). justin Gray, Su Har- 
mon, Nors Josephson, Burton Karson, Joseph Landon, John Lueck, Gary Maas, Benton Minor, 
William Nicholls, Jane Paul, Lloyd Rodgers, Robert Stewart, Howard Swan, David Thorsen, 
Rodger Vaughan, Mary Mark Zeyen* 

PART TIME 

Metche Alexander (theory), Kalman Bloch (clarinet), Kay Brightman (bassoon), Neil Chodar 
(theory), William Criss (oboe), Allen Davis (jazz), Jay Grauer (string bass), Roger Greenberg 
(saxophone and theory), David Grimes (guitar), Gail Kubik (composition), Michael Kurkjian 
(voice), Jenifer McKenzie (flute), Karen McKinney (organ), Todd Miller (French horn and 
percussion), Donald Muggeridge (oboe), Richard Pattie (guitar), Edward Persi (string meth- 
ods), Leona Roberts (voice), Madeline Schatz (violin), Gary Scudder (woodwind methods), 
James Self (tuba), Norita Skvarla (music education), James Stamp (trumpet), Susan Stockham- 
mer (flute), Susan Talevich (class piano), Leigh Unger (piano), Earle Voorhies (piano), Gerald 
Walker (oboe and woodwind methods), Page Williams (theory), Scott Zeidel (guitar) 

The Department of Music offers courses for both majors and non-majors. The fundamental purpose 
of the music curriculum is threefold: ( 1 ) to promote excellence in all aspects of music and academic 
coursework; (2) to provide basic preparation for careers in music; and (3) to promote interest in 
all musical and artistic endeavors in the university and the surrounding community. 

REQUIREMENTS OF THE DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC 

1 . All entering music majors must register for the Bachelor of Arts degree program for the first 
semester of residence. Students may change their degree objective to the Bachelor of Music 
program upon completion of at least one semester of coursework at the university, successful 
completion of an examination in applied music and recommendation of the coordinator in the 
appropriate area of concentration. 

2. A placement audition in the principal performance area (student's voice or instrument), and 
proficiency examinations in theory and basic piano will be given to all music majors at the time 
of entrance to the university. Each student must pass the proficiency examination in theory and 
basic piano before being approved for graduation. The basic piano requirement may also be 
satisfied by successful completion of Mu 282B. Students deficient in any of the above areas 
will be advised to take additional coursework. 

3. Each music major must declare a single principal performance area with the approval of a 
faculty adviser who will be assigned upon completion of the placement audition at the time 
of entrance. Before being approved for graduation, each student must achieve at least the 300 
level of performance proficiency in his area of principal performance. 

4. Each music major is required to present a senior recital appropriate to his degree program 
before being approved for graduation. In the music history and theory, conducting, composi- 
tion, accompanying and musical theatre programs, this requirement may be met by some 
means other than a conventional recital. All junior recitals and B.A. senior performance recitals 
are done in conjunction with enrollment in Music 371. B.M. senior recitals and B.A. recitals 
in history, theory, and conducting are done under Music 498. Consult the appropriate coordina- 
tor for more specific information. 

5. All undergraduate music majors are required to participate in a major performance ensemble 
(band, orchestra, opera or chorus) every semester. Students who declare wind or percussion 
as their principal performance area must register for band (or orchestra, if designated by the 
instrumental coordinator); string majors must register for orchestra; and voice majors must 
register for chorus (or opera, if designated by the choral-vocal coordinator). A music major 
whose principal performance area is piano, organ or guitar shall be assigned to an appropriate 
performance group by his faculty adviser. Exceptions to this requirement must be directed by 
petition to the department chair (see also 6d below). 


* University administrative officer 


110 Music 


6. The principal performance area for the major in music requires work in applied music, as 
follows: 

a. Music majors (except those covered in 6b below) must complete a minimum of six 
semesters (eight semesters for the Bachelor of Music) of applied music in the principal 
performance area. 

b. A student pursuing the Bachelor of Music (Composition) or the Bachelor of Arts ( Music 
History and Theory) may reach the 300 level in applied music before using all of the units 
designated in his degree requirements for that purpose. If the 300 level is reached before 
the required units in applied music (principal performance area) are expended, the 
remainder of these units may be used as music major electives. A music history and 
theory major may elect additional units in applied music only upon the recommendation 
of his adviser and the coordinator in his area of performance, and with the approval of 
the coordinator of applied music. The composition major must also complete six units 
of composition beyond Mu 422A culminating in the successful presentation of a senior 
recital of his own compositions. 

c. A student pursing the Bachelor of Music ( instrumental, keyboard, voice or accompanying 
specializations) must achieve the 300 level of performance proficiency before giving the 
junior recital, and must achieve the 400 level before giving the senior recital, and may 
not receive double lessons (two units) for more than three semesters at any given jury 
level. Specific information about jury level criteria is available in the Music Department 
Office. 

d. In order to receive state-funded lessons in applied music, an undergraduate student must 
be enrolled for a minimum of six units, two of which must be in an academic area of 
music (any courses other than performing ensembles and applied music), and must be 
making satisfactory progress toward a degree. If courses are dropped during the semester 
reducing his enrollment below the six-unit minimum, state-funded lessons will be with- 
held in a subsequent semester of enrollment. In order to receive state-funded lessons, the 
student also must be enrolled in an approved major performance ensemble or be excused 
from that requirement by means of a petition signed by the department chair. 

7. Senior transfer students entering Cal State Fullerton with a major in music, or graduate students 
in music entering to complete credential requirements are expected to complete a minimum 
of one semester of successful upper division work in music before they may be approved for 
admittance to teacher education Required courses and competencies must be satisfied before 
endorsement by the faculty committee for acceptance in the credential program. 

8. All credential candidates are required to pass functional examinations in piano and voice (in 
addition to the piano proficiency described in 2 above) before being approved for admittance 
to teacher education. This requirement may also be satisfied by successful completion of Mu 
282B and 283. 

9. A music major must maintain a 2.5 grade-point average in major field coursework at this 
institution in order to be approved for graduation. 

10. All exceptions to departmental or curricular requirements should be directed by petition to the 
department chair. 

MUSIC DECREE PROGRAMS 

The Department of Music offers a variety of courses and programs leading to baccalaureate and 
graduate degrees in teaching and the professions. The baccalaureate degree may be earned in either 
of two degree programs (Bachelor of Arts or Bachelor of Music). Within these patterns, a student 
will normally pursue an emphasis in music history and theory, music education, performance, 
composition, accompanying, or musical theatre. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN MUSIC 

The Bachelor of Arts in Music shall consist of no fewer than 50 units, of which at least 29 shall be 
in the upper division. All Bachelor of Arts students must complete the basic requirements in lower 
and upper division and in addition select and complete the requirements listed in one of iwo options: 
Music History-Theory Option or Music Education Option. 


Music 111 


Basic Requirements for the Bachelor of Arts in Music 

Lower Division 

Music theory (Mu 111A,B, 211) 

Music literature (Mu 251) 

Applied techniques (Ensemble 4, Principal Performance Area 4) 


Units 

9 

3 

_8 

20 


Upper Division 

Music theory (Mu 320A, 321 A)* 

Music history (Mu 351 A) 

8 


Music History and Theory Option 

This is designed as a balanced program in music history and theory and provides suitable preparation 
for advanced degrees in theory, literature or musicology and basic preparation for advanced study 
in other fields, such as musical acoustics, music therapy, ethnomusicology, library science in music, 


and music in industry and recreation. 

Basic requirements for the Bachelor of Arts 

Music theory (Mu 316, 321 B or C) 

Music history and literature (Mu 352A,B, 498, 499) 

Conducting and composition (Mu 391 A or 392 A or 422 A) 

Ensemble (Mu 361 ) 

Electives in music (conducting, history or theory) 


Units 

28 

4 

8 

2 

2 

_6 

50 


Allied requirements for Music History and Theory Option 

1. An academic minor (20 units) with written approval of the history or theory coordinator. 

2. Foreign language, preferably German, to be satisfied by one of the following. 

a. Four years study of foreign language at the secondary school level. 

b. Pass examination given by the Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures, or 

c. Completion of the second semester of the beginning university course in foreign language. 

Music Education Option 

This is designed to provide in-depth preparation for teaching in the California public schools under 
the provisions of the Teacher Preparation and Licensing Law of 1970 (Ryan Act). 

Instrumental Emphasis: ^ n !!l 

Basic requirements for the Bachelor of Arts 

Music history (Mu 351 

Orchestral instruments (Mu 281) 

Music theory (Mu 323A and 320B or 323B) 

Conducting (Mu 391 A, 392A,B, 362F) 

Ensemble (Mu 361) — 

50 


Vocal-Choral Emphasis: 

Basic requirement for the Bachelor of Arts 

Music history (Mu 351 B) 

Diction for singers (Mu 390) 

Orchestral instruments (Mu 281a,c,e,g) 

Conducting (Mu 391 A, B, 392A, 362F) 

Literature and interpretation (Mu 453, 457) 

Opera theatre (Mu 361 d) 

Ensemble (Mu 361) 


Units 

28 

3 
1 

4 
6 
4 
1 

_3 

50 


General Music Emphasis: 

Basic requirements for Bachelor of Arts 

• In the Music History and Theory Option, Mu 320B or 321C may be substituted for MU 320A. 


112 Music 


Music and child development (Mu 333) 3 

Conducting (Mu 391 A, B) 4 

Orchestral instruments (Mu 281a,c,e,g) 4 

Recreational instruments (Mu 381 B) 1 

Music in the classroom (Mu Ed 435) 3 

Music history (Mu 351 B) * 3 

Ensemble (Mu 361 ) 3 

Electives in music 1 

50 

TEACHING CREDENTIAL PREPARATION 


Students desiring a California teaching credential in music must complete the following courses prior 
to enrolling in the professional education program as required by the School of Education. 

Units 

Instrumental emphasis: Mu 342 B, 353, 399 5 

Choral-vocal emphasis: Mu 342 A, 354, 399 5 

General music emphasis: Mu 342 A, Mu Ed 441, 399 5 

Students who wish to earn a teaching credential in addition to a Bachelor of Arts with a music 
education option must complete the following: 

Units 

Mu Ed 442 (3) — professional education courses 9-12 

Student teaching, full-time 12 

21-24 

The following competency examinations must be passed prior to admission to teacher education: 
Theory 

Keyboard functional 
Voice functional 

Multiple Subject Instruction — Ryan Act 

The following three courses are recommended for all students intending to teach in the elementary 
schools in multiple subject classrooms: 


Units 
3 
3 
J 
9 

The following additional list of courses would be strongly recommended for any student who wishes 
to expand his knowledge in the arts: 

Art 100, 101, 103, 104, 107A, 201A,B, 310A,B, 320, 330, 340, and 380 
Dance 100, 112, 122, 125A,B, 132, 142, 152, 162, 206A,B, 323, 316A,B, 422 
Mu 100, 101, 1 1 1 A,B, 184A,B, 251. 281A,C,E,G, 283A, 381B, Mu Ed 435 
Theatre 100A,B, 211, 263A, 2/6A, 277, 370A,B, 402, 403, 41 1C 


Art 380 

Mu 333 

Theatre 402 


BACHELOR OF MUSIC 

This degree program is designed to provide training for the highly gifted students who show promise 
and capability of becoming professional performers and composers. 

This degree shall consist of no fewer than 70 semester units, of which at least 32 shall be in the upper 
division. 


Basic Requirements for the Bachelor of Music 

Music theory (Mu 111 A,B, 211) 

Music history and literature (Mu 251, 351 A) 

Principal performance area (Mu 171) 

Major performance ensemble 

Senior recital (Mu 498) 


Composition Specialization 

Basic requirements for the Bachelor of Music 

Music theory (Mu 316, 318, 320A,B, 321A and 321B or C, 323A, 422A) 
Music history and literature (Mu 352A,B) 


Units 

9 

6 

2 

4 

_i 

22 

Units 

22 

17 

6 


Music 113 


* Principal performance area 

Applied composition 

Major performance ensemble 

Electives in music 

Instrumental Specialization 

Basic requirements for the Bachelor of Music 

Music theory (Mu 316, 320A or B, 321 A, 323A, 422A) 

Music history and literature (351 B or 352A,B) 

Principal performance area 

Major performance ensemble 

Conducting (392A,B, 362F) 

Chamber music 

Electives in music 

Keyboard Specialization 

Basic requirements for the Bachelor of Music 

Music theory (Mu 316, 320A or B, 321 A, 422A) 

Music history and literature (Mu 351 B or 352A,B, 454A,B) 

Principal performance area 

Chamber music 

Accompanying 

Pedagogy (Mu 372 or 373, 467 A, B) 

Electives in music 

Voice Specialization 

Basic requirements for the Bachelor of Music 

Music theory (Mu 316, 320A or B, 321 A, 422A) 

Music history and literature (Mu 351 B or 352A,B, 456, 457A,B) 

Principal performance area 

Major performance ensemble (2 units minimum in Mu 361 d ) ... 

Diction (Mu 390A,B,C) 

Conducting 

Pedagogy 

Electives in music 


4 

5 
4 

12 

70 

Units 

22 

11 

3-6 

11 

4 

4 

6 

6-9 

70 

Units 

22 

9 

7-10 

11 

3 
1 

5 

9- 12 
70 

Units 

22 

9 

10- 13 
11 

4 
3 
2 
2 

4-7 

70 


Allied requirement for voice specialization: 

Two foreign languages, each to be satisfied by one of the following. 

a. Four years study of foreign language at the secondary school level, or 

b. A pass examination given by the Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures, or 

c. Completion of the second semester of the beginning university course in foreign 
language. 

Accompanying Specialization 

Basic requirements for the Bachelor of Music 

Music theory (Mu 316, 318, 320A or B, 321 A, 422A) 

Music history and literature (Mu 351 B or 352A,B, 455, 457A) 

Principal performance area 

Sight reading (Mu 385) 

Accompanying (Mu 386) 

Chamber music (Mu 363) 

Harpsichord class (Mu 372) 

Conducting (Mu 391 A) 

Diction (Mu 

Organ class (Mu 373) 

Electives in music 


Units 

22 

11 

8-11 


1 

2 

4 

1 

3^6 

70 


* See 6b under Requirements of the Department of Music. 


O'* Cv| CM cm 


114 Music 


Musical Theatre Specialization 

* Basic requirements for the Bachelor of Music 

Music theory (Mu 321 A or 323A) 

Music history and literature (Mu 351 B, 456) 

Principal performance area 

Major performance ensemble/workshop 

Diction (Mu 390D) 

Conducting (Mu 391 A or 392A) 

Music/Theatre workshop (465A, 4650 

Music/Theatre history (473) 

Theatre (Theatre 263A, 263B, 342A, 342B) 

Dance (Dance 102A,B or 206A,B) 


Minor in Music 


Units 

22 

2-3 

6 

5-6 

4 

1 

2 

6 

3 

14 

_4 

70 


The minor in music may be used as an appropriate area of study by persons whose majors are in 
other fields, or may be used to satisfy minor field requirements for elementary or secondary teaching 
credentials. A maximum of 1 2 units from the lower division may be included in work counted toward 
the music minor. The music minor requires a minimum preparation of 20 units. 


Composite of Lower Division and Upper Division (jnits 

Theory of music (selected from Mu 101, 111A,B, 211 or any 300- or 400-level theory 

classes for which student is qualified) 6 

Music history and literature (Mu 100, 251, 350 or courses at the 400- or 500-level 

for which student is qualified) 

Applied techniques (selected from Mu 183, 184A,B, 281 a-g, 283 or any course in 
ensemble, conducting, piano, voice and orchestral instruments at the 300 or 400 
level for which student is qualified 

20 

Mote: Students expecting to use the minor for teaching must complete four units of Mu 281 a-g 
and/or Mu 381 B Orchestral Instruments, and a minimum of two units in an ensemble appropriate 
to their area of specialization. 


MASTER OF ARTS IN MUSIC 

The program of studies leading to the Master of Arts in Music provides advanced studies in breadth 
as well as in an area of graduate specialization. The program is further intended to provide advanced 
coursework with a suitable balance in such music studies as theory, composition, history, literature, 
advanced techniques and music education. There are suitable graduate specializations in the areas 
of history and literature and performance. 

The Master of Arts in Music is designed for teachers and supervisors of music; persons intending 
to specialize in applied fields in the pursuit of occupational goals; individuals preparing for college 
teaching; and persons intending to pursue advanced degrees beyond the master's level 

PREREQUISITES 


An applicant must meet the university and school requirements for admission in classified graduate 
standing with the declared objective of this degree. These include: (a) possession of an acceptable 
baccalaureate degree from an accredited institution; (b) a major in music (or the equivalent of a 
maior ce., 29 upper division units in music), with a minimum grade-point average of 3.0 in the major 
. overa , (c) completion of a satisfactory audition or conference and a written essay in his 
area of specialization; and (d) the completion of Music 500 (Introduction to Graduate Studies in 
usic, 2 units). One objective of Music 500 is the selection of a Departmental Advisory Committee 
which aids the student ,n the preparation of a study plan listing all courses required for completion 
' ,? de ? ree T his s . ,udy P lan must receive the approval of the Departmental Advisory Committee 
a d the dean of graduate studies. Opportunity is given the student to remove deficiencies by taking 
certain prescribed courses, but such courses cannot be applied to the master's degree program. 
For admission in conditionally classified graduate standing with the declared objective of this degree, 
anapplicant must meet the university and school requirements: possession of an acceptable bacca- 

• Student may receive 498 credit for a leading role in a major production upon approval of instructor and area coordinator. 


Music 115 


laureate degree from an accredited institution and attainment of grade-point average of at least 2.5 
in the last 60 semester units attempted. In addition, each applicant will be required to audition in 
his area of specialization and to submit a written essay. 

Study Plan 

The degree program requires 30 units of graduate study, no more than nine of which shall be outside 
the field of music, and at least 15 of which must be in 500-level courses in music. The student must 
include Mu 500, Introduction to Graduate Studies in Music, within the first nine units taken as a 
graduate student. The degree program offers two options: Option I in History and Literature, or 
Option II in Performance A thesis is required in Option I; a thesis or project in Option II. In addition, 
in Option I the program will include at least six units of study outside the field of music, but supportive 
to the program. 

A written comprehensive examination will be required of all students prior to advancement to 
candidacy. In addition, for Option I only, the student must demonstrate reading ability in at least 
one foreign language, preferably German or French, prior to advancement to candidacy. 

For further information, consult the Department of Music. 

See also "The Program of Master's Degree" in this catalog and the Graduate Bulletin. 


MUSIC COURSES 


100 Introduction to Music (3) 

A basic approach to musical enjoyment and understanding through a general survey ot musical 
literature representative of various styles and performance media. Music will be related to other 
arts through lectures, recordings and concerts. Closed to music majors. 

101 Music Theory for Non-Music Majors (3) . . . . 

Basic theory and practical applications to further understanding of basic music principles and to 
improve music performance and listening skills. Includes sightsinging and relationsmp to key- 
board and simple melodic instruments. Closed to music majors. 

102 History of Jazz (3) , 4 

Historical study of jazz music in America, with emphasis on chronological development and stylistic 
evolution with consideration of peripheral trends. Emphasis on listening. Designed for the 
non-music major. 

111A,B Diatonic Harmony (3,3) , . , . . . 

A year course covering diatonic harmony and musicianship. Includes scales and intervals, triads and 
their inversions, harmonizations, nonharmonic tones, modulation and dominant sevent 
chords. Practical applications, to include sightsinging, dictation and keyboard harmonizations. 
(2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

171, 271, 371, 471 Individual Instruction (1-2) 

Prerequisite: jury recommendation. Individual study with approved instructor wit emp asis on 
technique and repertoire. Music majors must register for a minimum of one unit per semester. 
Performance majors approved by jury recommendation should reg.ster for two units per 
semester, jury examination required. May be repeated for credit. 


172 Piano Class for Piano Majors (1) ...... , 

Prerequisite: placement by coordinator. Group instruction in basic pianistic technique an rep 
May be repeated for credit. (2 hours activity) 


182A,B Piano Class for Music Majors (1,1) 

Fundamentals of keyboard technique for students whose major performance instrument is not 


piano. 


(2 hours activity) 

183 Voice Class for Non-majors (1) , , .. 

Beginning and elementary techniques in singing for the non-music major. May be repeated or ere i 

(2 hours activity) 

184 A Piano Class for Non-Majors (1) , , 

Prerequisite: Mu 101. Beginning and elementary instruction in basic piano techniques for the non- 
music major. (2 hours activity) 


116 Music 


196 Student-to-Student Tutorials (1-3) 

Prerequisites: A 3.0 or higher grade-point average and/or consent of instructor and simultaneous 
enrollment in the course or previous enrollment in a similar course or its equivalent. Consult 
University Curricula" in this catalog for more complete course description. 

211 Chromatic Harmony (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 1 1 1 B. Continuation of Mu 1 1 1 A,B with emphasis on the chromatic practice of the 
19th century. Includes secondary dominants; ninth, eleventh and thirteenth chords; sequence, 
and chromatically altered chords. Practical applications to include sightsinging, melodic and 
harmonic dictation, and keyboard practice. Required of all music majors. (2 hours lecture, 2 
hours activity) 

251 Survey of Musical Literature (3) 

An introductory course required of majors in the study of the literature of music in Western 
civilization. Open to minors and qualified students by consent of instructor. Students should be 
able to read music as a part of the analysis of form, design and style. (3 hours lecture) 

267 Observation in Applied Music (1) 

Prerequisites: piano major, sophomore standing. Observation of specialists in private music teaching, 
teaching techniques, materials, development of student and preparation for beginners, adult 
beginners, intermediate and early advanced students under the specialist in these areas Re- 
quires written reports of activity in these areas. 

281a-g Orchestral Instruments (1) 

Mu 281a,c,e, and g are required of all music credential candidates. Instrumental music candidates 
are required to take two additional units selected from Mu 281b, d, or f. (2 hours activity) 

281a String Instruments (1) 

Specialization on violin and viola. Violin and viola majors substitute Mu 281b for this course. 

281b String Instruments (1) 

Specialization on cello and string bass. Cello and bass majors are exempt. 

281c Brass Instruments (1) 

Specialization on trumpet and French horn. Trumpet and French horn majors substitute 281 d for 
this course. 

281d Brass Instruments (1) 

Specialization on trombone, baritone and tuba. Trombone and tuba majors are exempt. 

281e Woodwind Instruments (1) 

Specialization on clarinet and flute. Secondary emphasis on saxophone. Clarinet and flute majors 
substitute 281 f for this course. 

281f Woodwind Instruments (1) 

Specialization on oboe and bassoon. Oboe and bassoon majors are exempt. 

281 g Percussion Instruments (1) 

Specialization on the snare drum and mallet-played instruments with related work on other 
standard percussion instruments. Special consideration given to typical problems encountered 
with percussion in the public schools. Percussion majors are exempt. 

282A,B Piano Class for Music Majors (1,1) 

Prerequisite: Mu 182B or placement by instructor. Designed to meet music major minimum piano 
proficiency requirements for degree. Fundamentals of keyboard technique for students whose 
major performance field is not piano. Not required for keyboard majors. (2 hours activity) 

283 Voice Class (1) 


Prerequisite: placement by coordinator. Recommended for credential candidates. Not required for 
voice majors. (2 hours activity) 

2991 Clinical Practice in Instrumental Techniques (1) 

Clinical practice and field applications of instrumental techniques classes, as in public and private 
schools. Co-enrollment in Mu 281 recommended. (2 hours activity) 

299V Clinical Practice in Choral Techniques (1) 

Clinical practice and field applications of choral techniques classes, as in public and private schools. 
Co-enrollment in Mu 391 A recommended. (2 hours activity) 

300 Music of Today (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 100 or 101, or consent of instructor. Concentration on the musical trends of the 

f The e T h ! aS ' S l WI 1 be ° n wes,ern art music - but recent developments in jazz, 
rock and folk idioms will also be discussed. 


Music 11 7 


311 Advanced Harmony Skills (1) 

Prerequisites: Mu 211, audition and consent of instructor. Continuation of the laboratory work of 
Mu 211. For the advanced student. Emphasis on ear training with exercises in singing and/or 
keyboard. 

316 16th-Century Counterpoint (2) , , £ 

Prerequisite: Mu 21 1 or consent of instructor. Sixteenth-century counterpoint in two, three and tour 
parts, covering motet, canon, double counterpoint. 

318 18th-Century Counterpoint (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 316 or consent of instructor. Eighteenth-century counterpoint in two, three and four 
parts, covering invention, canon, double and triple counterpoint and fugue. 

320A.B 20th-Century Techniques (2,2) 

Prerequisite Mu 21 1. A survey of the compositional practices of the 20th century with emphasis on 
written examples in the various styles. Practical applications to include s.ghtsingmg, keyboard 
practice and dictation. A— Compositional techniques from 1890 to 1945. B— Compositional 
techniques since 1945, to include limited experience with the synthesis of sound. (1 hour 
lecture, 2 hours activity) 

321 A,B,C Form and Analysis (3,2,2) . , 

Prerequisite: Mu 211 or consent of instructor. A — Analysis of structural elements of music such as 
motive phrase and period; binary, tenary, rondo, sonato allegro and larger musical forms in 
representative musical works. Required of all music majors. B — Continuation of A, with empha- 
sis on larger musical works. C— Continuation of A and B with emphasis on literature of the 20th 


century. 

323 A, B Orchestration (2,2) . r u i 

Prerequisite: Mu 320, 321 A or consent of instructor. Writing and analysis of orchestral music. 

333 Music and Child Development (3) r , , . 

Prerequisite: Mu 101 or equivalent or successful completion of proficiency test. S^dy of the relation- 
ship of music to child growth and development, with emphasis on the child from 5 to 12. 

350 Music in Our Society (3) , 

Prerequisite: Mu 100 or consent of instructor. Designed to increase interest and an understanding 
of music in its relation to our general culture. A sociological approach which includes musical 
criticism and journalism, concert life, audience psychology and the political/religious/busmess 
aspects of the American musical scene. 

351 A, B History and Literature of Music (3,3) .. , 

Prerequisite: Mu 211 and 251 or consent of instructor. A— A study of the history and literature of 

music from early Creek beginnings through the Renaissance. B— A study of the history and 
literature of music covering the baroque, classic, romantic period and the 20th century. Re- 
quired of all music majors. 

352A,B History and Literature of Music from 1600 to the Present (3,3) . , 

Prerequisite: Mu 211 and 251, or consent of instructor. A— Historical and stylistic st udy the 
baroque and classic periods. B— Historical and stylistic study in the romantic period and I 20th 
century. May be used to replace 351 B. If used to fulfill music history requirements, both A and 
B sections of Mu 352 must be completed. This course is recommended to all music majors who 
intend to continue music study at the graduate level. 

353 Survey of Instrumental Music Materials (2) . , ,, 

Prerequisite: Mu 392A. Through examination and analysis of multiple examples of the reperto y, 

this course is designed to develop skills in the practical use of instrumental literature for 
performance in secondary schools and community colleges. 

354 Survey of Public School Choral Music Materials (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 391 A. Examination and analysis of multiple examples of choral repertoire u 
for junior and senior high choruses. 

361 a-h Major Performance Ensemble (1) ™ 

The study and performance of standard and contemporary music literature. Public concerts on 
campus and in the community are included in the scheduled activities each semester and 
participation is required. A concert tour may be included by some groups. (More than 3 hours 
major production.) May be repeated for credit. 

361a Symphony Orchestra (1) , 

Open to all university students and qualified adults in the community by audition or consent of 

instructor. 


118 Music 


361b University Choir (1) 

Open to all university students with consent of instructor. 

361c University Concert Band (1) 

Open to all university students with consent of instructor. 

361 d Opera Theatre (1) 

Study of roles and representative excerpts from standards and contemporary operas and the basic 
musical, dramatic and language techniques of the musical theatre. Performance of operatic 
excerpts and complete operas. 

361 e University Singers (1) 

Membership restricted to advanced voice students or those accepted by audition. 

361f University Wind Ensemble (1) 

Membership restricted to advanced wind and percussion students accepted by audition. 

361 g University Chorale (1) 

Open to upper division and graduate student with consent of instructor. Audition necessary. 

361 h Symphonic Band (1) 

Open to all university students by audition or consent of instructor. 

362A Wind Ensemble — Jazz Ensemble (1) 

Open to qualified students by audition or consent of instructor. Public performances on campus and 
in the community are scheduled each semester. 

362B Wind Ensemble — University Band (1) 

Open to all university students with consent of instructor. University Band provides music for Titan 
football and basketball home games. 

362C Vocal Ensemble (1) 

Study and performance of choral literature of the Renaissance and baroque periods. Open only to 
students by audition. Public performance required. (2 hours activity) 

362D Percussion Ensemble (1) 

Study and performance of music written for the Percussion Ensemble. Open to any qualified student 
with consent of instructor. (2 hours activity) 

362E Brass Ensemble (1) 

The study and performance of music written for large brass choir/ensemble. Open to any qualified 
student with consent of instructor. May be repeated for credit. (2 hours activity) 

362F Conducting Laboratory Ensemble — Instrumental (1) 

A non-performing ensemble composed of orchestral instruments (strings, woodwinds, brass and 
percussion) which functions as a laboratory ensemble for instrumental conducting students. 
Literature covered is of limited difficulty. Required of students enrolled in Mu 392A; open to 
all students. (2 hours activity) 

362G String Ensemble (1) 

Study and performance of string orchestra literature covering all periods of musical style. 

Open to students by audition or consent of instructor. 

362H Chamber Orchestra (1) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Study and performance of representative chamber orchestra 
literature. Open to university students and qualified adults in the community. 

362K Keyboard Workshop (1) 

Weekly workshop performances by students, faculty and guests. Open to all students. 

362L Jazz Laboratory (2) 

Prerequisite: ability to read music. A study in the commercial as well as artistic aspects of composing, 
arranging and improvisation. Included in the course are melodizing harmony, the 32 bar song, 
composing and recording jingles, and the mechanics of jazz improvisation. 

362V Vocal Workshop (1) 

Application of vocal technique to performance practices through lecture— demonstrations, master 
classes and ancillary recitals. 

363b-x Chamber Music Ensembles (1) 

Open to all qualified wind, string or keyboard students. Ensembles will study, read and perform 
representative chamber literature of all periods. (2 hours activity) 

363b Brass 

363g Guitar 

363k Keyboard 

363r Renaissance 


Music 119 


363s Strings 

363w Woodwind 

363x Saxophone 

367 Pedagogy Internship (1) 

Prerequisites: Mu 267 and 467A. Supervised internship in private piano teaching. 

372 Harpsichord Class for Music Majors (1) 

Prerequisite: 300-jury level in piano or organ or consent of instructor. The study of the harpsichord 
as an instrument, the application of baroque stylistic characteristics, and training in the rudi- 
ments of continuo playing in ensemble with voices and instruments. (2 hours activity) 

373 Organ Class for Music Majors (1) 

Prerequisite: 300-jury level in piano. The study of the organ as an instrument, the playing techniques, 
and repertoire. Instruction will include the differences between piano and organ techniques. (2 
hours activity) 

374 Keyboard Improvisation (2) 

Prerequisite: 200 level in keyboard applied music or consent of instructor. Emphasis on development 
of ability to modulate, transpose, read scores, and improvise at a moderately advanced level. 

381B Survey of Recreational Instruments (1) 

A general survey of recreational instrument practices for credential candidates. (2 hours activity) 

385 Keyboard Sight-reading (2) 

Prerequisite: 200-jury level in piano or organ or consent of instructor. Analysis of sightreading skills 
and procedures. Emphasis on development of ability to read solo, ensemble and scores without 
hesitation at first sight. (4 hours activity) 

386 Piano Accompanying (1) 

Prerequisite: by audition only. The study and performance of piano accompaniments for instrumen- 
talists, vocalists and ensembles. Participation in rehearsals, recitals and concerts required. (2 
hours activity) 

390A,B,C,D Diction for Singers (1, 1,1,1) 

Prerequisite: sophomore standing or consent of instructor. Study of proper singing diction; may not 
be considered a substitute for formal language study. Examples from standard vocal literature 
explained through the use of the International Phonetic Alphabet. A — Italian. B — German. C 
— French. D — English. 

391 A, B Choral Conducting (2,2) 

Prerequisite: one semester of voice class or consent of instructor. A — Principles, techniques and 
methods of conducting choral groups. Required of all music education majors. (4 hours activ- 
ity) B— Continuation of 391 A including laboratory work with class and vocal ensembles, using 
standard choral repertoire. (4 hours activity) 

392A,B Instrumental Conducting (1,2) 

Prerequisite: two courses from 281 a-g or consent of instructor. A — Principles, techniques and 
methods of conducting orchestral and band groups. Required of all music education majors. 
(2 hours activity) B— Continuation of 392 A, including laboratory experience in conducting 
instrumental groups, using standard instrumental literature. (4 hours activity) 

393 Music Instrument Care and Repair (2) 

Study of the care and repair of band and orchestra instruments. Practical experience in the preventa- 
tive maintenance of music instruments, and basic repairs which require a minimal amount of 
equipment, skill and time. 

3% Internship: Professional Experience (1-3) 

Fieldwork experience in music under supervision of resident faculty and professionals in the field. 
Requires minimum six hours fieldwork per week for each unit credit. May be repeated for credit 
to a maximum of six units. Open to all music students by consent of instructor. 

3991 Clinical Practice in Instrumental Conducting (1) 

Prerequisite: Mu 2991. Clinical practice and field applications of concepts, materials and proce- 
dures as applied to field situations, as in public and private schools. Co-enrollment in Mu Ed 
342 B. 

399V Clinical Practice in Choral Conducting (1) 

Prerequisite: Mu 299V. Clinical practice and field applications of concepts, materials and procedures 
as applied to field situations, as in public and private schools. Co-enrollment in Mu Ed 342A. 

400 Concert Music (1) 

Weekly performances by university students, faculty and performing organizations, with lectures and 


120 Music 


discussions relative to the performing arts. Attendance required at additional concerts during 
the semester. Open to all students. May be repeated for credit. 

401 Criticism of the Arts (3) 

Prerequisite: senior or graduate standing in the School of the Arts or consent of instructor. Develop- 
ment of criteria and vocabulary for criticism of the visual and performing arts through lectures, 
readings, discussions, and exhibit and performance attendance. Emphasis on descriptive and 
evaluative skills in music, art, theatre, dance and cinema criticism. 

422A,B Composition (2,2) 

Prerequisites: Mu 316, 320 and 321 A or consent of instructor. A — Ear-training analysis of smaller 
forms, simple composition of two- and three-part song form styles. B — Analysis and writing of 
more complex musical forms. 

433 Music in Early Childhood (3) 

Prerequisite: ability to read and perform simple songs and games for young children. Songs, games, 
creative activities and materials suitable for young children in nursery school and early child- 
hood education (approximately 3-6 years). Class stresses teaching-learning strategies. Field 
work is conducted in a neighboring public school. 

451 Composer Survey (1) 

An examination of the life, times and compositions of a selected composer. Completion of all lower 
division theory courses required for enrollment. May be repeated for credit with different 
content. 

453A,B Choral Literature and Interpretation (2,2) 

Prerequisites: MU 391 A or equivalent and 351 A, B. A — The study of choral literature from the 
medieval, renaissance and baroque eras analyzed in historical perspective. Appropriate per- 
formance practices will be examined. B — Continuation of A with representative examples from 
the classic, romantic and contemporary eras. 

454A,B Piano Literature and Interpretation (2,2) 

Prerequisite: 351 A,B and junior level piano standing or consent of instructor. Study and performance 
of representative styles and schools of piano literature, with particular reference to solo and 
ensemble repertoire. A — Concentration on contrapuntal forms, sonatas and variations. B — 
Concentration on concerti, character pieces, fantasies, suites and etudes. 

455 Instrumental Chamber Literature and Interpretation (3) 

Open to all music majors, or to non-majors by consent of instructor. Members of the class will be 
grouped into ensembles for demonstration purposes. Emphasis on the stylistic differences 
required in performing works of all periods. 

456 Opera Literature and Interpretation (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 351 A, B or consent of instructor. Study of all periods and nationalities, including 
stylistic and historical connotations. 

457 A Song Literature and Interpretation (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 390B or consent of instructor. Study and performance of German Lieder with 
representative examples of periods and styles. 

457B Song Literature and Interpretation (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 390A or consent of instructor. Study and performance of Italian, French, Russian, 
English and American art songs, with representative examples of periods and styles. 

458 Collegium Musicum Practicum (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 351 A,B or consent of instructor. The study and performance of rare and old music, 
both instrumental and vocal. Techniques of musical research will be applied. Students should 
be competent performers. 

459 Guitar Literature, Interpretation and Pedagogy (3) 

Prerequisite: 300-jury level in guitar or consent of instructor. A survey of the literature available to 
guitarists. Includes works for lute, vihuela and baroque guitar as well as the compositions and 
transcriptions for the modern guitar. An introduction to materials and methods essential for the 
guitar instructor. 

460 Interpretation of Early Music (3) 

Prerequisite: 300-jury level in principal performance area. A survey of the various stylistic interpreta- 
tions of vocal and instrumental literature from the 16th, 17th and 18th centuries. Designed for 
the senior or graduate student majoring in performance. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

467A,B,C Piano Pedagogy (2,2,1) 

Prerequisite: junior piano standing or consent of instructor. Fundamentals of piano pedagogy, with 


Music 121 


reference to individual and group instruction. A — Survey of materials and methods for beginning 
and elementary students. Supervised teaching. B — Survey of materials and methods of interme- 
diate and early advanced students. Physiology and psychology for studio teachers. Supervised 
teaching. C— Prerequisite: 467A or consent of instructor. Observation and practice teaching 
while learning organizational procedures, teaching techniques and course literature for class 
piano. 

468 A, B Vocal Pedagogy (2,2) ... 

Prerequisite: senior standing or consent of instructor. A — Fundamentals of vocal pedagogy with 
reference to studio and public school teaching, with consideration of physiology and acoustics 
as they apply to singing. B— Practical application of the fundamentals discussed in A. The 
student will participate in seminar discussions and be observed in an actual studio teaching 
situation. Emphasis will be on the diagnosis and cure of specific vocal problems. 

4% Student-to-Student Tutorials (1-3) 

Prerequisites: A 3.0 or more grade point average and/or consent of instructor and simultaneous 
enrollment in the course or previous enrollment in a similar course or its equivalent. Consult 
"University Curricula" in this catalog for more complete course description. 

497 Senior Project (1) ....... 

Intensive independent investigation of an area of special interest in music culminating in a public 
performance, lecture, lecture-recital or other suitable demonstration. 

498 Senior Recital (1) . 

Prerequisites: 371-level (471-level for performance majors) and consent of instructor. Intensive 
preparation and presentation of representative works in the principal performance area. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) . 

Study of a special topic in music selected in consultation with the instructor and carried out under 

his supervision. May be repeated for credit. 

500 Introduction to Graduate Study in Music (2) , 

Required of all graduate music majors. Study of basic bibliography, literature, and research tec 
niques and materials useful in graduate music study. 

523 Advanced Orchestration (2) . . 

Prerequisite: Mu 323B. Analysis and practice of traditional and contemporary orchestration tec 
niques. Scoring of music for large ensembles such as orchestra, band, chorus and orchestra, or 
chorus and band. 


524 Seminar in Music Theory (2) . . 

Deals with a variety of theoretical subjects (form /style analysis, history of music theory, etc.) o 
be chosen by instructor. May be repeated for credit. 

551 Seminar in Music of the Medieval Period (2) . 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. A detailed study of the music forms, structures and styles from 

500 to 1450. Detailed analysis of important representative works as well as the contributions 
of individual composers and theoretical writers. 

552 Seminar in Music of the Renaissance (2) ... 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. A comprehensive study of the forms, styles, and development 

characteristic^ of music between 1450 and 1600. Detailed analysis of selecte wor s y repre 
sentative composers and theoretical writers. 

553 Seminar in Music of the Baroque Period (2) . 

Prerequisite: Mu 351 A, B or consent of instructor. Musical forms, styles, and performance practices 
of the baroque period. Detailed analysis of significant representative wor s. 

554 Seminar in Music of the Classic Period (2) . 

Prerequisite: Mu 351 A, B or consent of instructor. A study of the history and literature of music o 
approximately 1750 to 1825. Detailed analysis of important representative works. 

555 Seminar in Music of the Romantic Period (2) , 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. An intensive study of the structure and deve opmen o mu i 
in the 19th century. Detailed analysis of important representative works. 

556 Seminar in 20th-Century Music (2) . _ , 

Prerequisite: Mu 351 A,B or consent of instructor. Developments in the music of western Europe and 
the western hemisphere since 1890. Intensive study of contemporary music and its structure. 

557 Seminar in Musicology (2) _ . .. .. 

Prerequisites: at least two courses from Mu 551-556 and consent of instructor. Detailed investigation 
and systematic analysis of specific developments in musicology including exercises in transcrip- 
tions from old notations and historical investigations prepared by members of the seminar. 


122 Music 


558 Collegium Musicum (2) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Advanced studies in the performance of rare and old music. (See 
Mu 458 for general description.) May be repeated for credit. 

559 Composer Studies (2) 

An examination of the life, times and musical style of a selected composer. A seminar for graduate 
students in music, conducted through lectures, discussion sessions and analytical projects. 
Open to seniors in music by consent of instructor. May be repeated for credit with different 
content. 

571 Individual Instruction (1-2) 

Prerequisite, jury recommendation. Individual instruction with approved instructor with emphasis 
on performance techniques and repertory. Required of all graduate students whose terminal 
project is the graduate recital. 

591 Seminar in Advanced Choral Conducting and Interpretation (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 391 B, conducting experience or consent of instructor. Advanced problems in choral 
conducting techniques, with emphasis on laboratory work with student groups and in concert 
conducting. 

592 Seminar in Advanced Instrumental Conducting and Interpretation (2) 

Prerequisites: Mu 392B, keyboard facility for score reading and consent of instructor. Advanced 
study of conducting techniques. Interpretive problems of each period covered in lectures 

597 Project (1-3) 

Systematic study and report of a significant undertaking in the area of musical composition, musical 
performance, or other related creative activity. A written critical evaluation of the work or 
activity will be required. 

598 Thesis (3) 

Individual investigations of specific problems in the area of concentration by candidates for the M A 
degree. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing in music and consent of instructor. Research and study projects in 
areas of specialization beyond regularly offered coursework. Oral and written reports required. 


MUSIC EDUCATION COURSES 

342A,B Practicum in School Materials and Techniques (2,2) 

De Tr^n f0r , ,he "T C educa,ion ma [ or Experience in the use of musical materials, conducting, 

nioues M?c. a h d , m if na8ement ' Odserva ' 1 ' on and application of rehearsal and classroom tech- 
niques. Must be taken concurrently with Mu 399. A-Choral. Prerequisite: Mu 391 A, B B- 
Instrumental. Prerequisite: Mu 392A,B. 

435 Music in the Modern Classroom (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 333 or consent of instructor. A survey of 20th-century materials and techniques of 
Efi* for «eat.ve movement to music, and of choral materials and techniques appropriate 
aai t 1 elementary school choir. Adaptation of materials for use in classroom music 

441 Teaching General Music in Secondary Schools (2) 

Prer mplhln ad ™ sio f n to teacher education, senior standing or consent of instructor. Objectives, 
° i ‘f aC I" 8 8eneral T Sk ° r 3llied act-humanities classes in secondary 
nmhu % h relationship to specialized instrumental and choral programs. Practical 

problems and field work applications are included. 

442 Principles and Methods of Teaching Music in the Public Schools (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. History, principles of public education, grades K-12, 

and h teadiTne e m P s aSIS °"i mUS ' C Phllo * ophy ' methods, materials and procedures for organizing 
and teaching music in elementary and secondary schools 

444 Administration, Materials for the Marching Band (2) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. A study of techniques, materials, administration for marching 

ootba " fieid and parade ac,ivi,ies ' with particuiar «•«*•* ° n 

449A Student Teaching in Music in the Secondary School (10) 

” * yin Acl 


Theatre 123 


449B Student Teaching Seminar (2) 

Must be taken concurrently with MuEd 449A. For candidates who have declared for the Ryan Act 
credential. See description and prerequisites under Division of Teacher Education. 

530 Practicum of Research in Music Education (2) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing in music and completion of Mu 500. Research techniques and 
procedures in music education. Students will be required to complete a creative project or 
research paper. 

531 Foundations of Music Education (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 500. Study of philosophical and historical bases which have influenced music 
education. Identification of philosophic frames of leading educators. Contemporary trends 
which affect the teaching of music in the schools. Prerequisite for all graduate music education 
courses. 

532 Seminar in Music Education (2) 

Studies in the trends and application of educational theory in relation to the teaching of music in 
the public schools. 

544 Curriculum Planning and Construction in Music (2) 

Principles and practices of curriculum planning in music education, with special reference to the 
public elementary, junior and senior high school. Required of majors who intend to complete 
supervision credential. 

545 Leadership in Music Education (2) 

Open to music education majors with teaching experience. Philosophy, principles and practices of 
leadership in music in the public elementary and secondary schools. Emphasis on modern 
principles of leadership, types of services, organization, management and evaluation of pro- 
grams of instruction. Required of candidates for supervisory credential. 

DEPARTMENT OF THEATRE 

FACULTY 
Alvin Keller 
Department Chair 

Joseph Arnold, Philip Cleveland, john Davis, Ronald Dieb, Marjorie Farmer, Donald Henry,* Dean 
Hess, Frederick Hunt, josh Kanin, Gretchen Kanne, Michael McPherson, R. Kirk Mee, Sallie 
Mitchell, S. Todd Muffatti, Dwight Odle, jerry Pickering, William Raoul, Robert Renee, Darrell 
Winn, james Young,* Allen Zeltzer* 

The Department of Theatre program includes the several fields of playwriting, oral interpretation, 
acting-directing, technical theatre, theatre history and theory, radio-television-film and dance. Spe- 
cifically, the coursework is arranged to provide opportunities for students ( 1 ) to develop an ap- 
preciation for the theatre; (2) to become aware, as audience or participants of the shaping force 
of the theatre in society; (3) to improve the understandings and skills necessary for work in the 
theatre as a profession; (4) to prepare for teaching theatre; and (5) to pursue graduate studies. 
To qualify for a baccalaureate degree with a major in theatre, students must have a C or better in 
all courses required for the degree. No credit toward the major will be allowed for specific major 
courses in which a grade of D is obtained. Theatre majors must maintain a 2.5 grade-point average 
in their major for graduation. In addition to course requirement, all students will enroll for two units 
of Theatre 478 each semester. 

bachelor of arts in theatre arts 

Course programs have been planned to meet the individual needs and interests of students working 
for the Bachelor of Arts in Theatre Arts. 

Plan I is for those who wish to study theatre as a cultural contribution or who wish to pursue graduate 
degrees in theatre with emphasis in theatre history and theory. It is strongly recommended that 
students electing this plan support the major with approved electives from art, music, foreign 
l an guages, literature, philosophy or speech. 

Plan II is designed to develop the necessary competency for pursuing theatre as a profession or for 
Pursuing graduate degrees in theatre with an emphasis in an area of concentration other than history 
°f the theatre. Areas of concentration are: playwriting; acting; directing; oral interpretation, radio- 
television-film; technical theatre and dance. 

Plan III meets the requirements of the teaching credential with specialization in secondary teaching. 
University administrative officer 


124 Theatre 


In addition to the requirements listed below for the major, students must meet the other university 
requirements for a bachelor of arts degree. Students following Plan III also must meet any specific 
requirements for the desired teaching credential (see section in catalog for School of Education). 
Those students who plan to work on the M.A. degree as well as the credential should see the chair 
of the Department of Theatre. 


PLAN I: THEATRE HISTORY AND THEORY EMPHASIS 

Lower Division: Theatre 200, Art of the Theatre (3); Theatre 263, Acting (3); Theatre 
276A,B, Technical Production (6); Theatre 277, Costume Fundamentals (3) or 
Theatre 285, Theatrical Makeup (3); Theatre 110, Introduction to Oral Interpreta- 
tion (3) 

Upper Division: Theatre 370A, Fundamentals of Directing (3); Theatre 475A,B,C,D, 
World Theatre (12); Theatre 477A,B, Senior Seminar in Critical Techniques (6); 
Theatre 472, American Theatre (3); electives (3 units) 


PLAN II: PROFESSIONAL EMPHASIS IN AN AREA OF CONCENTRATION 

Playwriting — 

Lower Division: Same as in Plan I. 

Upper Division: Theatre 364, Seminar in Play writing (6), or Theatre 364 (3) and 
Theatre 383, Television Writing (3); Theatre 370A,B, Fundamentals of Directing 
(6); Theatre 468, Experimental Theatre (3); Theatre 475A,B,C,D, World Theatre 
(12); Theatre 477 A, B, Senior Seminar in Critical Techniques (6) 

Oral Interpretation — 

Lower Division: Theatre 110, Introduction to Oral Interpretation (3); Theatre 263, 
Acting (3); Theatre 200, Art of the Theatre (3); Theatre 210, Advanced Oral 
Interpretation (3); Theatre 276A,B, Technical Production (6); Theatre 277, Cos- 
tume Fundamentals (3) or Theatre 285, Theatrical Makeup (3) 

Upper Division: Theatre 310, Oral Interpretation of Shakespeare (3); Theatre 
410A,B,C, Oral Interpretation of Prose, Poetry and Drama (9); Theatre 414 
Readers Theatre (3); Theatre 475A,B,C,D, World Theatre (12), Theatre 477 K, 
Senior Seminar in Critical Techniques (3) 

The major in theatre with an emphasis in interpretation requires 21 units in supportive 
courses from related areas such as stage lighting, art, literature, composition, 
linguistics, speech, philosophy to be selected in consultation with the student's 
adviser. 


Acting— Lower Division: Theatre 110, Introduction to Oral Interpretation (3); Theatre 
200, Art of the Theatre (3); Theatre 241, Voice Production for the Performer (3); 
Theatre 251, Body Movement for the Actor (3); Theatre 263, Acting (3); Theatre 
276A, Technical Production (3); Theatre 277, Costume Fundamentals (3)- 

Theatre 285, Theatrical Makeup (3) 

Upper Division: Theatre 310, Oral Interpretation of Shakespeare (3); Theatre 370A 
Fundamentals of Directing (3); Theatre 363A.B, Intermediate Acting (6)- Theatre 
463 A, B, Advanced Acting (6), Theatre 475AB,C,D, World Theatre (12)! Theatre 
482, Acting for Film and Television (3) 


Theatre Core: Theatre 200, Art of the Theatre (3); Theatre 263, Acting (3); Theatre 
276A.B, Technical Production (6); Theatre 370A, Fundamentals of Directing (Si- 
Theatre 383, Television Writing (3); Theatre 386, Beginning Lighting (3); Theatre 

475A,B,C,D,E, World Theatre (6) 

Radio-Television Core: Theatre 284, Introduction to Television Productions (3) : 
Theatre 371, Radio Production (3); Theatre 380, Introduction to Radio andTelevi- 
sion (3); Theatre 381, Radio and Television Announcing (3); Theatre 384 Televi- 
sion Production and Direction (3); Theatre 484, Television Dramatic Techniques 

(3); Theatre 490, Television/Film Aesthetics and Criticism (3) 

Film Core: Theatre 290A.B History and Aesthetics of Motion Pictures (6); Theatre 
392A,B Dramatic Film Productions (6); Theatre 490, Television/Film Aesthetics 
and Criticism (3); Theatre 492A,B, Advanced Dramatic Film Production (6) 
Electives: 9 units selected from Theatre 110, Introduction to Oral Interpretation (3)- 
Theatre 241 Voice Production for the Performer (3); Theatre 277, Costume 
Fundamentals (3); Theatre 285, Theatrical Makeup (3); Theatre 288, Design for 
the Theatre (3); Theatre 486, Advanced Lighting (3). 


Units 


18 

27 

Units 


33 


21 


30 


24 


33 


27 


21 

21 


Theatre 125 


Directing— Lower Division: Theatre 200, Art of the Theatre (3); Theatre 263, Acting 
(3); Theatre 276A,B, Technical Production (6); Theatre 277, Costume Fundamen- 
tals (3); Theatre 284, Introduction to TV Production (3); Theatre 285, Theatrical 

Makeup (3) 

Upper Division: Theatre 350, Organization for Production (1 ); Theatre 370A,B, Funda- 
mentals of Directing (6); Theatre 384, Television Production and Direction (3); 
Theatre 386, Beginning Lighting (3); Theatre 470A,B, Advanced Directing (8); 
Theatre 475A,B,C,D, World Theatre (12); electives, 3 upper division units in 

technical theatre 

Technical Production/ Design Major — Lower Division: Theatre 200, Art of the 
Theatre (3); Theatre 263, Acting (3); Theatre 276A,B, Technical Production (6); 
Theatre 277, Costume Fundamentals (3); Theatre 285, Theatrical Makeup (3); 

Theatre 288, Design for the Theatre (3) 

Upper Division: Theatre 350, Organization for Production (1 ); Theatre 370A, Funda- 
mentals of Directing (3); Theatre 386, Beginning Lighting (3); Theatre 450, 
Theatre Management (3); Theatre 475A,B,C,D, World Theatre (12); 3 units se- 
lected from: Theatre 377, Stage Costuming (3); Theatre 387, Audio Techniques 

(3); or Theatre 388, Historical Styles (3) 

Electives: 9 units from Theatre 284, Introduction to Television Production (3); 
Theatre 376A,B, Advanced Technical Production (6); Theatre 385, Advanced 
Theatre Makeup (3); Theatre 486, Advanced Lighting (3); Theatre 488, Seminar: 

Advanced Design (3) • 

Dance — Lower Division: Theatre 200 (3); Dance 100 (3); Dance 226 (3); ten units 
selected from Dance 112, 122, 126A,B, 132, 142, 152, 162, 212, 222, 232, 242, 262; 

six units selected from: Theatre 276A, 277, 285 

Upper division: Dance 323 (3); Dance 375 (3); Dance 383 (3); Dance 422 (3); Dance 
423 (3); Dance 475 (3); six units by advisement selected from Theatre 350, 386, 
387, 450, 486; three units selected from Theatre 363A, 370A; three units selected 

from Dance 316A,B, 336A,B; 426, 462 

PLAN III: TEACHING EMPHASIS (Single Subject) 

Lower Division: Theatre 110, Introduction to Oral Interpretation (3); Theatre 200, Art 
of the Theatre (3); Theatre 263, Acting (3); Theatre 276A,B, Technical Production 


Upper Division: Theatre 342, Simplified Technical Production (3); Theatre 370A,B, 
Fundamentals of Directing (6); Theatre 386, Beginning Lighting (3); Theatre 402, 
Dramatic Activities for Children (3); Theatre 403, Theatre for Children (3); 
Theatre 41 4, Readers Theatre (3); Theatre 450, Theatre Management (3); Theatre 
470A, Advanced Directing (4); Theatre 475A,D,E, World Theatre (9) 


21 


36 


21 


25 


9 

25 


30 

Units 


15 


37 


master of arts in theatre arts 

The Master of Arts in Theatre Arts is designed to provide a program of coordinated graduate studies 
built on the framework of the undergraduate preparation; to provide added incentive for intellectual 
growth reflected in improvement in teaching and professional recognition; and to provide a sound 
basis for continued graduate study in the field of theatre. The student is expected to demonstrate 
3 high degree of intellectual and creative competence and to demonstrate mastery of one of the areas 
of emphasis in theatre: (1) acting and directing, (2) dance, (3) dramatic literature and criticism, 
(4) oral interpretation, (5) playwriting, (6) radio and television, (7) theatre for children, (8) theatre 
history; (9) technical theatre. 

Prerequisites 

An applicant must meet the university requirements for admission in conditionally classified graduate 
standing: a baccalaureate degree from an accredited institution and a grade-point average of at least 
2-5 in the last 60 semester units attempted (see section of this catalog on admission of graduates 
for complete statement and procedures). 

A student who meets the requirements for conditionally classified graduate standing, as well as the 
following requirements, may be admitted as a classified graduate upon the development of an 
approved study plan: an appropriate undergraduate major in theatre, with a grade-point average of 
3.0 in all upper division work in the major, or at least 24 units of appropriate upper division work 
in theatre, with a GPA of 3.0; Theatre 477 A, Senior Seminar in Critical Techniques, or in the case 
of tranfer students, its equivalent. Upon recommendation of the student s graduate committee, 
additional prerequisites may be required prior to classification and the approval of the area of 


126 Theatre 


emphasis. Students will complete an oral interview as early as possible before becoming classified. 

Study Plan 

The degree study plan in theatre will include at least 30 units of adviser-approved graduate studies, 
15 units of which must be 500-level courses. Each program will have 24 units in theatre, including 
a core of six units (Theatre 500, Introduction to Graduate Study — which must be taken in the first 
semester of graduate study; Theatre 597, Project; or Theatre 598, Thesis) and six units of adviser- 
approved supporting courses in related fields either in other departments or within the Theatre 
Department. Before the degree is granted each student will pass oral and written examinations. 
Students will be permitted to take the written examination twice. 

For further information, consult the Department of Theatre. See also "The Program of Master's 
Degrees" in this catalog and the Graduate Bulletin. 


THEATRE COURSES 

100 Introduction to the Theatre (3) 

A nontechnical survey course for the general student leading to an appreciation and understanding 
of the theatre as an entertainment medium and as an art form. Field trips to certain significant 
productions. Recommended for non-majors 

102 Play Bill (3) 

An introduction to the theatregoing experience. Attendance at stage plays, films and a wide variety 
of other theatrical productions both on and off campus, including discussions with directors, 
actors and designers. Students will be expected to purchase low-charge, group-rate admission 
tickets as part of course requirement. Recommended for non-majors. 

110 Introduction to Oral Interpretation (3) (Formerly 211) 

An introduction to the basic techniques for the analysis and performance of literature by the 
interpreter. 

163 Beginning Acting (3) (Formerly 263A) 

Laboratory practice and discussions of the form and content of acting. Improvisation, action motiva- 
tion, and behavior. Recommended for non-majors. May be repeated for credit (6 hours 
activity) 


180 Great Moments in Radio and TV (3) (Formerly 280) 

Presentation and analysis of selected radio and television programs presented from 1926 to the 
present, including guest artists from the radio and television industry. 

200 Art of the Theatre (3) 

Introduction to theatre as an art form, involving the interrelated processes of playwriting, directing, 
acting, design and theatre management. Includes study of current plays, films and television with 
emphasis on dramatic analysis and cultural significance. Required of all theatre majors. 

210 Advanced Oral Interpretation (3) (Formerly 311) 

The application of advanced techniques for the analysis and performance of literature May be 
repeated for credit with consent of instructor. 

241 Voice Production for the Performer (3) 

Fundamental techniques, methods and training to give the actor maximum use of his voice in theatre. 
Correction of speech faults and regional accents. Introduction to problems of stage dialects. 
Study of basic interpretive material. May be repeated for credit. (6 hours activity) 

251 Body Movement for the Actor (3) 

Fundamenta! work in developing the body as an expressive instrument; acquiring of strength, 
flexibility relaxat 10 !!, control. Establishment of an awareness of and coordination of relationship 
ot the body to the creative project. May be repeated up to six units of credit. (6 hours activity) 

263 Acting (3) (Formerly 263B) 


Improvisations, exercises, and techniques of the stage. Studies in motivation and behavior leading 
to problems in characterization. May be repeated for credit. 

276A,B Technical Production (3,3) 

Prerequisite. 276A is prerequisite to B. Study and practice in planning and construction of stage and 
television scenery including use of tools, stage equipment and reading of technical drawings. 
Students will crew productions. Required by second year. (More than 6 hours activity) 

277 Costume Fundamentals (3) 

Study ot the principles and procedures of costuming theatrical and television productions. Practical 
experience in basic construction techniques, organizing and executing duties of the costume 


Theatre 12 7 

crew. Designed primarily for non-technical majors within the department and as an introduc- 
tory course for technical majors. (More than 6 hours activity) 

284 Introduction to Television Production (3) (Formerly 282) 

Theory and practice in the fundamentals of production for television. (6 hours activity) 

285 Theatrical Makeup (3) 

Theory and practice in makeup for stage and television. Emphasis on development of individual skill 
in techniques of character analysis, application in pigment, plastic, hair makeup, and selection 
and use of makeup equipment. (6 hours activity) 

288 Design for the Theatre (3) 

Fundamental exposure to all aspects of scene design: aesthetics, practical considerations and techni- 
cal skills, such as drawing and model building. (Same as Art 288) (6 hours activity) 

290A,B History and Aesthetics of Motion Pictures (3,3) 

History and development of the motion picture as an art form and social influence. A — The motion 
picture from its origins until 1945. B — The contemporary cinema, from 1945 to present. (Same 
as Comunications 290A,B) 

310 Oral Interpretation of Shakespeare (3) 

Development of techniques for interpretation of Shakespeare with special emphasis on the problems 
of verse. 

342 Simplified Technical Production (3) 

Open to theatre education majors only. Simplified inexpensive methods of producing in: design, 
costume, makeup, production organization and technical problem solving. Includes handling 
of limited resources, untrained personnel, improper facilities and equipment. Participation on 
production crews. Supplements the theatre education program in technical theatre. (More than 
6 hours activity) 

350 Organization for Production (1) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 370A. Theory and training in backstage management, stressing interrelation- 
ships of production personnel. Students will serve as crew heads or stage managers. Sophisti- 
cated production abilities are mandatory. 

363A,B Intermediate Acting and Characterization (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 241, 251, 263 and audition. Emphasis on extended and integrated speech and 
movement problems in characterization. Ensemble acting, extensive analysis and exploration 
and basic television techniques. (6 hours activity) 

364 Seminar in Playwriting (3) 

Prerequisite: evidence of student's previous interest in creative writing and consent of instructor. 
Study of superior models, development of style, and group criticism and evaluation of each 
student's independent work, as it relates to playwriting. May be repeated for credit. (Same as 
English 364) 

370A,B Fundamentals of Directing (3,3) 

Prerequisites: 370A is prerequisite to B; Theatre 263, or consent of instructor. The study of prerehear- 
sal problems and procedures, of the structural analysis of plays, and of composition, picturiza- 
tion, pantomimic dramatization, movement and rhythm on stage and in television. Practice in 
directing scenes (6 hours activity) 

371 Radio Production: Dramatic Techniques (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 380. The art of producing radio programming material, including development 
of the theatrical radio commercial, the radio personality, and dramatic radio entertainment. (6 
hours activity) 

376A,B Advanced Technical Production (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 276B or consent of instructor. Advanced problems in planning and executing 
scenery for stage and television. Students will also work in the scene shop for major productions. 
(More than 6 hours activity) 

377 Stage Costuming (3) 

A chronological study of fashions and textiles of major historical periods, methods of research, 
interpreting historical costume for theatrical statement. (More than 6 hours activity) 

380 Introduction to Radio and Television (3) 

The development of the broadcasting industry and its impact and influence on our society. A study 
of the basic broadcasting practices, audiences, production and programming. 

381 Radio and Television Announcing (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 110 or consent of instructor. Theory and practice of control room operation. 


128 Theatre 


Lectures and practice in microphone and camera techniques, commercial announcements, 
interviewing, sportscasting, narration, foreign pronunciation, and continuity. (6 hours activity) 

383 Television Writing (3) 

Study of the principles and practices and experience in the writing of scripts and other forms of 
continuity for television. May be repeated for credit. 

384 Television Production and Direction (3) (Formerly 480) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 284. Theory and practice in the production of television programs and an- 
nouncements: the planning, organizing, directing, rehearsing, performing, recording and editing 
of television programs and announcements. (6 hours activity) 

385 Advanced Theatre Makeup (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 285. Advanced problems in makeup including special techniques and material 
prosthetics, hairpieces, masks for television and film; practical application of study through 
design and supervision of makeup for departmental production (6 hours activity) 

386 Beginning Lighting (3) 

Theory and practice in lighting for stage, television and film productions. (More than 6 hours 
activity) 

387 Audio Techniques (3) 

Theory, procedures and practice necessary to develop and to integrate live and recorded sound into 
performing arts productions. Emphasis given to recording, reproduction and studio techniques. 
(6 hours activity) 

392A,B Dramatic Film Productions (3,3) 

Theory and practice of silent dramatic film production techniques to include mechanical operation 
of super 8mm and 16mm equipment, preparation of shooting script, direction and production 
of several short films, criticism and analysis of finished products. (6 hours activity) 

400 Theatre Internship (1-3) 

Consent of appropriate faculty supervisor. Innovative individually supervised work experience in all 
areas of theatre to expand the dimensions of the classroom by integrating the formal academic 
training with direct practical application in the field. Periodic seminar meetings to discuss work. 
Enrollment on a credit/no credit basis. 

401 Criticism of the Arts (3) 

Prerequisite: senior or graduate standing in the School of the Arts or consent of instructor. Develop- 
ment of criteria and vocabulary for criticism of the visual and performing arts through lectures, 
readings, discussions, and exhibit and performance attendance. Emphasis on descriptive and 
evaluative skills in music, art, theatre, dance and cinema criticism. 

402 Dramatic Activities for Children (3) 

Theory and practice in the use of creative dramatics, storytelling, puppetry, assembly programs, 
role-playing and other aspects of dramatics as tools for the teacher, group worker, recreation 
major and others who work with children. (6 hours activity) 

403 Theatre for Children (3) 

Theories and principles of production in the formal theatre arts for children. Demonstrations of 
appropriate theatrical forms with analysis and evaluation. (6 hours activity) 

410A Oral Interpretation of Prose Literature (3) (Formerly 411 A) 

The study of the techniques of criticism and performance used in the interpretation of prose 
literature. 

410B Oral Interpretation of Poetry (3) (Formerly 411B) 

The study of the techniques of criticism and performance used in the interpretation of poetry. 

41 0C Oral Interpretation of Drama (3) 

The study of the techniques of criticism and performance used in the interpretation of drama. 

414 Readers Theatre (3) (Formerly 411C) 

The theory, principles and techniques of the interpretation of literature in the medium of readers 
theatre. May be repeated for credit with consent of instructor. (6 hours activity) 

450 Theatre Management (3) 

Discussion and practice of basic elements of public relations as applied to theatre; financial aspects 
of academic, community and professional theatre operations. Front-of-house management and 
box office operation through the department's public presentations. (6 hours activity) 


Theatre 129 


463A,B Advanced Acting (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 363A,B and audition. A study of historical theories and techniques of styles 
of acting as an art form. The first semester will include Greek through renaissance periods and 
the second semester will include the neoclassic periods to contemporary styles. (6 hours 
activity) 

468 Experimental Theatre (3) 

An activity course in which dramatic principles are applied through production of full length and 
one-act plays using various styles of acting and staging. May be repeated up to six units for 
credit. (More than 2 hours activity per unit) 

470A,B Advanced Directing (4,4) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 350, 370A,B and 475B,D, or consent of instructor. Readings in theory, analysis 
of scripts and practice in directing plays for their oral and visual value as theatre. A — Each 
student directs public performances of a one-act play. B — Each student directs public perfor- 
mances of two one-act plays or equivalent. (8 hours activity) 

472 American Theatre (3) 

Prerequisite: junior standing. The development of the art of theatre in the United States from colonial 
times to the present day; its place and potentialities as a force in a democratic society. 

475A,B,C,D,E World Theatre (3,3,3,3,3) 

Examination of the historical and dramatic evolution of world theatre. A — Ancient Greece and 
Rome, Middle Ages; Italian renaissance; B — England from 1558-1790; 16th- and 17th-century 
Spain and France; C — 18th- and 19th-century Europe and Russia; 19th-century England: D 
— 18th- and 19th-century America; the Orient; the modern world. E — Historical background 
and contemporary view of the musical theatre. Students registering for Theatre 475 must have 
completed the requirements for upper division standing. 

477A,B Senior Seminar in Critical techniques (3,3) 

Theatre 477A or consent of instructor prerequisite to B. First semester presents a historical survey 
of major critical theories as they apply to theatre. Second semester provides the opportunity 
to apply critical theories to local dramatic productions. 

478A,B Rehearsal and Performance (2,2) 

A — Acting in stage or television performances. B — Technical crew work on stage and television 
performances. Two units per semester required of all theatre majors. ( More than 4 hours activity 
per unit) 

482 Acting for Film and Television (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 363B and audition. Advanced acting emphasizing the adaptation of stage 
techniques for the camera, involving the skills of audition, rehearsal, and final performance, 
utilizing videotape and studio equipment. (6 hours activity) 

484 Television Dramatic Techniques (3) (Formerly 382) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 384 and consent of instructor. Television techniques and production, designed 
primarily for theatre majors to train the director, actor and designer in the elements of televised 
drama. (6 hours activity) 

486 Advanced Lighting (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 386 or consent of instructor. The design and technology of lighting. Student 
will be prepared to design for the stage, dance, film and television. (6 hours activity) 

488 Seminar: Advanced Design (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 277 and/or 288 and consent of instructor. In-depth study and practice in 
design styles for various types of theatres and for television and film. Team-teaching in advanced 
design, coordinating scenery and costume design projects. 

489 Television Production Activities (3) 

(Same as Communications 489) 

490 Television/Film Aesthetics and Criticism (3) (Formerly 492) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 290A,B, 384 or consent of instructor. An exploration of the nature of film and 
television through aesthetic and theoretical bases and the establishment of a critical basis for 
film and television evaluation and understanding. 

491 Senior Seminar: Greek Tragedy (3) 

( Same as Comparative Literature 491 ) 

492A,B Advanced Dramatic Film Production (3,3) (Formerly 490A,B) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 392A,B. Theory and practice of 16mm sound film production with emphasis 
on the narrative film. Labs and lectures include the development of scripts, uses of sound film, 
editing and directing the sound film and production of several short films. (6 hours activity) 

• 5—88930 


130 Theatre 


499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Undergraduate creative or research projects. Open to advanced students with the consent of 
instructor. Course application form with appropriate signatures, must be on file in department 
office prior to registration. May be repeated for credit. 

500 Introduction to Graduate Study in Theatre (3) 

Introduction to methodological problems in graduate research. Location of source materials, includ- 
ing library and original data; research and project design and execution; interpretation of 
researches. Must be taken the first semester after admission to graduate study. 

501 Graduate Seminar: Advanced Theatre Theory (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 500. Directed research with emphasis on the relationship between historical 
backgrounds and developments in the theatre and the student's area of concentration. 

503 Seminar: Theatre for Children (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 403. Critical study of the historical development, philosophies, theories, tech- 
niques and trends of the art of theatre for children. Research and investigation of problems 
related to the use of materials in educational, community and professional children's theatres. 

510 Graduate Seminar in Oral Interpretation (3) (Formerly 511) 

The historical and philosophical backgrounds in the development of interpretation and its relation- 
ship to contemporary theory and practice. 

571 Graduate Seminar: Major Writers (3) 

As appropriate to the specialized research of instructor this course will offer directed research and 
writing, group discussion, and lectures covering major figures. May be repeated with different 
content for additional credit. (Same as English 571) 

572 Graduate Seminar, Literary Genres (3) 

As appropriate to the specialized research and publications of instructor, this course will offer 
directed research and writing, group discussion and lectures covering such major literary types 
as: tragedy, comedy and historical drama. With consent of adviser, may be repeated with 
different content for additional credit. (Same as English 572) 

576 Production Planning in Theatre Arts (3) 

History and philosophy of production problems in theatre arts. Organization of the university theatre 
as it relates to the total university program. Planning of the production within the limitations 
of budgets and physical facilities. 

597 Project (3) 

Prerequisites: consent of instructor, student's graduate committee and department executive com- 
mittee. Development and presentation of a creative project in the area of concentration beyond 
regularly offered coursework. May be repeated to a maximum of six units. Student must 
complete course application form by the end of the seventh week of the semester preceding 
the semester in which the work is to be done. 

598 Thesis (3) 

Prerequisites: consent of student's graduate committee. Development and presentation of a thesis 
in the area of concentration beyond regularly offered coursework. Course application form, 
with appropriate signatures, must be on file in department office prior to registration. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Open to graduate students in theatre with consent of instructor and student's graduate committee. 
May be repeated for credit. Course application form, with appropriate signatures , must be on 
file in department office prior to registration. 


THEATRE EDUCATION COURSES 

442 Teaching Theatre in the Secondary School (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. Objectives, methods and materials, including audiovis- 
ual instruction for teaching in secondary schools. See description of secondary school teaching 
credential program under Division of Teacher Education. 

449A Student Teaching in Theatre in the Secondary School (10) 

See description under Division of Teacher Education. 

449B Student Teaching Seminar (2) 

See description under Division of Teacher Education. 





132 


SCHOOL OF BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION AND ECONOMICS 

Dean: Jack W. Coleman 
Associate Dean: Edward R. Zilbert 


FACULTY 

Department of Accounting: Henry Anderson, Chair 

Dale Bandy, Eugene Corman, Mary Fleming, Clyde Hardman, John Hinds, A. Jay Hirsch, Robert 
Lamden, Maria Melcher, Robert Miller, Robert Vanasse, Herbert Watkin, John Williams, Dorsey 
Wiseman, John Woo, Arnold Wright 
Department of Economics: Joyce Pickersgill, Chair 

Maryanna Boynton, Kwang-wen Chu, James Dietz, Franz Dolp, Kenneth Goldin, Levern Graves, 
Lionel Kalish, Sidney Klein, John Lafky, Stewart Long, Robert Michaels, Gary Pickersgill, Jack 
Pontney, Guy Schick, Norman Townshend-Zellner 
Department of Finance: Dennis O'Connor, Chair 

Dick Bednar, Albert Bueso, Peter Mlynaryk, John Nichols, Radha Sharma, Peter Sibbald, Frank 
Taylor, Marco Tonietti, B. E. Tsagris 
Department of Management: Geoffrey King, Chair 

Farouk Abdelwahed, Robert Allan, Thomas Apke, John Bayless, Mei Liang Bickner, Robert 
Chapman, Fred Colgan, James Conant, Richard Gilman, Leo Guolo, Granville Hough, Leland 
McCloud, Kent McKee, Tai Oh, Ronald Smith, Edgar Wiley, Robert Wright 
Department of Marketing: Irene Lange, Chair 

Robert Barath, William Bell, Paul Hugstad, Robert Olsen, Frank Roberts, James Taylor, Guthrie 
Worth 

Department of Quantitative Methods: LaVeme Stanton, Chair 

Gora Bhaumik, Gary Bloom, Milton Chen, Wen Chow, Ronald Colman, Ben Edmondson, Basil 
Gala, William Heitzman, James Hightower, John Lawrence, Marshal McFie, Demetrios Mi- 
chalopoulos, Fred Mueller, Herbert Rutemiller, Sohan Sihota, Ram Singhania, Eric Solberg, 
David Stoller 

Academic Objectives of the School 

The faculty of the schobl believes that it can best optimize its effectiveness in achieving the broad 
educational objective of the university by concentrating its energies on the exploration and teaching 
of relevant concepts, principles and practices, including interrelationships. Additionally, the faculty 
recognizes the need for integrating and relating the various disciplines into a balanced and thought- 
provoking educational experience for the student. While considerable emphasis must be placed on 
the need for breadth of knowledge and creativity in thought and actions, there must also be emphasis 
on exploration and analysis in some depth of those disciplines most relevant to the business 
profession. These disciplines are recognized to be interrelated and are to be integrated through the 
application of economics, behavioral and quantitative sciences, systems theories and concepts, 
decision theories, computer sciences, logic, and theoretical and applied research methodology. In 
addition, the faculty of the school has set forth specific objectives for its curriculum and related 
programs. A summary statement of these objectives is as follows: 

1 . Educational and Professional 

Through a study of the various theoretical and practical business and economic models, policies 
and procedures, each student is to be afforded and provided with technical expertise in a chosen 
discipline — accounting, economics, finance, management, marketing, quantitative methods and 
business education — to a depth acceptable to prospective employers for beginning professional 
employment. 

2. Human and Ethical 

A major part of effective society and business leadership is related to organization and direction 
of human resources to achieve general and specific goals. Therefore, a knowledge of human 
values — the ethical, psychological and sociological foundation for human behavior — is essential. 
This includes an awareness and understanding of the nature of human values, of individual goals 
and the forces which lead to their achievement; the function of leadership in relating individual 


Business Administration 133 


and enterprise goals; the impact of group dynamics, informal organizations, and interpersonal 
relationships on the administrative process; and the need for a personal code of ethics. 

3. Socioeconomic , Political and Cultural Environment 

Firms do not operate in a vacuum, and information about the external forces and constraints 
which bear on the enterprise comprises a necessary body of knowledge for competent business 
planners and administrators. In particular, development and economic literacy to support rational 
choice; recognition of economic implications resulting from economic policy decisions by various 
levels of government; and a conceptualization of the impact of the various institutions on the 
enterprise and the impact of business leadership decisions on the social system as a whole are 
stressed. 

Student Organizations 

Chapters of the following national honor societies have been established on campus with member- 
ship open to qualified students: Alpha Delta Sigma (advertising), Beta Alpha Psi (accounting), Beta 
Gamma Sigma (business), Financial Management Association Honor Society (Finance), Omicron 
Delta Epsilon (economics), Phi Kappa Phi (all campus), Pi Sigma Epsilon (Marketing). In addition 
there are the following departmentally affiliated clubs which students are encouraged to join, the 
Accounting Society, Computer Club, Data Processing Management Association, Economics Associa- 
tion, Finance Association, Marketing Club, Personnel and Industrial Relations Association, QM Club, 
Rho Epsilon (Real Estate-Finance) and Society for the Advancement of Management. 

Internship and Cooperative Education Program 

The School of Business Administration and Economics is offering a limited number of internship 
positions in business, industry and public agencies for qualified business students. Students interested 
in this program should be of junior standing, academically qualified, and have received consent of 
the internship adviser. Opportunities exist in such areas as: accounting and auditing; cost/benefit 
analysis and econometrics; finance and real estate; insurance and banking; management and indus- 
trial relations; marketing, sales, and advertising; computer programming and business data systems, 
and other specialized areas fitting the need of the student and the business community. In return 
for the student's participation in the School of Business Administration and Economics internship 
program, the student intern will receive academic credit through Business Administration 495 (on 
a credit/no credit basis), plus first hand experience and financial remuneration from their employers. 
For further information and/or applications on this program, please contact the Academic Programs 
Office, School of Business Administration and Economics. 

Undergraduate Program in Business Administration and Economics 

The School of Business Administration and Economics offers two undergraduate degree programs, 
the B.A. in Business Administration and the B.A. in Economics. Students majoring in the school are 
encouraged to elect courses in other divisions of the university, particularly in the area of behavioral, 
social, and political sciences, and foreign languages. It is assumed that the first half of their university 
work toward a bachelor's degree represents a required basic education in communication, math- 
ematics, natural science, social sciences and the humanities. Since quantitative and written com- 
munication skills are increasingly emphasized in business and the social sciences, students who 
contemplate enrollment in either business administration or economics are encouraged to ta e 
college preparatory English and four years of high school mathematics. College algebra, or three 
years of high school mathematics including a second course in algebra, will be a minimum mathe- 
matical prerequisite for entrance to the program. 

bachelor of arts in business administration 

Degree Requirements 

In addition to the required coursework in business administration, students must complete Math 130 
or its equivalent and demonstrate proficiency in written communication (See No. 8 below ). If credits 
for elementary accounting, economics, calculus and the English requirements have not been met, 
it will be necessary to complete these requirements before or during the first semester of the junior 
year. 

In addition to the requirements listed below for the major, students must meet the other university 
requirements for a B.A. degree. The degree requirements are as follows: 

1. Completion of a minimum of 60 semester credit hours in the School of Business Administration 
and Economics, of which 42 semester credit hours must be upper division. 

2. Completion of the required core courses in the School of Business Administration and Economics. 

3. Completion of 18 semester credit hours of required courses in an area of concentration to be 


134 Business Administration 


selected by the student. (Refer to specific departmental requirements.) 

4. Completion of at least 50 percent of the required units in the concentration and 1 5 of the last 
24 units are required in residence in the School of Business and Economics. 

5. Completion of at least 50 semester credit hours in areas other than business administration. 

6. Attainment of at least a 2.0 grade point average (C average) in all university work attempted, in 
all courses taken in the School of Business Administration and Economics, and in the area of 
concentration. 

7. Completion of Math 130, A Short Course in Calculus, or its equivalent.! 

8. Demonstration of proficiency in written communication skills. Students must pass an English 
written proficiency test offered four times a year on the first Saturdays of March, August, October 
and on the third Saturday in November. All students are urged to take the CEPT examination as 
soon as possible in their academic career. (Information on the dates offered and the costs of these 
tests may be obtained from the University Testing Center.) Passing scores on the College Board 
Achievement Test in English Composition or the College Level Examination Program (CLEP) 
Subject Examination in English Composition or the California State University English Equivalency 
Test will be accepted as satisfying the proficiency requirement in written communication skills. 

Academic Advisement for Business Administration Students 

The School of Business Administration and Economics provides an advisement service for its stu- 
dents. New students are particularly encouraged to consult an adviser in the school's Academic 

Programs Office to review program and course requirements. 

CORE: The business administration and economics courses listed below are required of all 


students majoring in business administration: 

Lower Division Units 

Eco 100 The Economic Environment and 3 

Eco 200 Principles of Economics, or 

Eco 210 Principles of Economics (5) 3 

Acc 201 A, B Elementary Accounting 6 

Man 246 Business Law 3 

QM 265 Computer Methods in Business and Economics 3 

Upper Division: 

Eco 310 Intermediate Microeconomic Theory or 

Eco 320 Intermediate Macroeconomic Theory * 3 

Fin 320 Business Finance 3 

Man 340 Behavioral Science for Business 3 

Man 341 Organization and Management Theory 3 

Mar 351 Principles of Marketing 3 

QM 361 Statistical Methods in Business and Economics 3 

QM 362 Management Sciences Methods in Business and Economics or 

QM 363 Management Sciences J 3 

Man 449 Seminar in Business Policies ** 3 


42 

Suggested Sequence of Business Core Courses 

The following listing is the suggested course sequencing for the business core: 


Freshman level: Units 

Math 130 A Short Course in Calculus 1 4 

Eco 100 The Economic Environment 2 3 

Sophomore level: 

Eco 200 Principles of Economics 2 3 

Man. 246 Business Law 3 


t Students who concentrate in quantitative methods must take math 150A in lieu of Math 130. 

• Management and Quantitative Methods require Economics 310. All other departments require either Economics 310 or 

320. 

t Students taking quantitative methods as their area of concentration will take QM 363, Management Science. 

•• Students taking business economics as their area of concentration will take Economics 410, Government and Business — in 
lieu of Management 449, Business Policies. 

‘QM concentration requires Math 150A and QM 170 in lieu of Math 130. 

* Eco 210 may be substituted for Eco 100 and 200, units counted outside the School of Business Administration and 

Economics. 


Business Administration 135 

Acc 201 A, B Elementary Accounting 6 

QM 265 Computer Methods in Business and Economics 3 

Junior level: 

Man 340 Behavioral Science for Business 3 

Eco 310 Intermediate Microeconomic Theory 3 or 

Eco 320 Intermediate Macroeconomic Theory 3 

QM 361 Statistical Methods in Business and Economics 3 

Mar 351 Principles of Marketing 3 

Fin 320 Business Finance 3 

Man 341 Organization and Management Theory 3 

QM 362 Management Science Methods in Business and Economics 4 or 

QM 363 Management Science 3 

Senior level: 

Man 449 Seminar in Business Policies 5 3 


AREAS OF CONCENTRATION FOR MAJORS IN BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

A student in business administration should select an area of concentration as soon as possible, but 
not later than the second semester of the junior year and take the required courses in the area. 

Accounting 

301 A, B Intermediate Accounting 

302 Cost Accounting 
308 Federal Income Tax 

And at least two of the following courses: 

401 Advanced Accounting 

402 Auditing 

406 Cost Control 

407 Integrated Data Processing Systems 

408 Problems in Taxation 

Economics 

310 Intermediate Microeconomic Theory 
320 Intermediate Macroeconomic Theory 
6 units economics electives, 3 units of which must be 400-level 
Management 446, Managerial Economics 

In addition, 6 upper division units of either Economics or School of Business electives. 

Finance 

The department offers four primary areas of emphasis: financial management, real estate, securities- 
investments and insurance. Courses are also offered in personal finance. A finance concentration 
requires Finance 331, Financial Analysis, plus 15 additional credit hours offered by the Finance 
Department. The student may choose all courses from one area or may elect to sample several areas. 
Finance 310, Personal Financial Management, will not count toward the area of concentration. 
Financial Management Emphasis: Designed for students interested in the financial organization and 
operation of financial and business enterprises. Students interested in this area of emphasis are 
encouraged to include the following courses in their plan of study: 

332 Financial Administration 
370 International Business Finance 

425 Commercial Bank and Financial Institution Management 

432 Financial Forecasting and Capital Budgeting 

433 Problems in Business Finance 
440 Capital and Money Markets 

Estate Emphasis: Designed for students interested in a broad range of careers in real estate 
and urban development. Students interested in this option are advised to include the following 
courses in their plan of study: 

350 Principles and Practices of Real Estate * 

* Management and QM concentrations require Eco 310. 
s QM concentration requires QM 363. 

Business economics concentration requires Eco 410 in lieu of Man 449. Man 449 also requires completion of all other core 
m courses as a prerequisite. 

These courses satisfy the California State Real Estate Brokers License Examination requirements. Please contact the 
Finance Department for further details. 


136 


Business Administration 


451 Legal Aspects of Real Estate * 

452 Real Estate Finance * 

453 Real Estate Valuation * 

454 Real Estate and Urban Development * 

459 Real Estate Research 

Securities-/ nvestments Emphasis: Designed for students interested in securities and investment 
analysis, money and capital markets, and portfolio management. Students interested in this area of 
emphasis are encouraged to include the following courses in their plan of study: 

340 Security Investments 
440 Capital and Money Markets 
442 Security Analysis and Portfolio Management 
Insurance Emphasis: Designed for students interested in careers in insurance or in applying correct 
insurance procedures to business and personal affairs. Students interested in this emphasis should 
include the following courses in their plan of study: 

360 Principles of Insurance 

461 Risk Management 

462 Life and Health Insurance 
Management 

In consonance with university and school objectives, the major goals of the Management Depart- 
ment are to: 

1. Provide students with foundational competence in the utilization of the factors of production 

2. Develop in each student an understanding of the theory and practices needed for successful 
performance in managerial and staff positions in business, government and the community. 

3. Provide students with a knowledge of human values— ethical, psychological and sociological 
foundation for human behavior, and the impact of group dynamics, informal organizations, and 
interpersonal relationships on the administrative process. 

Students with an area of concentration in management must choose one of the three following 
emphases: 

Administrative Management Emphasis: Designed for students interested in all aspects of business 
or in general supervision of organized activity. 

342 Production Operations 

343 Personnel Management 

444 Management of Systems 

446 Managerial Economics or 

447 Management Decision Games 

Two other concentration courses to be arranged 

Operations Management Emphasis: Designed for students who have interest in and aptitude for 
managing new projects and production operations in both manufacturing and nonmanufacturing. 

342 Production Operations 

343 Personnel Management 

445 Advanced Production Operations 

446 Managerial Economics or 

447 Management Decision Games 

Two other concentration courses to be arranged. 

Human Resources Management Emphasis: Designed for students interested in interpersonal rela- 
tions and group leadership opportunities in all organizations but specifically found in manpower 
management, small business, industrial relations, hospital and welfare administration, and organiza- 
tions carrying out social change. 

343 Personnel Management 
441 Labor-Management Relations 

443 Individual, Interpersonal, and Group Dynamics for Management 

444 Management of Systems 

Two other concentration courses to be arranged. 

Management Information Systems 

The objective of the management information systems concentration is to prepare its graduates for 
careers in the areas of information processing, including information systems design, implementa- 
tion, man agement and use. This concentration provides alternative areas of emphasis in the senior 

upper division work (o be selected in consultation with the student s adviser 


* Also requires an additional six units of 


Business Administration 137 


year: The design emphasis includes analysis of data structures in applications, while the management 
emphasis stresses the selection and use of information to support decision systems in organizations. 
Required of alt students in the management information systems concentration • 

Man 244 Introduction to Systems Concepts 
QM 270 Introduction to Computer-Based Information Systems 
QM 300 File Structures and Data Communication 
Acc 302 Cost Accounting 
Required for design emphasis: 

QM 404 Analysis of Business Information Systems 
QM 408 Data Management Applications 
Required for management emphasis: 

Man 444 Management of Systems 
Man 494 Seminar in Management Information Systems 
Marketing 

Students with an area of concentration in marketing choose a career path from the following areas: 
marketing management, marketing research, advertising, sales management, retailing, international 
marketing or physical distribution. 

Brochures and advising on career path selection are available in the department office. In addition 
to Marketing 351, all students will take 18 hours in marketing. 

Students with an area of concentration in marketing must choose one of the six following em- 
phases:** 

Advertising Management Emphasis 
354 Principles of Advertising 
379 Marketing Research Methods 
470 Consumer Behavior 
454 Advertising Management 
459 Marketing Problems 
One marketing elective 
Marketing Management Emphasis 

Behavioral option (354, 356 or 470) 

Quantitative option (379 or 457) 

357 Industrial Purchasing 
459 Marketing Problems 
Two marketing electives 

Marketing Research Emphasis 

379 Marketing Research Methods 
470 Consumer Behavior 
479 Research Problems in Marketing 
459 Marketing Problems 
Two marketing electives 
Physical Distribution Emphasis 

358 Physical Distribution 
Behavioral option (354, 356 or 470) 

457 Quantitative Marketing Analysis 

451 Management of Physical Distribution Operations 
459 Marketing Problems 
One marketing elective 
Retailing Emphasis 

352 Principles of Retailing 
354 Principles of Advertising 
379 Marketing Research Methods 
470 Consumer Behavior 
456 Marketing Problems in Retail Sector 
459 Marketing Problems 
Sales Management Emphasis 

* Also requires an additional six units of upper division work to be selected in consultation with the student’s adviser. 
** All students must take Marketing 351 prior to the courses listed within the departmental emphasis areas. 


138 


Business Administration 


356 Creative Motivation in Marketing 
379 Marketing Research Methods 
470 Consumer Behavior 
455 Management of the Sales Force 
459 Marketing Problems 
One marketing elective 
International Marketing Emphasis 

Behavioral option (354, 356 or 470) 

379 Marketing Research Methods 

458 International Marketing 

459 Marketing Problems 
Two marketing electives 

Quantitative Methods 

Through study of the theory and practice of the disciplines of computer science, information systems, 
operations research and statistics, a student is prepared to effectively utilize quantitative information 
in evaluating alternatives and making decisions. 

Students with a quantitative methods concentration are required to take Math 150A, Calculus *• QM 
170, Introduction to Quantitative Methods; QM 265, Computer Methods in Business Economics- QM 
361, Statistical Methods in Business and Economics; QM 363, Management Science, in lieu of QM 
362; QM 461, Advanced Statistics. 

In addition to the required courses above, the student must choose at least 15 units of electives in 
an approved study plan. Electives may include any of the following, as well as approved courses 
in other disciplines: 

Computer Science * * 

364 Computer Logic and Programming 

382 Information Structures and Machine Language Programming 
446 Computer Programming Theory 

464 Information Retrieval and Natural Language Processing 
480 Information Theory and Cybernetics 

482 Introduction to Discrete Structures 

484 Computer Assisted Instruction 

485 Programming Systems and Programming Language Processing 

486 Automata Theory 

487 Artificial Intelligence 

488 Introduction to Pattern Recognition 
Operations Research 

448 Digital Simulation in Business and Economics 

465 Linear Programming 

466 Integer and Nonlinear Programming 

470 Conflict, Bargaining and Cooperation 

471 Dynamic Programming and Network Flows 

472 Quantitative Methods in Production and Inventory Control 

490 Queueing and Stochastic Process Models in Business and Industry 
Statistics 

367 Statistics and Society 

420 Applied Statistical Forecasting 

422 Surveys and Sampling Design and Applications 

430 Nonparametric Statistics 

467 Statistical Quality Control 

468 Design of Experiments 

469 Reliability Statistics 
475 Multivariate Analysis 

A student majoring in quantitative methods may also elect to minor in computer science. For details 
conce rning the Bachelor of Science in Computer Science and the minor in computer science, see 

|^Math 150A may be taken with the credit/no credit option. 

" ^oTC'he^XmaHon 501,001 ° f Ma,hemalics ’ “ d Engineering end should be conLCed 


Business Administration 139 


Cross-disciplinary University Programs" elsewhere in this catalog. 

BUSINESS EDUCATION 

Students who wish to major in business administration in preparation for a career as a secondary 
school teacher in business subjects must meet the requirements of the School of Business Administra- 
tion and Economics and the secondary school teacher education program including the require- 
ments for the proper credential as outlined in this catalog. 

The requirements for a major in business education are as follows: 

1 The core requirements as set forth for all business administration majors. 

2. Completion of 18 hours of required coursework in one of the six areas of concentration: 

a. Accounting 

b. Economics 

c. Finance 

d. Management 

e. Marketing 

f. Quantitative methods 

3. Meet the school's minimum requirement of 60 credit hours in business administration and 
economic courses. 

4. A maximum of 12 credit hours in the secretarial field, including those applied as electives, may 
count toward the degree in business administration and economics. t 

5. Completion of at least 50 credit hours in areas outside business administration and economics. 
Education courses required for a credential will be detailed by the School of Education. 

Students interested in pursuing a minor in business education should consult with the School of 


Education before embarking on the minor. 

The requirements for a minor in business education are as follows: Units 

Eco 100 The Economic Environment and tco 200 Principles of Economics or 

Eco 210 Principles of Economics 5-6 

Acc 201 A, B Elementary Accounting 6 

QM 264 Computer Programming 2 

One of the following: 3 


Man 246 Business Law 

QM 265 Computer Methods in Business and Economics 


Fin 320 Business finance 
Mar 351 Principles of Marketing 

Educ 442 Teaching Business in Secondary School 3 

Electives * 6 


25-26 

master of business administration 

Applicants, as well as continuing students, should read carefully "The Program of Master's Degrees" 
m this catalog and consult the Graduate Bulletin, particularly the "Steps in the Master's Degree 
Program." 

Programs of Study 

The School of Business Administration and Economics offers two plans for the M.B.A. degree. 
Plan I is a broad, integrated program designed primarily for students with an undergraduate degree 
in a field other than business administration. 

Plan II is an integrated program allowing some concentration in an area of specialization. Under this 
Plan the student is required to complete 12 units in an area of concentration. It is designed primarily 
for students with baccalaureate degrees in business administration. 

The procedural steps for admission to, and completion of, the Master of Business Administration 
degree Follow: 

Admission 

A Regular admission into the M.B.A. program (i.e., classified standing) of the School of Business 

f university does not offer work in secretarial training, typewriting, or business machines, but will accept some transfer 
% work in these areas taken at other institutions. 

A maximum of six units of secretarial courses, including those applied as electives, may count toward the minor in business 
education. 


140 Business Administration 


Administration and Economics, requires development of an approved study plan and the follow- 

1. A bachelor's degree from a fully accredited college or university. 

2. A combination of grade-point average (CPA) and test score on the Graduate Management 
Test (GMAT) according to the following rules: 

a. An overall undergraduate CPA of at least 2.5 plus a minimum GMAT score of 450 or a 
combination of GPA and GMAT scores according to the formula: 200 times overall 
undergraduate GPA plus GMAT score equals 1000 or over or 

b. At least a 2.75 GPA on the last 50 percent of the coursework taken for the bachelor's 
degree plus a minimum GMAT score of 450 ora combination of GPA and GMAT score 
accoixlmg to the formula: 200 times GPA on the last 50 percent of coursework taken t 
plus GMAT score equals 1025 or over, or 

c. At least a 3.0 GPA score on the last 60 sequential semester units of coursework plus a 
minimum GMAT score of 450 } or a combination of GPA and GMAT scores according 
to the formula: 200 times GPA on the last 60 sequential semester units of coursework i 
plus GMAT score equals 1050 or over. 

B. Admission into the M B A. program (conditionally classified standing) of the School of Business 
Administration and Economics: 

An applicant who does not meet the entrance requirements for Classified standing, and/or who 
has dehaences in a prerequisite preparation which in the opinion of the appropriate school 
authority can be met by additional preparation, including qualifying examinations, may be 
considered for admission into the M B A. degree program with conditionally classified graduate 
standing. Such students, at a minimum, must meet the general university admission requirements 
for graduate standing. Interested students should contact the associate dean, academic programs. 
School of Business Administration and Economics, for additional information. 

C. For Plan II. the equivalent to an undergraduate degree in business from Cal State Fullerton is 
required in addition to other requirements listed in A and B above. 

The courses in the major are to be no more than seven years old and are to have at least a 3 0 
grade-point average. Courses with grades less than C must be repeated. In addition the Plan II 
student will be required to successfully complete the Business Foundation Examination which 
covers the core requirements in the school's undergraduate degree in business 

PLAN I 

CURRICULUM 
First- Year Program 

Acc 510 Financial Accounting 
Acc 51 1 Managerial Accounting 
Eco 514 Principles and Problems of Economic Policy, A 
Eco 515 Principles and Problems of Economic Policy, B 
Fin 517 Managerial Finance 

Man 516 Organizational Theory and Management of Operations 
Legal Environment of Business 
Marketing Management 
Quantitative Business Decision Techniques, A 
Quantitative Business Decision Techniques, B 

Note: Upon completion of the first year curriculum, Plan I students are required to successfully 
complete the Business Foundation Examination. 

Second- Year Program 

Acc 521 Seminar in Administrative Accounting 

Eco 522 Comparative Economics Seminar 

Fin 523 Seminar in Corporate Financial Management 

Man 524 Seminar in Organizational Behavior and Administration 

Mar 525 Seminar in Marketing Problems 

| any given quar,er must >* included even though that will result in more than 50 percent 

In ,TT t , e ™ mUS ' ** mclude<i even thou 8 h that wiU result in more than 60 semester 


Man 518 
Mar 519 
QM 512 
QM 513 


Business Administration 141 


QM 526 Quantitative Business Decision Analysis or 
QM 560 Operations Research 
BAE 596 M.B.A. Management Game 
Two electives at the 400- or 500-level 


PLAN II 

CURRICULUM 

(A minimum of 24 of the 30 units required for the degree must be at the 500 level.) 


Required Courses 

Acc 51 1 Managerial Accounting * or 
Acc 521 Seminar in Administrative Accounting 
Eco 51 5 Principles and Problems of Economic Policy, B or 
Eco 522 Comparative Economics Seminar 
Fin 523 Seminar in Corporate Financial Management 
Man 524 Seminar in Organizational Behavior and Administration 
Mar 525 Seminar in Marketing Problems 
QM 526 Quantitative Business Decision Analysis or 
QM 560 Operations Research 
Concentration 

Each student shall elect an area of concentration of at least 12 units to be approved by the 
department chair concerned, or his designee within the department, and the associate dean, aca- 
demic programs. Concentrations offered in Plan II are: accounting, finance, international business,! 
management, marketing and quantitative methods. 

Terminal Evaluation 

A terminal evaluation is required for the degree. Departmental requirements vary, however, and the 
student should check with his department chair. In many cases students take Business Administration 
596, M.B.A. Management Game, to satisfy this requirement, thus increasing the number of units 
offered for the degree from 30 to 33. The Management Game may be repeated once during a 
two-year period. 

For further information, consult the School of Business Administration and Economics Announce- 
ment and/or the associate dean, academic programs, in the School of Business Administration and 
Economics. 


BACHELOR OF ARTS IN ECONOMICS 

The economics major is designed to prepare students for positions in business, education and 

government, and for graduate work in economics and related disciplines. 

Requirements 

Required of all students for the degree: 

1. Completion of lower-division requirements (see below) and 27 semester credit hours in 
upper-division courses. At least 15 semester hours must be completed in residence in t e 
School of Business Administration and Economics. 

•2. Completion of the major course requirements for economics majors as listed below. Students 
in economics are required to take Quantitative Methods 265 or equivalent as prerequisite to 

Quantitative Methods 361 . . , . . 

3. Completion of at least 60 credit hours in areas other than economics and business ^ministra- 
tion. Of these 60 semester credit hours the department suggests that special attention be p aced 
on related social sciences, particularly political science, sociology, history and geograp y, as 
well as philosophy and the fields of quantitative methods and mathematics. A list of suggested 
courses is available irf the Economics Department office. 

4. Students must attain at least a 2.0 grade-point average in all college or university work attempt- 
ed, and in all courses in the School of Business Administration and Economics. 

5. Demonstration of proficiency in written communication skills. Students must pass an English 
written proficiency test offered four times a year on the first Saturdays of March, August, 
October and on the third Saturday in November. All students are urged to take this examination 
as soon as possible in their academic career. (Information on the dates offered and the costs 
of these tests may be obtained from the University Testing Center.) Passing scores on the 


* Students who have credit in cost accounting may not receive credit for Accounting 511. . 

t Students desiring an international business concentration, should contact the academic programs office, School of Business 
Administration and Economics, regarding concentration requirements. 


142 Business Administration 


College Board Achievement Test in English Composition or the College Level Examination 
Program (CLEP) Subject Examination in English Composition or the California State University 
English Equivalency Test will be accepted as satisfying the proficiency requirement in written 
communication skills. 

Business administration and economics courses required of all students majoring in economics are 
listed below: 

Lower Division 

(Students who have done exceptionally well in high school economics may wish to consult the 
policy, appearing elsewhere in this catalog, on challenge examinations.) 

Eco 100 and 200 or 210 Principles of Economics 

Math 130, A Short Course in Calculus and Acc 201 A, B Elementary Accounting; or 

Math 150A,B Analytic Geometry and Calculus and Acc 201 A 

QM 265 Computer Methods in Business and Economics 

Total 

Upper Division 

Eco 310 Intermediate Microeconomic Theory 

Eco 320 Intermediate Macroeconomic Theory 

Eco 420 Money and Banking 

QM 361 Statistical Methods in Business and Economics 

Fifteen hours of upper division electives in economics approved by the student's 
adviser 

Total 

MINOR IN ECONOMICS 

A minor in economics may be achieved by taking the following courses: 

Eco 100 and 200 or 210 Principles of Economics 

Eco 310 Intermediate Microeconomic Theory 

Eco 320 Intermediate Macroeconomic Theory 

Upper division economics electives 


MASTER OF ARTS IN ECONOMICS 

The Master of Arts in Economics is a program designed both for candidates who will be studying 
full time and for those employed full time or part time while working for the M.A. degree. The 
program is separated into two parts, the core requirements and the electives. The purpose of the 
core is to provide rigorous training fundamental to the discipline of economics, yet eminently useful 
to the candidate, whatever his special area of interest. It represents a planned sequence of work, 
progressing from economic theory (Economics 502 and 503) through methodology (Economics 
505) to the seminar (Economics 506) in which the student prepares a project applying what he has 
learned in theory and method to an area of his special interest. The purpose of the electives is to 
provide the student an opportunity to apply economic theory in specialized areas of interest. 

The procedural steps for admission to, and completion of, the Master of Arts in Economics follow: 
Admission Requirements (Classified Standing) 

1. Apply for admission to the university and declare the objective to be a Master of Arts in 
Economics degree. This must be accomplished at the Office of Admissions before the dates 
established in the university calendar. 

2. Contact the academic programs office of the School of Business Administration and Economics 
and the graduate coordinator of the Department of Economics to secure informal advisement. 
The informal advisement should occur at least three weeks prior* to your first registration. 

3. Possess a baccalaureate degree from an accredited institution with an overall grade-point 
average in all undergraduate work of not less than 2.5. 

4. Satisfactory level of performance on the Graduate Record Examination (verbal and quantita- 
tive), aptitude only. 

5. Preparation of a study plan in consultation with the graduate adviser and approval. 

6. Completion of an application for classified standing form. 

7. Satisfactory completion of program prerequisites listed below. 

Prerequisites 

Acceptance into the program requires completion of the following prerequisite courses, or equiva- 


Units 

5-6 

10-11 
3 

18-20 

3 

3 

3 

3 

15 

27 


5-6 

3 

3 

9 


Accounting 143 


1 For students without an undergraduate major in economics (a grade-point average of not less 
than 3.0 in the following prerequisites is required): 

Units 

Principles of Economics jj 

Calculus 3 

Intermediate Macroeconomic Analysis 

Statistics (analytical) 

Money and Banking 

Total . 22 ” 23 

2. For students with an undergraduate major in economics: 1 8 semester units of work in econom- 
ics or related courses (e.g., statistics), and one semester of calculus, with a minimum grade- 
point average of 3.0. The 18 units must include the following courses or their equivalents: 
Intermediate Microeconomic Analysis, Intermediate Macroeconomic Analysis, Statistics (ana- 
lytical), Money and Banking. 

Units 

Units in economics or related courses ^4 

Calculus 

Total 28 - 29 


Admission Requirements (Conditionally Classified Standing) 

An applicant who does not meet the entrance requirements for classified standing, and/or who has 
deficiencies in a prerequisite preparation which in the opinion of the appropriate school authority 
can be met by additional preparation, including qualifying examinations, may be considered tor 
admission into the Master of Arts in Economics program with conditionally classified graduate 
standing. Such students, at a minimum, must meet the general university admission requirements tor 
graduate standing: a baccalaureate degree from an accredited institution and a grade-point average 
of at least 2.5 in the last 60 semester units attempted. Interested students should contact the graduate 
adviser, Department of Economics. 


Program of Study 

1. A core of 12 graduate units in economics is required: Units 

Eco 502 Advanced Microeconomic Analysis ' 

Eco 503 Advanced Macroeconomic Analysis * 

Eco 505 Methodology in Economic Research Seminar 

Eco 506 Seminar in Micro- and Macroeconomic 

Applications {project required) — 

Total 12 

2. In addition to the core, 18 units of electives are required as follows: 

a. Eighteen units of electives at the 400 or 500 level, with a minimum of six and a maximum 
of 12 in a field outside of but related to economics. 

b. At least nine units of electives must be at the 500 level, six of which must be m economics. 
In this regard, Economics 596 is specifically designed to serve as an elective in this program. 
The topic of the course rotates every semester and it may be repeated for credit. The topics 
offered include international monetary systems, comparative economic systems, history ot 
economic thought, economic history, and advanced topics in micro- and macrotheory. 

c. If nine or more units are taken in fields outside of economics, at least three units must be 
at the 500 level. 

For further information, consult the School of Business Administration and Economics Announce- 
ment and/or the associate dean, academic programs, in the School of Business Administration and 
Economics. See also ''The Program of Master's Degrees" elsewhere in this catalog, and the Graduate 
Bulletin. 


ACCOUNTING COURSES 

201 A,B Elementary Accounting (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 201 A must be taken before 201 B. Accounting concepts and techniques 
essential to the administration of a business enterprise; accounting as a process of measuring 
and communicating economic information; analyzing and recording manc.al transactions; 
preparation of financial statements; analysis and interpretation of financial statements; introduc- 


144 Accounting 

tion to managerial accounting; product costing; analysis and techniques for aiding management 
decisions; management control; the interaction of accounting with the areas of finance, quanti- 
tative methods, interpersonal relations, motivation, and data-information systems. 

301 A, B Intermediate Accounting (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 201 B, 301 A must be taken prior to 301 B. Concepts and principles of 
accounting theory; preparation of income statements, balance sheets, and statements of 
changes in financial position; present value and amount concepts; assets, liabilities and stock- 
holders equity; price-level accounting; pensions; leases; earnings per share; financial statement 
analysis; accounting changes and error analysis. 

302 Cost Accounting (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 201 B. The development of accounting information for management of 
manufacturing enterprises; cost records; cost behavior and allocation; standard costs; and an 
introduction to cost control. 

304 Managerial Accounting (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 201 B. Intended for students whose area of concentration is not account- 
ing. Analysis, interpretation, and application of accounting information for managerial decision 
making; budgets and budgetary control; special-purpose reports; differential cost analyses. 

307 Distribution Costs (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 201 B and Marketing 351 . The development of quantitative measures for 
marketing activity; costs of distributing through different channels of distribution, advertising vs. 
personal selling, and movement activities; development of sales budgets, standard costs, and 
the analysis of actual performance in the light of budgets and standards. 

308 Federal Income Tax (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 201 B. Basic consideration of the history, theory, and accounting aspects 
of federal income taxation. 

401 Advanced Accounting (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 301 B. Current principles and practices of business combinations; mean- 
ing, usefulness and methodology of consolidated financial statements; investments in non- 
subsidiary affiliates and corporate joint ventures; consolidated financial statements for overseas 
units of U.S. -based multinational companies; study of partnership, statements for special pur- 
poses; branch accounting and foreign exchange. 

402 Auditing (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 301 B and 302. The auditing standards and procedures used by the 
independent auditor (CPA) to provide basic preparation for the auditing section of the CPA 
Examination. Major topic areas: evaluation of internal control; nature of and procedures for 
gathering audit evidence; professional responsibilities and legal liability; the standards of report- 
ing financial information. 

403 Accounting for Governmental and Nonprofit Entities (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 201 B or 51 1 . Concepts of fund accounting as applied to governmental and 
nonprofit entities; particularly state and federal governments, municipalities, hospitals, and 
universities. Budgets, tax levies, revenues and appropriations, expenditures and encumbrances, 
various types of funds, and accounting statements. 

406 Cost Control (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 302. A study of current and persistent problems in cost accounting; 
theories of cost allocation and absorption; flexible budgeting; responsibility accounting; and 
distribution cost control. 

407 Integrated Data Processing Systems (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 301 A and 302 and QM 264 or 265. Integrated systems for the collection, 
processing, and transmission of information; aspects of the information service function; feasibil- 
ity studies; case studies of operating systems. 

408 Problems in Taxation (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 308. Research in problems of taxation with emphasis on income taxes as 
they relate to corporations, partnerships and fiduciaries. 


Accounting 145 


470 Tax Research, Practice and Procedures (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 308. The methodology of tax research including case studies; the manage- 
ment of a tax practice; administration procedures governing tax controversies; rights and 
obligations of taxpayers and tax practitioners. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) . t _ 

Prerequisites: senior standing and approval by department chair. Open to qualified undergraduate 
students desiring to pursue directed independent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. 

502 Seminar in Accounting Theory (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 301 B, classified M B. A. status and consent of instructor. The concepts 
and theory of accounting; the effects of professional, governmental, business, and social forces 
on the evolution of accounting theory. 

503 Seminar in Contemporary Financial Accounting Problems (3) ^ 

Prerequisites: Accounting 502 and classified M.B.A. status and consent of instructor. A critical 
examination of the current problems and areas of controversy in managerial accounting. 

504 Seminar in Contemporary Managerial Accounting Problems (3) . 

Prerequisites: Accounting 511 or 302, classified M.B.A. status and consent of instructor. A critical 

examination of the current problems and areas of controversy in managerial accounting. 

505 Seminar in Auditing (3) «... . c 

Prerequisites: Accounting 402 and classified M.B.A. status. Auditing t eory an pra i ' , ... 

sional ethics; auditing standards; SEC and stock exchange regulations; auditor s legal liability, 
statement trends and techniques. 

507 Seminar in Accounting Information Systems (3) .. , , 0 c . 

Prerequisites: Accounting 407 or equivalent, and classified M.B.A. status. Case < 

accounting systems used by organizations such as universities, banks, and ndustnal ™ r P° r *' 
tions. Applications of conceptual knowledge of system components and controls learned previ- 
ously to actual operating systems. 


508 Seminar in Tax Planning (3) . = „f 

Prerequisites: Accounting 308 or consent of instructor and classified . . _ romor , lp 

substantive provisions of federal tax law with an emphasis on tax planning from a corporate 
viewpoint; case studies of the effect of federal tax law on business decisions. 

510 Financial Accounting (3) , . . 

Prerequisite: classified M.B.A. status. The basic fundamentals of accounting as they * pp ^ 

accumulation, organization, and interpretation of financial and quantitative datareievant tothe 
activities of the corporate business enterprise. The interaction of accounting with the areas of 
finance, interpersonal relations, motivation, and data-mformation systems. 

511 Seminar in Managerial Accounting (3) ...... „ . c , ah « Armuntina 

Prerequisites. Accounting 201 B or 510, consent of instructor and classified M - B *:*** us - ^nd *rvi« 

information for management decision; elements of manufacturing, distribution and service 
costs; cost systems; standard costs; cost reports; cost analysis. 

518 Seminar in International Accounting (3) .n„ A ** r analvsk 

Prerequisites: Accounting 201 A, B or equivalent and classified M.B.A. sta US n S Uncial reoortL 
of accounting principles and practices, current problems of 
accounting planning and control for international operations wit emp P 
companies. 

521 Seminar in Administrative Accounting (3) . „ rtCont instructor 

Prerequisites: Accounting 302, or 304, or 511; classified M.B.A. sta us, an decision- 

integrative aspects of accounting, financial, and quantitative data 

making; long-term, short-term profit planning; budgetary control; cost analysis, financial analysis 
and planning; taxation; and transfer pricing. 

572 Seminar in Taxation of Corporations and Shareholders (3) , 

Prerequisite: Accounting 308. Federal taxation relating to corporations with emphasis on the areas 
of organizing, distributions, liquidations and reorganizations. 

575 Seminar in Estate, Cift, Inheritance Taxes and Estate pl * n " in 8 (3 > , , . 

Prerequisite: Accounting 308. Federal and California death taxes and the planning of personal estate . 

578 Seminar in Taxation of Special Entities (3) . lrIlct , nr i nt u p . 

Prerequisite: Accounting 308. Federal taxation relating to partnerships, estates, trusts and other 

special entities. 


146 Economics 


597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: classified M.B.A. status. Directed independent inquiry. 

598 Thesis (3-6) 

Prerequisite: classified M.B.A. status. Directed independent inquiry. Student will select and have 
approved a thesis topic, show evidence of original research, and must present himself for a 
defense of the thesis before a faculty committee. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified M.B.A. status, consent of instructor, and approval by department chair. May 
be repeated for credit. 


BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION COURSES 

495 Internship Experience (1-3) 

Prerequisites: junior standing, academic qualification and consent by the internship adviser. Provides 
planned and supervised work experience in business, industry and public agencies, extending 
the student's learning experience beyond the classroom. Number of units granted is determined 
by number of hours worked per week. Credit/no credit up to a maximum of six units. 

497 Business and Economic Research (3) 

Prerequisites: business administration core, senior standing and consent of instructor. Application of 
research methods; selection and identification of a problem, determining a method of approach, 
collection and analysis of relevant data, eliciting conclusions and solutions. 

5% M.B.A. Management Game (3) 

Prerequisite: classified M.B.A. status and within six units of completion of the M.B.A. study plan. This 
course serves as the required terminal evaluation for M.B.A. candidates. An integrated approach 
to policy decisions using the principles and practices of the several disciplines in the M.B.A. 
program. 


ECONOMICS COURSES 

100 The Economic Environment (3) 

An introduction to economics with application to problems such as unemployment, poverty, dis- 
crimination, inflation, gold and foreign exchange, pollution, urban decay, defense, war, and 
industrialization. 

Ill Economics of Utopia (3) 

An economic analysis of utopian thought and attempts to create ideal economic systems. Emphasis 
is placed on the importance of economic structure and environment to the performance of 
utopian experiments. 

120 Economics Through Classic Films and Documentaries (3) 

A course centered about an integrated series of classic films and documentaries, such as Grapes of 
Wrath and Hunger in America. Students will develop a germinal appreciation and understanding 
of economics — concepts, institutions, issues — through the film medium. 

200 Principles of Economics (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100. A survey of basic economic theory. Includes the central problem of 
allocating resources, the distribution of income, unemployment, inflation, and the role of 
markets and public policies solving these problems. 

210 Principles of Economics (5) 

Prerequisite: open only to junior transfers. (Duplicates 100 and 200.) An introduction to the princi- 
ples of economic analysis and policy including the central problem of scarcity, basic economic 
institutions of the United States, resource allocation and income distribution, economic stability 
and growth, and the role of public policy. 

301 Economic Principles (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 150A,B and QM 265 or equivalents. An introduction to economic principles for 
students who have a strong quantitative background, and who have a special interest in the 
technical areas of engineering and computer science. Not open to students majoring in business 
administration or economics. 

310 Intermediate Microeconomic Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 200 or 210. An analysis and evaluation of (1) rational decision- 
making behavior of consumers and firms and (2) price and output determination in markets; 


Economics 147 


with special emphasis placed on the use of cases and problems to illustrate the application of 
the analysis to the contemporary scene. 

320 Intermediate Macroeconomic Analysis (3) . . . 

Prerequisites: Economics 100 and 200 or 210. The explanation and evaluation of the determinants 
of the level and fluctuations of such economic aggregates as national income and employment, 
with stress placed on the use of problems involving the application of analytical tools to mode 
macroeconomic issues. 

330 Comparative Economic Systems (3) 

Prerequisite- Economics 200 or 210 or 1 00 plus consent of instructor. A study of alternative econom 
wstems with regard to their theoretical foundations, actual economic institutions, and achieve- 
mentTand failures. The contrast between socialist and capitalist systems will be emphasized. 

Prereq^sIt^EconomkHoO « 210. An analytical evaluation of Soviet 

including the structure and performance of the Soviet economy and problems of planning and 
control. 

332 Economic Problems of Asia (3) ri ™ 1 i a *s rtn aorirultural 

Prerequisite. Economics 100 or 210. Analysis of the natura resources, popuiation agricultural, 

industrial, transportation, communications, monetary banking, etc. problems of As a, i -eCtaa, 
Japan, etc. and the Asian subcontinent. The relations of non-econom.c problems to the econom 
ic are considered in detail. 

333 Economic Development: Analysis and Case Studies (3) 

Prerequisite- Economics 100 or 210. An examination of the processes of economic growth wi 
special references to developing areas. Considers capital formation re^ 
to the world economy, economic planning and institutional factors, with appropriate case 

studies. 

Prere^ui°iteTconomic^'IoO or 2*0.%*^^onti!Tana?ysjs o/the problems^and f^licie^dealmg^jvith 
poverty, race and discrimination. A field investigation or pro ( ect is required of each student. 

350 American Economic History (3) . with 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 210. The development of American economy institutions with 

special emphasis on economic problems, economic growth, and economic welfa e. 

351 European Economic History (3) . ... , t : nn c and their 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 210. The evolution of European 

relation to the development of industry, commerce, transportation, and finance in the pnnc.pa 

European countries. 

361 Urban Economics (3) , . , , . ,, r han ^rnnomic 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 210. Theory and analysis of the urban economy, urban economic 

problems and policy. 

“ o, consent of ins.roc.o, l*» of be~« CM 

government programs, with emphasis on educational and wa, ^ r “° u , including han- 

ing environmental, cultural, life-saving, and macroeconomic co« anaShave 

dling future benefits and costs. Considers questions such as: Does bene .t-co analysis 
much impact on government decisions? Is benefit-cost analysis worth its cost? 

Prerequisite Economics or 210. A study of government fina "« 

levels with particular reference to the impact of taxation and spending on resource allocatio , 

income distribution, stabilization and growth. . 

370 Economics of Research, Development and Technological Change (3 ^ ., 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 210. Exammation of the impo economics of 

and evaluation 

of the impacts of technological change. 

sssssca: 

and the History Department. 


148 Economics 


410 Government and Business (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 310. An economic study of business organization, conduct and performance 
followed by an analysis of the rationale and impact of public policy on various segments of 
business and business activities, including the regulated industries, sick industries and antitrust 
policy. 

411 International Trade (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 310. An examination of the theory of international trade and the means and 
significance of balance of payments adjustments, with an analysis of past and present develop- 
ments in international, commercial and monetary policy. 

412 Labor Economics (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 310. An analysis of the basic economic and institutional influences operating 
in labor markets. Cons'ders relevant aspects of wage differentials, unemployment, and problems 
of disadvantaged labor market groups. 

420 Money and Banking (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 320. A study of the money supply process and the impact of monetary 
policy on economic activity. 

421 Monetary and Fiscal Policy (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 320. A study of the techniques of monetary and fiscal policy and an appraisal 
of their relative roles in promoting economic stability and growth. 

440 Introduction to Econometrics (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 200 or 210 or 301 andQM 361 or equivalent. Development of advanced 
stat'stical methods and their application in economic research. Advanced concepts in model 
building; development of different types of economic models. The use and effect of economic 
models in public policy. 


441 Introduction to Mathematical Economics (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 200 or 210 or 301 anrfMath 1 30 or equivalent. Selected topics in economic 
theory drawn from microeconomics and macroeconomics. Content varying from year to year 
but with emphasis on constrained optimization problems and rational decision-making. 

450 History of Economic Thought (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 310 or 320. A study of the development of economic thought as reflected 
in the evolution of major schools of thought and of leading individual economists as they 
influenced economic thought and policy. 

497 Business and Economic Research (3) 

(Same as Business Administration 497) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 


Prerequisites: Economics major or concentration, senior standing and approval by the department 
chair. Open to qualified undergraduate students desiring to pursue directed independent in- 
quiry. May be repeated for credit. 

502 Advanced Microeconomic Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 100 and 200 or 210, and 310; classified status in the M.A. in Economics 
program or consent of instructor. An advanced theoretical formulation of the principles of the 
determination of prices and outputs of goods and productive services in a market system Topics 
include: consumer choice, demand, production, cost, the equilibrium of the firm and the market 
and distribution. 


503 Advanced Macroeconomic Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 100 and 200 or 210, and 320; classified status in the M.A. in Economics 
program or consent of instructor. Advanced theory of the determination of employment 
fluctuations of real and money income and the forces underlying economic growth. 

505 Methodology in Economic Research Seminar (3) 

Prerequisites: Classified status in the M.A. in Economics program or consent of instructor. Applica- 
tions of statistical and econometric techniques in economic analysis. Emphasis is on practical 
problems in empirical research. Topics include statistical analyses of demand functions con- 
sumption functions cost and production functions, and models of national income determina- 
tion. Practical problems involved in using multiple regression analysis are examined. 

506 Seminar in Micro- and Macroeconomic Applications (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 502, 503 and 505; classified status in the M.A. in Economics program or 
consent of instructor. Complements the study of methodology in economic research. Students 
select approved topics and via independent investigation, seminar presentation and critique 
develop their analytical and research abilities, culminating with an acceptable paper. 


Finance 149 


511 Economic Problems and Public Policy (3) . . 

Prerequisites: Economics 514, 515 and classified M.B.A. status. Seminar devoted to an examination 
of the nature and implication of the major economic problems facing the economy and an 
evaluation of current and alternative policies for their solution. Problems considered wil include 
price level stabilization, balance of payments equilibrium, economic growth, and cyclical and 
technological unemployment. (Not open to Economics M.A. candidates.) 

514 Principles and Problems of Economic Policy — Part A (3) 

Prerequisite: Classified M.B.A. status. An intensive study of micro- and macroeconomic theory and 
policy within the framework of a market system. (Not open to Economics M.A. candidates.) 

515 Principles and Problems of Economic Policy — Part B (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 514 and classified M.B.A. status. An integration of modern microeconom 
theory optimization techniques, and microeconomic policy. Topics include: mathematical 
programming, consumer choice,, production theory, firm and market equilibrium, and govern- 
ment regulation. (Not open to Economics M.A. candidates.) 

522 Comparative Economics Seminar (3) t c 

Prerequisites: Economics 514 and 515 and classified M.B.A. status. A comparative study of various 
analytical and prescriptive approaches to economic problems of scarcity, development, fisc 
and monetary policy, planning and poverty. (Not open to Economics M.A. candidates.) 

528 Seminar in International Economics (3) ... . . KA D . f fr A 

Prerequisites: Economics 514 or equivalent, consent of instructor or classified A 

systematic survey of international monetary and international trade theories and policies. In- 
cludes analyses of international monetary reform, barriers to trade, economic integration, 
economic development and international capital flows. 

595 Modern Capitalism (3) 

(Same as Business Administration 595) 

5% Selected Topics in Economic Analysis and Policy (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 200 or 210, 310 and 320; classified status in the M.A. in pr °* ra ^ 

or consent of instructor. Seminar: Selected topics in economic analysis "J .«*>!£ ics m S 
covered in depth, with special emphasis on contemporary research and materials. J^s may 
include international monetary systems, comparative economic systems. hi< itory of r tconomrc 
thought, economic history, and advanced topics in micro- and macrotheory. May be repeated 
for credit. 

597 Projects (3) 

Open to qualified graduate students. Directed independent inquiry. 

O^nto'qualif^graduate students. Directed independent inquiry. Student se'ecl :an d have 

approved a thesis topic, show evidence of original research, and must present himself o 
defense of the thesis before a faculty committee. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) . . n . 

Prerequisites: graduate standing, consent of instructor and approval by department chw Oper^ o 
qualified graduate students desiring to pursue independent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. 


FINANCE COURSES 

310 Personal Financial Management (3) Knn . ; , iir „ r n . iHera- 

Financial problems of the household in allocating resources and planning ex Pf n ^ re *. C °" S '* . 
tion of housing, insurance, installment buying, medical care, savings and investments. ( May not 
be used to fulfill the area of concentration requirement in finance.) 

Pmreq^sUe e AccouXg 201 3 B. Financing business enterprises; financial p ^ nning an ^ 

* of alternative sources and uses of combinations of short-, intermediate- and long-term deb, 
and equity. Cost of capital. Study of capital investment decisions; capital budget analysis and 
valuation; working capital and capital structure management. 

Prerequishe^Rnance'^O. Development of techniques for internal financial control; and the 'r applica- 
tion to business situations. Capital costs and optimal capital investment decisions. Budgets and 
forecasts for projection of long-term profitable operations. Analysis of current financial mode s. 
Group problems and case studies. 


150 Finance 


332 Financial Administration (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 320. Cost of cash, accounts receivable and inventories of each asset. Sources 
of short term funds and interchange of alternative short term liabilities as a means of controlling 
costs. Cash flow analysis, funds flow analysis. 

340 Security Investments (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 320 and QM 265 or consent of instructor. Principles underlying the analysis, 
selection and management of securities; characteristics of securities, valuation, trading methods, 
role of mutual funds and other institutions; computerized statement analysis and portfolio 
selection methods; a computer securities game is played by members of the class. 

350 Principles and Practices of Real Estate (3) 

Survey of urban real estate principles and practices; structure and growth of cities; economic 
implication to real estate markets. Trends and factors affecting real property values, real estate 
financing and real estate law. Integrative cases and projects. Study of current urban models used 
in urban development. Group problems and case studies. 

360 Principles of Insurance (3) 

Principles of life, casualty and liability insurance, individual and group insurance programs; methods 
of establishing risks and rates. 

370 International Business Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 320 or consent of instructor. Financing problems of international business. 
Topics include the international financial environment, taxation of foreign income, international 
capital and money markets, problems of risk in foreign investments, and financial techniques 
for the operation of a multinational firm. 

425 Commercial Bank and Financial Institution Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 331 . Application of analytical techniques to the solution of financial institution 
problems. Major financial intermediaries and the broad range of decision-making problems they 
face. Regulation and its effect on management operations. Group problems and case studies. 

432 Financial Forecasting and Capital Budgeting (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 320. Role of forecasting in financial management; construction and interpreta- 
tion of economic forecasts for the economy, industry, and the firm; construction and interpreta- 
tion of financial plans; evaluation of capital acquisition decisions under certainty and uncertainty 
conditions. 

433 Problems in Business Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 331 Comprehensive case studies including group problems of estimating funds 
requirements, long-term financial planning, controlling and evaluating cash flows, and financing 
acquisitions and mergers. Group problems and case studies. 

440 Capital and Money Markets (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 320. Role of capital and money markets in the American economy; markets 
for new corporate and government issues; secondary markets; interrelation of financial institu- 
tions; factors influencing yields and security prices. 

442 Security Analysis and Portfolio Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 340 or consent of instructor. Advanced securities analysis course utilizing 
computer applications for statement analysis, valuation models, and portfolio selection and 
management models. The data base utilizes Standard and Poor's "compustat tapes." A simulat- 
ed portfolio management game is played at the end of the course. 

451 Legal Aspects of Real Estate (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 246 or equivalent area, Finance 350. Law of real property; types of 
ownership; titles and estates; transfers of interests; encumbrances; casements; fixtures; land sale 
contracts; recording; zoning; leases; responsibilities of real estate brokers. 

452 Real Estate Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 350 or consent of instructor. Sources and uses of capital in financing real estate 
transactions. Financial institutions and their effect on credit. Money and capital market condi- 
tions and their effect on credit availability and cost. Instruments of real estate finance. Real estate 
as an investment medium. Group problems and case studies. 

453 Real Estate Valuation (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 350 or consent of instructor. Theory of real property value, historical develop- 
ment; methods used in urban and rural property appraisals; special purpose appraisals. Group 
problems, laboratory work as determined by computer terminal availability. 


Finance 151 


454 Real Estate and Urban Development (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 350. Real estate and urban development deals with factors and influences of 
urban growth and development. Economic factors as they relate to real estate supply and 
demand. Location theory and urban growth patterns. Real estate markets. 

459 Real Estate Research (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 350 and 452 or 453. Croup problems, laboratory work as determined by 
computer terminal availability. 

461 Risk Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 360 or consent of instructor. Techniques and structures of risk management; 
risk planning, control and financing in the business enterprise. 

462 Life and Health Insurance (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 360 or consent of instructor. Life and health insurance coverages, both individ- 
ual and group policies, and the operation of insurance companies. Subjects include business 
and estate planning, pension plans, and government benefits. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: senior standing and approval by department chair. Open to qualified undergraduate 
students desiring to pursue directed independent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. 

517 Managerial Finance (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 510 and classified M.B.A. status. The methodology of financial manage- 
ment including the primary tools for financial analysis, long-term investment decisions, valua- 
tion and working capital management. 

523 Seminar in Corporate Financial Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 517 and classified M.B.A. status. Emphasis in this course is on the analysis o 
the financial decision-making process through case studies and seminar presentations. Current 
financial theory and models are utilized. 

533 Seminar in Financial Administration (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 523 and classified M.B.A. status. Optimal financing and asset administration; 
advanced techniques of capital budgeting; application of analytical methods to the administra- 
tion of the finance function of the business firm. 


540 Seminar in Financial Markets (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 440 or consent of instructor and classified M.B.A. status. Structure and opera- 
tion of major financial institutions; portfolio composition, pricecost problems, and market 
behavior; analysis of financial intermediation and interrelation of financial institutions and 


markets. 

541 Seminar in Investment Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 442 or consent of instructor and classified M.B.A. status. Problems of invest- 
ment and portfolio management; concepts of risk evaluation and investment criteria; ana ysis 
of interest rate movements; investment valuation and timing; regulation and administrative 
problems of the industry. 

551 Seminar in Real Estate Investment (3) , . . . 

Prerequisites: Finance 320, 350 or equivalent and classified M.B.A. status. Problems of real estate 
investment; concepts of evaluation and investment criteria; analysis of real property values, rea 
estate development and financing. 

570 Seminar in International Financial Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 51 7 or consent of instructor and classified M.B.A. status. Focus on the fmancia 
problems of the multinational firm. Included are international financing instruments, capital 
investment decisions, and constraints on the profitability of multinational businesses. 

597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: classified M.B.A. status. Directed independent inquiry. 


Prerequisite: classified M.B.A. status. Directed independent inquiry. Student will select and have 
approved a thesis topic, show evidence of original research, and must present himself for a 
defense of the thesis before a faculty committee. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) ... , . KA 

Prerequisites: classified M.B.A. status, consent of instructor and approval by department chair. May 

be repeated for credit. 


152 Management 


MANAGEMENT COURSES 

244 Introduction to Systems Concepts (3) 

The basic functions of goal seeking organizations, basic systems concepts in business and society, 
and the systems approach to problem solving. 

246 Business Law (3) 

Philosophy, institutions and role of law in business and society, with emphasis on functions of courts 
and attorneys, case studies in areas of contracts, and on the law relating to sale of goods. 

340 Behavioral Science for Business (3) 

Prerequisites: general education for social sciences, and a passing score on the English Proficiency 
Examination. Study of social and cultural environments of business. Communication, leadership, 
motivation, perception, personality development, group dynamics and group growth. Covers 
fundamental aspects of human behavior with implications for organizational design and man- 
agement practice. 

341 Organization and Management Theory (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 200 or 210, or consent of instructor. Administrative processes, organization 
theories, applications in utility-creating business operations. Planning, control and information 
systems, measuring and improving effectiveness. Leadership in creating utility. Open to non- 
business majors. 

342 Production Operations (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 341 and QM 265. Fundamentals of production systems which combine 
materials, labor, and capital resources to produce goods or services. Analysis of systems, models 
and methods for management of production operations. Product and process development. 
Case studies stress utilization of computer decision models. 

343 Personnel Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 341 or consent of instructor. A study of the personnel function, its 
activities, and its opportunities. Emphasis upon management's responsibilities for selection, 
development and effective utilization of personnel. Open to non-business majors. 

347 Business Law (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 246 or equivalent. Philosophy, institutions and role of law in business 
relationships, with emphasis on case studies in areas of agency, partnerships, corporations, 
bankruptcy, unfair competition and trade regulation. 

348 Business Law (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 246.or equivalent. The philosophy, institutions and role of law in commer- 
cial and personal transactions, with emphasis upon case studies in the areas of personal 
property, bailments, commercial paper, secured transactions, real property, mortgages, trusts, 
community property, wills, estate administration and insurance. 

441 Labor-Management Relations (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 341. Impact of labor-management relations upon labor, management, and 
the public. Proper grievance procedure, collective bargaining and settlement of disputes are 
among subjects examined. 

442 Collective Bargaining and Labor Legislation (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 441. Study of effects of federal and state legislation on union and nonun- 
ion environments in both private and public sectors. Practicum in collective bargaining proce- 
dures. Case studies of recent successful and unsuccessful labor negotiations. 

443 Individual, Interpersonal and Group Dynamics for Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 340, 341 or consent of instructor. Case studies and current literature on 

human problems of work situations. Focuses on developing self-knowledge; manager motiva- 
tion; communicator strengths; improving interaction skills; and improving interaction processes 
in groups. Laboratory work offers practical approach. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

444 Management of Systems (3) 

Prerequisites: QM core and other 300 level courses in student's program. Technology for managing 
business and other enterprises as cybernetic systems. Investigates the design and control of 
systems appropriate for product, project and program levels of analysis. (2 hours lecture, 2 
hours laboratory) 

445 Advanced Production Operations (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 342 and QM core. Planning and control methodologies for production 
operations. Quantitative approaches which integrate cost, schedule and technical performance 
criteria. Collection, evaluation and use of real-time information. Individual and group projects 
synthesize control systems for actual cases. 


Management 153 


446 Managerial Economics (3) 

Prerequisites: QM core, Economics 310 and Management 341. A study of relationships of manage- 
ment tools to applied economics and statistics in decision-making process; use of cases and 
group problems to study the true economic meaning of cost, demand, supply, price, product 
and competition. 

447 Management Decision Games (3) 

Prerequisites: business administration core less Management 449, or consent of instructor. A simula- 
tion of an oligopolistic industry to provide the student with an opportunity, through group 
problems, to use statistics and other analytical tools to make managerial decisions in the 
functional areas of management. (2 hours lecture; 2 hours activity) 

449 Seminar in Business Policies (3) 

Prerequisites: all other School of Business Administration and Economics core courses and depart- 
mental approval. Through analyzing integrative cases from top management viewpoint, students 
use business and liberal arts training, especially knowledge of business operations, administra- 
tive processes, organization theory, and policy formulation. Individual and team efforts. 

494 Seminar in Management Information Systems (3) 

Prerequisites: 300-level business core courses, 300-level requirements for concentration in manage- 
ment information systems and Management 444. Senior seminar and practical applications in 
the design, implementation and use of management decision/ information systems. 


(3) 


497 Business and Economic Research 

(Same as Business Administration 497) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) , 

Prerequisites: management concentration, senior standing, and approval by faculty sponsor and 
department chair of proposed statement of work. Open to qualified undergraduate students 
desiring to pursue directed independent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. 

516 Organizational Theory and Management of Operations (3) 

Prerequisites: classified M.B.A. status, Accounting 510, Economics 514 and Quantitative Methods 
512. Modern organization theory and application in utility creating operations. Planning, con- 
trol, organizing, directing, communication and information systems, and measures of effective- 
ness are explored. Business ethics and relationships to society and politics are examined. 
Graduate discussion and research reports. 

518 Legal Environment of Business (3) , , c . 

Prerequisites: classified M.B.A. status and Accounting 510. Philosophy, institutions and role ot law 
in business, with emphasis upon legal implications inherent in business decisions and upon case 
studies in areas of contracts, sale of goods, agency, partnerships and corporations. 

524 Seminar in Organizational Behavior and Administration (3) . , 

Prerequisites: classified M.B.A. status, Management 516 and 518 or equivalent. Analysis of human 
behavior in organization, studies in organizational theories, and administrative action. 

541 Seminar in Project Operations Problem Solving (3) , 

Prerequisites: classified M.B.A. status, Management 516 and 518, or equivalent. A seminar designed 
to focus attention on application of system analysis and other dynamic tec mques o cur 
operations problems. Special projects are used to demonstrate application of concepts. 

542 Seminar in Labor Relations (3) . . . 

Prerequisites: classified M.B.A. status, Management 516 and 518, or equ^lcnt Theories a 
philosophies of union-management relations in modern industria socie y wi ... 
trends in nonindustrial organizations. Issues in collective bargaining, contract administration, 
labor law, and government regulation. Discussion and analysis of literature. 

543 Seminar in Personnel Administration (3) . D m/i j 0 c oraHiiatP 

Prerequisites: classified M.B.A. status, Management 516 and 518, or equivalent. Provides ^ graduate 

students with opportunities to study cases, problems, and significant personne 

literature in order to develop a comprehensive understanding of personnel administration and 

human relations. 

548 Seminar in International Management (3) . , . : n 

Prerequisites: classified M.B.A. status, Management 516 and 518, or equ'valen hp P nn p^7ionT 
managerial qualifications and training, political structure within an Wl °V t nnal firm 
foreign receptivity to United States business, organization and controlling the international firm. 

Management in selected countries is examined. 


154 Marketing 

549 Seminar in Policy Planning and Administration (3) 

Prerequisites: classified M.B.A. status, Management 516 and 518, or equivalent. Planning, implement- 
ing and controlling policy strategies to achieve objectives are considered. Executive's role in 
overall enterprise operations and the firm's resource use are examined and supported by cases, 
literature and training techniques. 

597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: classified M.B.A. status. Directed independent project. Student will select and have 
approved a project proposal, conduct the project, and prepare a formal analysis and report. 

598 Thesis (3-6) 

Prerequisite: classified M.B.A. status. Directed independent inquiry. Student will select and have 
approved a thesis topic, show evidence of original research, and must present himself for a 
defense of the thesis before a faculty committee. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified M.B.A. status, consent of instructor and consent of department chair. May 
be repeated for credit. 


MARKETING COURSES 

351 Principles of Marketing (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 200. Analysis of how management markets output of the enterprise — and 
obtains revenue. Covers product management, pricing, promotion, distribution channels. Mar- 
keting's role in socioeconomic system is examined from vievypoints of consumer, management 
and government. 

352 Principles of Retailing (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. Covers problems retailers face such as store location, store design and 
layout, what goods should be purchased, how to obtain sales volume, plan operations, control 
the enterprise, and react to competitors. Current problems in retailing will be examined. 

353 Marketing Administration (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. Major problems facing the marketing executive, including marketing 
organization, planning, and forecasting, market analysis, budgeting, product policy, pricing, 
advertising and sales promotion, administration of the sales force. 

354 Principles of Advertising (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. The management of the advertising function, including the role of 
advertising in marketing strategy, budgetary considerations, allocation among media, measure- 
ment of effectiveness, administration and control, and its economic and social implications. 

355 Credit and Credit Administration (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. The general nature and functions of credit, credit instruments; the 
management of the credit department; sources of credit information; acceptance of credit risk; 
establishment of credit limits; and the problem of collections. 

356 Creative Motivation in Marketing (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. Salesmanship, in the very broad context, is persuading people to do 
what you want them to do. A fundamental managerial skill. Relevant principles of behavior are 
applied to the persuasion process. 

357 Industrial Purchasing (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. The principles and practices of purchasing for industrial organizations. 
Major buying policies, sources of materials, quantity and quality considerations, and the relation 
to production cost. 

358 Physical Distribution (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 351, QM 265. Introduction to the physical distribution system and its 
element — packaging, transportation, warehousing and inventory management. Analysis of 
physical distribution practices and problems leading to improved system design and effective- 
ness. 

379 Marketing Research Methods (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 351 and QM 361. Introduction to marketing research process: problem 
formulation, identifying data sources, selecting data collection and analysis techniques, prepar- 
ing research reports. Emphasis placed upon selecting marketing problems for research. Lecture- 
discussion, cases. (3 hours lecture, 1 hour activity). 

451 Management of Physical Distribution Operations (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 358, Finance 330, QM 361 and 362 (or consent of instructor). Builds on 


Marketing 155 


the material and techniques introduced in Marketing 358. Addresses the problems involved in 
physical distribution operations management. Uses a ''case" or "situation" approach to simu- 
late a "real world" problem context. 

453 Marketing to the Government (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351 . The marketing of defense and nondefense products to the government. 
The nature and administration of contractual agreements with government agencies. 


454 Advertising Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 354. Examines the interrelationships of product planning, advertising man- 
agement, sales management, financial management and corporate strategy in a competitive 
environment. 

455 Management of the Sales Force (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. Examines the job of the sales manager in such areas as organization; 
recruiting and selecting salesmen; sales training; formulating compensation and expense plans, 
supervising and stimulating sales activities; morale; sales planning, evaluating salesmen; and 
distribution cost analysis. 

456 Marketing Problems in Retail Sector (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 352. Structure and scope of the retail sector; entrepreneurial function; fran- 
chising; consumer segment and store image; assimilating the employee into the organization, 
pricing; measurement and elasticities; monopolistic competitive markets and nonprice competi- 
tion; merchandising control; emerging trends in retailing — a macroeconomic view. 

457 Quantitative Marketing Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 351, QM core, Finance 320 and Management 341 (or consent of instructor) . 
Develops the use of analytical tools and techniques as support for such marketing-management 
functions as planning, scheduling, evaluating, control. Emphasizes the analysis of marketing 
processes and systems and the development of appropriate action recommendations. 

458 International Marketing (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 351 and senior standing. Presents analytical framework for studying devel- 
opment of domestic marketing systems. Marketing problems arising across national boundaries 
and within national markets will be analyzed. Emphasis is given U.S. firms involved in interna- 
tional marketing operations. 

459 Marketing Problems (3) . . . 

Prerequisites: senior standing, two advanced marketing courses. Analysis and evaluation ot mar et- 
ing problems of both the firm and society. Emphasis placed upon integrative interactions 
between marketing activities and the interfaces of marketing with finance and production. Case 


method and current readings. 

470 Consumer Behavior (3) , . 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. An investigation of consumer buying patterns, motivation and searcn 
behavior. Emphasis on the consumer decision-making process. Interdisciplinary study of con- 
sumer based on concepts from economics, sociology, psychology, cultural anthropology and 
mass communications. 

479 Research Problems in Marketing (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 379. Marketing research practicum. Emphasis on matching research me- 
thodologies to problems of market analysis, product planning, advertising, sales forecasting and 
other marketing activities. Alternative data collection and analysis techniques explored. Semi- 
nars, research projects. (3 hours lecture, 1 hour activity) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) , _ , . . 0 

Prerequisites: marketing concentration, senior standing, and approval by the departmen c . pe 
to qualified undergraduate students desiring to pursue directed independent inquiry. May be 
repeated for credit. 

519 Marketing Management (3) . „ 

Prerequisites: Accounting 510, Economics 514, QM 512, 513, Management 516, 518 (may be taken 
concurrently) and classified M.B.A. status. A graduate introductory course in marketing man- 
agement. A contemporary analysis of concepts, principles and techniques used in the adminis- 
tration of the marketing variables. The role of marketing within the context of society and the 
business firm is explored. 

525 Seminar in Marketing Problems (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 519 and classified M.B.A. status. A managerial approach to major marketing 
problems facing industry: definition of and organization for marketing task; demand analysis; 


156 Quantitative Methods 


decisions concerning product, price, promotion, and trade channels. Use of case method and 
readings on current topics. 

552 Seminar in Price Policy (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 525 and classified M.B.A. status. Critical analysis of pricing problems. Pricing 
function examined from standpoints of economic theory, management science, business prac- 
tices, legal constraints, ethical considerations. Relationship of pricing objectives, policies, strate- 
gies, methods market behavior, goals of firm. 

553 Seminar in Product Planning (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 525 and classified M.B.A. status. Designed to assist marketing management 
in the formulation and execution of marketing plans for new and existing products. Examination 
of the management decision areas and procedures search, preliminary evaluation, develop- 
ment, testing, commercialization products. 

554 Seminar in Promotion (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 379, 525, and classified M.B.A. status. Critical analysis of the promotion mix 
as employed by businesses to optimize profitable operations. Particular emphasis given to 
determination of promotional goals, planning, budgeting, controlling promotional programs; 
and measuring promotional effectiveness. 

556 Seminar in Consumer Behavior (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 525 and classified M.B.A. status. Design and evaluation of marketing com- 
munications programs in consumer and industrial settings based on the critical analysis of buyer 
decision-making and communications models. Discussion, cases, and projects. 

558 Seminar in International Marketing (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 519 or equivalent and classified M.B.A. status. Includes: comparative inter- 
national marketing systems; managerial techniques and strategies as they apply to multinational 
and domestic firms engaged in export; and the impact of political, legal, social, economic and 
cultural forces upon the decision-making process. 

597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: classified M.B.A. status. Directed independent inquiry. 

598 Thesis (3-6) 

Prerequisite: classified M.B.A. status. Directed independent inquiry. Student will select and have 
approved a thesis topic, show evidence of original research, and must present himself for a 
defense of the thesis before a faculty committee. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified M.B.A. status, consent of instructor and approval by department chair. May 
be repeated for credit. 


QUANTITATIVE METHODS COURSES 

170 Introduction to Quantitative Methods (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 150A or equivalent. For those business majors concentrating in quantitative 
methods. Emphasizes application of the mathematical tools which the student learns in a first 
course in calculus and analytic geometry. 

264 Computer Programming (2) 

Introduction to problem-oriented languages of computers. The solving of problems using computer 
programming. May be repeated for credit. 

265 Computer Methods in Business and Economics (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 1 30 or equivalent ( may be taken concurrently) . Elementary probability and digital 
computer methods and their business and economic applications. Solving business and eco- 
nomics problems on a digital computer with a compiler language. 

266 Computer Methods and Probability* (3) 

Prerequisite: college algebra or three years of high school mathematics including two courses in 
algebra. For computer science majors. Includes computer system configurations, terminology, 
algebraic compiler level programming, flow charts, probability, set theory, frequency distribu- 
tions, expectation and binomial distribution. 

270 Introduction to Computer-based Information Systems (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 265. Information systems from the viewpoint of systems analysis and management. 
Primary consideration is given to concepts of file structure and file processing. 

• This course is now a part of the Computer Science Department, School of Mathematics, Science and Engineering, and 
will be so designated in subsequent catalogs. 


Quantitative Methods 157 


280 Computer Language Survey (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 264, 265, or equivalent. A study of selected computer languages. Introduction to 
formal language theory, numerical data processing, string and list processing, formal structure 
manipulating, recursive routines. 

289 Computer Methods in Social Science (3) 

An introduction to the history and application of digital computers to problems in the social sciences. 
Student written programs in a problem-oriented computer language. Discussion of computers, 
law and society; artificial intelligence; and other topics of current interest. 

300 File Structures and Data Communication (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 270 or equivalent. Design and use of computer files for information processing. 
Basic aspects of data communication in computer systems. 

361 Statistical Methods in Business and Economics (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 265 or equivalent and Math 1 30. Collection, analysis, and presentation of statistical 
data. Random sampling, estimation, and hypothesis testing. Introduction to regression and 
correlation. 

362 Management Science Methods in Business and Economics (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 265 or equivalent and Math 130. Concepts of mathematical methods and their 
application to business and economic problems. Elementary mathematical optimization mod- 
els. Students with a quantitative methods concentration must take QM 363 in lieu of this course. 


363 Management Science (3) . 

Prerequisites: Math 150B or QM 170. Introduction to the basic concepts of management science and 
its relationship to economics and decision theory. Topics surveyed include optimization in 
continuous models, linear programming, queueing and inventory models, network analysis and 
dynamic programming. 

364 Computer Logic and Programming* (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 264, 265, or equivalent, and QM 280 (may be taken concurrently). An introduc- 
tory survey of assembler language, hardware organization, design, logic, and system software 
of modern digital computers. 


382 Information Structures and Machine Language Programming* (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 364. A formal discussion of information structures, the types of processes for which 
they are appropriate, and their relative computational efficiencies. Assignments implemented 
in a variety of machine languages. 

404 Analysis of Information Systems (3) . 

Prerequisite: QM 300. The function of information systems, system hardware, system organization 
and structure, analysis of information systems, and examples of integrated systems. 

408 Data Management Applications (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 404. Data handling facilities of higher level languages. The concept of information 
systems and data management systems. To equip the student to design and implement an 
information system and to evaluate proposed computer systems in accord with specified 


requirements. 

409 On-Line Distributed Systems (3) ., , , 

Prerequisite: QM 404. Recent developments in the distributed network system are described from 
both the hardware and software point of view. Tradeoffs of implementation and capa i ities are 
discussed. 

420 Applied Statistical Forecasting (3) . . . . ... 

Prerequisites: QM 361 or Math 230 and Economics 310 or 320. Statistical methods applied to 
problems in business and industry; fundamentals of index-number constructions; practical 
multiple regression models with computer solutions; basic techniques in time-series ana ysis o 
trend, cyclical and seasonal components; correlation of time-series and forecasting with the 
computer. 


• This course is now a part of the Computer Science Department, School of Mathematics, Science and Engineering, and 
will be so designated in subsequent catalogs. 


158 Quantitative Methods 


422 Surveys and Sampling Design and Applications (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 361 or Math 230. Principles for designing business and economic surveys. Applica- 
tions in accounting, marketing research, economic statistics and the social sciences. Basic 
methods of sampling: simple random, stratified and multistage design; construction of sampling 
frames; detecting and controlling non-sampling errors. 

430 Nonparametric Statistics (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 361 or Math 230. The application of nonparametric statistical methods to problems 
in business and economics. Topics covered include sign tests, rank correlation, contingency 
tables, order statistics, runs. 

446 Computer Programming Theory* (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 382. A study of techniques for establishing the correctness of algorithms, estimating 
time and storage requirements of algorithms, and selecting the operational environment and 
linguistic media appropriate for algorithms. 

448 Digital Simulation in Business and Economics (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 280, and Math 435 or QM 461 . A study of techniques of generating stochastic 

variates and their use in solving numerical problems and studying operational problems in 

queueing, communication, economic, inventory, scheduling and other business models. 

461 Advanced Statistics (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 170 or Math 150B and QM 361 or Math 335 or Engineering 423. An advanced 
treatment of the theory and application of the topics covered in QM 361, using the methods 
of the calculus. Moments, generating functions, point and interval estimation, Neyman-Pearson 
and Likelihood Ratio Hypothesis Tests. 

464 Intormation Retrieval and Natural Language Processing (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 364 or consent of instructor. An examination of modern computer hardware, the 
techniques of programming it, and the languages in which such programs are written. Includes 
discussion of memory protection, interrupt systems, recursive programming, list-structured 
languages and user-oriented languages. 

465 Linear Programming (3) 

Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. Theory and applications of linear programming. Topics include: 
problem formulation and solution, simplex method, duality, post-optimality and parametric 
analyses, techniques for specially structured problems such as upper bounded, transportation, 
and assignment problems. 

466 Integer and Nonlinear Programming (3) 

Prerequisites: calculus and consent of instructor. Theory and applications of nonlinear and integer 
programming. Topics in nonlinear programming include Kuhn-Tucker theorem, computational 
algorithms, quadratic programming. Topics in integer programming include cutting plane al- 
gorithms, branch and bound techniques, special techniques for specially structured problems. 

467 Statistical Quality Control (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 361 or Math 230. Shewhart Control Charts for variables, percent defective, and 
defects. Tolerances, process capacity; special control charts, acceptance sampling, and batch 
processing problems. Bayesian aspects of process control. 

468 Design of Experiments (3) (Formerly 566) 

Prerequisite: QM 361 or Engineering 205 and Math 230. The fundamentals of experimental design, 
including analysis of variance, factorial experiments, nested designs, confounding and factorial 
replications. 

469 Reliability Statistics (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 461 or equivalent. Statistical principles of reliability; hazard functions; point and 
interval estimation of reliability; reliability demonstration; growth models. 

470 Conflict, Bargaining and Cooperation (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 265, Math 1 20, or consent of instructor. Analysis of the structure of two-, three- 
and many-sided conflict, bargaining, and cooperation by means of the theory of games of 
strategy. The structure and utility, domination, negotiability and non-negotiability, cooperation 
and equilibrium. 

471 Dynamic Programming and Network Flows (3) 

Prerequisites: Calculus and QM 465. Theory and applications for dynamic programming and network 
flows and their interrelationships. Topics include formulation of sequential decision processes 
such as cargo-loading, equipment replacement, resource allocation, and scheduling problems; 
shortest route problem; max. flow/ min. cut theorem, generalized network problems. 

• This course is now a part of the Computer Science Department, School of Mathematics, Science and Engineering, and 
will be so designated in subsequent catalogs. 


Quantitative Methods 159 

472 Quantitative Methods in Production & Inventory Control (3) 

Prerequisites: Calculus, QM 362 or 363 and 361. (s,S) inventory policies, static and dynamic models, 
deterministic and probablistic models; aggregate production planning models, scheduling mod- 
els, assembly line balancing. 

475 Multivariate Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 461 or equivalent. The least squares principle; estimation and hypothesis testing 
in linear regression; multiple and curvilinear regression models; discriminant analysis; principal 
components analysis; application of multivariate analysis in business and industry. 

480 Information Theory and Cybernetics* (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 265, 361 or Math 250. Study of complex systems in their static aspects; information 
contents and communications and their dynamic aspects; change, control and stability. 

482 Introduction to Discrete Structures* (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 150A,B and either QM 382 or consent of instructor. Combinatorial and graph 
theory techniques applied to study of known and unknown structures, to counting, approximate 
counting and enumeration of structural configurations, and to resolution of discrete optimization 
problems. 

484 Computer Assisted Instruction* (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 264 and consent of instructor, knowledge of computer organization, terminology, 
and experience in programming. A survey of computer-assisted and computer-based instruction 
consisting of a review of present research activities and including: methodology of educational 
approaches, implementations, and present achievements. 

485 Programming Systems and Programming Language Processing* (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 382. A study of monitor, assembler, and compiler systems and the hardware, 
firmware, and software characteristics required in a real-time, interactive environment. 

486 Automata Theory* (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 382 and Math 250, or consent of instructor. A formal introduction to the theory 
of computation and its relation to modern computing techniques. Includes development of 
Turing machines, recursive functions, equivalence theorems, and the algebraic theory of recog- 
nizers. 

487 Artificial Intelligence* (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 382. Selected topics of current interest from heuristic programming, pattern recog- 
nition, learning systems, problem solving systems, and formal symbol manipulating systems. 

488 Introduction to Pattern Recognition* (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 382 and 461, or consent of instructor. Classification techniques, discriminant 
functions, training algorithms, potential function theory, supervised and unsupervised learning, 
feature selection, clustering techniques, multidimensional rotations and rank ordering relations. 

490 Queueing and Stochastic Process Models in Business and Economics (3) 

Prerequisite: Calculus, QM 362 or 363 and 361. Single and multichannel queueing systems of 
Markovian and general arrival and departure streams; birth-death processes, cost models and 
optimization of queues; Markov analyses; introduction to renewal theory; reliability. 

495 Symposium in Applied Mathematics (1) 

Prerequisites: a major in engineering, mathematics, or business administration (quantitative meth- 
ods) and at least junior standing. A series of weekly lectures to be given on varied topics in 
applied mathematics by invited experts in areas of current research and applications. 

497 Business and Economic Research (3) 

(Same as Business Administration 497) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: quantitative methods concentration, senior standing, and approval by the department 
chair. Open to qualified undergraduate students desiring to pursue directed independent in- 
quiry. May be repeated for credit. 

507 Organizations and Their Informational Systems Requirements (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 407 or equivalent. A broad, rigorous, non-mathematical study of the infor- 
mation processing requirements of organizations and the abstract factors which characterize 
these requirements. 

512, 513 Quantitative Business Decision Techniques (3,3) 

Prerequisites: QM 512 must be taken before QM 513 as must Accounting 510 and Economics 514; 

* This course is now a part of the Computer Science Department, School of Mathematics, Science and Engineering, and 
will be so designated in subsequent catalogs. 


160 Quantitative Methods 


classified M.B.A. status. The development and application of mathematical and statistical meth- 
ods, including mathematical models, computer programming and simulation, used in business 
decision-making. 

526 Quantitative Business Decision Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 513 and classified M.B.A. status. Techniques from probability, statistical decision 
theory, and computer simulation applied to problems of management. 

560 Operations Research for Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 130 or 150A, and classified M.B.A. status. Techniques of operations research, 
with emphasis on model construction. Topics include optimization in continuous models, linear 
programming, queueing and scheduling models, inventory models, dynamic programming. 
(Not open to students with QM 363) 

565 File Management and Information Systems (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 464 or consent of instructor. An examination of innovative real-time computer 
based information systems in industry and government. 

576 Business Modeling and Simulation (3) 

Prerequisites: graduate status and consent of instructor. Theory of modeling and simulation of 
business activities. Selected topics include planned models, flow graphs, queueing phenomena, 
industrial dynamics, human factors and large scale systems. 

584 Operating Systems* (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 485. A study of design and evaluation techniques for controlling automatic resource 
allocation, providing efficient programming environments and appropriate user access to the 
system, and sharing the problem solving facilities. 

585 Programming Language Processing* (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 584. A study of practical techniques for the design of compilers and their relation 
to formal automata models. 

586 Mathematical Automata Theory (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 382, Math 250, QM 486. A mathematically theoretic approach to computation, 
recursive function, syntactic compiler theory, ambiguity, soluability automata, probabilistic 
machines and decomposition theory. 

587 Formal Languages and Automata* (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 485. A study of finite and infinite languages; generators, recognizers and acceptors, 
types of formal grammars; decidability and partial decidability. 

588 Mathematical Pattern Recognition* (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 382, 461, 488. A mathematical approach to classification techniques, discriminant 
functions, training algorithms, potential function theory, supervised and unsupervised learning, 
feature selection, clustering techniques, multidimensional rotations and rank ordering relations. 

597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: classified M.B.A. status. Directed independent inquiry. 

598 Thesis (3-6) 

Prerequisite: classified M.B.A. status. Student will select and have approved a thesis topic, show 
evidence of original research and must present himself for a defense of the thesis before a 
faculty committee. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified M.B.A. status and consent of department chair. May be repeated for credit. 

• This course is now a part of the Computer Science Department, School of Mathematics, Science and Engineering, and 
will be so designated in subsequent catalogs. 



HUMAN DI:VI=I.CPMISN7 
AND COMMUNITY SERVICE 



162 


SCHOOL OF HUMAN DEVELOPMENT AND 
COMMUNITY SERVICE 

Dean: Robert T. Stout 


The School of Human Development and Community Service offers work designed to provide 
preservice education and professional development for professionals in education, nursing and other 
forms of public service. Courses are offered at the bachelor's degree level in child development, 
counseling, human services, nursing, physical education, recreation, reading and teacher training. 
In addition, graduate work is offered in bilingual education, early childhood education, counseling, 
physical education, reading, school administration, special education and teacher education. 

RESEARCH PROGRAMS IN EDUCA T/ON 

510 Research Design and Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: bachelor's degree, Teacher Education 509 or equivalent. Elements of design, in- 
strumentation, treatment of data, hypothesis testing and inference and analysis of educational 
data Develop a research proposal Practice in analyzing and evaluating research reports. 

SERVICE PROGRAM 

252 Career Exploration and Life Planning (3) 

Exploration of personal career potentials, employment trends, decision-making, goal-setting and job 
search methods. Lectures, panels, small group interaction, vocational-educational tests will be 
used. 

CHILD DEVELOPMENT 

ADVISER 
James Gilmore 

The B.S. in Child Development is administered by an interdisciplinary group representing the ethnic 
studies programs, the Department of Psychology, the Department of Sociology and the Division of 
Teacher Education. 

This degree is designed for students interested in child related vocations. The objective of this 
program is to expand the degree candidate's understanding of growing human individuals and his 
ability to work effectively with them 

BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN CHILD DEVELOPMENT 

The major in child development requires the successful completion of a minimum of 51 units which 
satisfy the pattern indicated below. Each degree candidate and faculty adviser will select course 
options consistent with the student's background and interests, and assure that the program forms 
a coherent entity The program is approved by a faculty committee of three, including the adviser. 
Each member of this committee will be a member of a different academic department. 

Units 

Upper Division 51 

Required (Either of the following): 

Child Development 312, Human Growth and Development (Same as Ed-TE 312) (3) 

Psychology 361, Developmental Psychology (3) 

Required (Minimum of 6 units selected from the following): 

Child Development 385. Infancy and Early Childhood (Same as Ed-TE 385) (3) 

Child Development 390, Middle Childhood (Same as Ed-TE 390) (3) 

Child Development 386. Adolescence (Same as Ed-TE 386) (3) 

Required (Each of the following courses — minimum of 18 units): 

Biological Science 311, Human Reproduction (2) 

Biological Science 314, Ethics and Genetics (1 ) 

Child Development 391, Practicum (3) 

Child Development 4%, Senior Seminar (3) 

Education 371, Exceptional Individual (3) 


Counseling/ Psychometry /School Psychology 1 63 

Psychology 463, Experimental Child Psychology (3) 

Sociology 453, Sociology of Childhood (3) 

Required (Minimum of 6 units selected from the following): 

Afro-ethnic Studies 309, Black Family (3) 

Anthropology 415, Culture and Personality (3) 

Chicano Studies 431, Chicano Child (3) 

Criminal justice 330, Crime and Delinquency (3) 

Sociology 413, Juvenile Delinquency (3) 

Sociology 451, Sociology of the Family (3) 

Required (Minimum of 9 units — select from the following): 

Afro-Ethnic Studies 422, Psychology of the Afro-American (3) 

American Studies 301, American Character (3) 

Anthropology 450, Culture and Education (3) 

Art 380, Art and Child Development (3) 

Chicano Studies 305, Chicano Family (3) 

Criminal Justice 425, Juvenile Justice (3) 

Dance 271, Creative Dance for Children (3) 

Education 406, Educational Sociology (3) 

Education 437, Early Childhood Education (3) 

English 433, Children's Literature (3) 

Music 333, Music and Child Development (3) 

Psychology 311, Educational Psychology (3) 

Psychology 471, Behavior Modification (3) 

Physical Education 425, Sensory-Motor Development (3) 

Physical Education 425, Movement Education (3) 

Sociology 341, Social Interaction (3) 

Speech 403, Speech and Language Development (3) 

Theatre 402, Dramatic Activities for Children (3) 

Required 9 units of electives selected with approval of adviser 
Total for major 51 


CHILD DEVELOPMENT COURSES 

312 Human Growth and Development (3) 

(Same as Ed-TE 312) 

385 Infancy and Early Childhood (3) 

(Same as Ed-TE 385) 

386 Adolescence (3) 

(Same as Ed-TE 386) 

390 Middle Childhood (3) 

(Same as Ed-TE 390) 

391 Practicum in Child Development (3) 

Prerequisites: Child Development 385, 390 or 386 and consent of instructor. Supervised practical 
experience with children or adolescents in selected community settings. Seminar and field 
placement. May be repeated for a maximum of six units of credit. 

4% Senior Seminar in Child Development (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Topics in child development selected by the faculty and students 
participating in course. Theory, methodology and findings are emphasized. 

COUNSELING/PSYCHOMETRY/SCHOOL PSYCHOLOGY 

FACULTY 

Marilyn Bates 
Coordinator 

Keith Golay, David Keirsey, Michael Parker 

PART-TIME 

Jerome Atkin, Dewitt Bogue, Edwin Carrigan, Raymond Choiniere, LeRoy Cordrey, Lang Dana, 
Evelyn Delunas, Vickie Dendinger, Ski Harrison, Eleanor Hicks, Wm. LaForge, Milton Lucius, 
Les March, Joe Platow, Jean Preble, Richard Rogal, Elaine Rowen, John Seeland, Jerry Shaw, 
Tom Smith. 


1 64 Counseling/ Psychometry /School Psychology 


The counseling/ psychometry /school psychology program is focused on the competencies which 
students acquire. Students who exit from the program as graduates will be certified by the faculty 
as having demonstrated to a specified degree, a specified set of competencies. Curricula are offered 
leading to (1) the degree of Master of Science in Counseling and (2) credentials in counseling, 
psychometry and school psychology. 

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN COUNSELING 
Prerequisites 

An applicant must meet the university requirements for admission in conditionally classified graduate 
standing: a baccalaureate degree from an accredited institution and a grade-point average of at least 
2.5 in the last 60 semester units attempted (see section of this catalog on admission of graduates 
for complete statement and procedures). In addition, an applicant should have professional experi- 
ence or other approved experience. Applications are screened by a Faculty Review Committee and 
applicants are notified of their acceptance or nonacceptance. As soon as a student is admitted to 
the university for work toward this degree, he should schedule an appointment with a faculty adviser 
to work out a program of studies and a schedule of classes. Applicants may wish to schedule a 
conference for preliminary program advisement before submitting a formal application. 

A student who meets the requirements for conditionally classified graduate standing, as well as the 
following requirements, may be admitted as a classified student upon the development of an 
approved study plan: 

( 1 ) An approved major; 

(2) A grade-point average of 2.5 overall; 

(3) Satisfactory interview, references and autobiography; 

(4) Coun 452 satisfactorily completed or in progress, and approved for further work in the 
program by the Faculty Review Committee. The student should submit an application for 
admission to the Program of Counseling/ Psychometry /School Psychology, complete a for- 
mal study plan for the M.S. in Counseling degree, and file a request for classified standing 
in the university Graduate Office. Admission to classified standing is through formal and 
informal screening processes, is by faculty decision, and is approved by the dean of graduate 
studies. 


Study Plan 

The following information is provided to assist students in planning programs and in seeking admis- 
sion to classified graduate status. Students should consult the Graduate Bulletin for information 
concerning standards for graduate study, steps in the master's degree program, and graduate policies 
and procedures. Thirty semester units of graduate work, specified on a formal study plan approved 
by the graduate adviser, must be completed within five years. The units are to be distributed as 
follows: 

Units 


Master's degree studies, supporting courses 9 

Ed-RP 510 Research Design and Analysis (3) or 

Coun 557 Research and Development in Counseling and Psychology (3) 

Adviser-approved courses (6) 

Courses for the concentration in counseling 21 


Coun 452 Explorations in Self-Concepts: Professional /Personal (3) 

Coun 550 Counseling Procedures I (3) 

Coun 551 Career Education and Program Development (3) 

Coun 552 Croup Leadership (3) 

Coun 553 Program management and Operation (3) 

Coun 555 Psychological Disorders I (3) 

Coun 598 Thesis, or Coun 597 Project, or Coun 595 Advanced Studies (includes 
comprehensive examination) (3) 

Total 30 

For advisement and further information, consult the program graduate adviser. 

See also "The Program of Master's Degrees" in this catalog and the Graduate Bulletin. 

INTERNSHIP IN SCHOOL COUNSELING 

The program offers an internship program for bilingual / bicultural counselors in cooperation with 
sponsoring school districts. 


Counseling/ Psychometry /School Psychology 165 


advanced credential programs 

The program offers work toward the basic pupil personnel credentials with authorization for counsel- 
ing, psychometry and psychology. Students are asked to check with an adviser to plan a program 
of study. 


COUNSELING/PSYCHOMETRY/SCHOOL 
PSYCHOLOGY COURSES 

315 Self-Actualization Group: Experiences in Human Growth (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Intensive small group experiences will assist each individual in 
unleashing his own growth potential and accelerating his own developmental processes. Self- 
actualization and related existential and humanistic concepts will be explored in depth, using 
recently developed methods. Lectures, individual assignments supplement the class experience. 
Credit/No credit grading only. 

316 Group Process and Leadership (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. The impact of the individual on other persons in a group and what 
takes place in a group, the structure and process of a group; the influence of leadership. Theories 
and concepts of those forces operating in a group situation, as well as a first-hand experience 
of one's own self in a group; feedback on how others see one in a group relation; and 
involvement in group dynamics. Credit/ No credit grading only. 

317 Special Group Experiences (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Intensive group experience familiarizing the student with a 
practical encounter approach and its theoretical basis. Sections may be repeated for credit 
including: transactional analysis group; Gestalt group; open couple; guided fantasies; residential 
marathon group; search for identity; therapeutic community; existential group; and other experi- 
mental group approaches. Credit/ No credit grading only. 

452 Explorations in Self Concepts: Professional/Personal (3) 

A didactic and experiential exploration of work in the helping professions with emphasis on personal 
and professional self-concepts. This screening course is designed to give members opportunity 
to "sample" the helping professions before making further career commitment. 

500 Survey of Collegiate Student Personnel Services (3) 

History, philosophy, objectives, organization and administration of collegiate student personnel 
services. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

540 Seminar in Counseling: Normal and Deviant Human Sexuality (3) 

Student develops competencies in the diagnosis and treatment of premarital and marital problems 
of a sexual nature. 

543 Individual Mental Tests Proseminar: Metric Methods (3) 

Prerequisites: Coun 555, 545 and consent of instructor. Student will have opportunity to learn and 
demonstrate competencies in administration, scoring and explaining of samples of cognitive 
behavior using the Stanford-Binet Scale, Wechsler Scales, Illinois Test of Psycholinguistic Ability 
and the Leiter International Scale. 

544 Individual Mental Tests Proseminar: Projective Methods (3) 

Prerequisites: Coun 546 and consent of instructor. Students will have opportunities to learn and 
demonstrate competencies in administration, scoring and explanation of samples of projective 
behavior using the Thematic Apperception Test, Family Drawings Tests, Draw a Man Test, 
House-Tree- Person Test, Bender Gestalt Test and a Sentence Completion Test. 

545 Diagnostic Observation I (3) 

Prerequisites: Coun 550 and consent of instructor. In this seminar students will have opportunity to 
learn and demonstrate competencies in eliciting, describing and explaining symptomatic behav- 
iors in the framework of alternative theories of psychological disorders using a variety of 
interview, inventory, and test techniques. 

546 Psychological Disorders II (3) 

Prerequisites: Coun 555, 545 and consent of instructor. In this proseminar the student will have 
opportunity to learn and demonstrate competencies in the definition and explanation of the 
spectrum of disorders of thought and language of clients of varying age, sex, culture and 
ethnicity. 


1 66 Counseling/Psychometry /School Psychology 

547 Psychological Disorders III (3) 

Prerequisites: Coun 546 and consent of instructor. Advanced proseminar. Students will have oppor- 
tunity to learn and demonstrate additional competencies in the definition and explanation of 
abnormal behaviors and experiences with clients of varying age, sex, culture and ethnicity. 

548 Individual and Group Counseling Assessment Seminar (3) 

Prerequisites: Coun 550, 552 and consent of instructor. Coaching, and assessment opportunities in 
individual and group treatment technologies. 

549 Conjoint Counseling (3) 

Prerequisites: Coun 556 and consent of instructor. Student will have the opportunity to learn and 
demonstrate competencies in applying the basic counseling repertoire in the setting of a related 
group comprising the identified patient and his significant others. 

550 Counseling Procedures I (3) 

Prerequisites: Coun 452 and consent of instructors. Seminar delivering competencies in psycho- 
therapeutic techniques of counseling which can be used in a variety of settings, e.g. schools, 
families, community agencies, and with clients of varying ethnicity, sex, age and culture. Focus 
is on work with the individual client. 

551 Career Education and Program Development (3) 

Prerequisites: Coun 452 and consent of instructor. Competencies in developing programs in educa- 
tional settings (tutor corps, motivation labs, parenting, career centers, group testing, etc.) 
designed to help clients with their problems. Includes legal and social issues, learning theory 
and study of student populations. 

552 Group Leadership (3) 

Prerequisites: Coun 550 and consent of instructors. Seminar in group leadership using lectures, 
demonstrations, coaching and experimental learning opportunities. A variety of theoretical 
approaches are integrated into a leadership model appropriate for work in public schools, in 
community agencies, and in child and family counseling. 

553 Program Management and Operation (3) 

Prerequisites: Coun 550, 551, 552, 555 and consent of instructor. Seminar in management of human 
and data systems with focus on results management. Task group leadership and competencies 
in staff development through inservice programs emphasized. Includes laws relating to family 
and child welfare. 

555 Psychological Disorders I (3) 

Prerequisites: Coun 452 and consent of instructor. An opportunity to learn and demonstrate compe- 
tencies in definition and explanation of the spectrum of abnormal behaviors and experiences 
of clients of varying age, sex, culture and ethnicity. 

556 Therapeutic Paradox (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. An opportunity to examine each of the main treatment models 
in the framework of therapeutic paradox theory. 

557 Research and Development in Counseling and Psychology (3) 

Student acquires research competencies in describing the location, coverage and usefulness of 
literature in the field. Design and criticism of research in institutional settings. Use of measures 
of central tendency and dispersion within and between samples. 

558A Casework Seminar (3) 

Prerequisites: Coun 543 and 544 or concurrent and consent of instructor. Experience in case analysis 
and planning of intervention strategies, including audio and videotape reviews of actual cases. 

558B Personality Study: Human Development (3) 

Prerequisites: Coun 555, 545 or consent of instructor. Study of physical and personality development. 
Includes development of cross cultural mores and values, thought and language, needs and 
wants, adaptation and enculturation, learning and communication skills. 

559A Fieldwork in Counseling (3) 

Prerequisites: Coun 551, 552, 555, classified status and consent of faculty committee. Student will 
work in a local school and/or other institutional setting under supervision of a local coordinator 
and university staff. Assignments are on an individual basis. Students will also meet in weekly 
seminar. May be repeated for credit up to a maximum of 6 units. 

559B Fieldwork in Counseling (3) 

Prerequisites: Coun 548 and 545, advancement to candidacy and consent of faculty committee. 
Student works in field setting under supervision of local coordinator and university staff. Assign- 
ments on individual basis. Weekly seminar. May be repeated for credit up to maximum of 6 
units. 


Human Services 16 7 


559C Fieldwork in Psychometry (3) 

Prerequisites: Coun 559A,B and consent of faculty committee. Students will participate in psychome- 
try activities in their local setting under the supervision of a local coordinator and university staff. 
Work assignments on individual basis. Weekly seminar. May be repeated for credit. 

559D Fieldwork in School Psychology (3-6) 

Prerequisites: Coun 559A,B/C and consent of faculty committee. Fieldwork in psychological services 
in the school and/or other institutional settings under the supervision of a local coordinator and 
university staff. Weekly seminar. Assignments are made on an individual basis. 

595 Advanced Studies (1-3) 

Graduate seminars designed to develop professional competencies in such areas as behavior, 
teaching strategies, educational technology, program development, communication theory and 
interpersonal relations. May be repeated for credit. 

5% Graduate Educational Practicum (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conduct at a graduate level an educational practicum experience 
with an individual under the direction of a faculty member. May be repeated for a maximum 
of six units. 

597 Project (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Individual research on an empirical project, with conferences 
with the instructor, culminating in a project. 

598 Thesis (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Individual research with conferences with the instructor, cul- 
minating in a thesis. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Open to qualified graduate students desiring to pursue independ- 
ent inquiry. 

HUMAN SERVICES 

Michael Brown (Political Science) 

Program Coordinator 

The Bachelor of Science in Human Services is a carefully articulated program providing both an 
academic and experimental background for the student seeking a career working with people in the 
varied and expanding field of human services. The required core curriculum reflects a cross-cutting 
integration of psychology, sociology, education and counseling in addition to phased experiences 
in supervised field placements. 

To attain intellectual depth and academic preparation in a particular area of concentration, the 
human services major will select 15-units of upper division courses in addition to the required core 
curriculum. Students with specific career interests and/or exceptional occupational backgrounds 
may construct an individual concentration core with the advice and prior approval of an adviser 
and the program director. 

Units 

A. Required core curriculum 42 

Upper division: 

First semester: Human Services 300, Character and Conflict (3); Human Services 380, 

Theories of Counseling (3); Psychology 361, Developmental Psychology (3 ) or 
Education-TE 312, Human Growth and Development (3) Human Services 395, 

Practicum (3) 

Second semester: Human Services 311, Intracultural Socialization Patterns (3); Psy- 
chology 341, Abnormal Psychology (3); Sociology 466, Deviant Behavior (3); 

Human Services 396, Practicum (3) 

Third semester: Human Services 470, Measurement: Program Analysis and Evaluation 
(3); Human Services 480, Case Analysis and Intervention Techniques (3); Human 
Services 485, Program Design and Proposal Writing (3); Human Services 495, 

Internship (3) 

Fourth semester: Human Services 499, Assessment (3); Human Services 496, Intern- 
ship (3) 


B. Required core of concentration 15 

Coursework selected from curricula designed by faculty in the area of concentration. 

Total ; 57 


168 Human Services 


Student Advisement 

Graduates of the human services program are prepared to seek employment in a wide variety of 
service agencies including those which deal with exceptionality, child care, geriatrics, probation, 
correction and detention, mental health, education, community change and minority relations, 
rehabilitation, and career development. Many graduates of the program prefer to continue their 
training in a specialized area rather than seek a career immediately. Students who intend to enter 
an advanced degree program after completing the B.S. in Human Services are urged to declare that 
intent by the end of their junior year in order that their concentration package is congruent with 
the required preparation for graduate work in their chosen area. 

Students interested in pursuing the "double degree" option, a B.S. degree in human services and 
a B.A. in a related discipline, should declare their intent early in order to minimize the additional 
time necessary to fulfill the requirements for both the B.S. and the B.A. degrees. 

Students preparing for graduate work in psychology are advised to consider a double-degree option 
in human services and psychology. 

If entry into a graduate program necessitates that certain substitutions be made for human services 
courses, equivalencies can be approved by the program coordinator. As a general rule, these 
substitutions are in statistics and research methods and certain courses demanded for graduate work 
in psychology and sociology. For example, Human Services 470 may be substituted by Psychology 
161 and Psychology 202 or by Sociology 331 A and 331 B or 331 X. 

Transfer students: Students transferring from a two- or four-year institution are urged to complete 
all general education requirements prior to enrollment in the human services program. This will allow 
the student to embark upon the core curriculum with its fieldwork component, as well as his area 
of concentration, without diversion of time and energy in satisfying the general education require- 
ments. 

Cal State Fullerton students: Students doing their lower division work at this university are advised 
to complete all general education requirements before entering the human services program, al- 
though they may declare the human service major in either the freshman or sophomore year. 

Change of Majors 

Students making a change from their prior major into human services must complete a change of 
major form available from the Office of Admissions and Records and approved as stipulated on the 
form. 


HUMAN SERVICES COURSES 

300 Character and Conflict (3) 

An exploration — via lectures, discussion and group encounter — into the problems and techniques 
of resolving the conflicts created by the individual's struggle to achieve and maintain personal 
autonomy while living successfully in an automated world. Topics include: autonomy, mas- 
culinity-feminity, love, sex, marriage, meaning and encountering others. 

311 Intracultural Socialization Patterns (3) 

(Same as Afro-Ethnic Studies 311 ) 

380 Theories of Counseling (3) 

Analysis of basic theories underlying the counseling situation; long-range and short-term applicabili- 
ty; situational and functional appropriateness of theory; ethics and the counselor-client relation- 
ship. 

395 The Human Services (3) 

Survey of the field of human services; inventory of student aptitudes, abilities and goals; review of 
community agencies and their functions and requirements; observation and experience in basic 
helping situations. Required of all majors in the first semester. 

396 Practicum (3) 

Field placement in a variety of on-campus and community service locations. First semester prac- 
ticum required of all majors. 

470 Measurement: Program Analysis and Evaluation (3) 

Review and analysis of pertinent measuring instruments applicable to human service screening 
procedures; use and limitations of available measurements; collection and analysis of aggregate 


Nursing 169 


data; uses of aggregate information from academic research and public agency reports; interpre- 
tation and application of basic statistics in aggregate data analysis; evaluation techniques appli- 
cable to new and continuing programs. To be taken concurrently with Human Services 485. 

480 Case Analysis and Intervention Techniques (3) 

Prerequisites: Human Services 380 and Human Services 395. Basic techniques of counseling; appro- 
priateness in the utilization of theoretical modalities; limitations of time, institutional function, 
and counselor training; the art of referral. Utilizing field situations through role-playing and video 
observations of actual counseling encounters to critique techniques and strategies in counseling; 
stressing experience in clear and cogent case writing and reporting. 

485 Program Design and Proposal Writing (3) 

Programming in public and private agencies; program proposal writing; design of empirical research 
components for innovative programming and accountability; analysis and critiques of agency 
task force programming for immediate social problems; program-funding agencies and grant 
writing; program budget and effect on design. To be taken concurrently with Human Services 
470. 

490 Practicum in Group Leadership (3) 

Prerequisites: Human Services 300, Human Services 380 and consent of instructor. Supervised 
experience as a group leader, with emphasis on various approaches and techniques of group 
leadership. May be repeated for credit. May be substituted for 495 or 496. 

495 Internship (3) 

Supervised work in a community or campus human service location. Third semester of practical 
experience required of all human services majors. 

496 Internship (3) 

Supervised field work in community human service agency. Fourth semester of practical experience 
required of majors. 

499 Assessment Seminar (3) 

Analysis of student's academic performance, basic skills, aptitudes and satisfactory field perform- 
ance; assessment of basic competencies in the general field of human services covered by the 
human services core curriculum; assessment of competencies in the special area of concentra- 
tion by the Faculty Assessment Team. This assessment and evaluation seminar is to be taken 
in the last semester of course and field work by all majors. 

NURSING 

FACULTY 
Wilma Traber 
Program Coordinator 

Arlene Gray, jeanne Sterling, Audree Vernon 

BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN NURSING 

The nursing program is an upper division, articulated program for registered nurses seeking a 
Bachelor of Science degree in nursing. The curriculum is designed to prepare students for primary 
care functions: initial and continuing assessment of the health status of individuals and families in 
collaboration with, or independently from others; decision making regarding appropriate interven- 
tions; and accountability as a consumer advocate. The student will have the opportunity to expand 
skills in physical assessment, mental health, community health and leadership. Graduates are pre- 
pared to function as professional nurses in a variety of settings. Educational foundations are provided 
for continuing professional development. 

Admission Requirements 

1. Qualify for admission to the university. 

2. Possess current licensure to practice nursing in the state of California. 

3. Attain upper division standing. 

4. Possess a transferable college course in Introduction to Chemistry (with lab), combined inorganic 
and organic preferred, with a minimum of "C" grade, and proficiency equivalent to the past five 
years. 

5. Possess malpractice insurance. 

6. Possess a current California driver's license and access to transportation to extended campus 
clinical facilities. 

7. Have access to a medical preceptor. 

The student must submit duplicate transcripts of all previous college work to the Admissions Office. 


170 Nursing 


One year of work experience as a registered nurse is encouraged. 


Study Plan 

The total number of units required for graduation is 128: 

1. Nursing 34 units (a selected clinical area in the second semester of the 

senior year) 

2. Chemistry 300 4 units 

3. Biological Science 425 4 units 

A minimum of nine units of behavioral sciences are strongly recommended as support courses for 
the area of nursing interest selected by the student. Students preparing for graduate school must take 
an upper division statistics course. 

All required nursing and support courses must be taken in sequence. Students must apply for specific 
nursing courses each semester prior to enrolling in the class (November 15 for spring semester and 
April 15 for fall semester). Faculty advisers are assigned to individual students to help with program 
planning. To remain in the nursing sequence, students must attain a minimum grade of "C" in all 
required courses. 

The nursing curriculum requires a minimum of four semesters. Students may attend part time or full 
time. 


Course Requirements: 


Nursing 305 
Nursing 305L 
Nursing 307 
Chemistry 300 


Nursing Practice I (2) 

Nursing Practice I Field/ Laboratory (3) 

Human Life Cycle I (3) 

Introduction to Organic and Physiological Chemistry 


Nursing 355 Nursing Practice II (2) 

Nursing 355L Nursing Practice II Field/ Laboratory (3) 

Nursing 357 Human Life Cycle II (3) 

Biological Science 425 Pathobiology (4) 


Nursing 400 
Nursing 400L 
Nursing 402 
Nursing 402 L 
Nursing 450 
Nursing 450L 
Nursing 452 
Nursing 452L 


Nursing Process (2) 

Nursing Process Field /Laboratory (1) 
Clinical Studies (2) 

Clinical Studies Field /Laboratory (4) 
Advanced Nursing Process (2) 

Advanced Nursing Process Field /Laboratory 
Advanced Clinical Studies (2) 

Advanced Clinical Studies Field/ Laboratory 


( 1 ) 

(4) 


(4) 


NURSING COURSES 

305 Nursing Practice I (2) 

Prerequisites: current California Registered Nurses' license, Associate Degree (junior standing) and 
consent of instructor. Corequisite: Nursing 305L. To develop increased skill in health assessment 
and intervention through increased depth in self-understanding and understanding of others. 
The nursing process is facilitated by learned communication skills. 

305 L Nursing Practice I Field/ Laboratory (3) 

Prerequisites: current California Registered Nurses' license, Associate Degree (junior standing) and 
consent of instructor. Corequisite: Nursing 305. Clinical/seminar to facilitate increased aware- 
ness of self and others through the improved use of the communication process while demon- 
strating beginning changes in role function. 

307 Human Life Cycle I (3) 

Prerequisites: junior standing and consent of instructor. The physiological, social, intellectual and 
emotional aspects of growth and development throughout the life cycle from conception 
through adolescence, including the dynamic relationship of familial, environmental, social and 
cultural values. 

355 Nursing Practice II (2) 

Prerequisites: Nursing 305, 305L, 307 (or Psych 361 or Educ 312), Chem 300 and consent of 
instructor. Corequisite: Nursing 355L. Bio-psycho-social assessment of the health status of 
c lent/family involving epidemiology, risk, prevention and group/family dynamics. 


Reading 171 


355 L Nursing Practice II Field/Laboratory (3) 

Prerequisites: Nursing 305, 305L, 307 (or Psych 361 or Educ 312), Chem 300 and consent of 
instructor. Corequisite: Nursing 355. Clinical/seminar applying concepts of nurse-family rela- 
tionships and family and group dynamics. 

357 Human Life Cycle II (3) 

Prerequisites: junior standing and consent of instructor. Growth and development from young 
adulthood through aging, including the process of death and dying. Physiological, social, intel- 
lectual and personality development emphasizing the application of knowledge to the nursing 
process. 

400 Nursing Process (2) 

Prerequisites: Nursing 355, 355L, 357 (or Soc 451 or 454), Chem 300, Biol 425 and consent of 
instructor. Corequisite: Nursing 400L. Collaborative and leadership dimensions of nursing proc- 
ess with emphasis on accountability and transmission and advancement of nursing knowledge 
and skills. 

400L Nursing Process Field /Laboratory (1) 

Prerequisites: Nursing 355, 355L, 357 (or Soc 451 or 454), Chem 300, Biol 425 and consent of 
instructor. Corequisite: Nursing 400. Clinical/seminar application of Nursing 400 concepts, 
focusing on the educational model in prevention of illness and maintenance of health. 

402 Clinical Studies (2) 

Prerequisites: Nursing 355, 355L, 357 (or Soc 451 or 454), Chem 300, Biol 425 and consent of 
instructor. Corequisite: Nursing 402L. Use of the nursing process in dealing with subtle-covert 
client/family/community problems. Diversified and/or permanent interruptions in the illness- 
wellness continuum and associated nursing care. Clinical application made in Nursing 402L. 

402 L Clinical Studies Field/Laboratory (4) 

Prerequisites: Nursing 355, 355L, 357 (or Soc 451 or 454), Chem 300, Biol 425 and consent of 
instructor. Corequisite: Nursing 402. Clinical/seminar utilizing the community setting to provide 
primary nursing care to clients/families with diverse life style and health needs. Concepts 
applied from Nursing 402. 

450 Advanced Nursing Process (2) 

Prerequisites: Nursing 400, 400L, 402, 402L and consent of instructor. Corequisite: Nursing 450L. 
Research: identification of nursing problems, data collection and data analysis. 

450L Advanced Nursing Process Field/Laboratory (1) 

Prerequisites: Nursing 400, 400L, 402, 402 L and consent of instructor. Corequisite: Nursing 450. 
Clinical/seminar conducting a study in a selected clinical setting. 

452 Advanced Clinical Studies (2) 

Prerequisites: Nursing 400, 400L, 402, 402L and consent of instructor. Corequisite: Nursing 452L. The 
nurse in management and bureaucracy: leader, advocate, change agent, planner, decision- 
maker. 

452L Advanced Clinical Studies Field/Laboratory (4) 

Prerequisites: Nursing 400, 400L, 402, 402L and consent of instructor. Corequisite: Nursing 452. In 
agreement with the department and appropriate clinical facility, the individual student applies 
concepts presented in Nursing 452 and gains additional experiences specific to the setting. 

495 Seminar in Nursing (2) 

Prerequisites: senior standing in nursing and/or consent of instructor. Selected topics in nursing. 

499 Independent Study in Nursing (1-3) 

Prerequisites: senior standing in nursing and/or consent of instructor. Individually supervised 
projects and/or study either in the library or in the clinical setting. 

READING 

FACULTY 

Deborah Osen Hancock 
Coordinator; Director, Institute for Reading 

Ann Coil, Adelina Gutweiler, Norma Bartin Inabinette, Ruth May, George Schick 

PART-TIME 

Pamela Conlon, Jeffrey Denhart, Marietta Dora, Jane Hopper, Paula Jenner, Dorothy Klausner, 

Suzanne Lewy, Trinka Stotsky, Marilyn Wall, JoAnn Wells 

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION 

Reading 

A program of graduate studies leading to the degree of Master of Science in Education Reading, is 


172 Reading 

authorized by The California State University and Colleges Board of Trustees. The program is 
designed to help qualified individuals gain the technical knowledge and scholarship requisite to 
becoming reading specialists. This professional program is based on and combined with sound 
preparation in the liberal arts and sciences. The curriculum proposes an interdisciplinary approach 
to the preparation of the professional specialist in the area of reading. 

Prerequisites 

An applicant must meet the university requirements for admission in conditionally classified graduate 
standing: a baccalaureate degree from an accredited institution and a grade-point average of at least 
2.5 in the last 60 semester units attempted (see section of this catalog on admission of graduates 
for complete statement and procedures). In addition, an applicant must have an approved major 
and complete an application to the reading program in the Division of Special Programs. He will 
confer with the graduate program adviser to discuss the prerequisites for attaining classified standing. 
A student who meets the requirements for conditionally classified graduate standing, as well as the 
following requirements, may be admitted as a classified graduate upon the development of an 
approved study plan: successful teaching experience or other approved experience; a grade-point 
average of 2.5 or better in academic and related work; sufficient background in reading; a satisfactory 
interview; and four references from school administrators, school supervisors or professors. 

Study Plan 

The final adviser-approved program of coursework for the degree must include: 

Units 


Master's degree studies 3 

Ed-RP 510 Research Design and Analysis (3) 

Courses for the concentration in reading (no grade below B) 27 


Ed-R 507 Current Trends in Secondary and College Reading Programs (3), or 
Ed-R 508 Teaching Reading in Today's Elementary School (3) 

Ed-R 516 Etiology of Reading Difficulties (3) 

Ed-R 517 Educational Testing and Reading Instruction (3) 

Ed-R 581 Analysis of Reading Difficulties (4) 

Ed-R 583A Remedial Reading Casework (3) 

Ed-R 583B Remedial Reading Casework (3) 

Re-R 584 Linguistics and Reading (4) 

Elective(s): adviser-approved course(s) in reading or related field (3) 

Ed-R 595 Advanced Studies (includes comprehensive examination) (1 ) or 

Ed-R 597 Project ( 1 ) or Educ 598 Thesis ( 1 ) 

Total 30 

For advisement and further information, consult the program graduate adviser. 

See also "The Program of Master's Degrees" in this catalog and the Graduate Bulletin. 
UNDERGRADUATE READING SKILL DEVELOPMENT SKILLS COURSES 
Lower division courses in reading (Ed-R 101, 103 minicourses, 201 and 202) and an upper division 
course (Ed-R 320) are designed to assist students in developing the critical and creative reading skills 
required for efficient university learning. Ed-R 480 presents an overview of reading education 
(K-adult) and prepares teachers to assess reading skills and build a curriculum based on the results 
of continuing assessment. 

READING SPECIALIST CREDENTIAL 

The Commission for Teacher Preparation and Licensing granted approval to the Institute for Reading 
to offer the Reading Specialist Credential, effective in September, 1974. 

An examination of the course requirements will show overlapping between the Reading Specialist 
Credential and the Master of Science in Reading degree. With careful planning with a graduate 
adviser in reading, the student can virtually complete the requirements for both at the same time. 
Program pre-entry requirements for the Reading Specialist Credential are as follows: 

1 . Methods of teaching reading. Prior to entering this approved program the students will present 
evidence (transcripts) demonstrating satisfactory completion of one of the following: 

A. Ryan Act reading methods courses, such as Ed-TE 433 or Ed-TE 440R, or 

B. Teaching of reading examination adopted by Teacher Preparation and Licensing Commission, 
or 

C. Ed-R 480, The Teaching of Reading (3 units). 


Reading 173 


D. Entering students who received teacher training from out-of-state institutions since September 
1973, may submit a transcript and catalog course description and petition to have an under- 
graduate course accepted in lieu of the above. 

2. Teaching experience. Prior to entering this approved program, both in-state and out-of-state 
students will present evidence in the form of letters of verification from the district office demon- 
strating satisfactory completion of one of the following: 

A. Two or more years of successful experience teaching reading for at least one instructional 
period per day in public and/or private elementary and/or secondary schools, this experience 
to include at least a two grade spread, or 

B. Two or more years of successful classroom teaching experience, this experience to include 
at least a two-grade spread, or 

C. Two hundred fifty or more days of successful and extensive substitute teaching experience, 
this experience to include at least a two-grade spread, or 

D. Successful student teaching experience, at least part of which inolved the teaching of reading, 
as well as at least 45 hours of successful experience as a 

teaching aide in reading 

reading tutor, this experience to include at least a two grade spread 

E. Students whose teaching experience on the above covers less than a two grade span may 
complete this requirement by tutoring students in Ed-R 581 and Ed-R 583A at a grade level 
at least two years different from previous experience. 

Top priority for entering the credential program will be given to those students meeting criterion "A" 
listed above. Other applicants will be admitted, as space permits, in descending order according to 
the remaining criteria. 

3. Assessment of experiences reading specialists. Prior to entering this approved program, the 
applicant who has served as a school or district reading specialist will be assessed according to 
the following criteria and have his program planned around the needs revealed by this assess- 
ment: 

Graduates of master's programs with an emphasis in reading, and applicants functioning as 
reading specialists who have not completed such a degree: evaluation of competencies required 
under this credential to be completed by a faculty member in conjunction with the applicant in 
Ed-R 5821, Analysis of Reading Practices: 

Assessment in Reading (1 unit). Assessment strategies include: 

(1 ) Self assessment of progress toward attaining specified program objectives. Students will rate 
themselves on a scale of 1-7 on each of the major program objectives. Students who rate 
themselves 

(a) 1 or 2 on a given objective will be advised to take the appropriate course(s) to meet 
that objective; 

(b) 3, 4 or 5 on a given objective will be given the opportunity to take a deartment prepared 
exam or write a professional paper under the guidance of an instructor which demon- 
strates that the student has achieved this objective to minimally stated standards. The 
student may opt to take coursework instead of writing the exam or paper. 

(c) 6 or 7 on the given objective will verify their competency in an oral exam during an 
interview with a faculty member; 

(d) Students who avail themselves of the oral and/or written evalation procedures and do 
not meet the previously specified standards will be required to take the required course- 
work related to these objectives. 

(2) Faculty assessment of progress toward attaining specified program objectives, this to include 
letters of evaluation from supervisory personnel, direct observation by faculty, and/or 
evaluation of oral or written evaluation. 

At the conclusion of the assessment phase, the faculty member will develop a credential study plan 
which specifies the coursework the student must complete before obtaining the credential. 

Program Description Units 

Ed-R 507, Current Trends in Secondary and College Reading Programs (3) and 
Ed-R 582R Analysis of Reading Practices: Elementary Reading Curriculum (1), or 
Ed-R 508 Teaching Reading in Today's Elementary School (3) and 
Ed-R 582S Analysis of Reading Practices: Secondary Reading Curriculum (1) 

Ed-R 516 Etiology of Reading Difficulties (3) 

Ed-R 517 Educational Testing and Reading Instruction (3) 


174 Reading 


Ed-R 581 Analysis of Reading Difficulties (4) 

Ed-R 583A,B Reading Improvement Casework (6) 

Ed-R 584 Linguistics and Reading (4) 

Electives and/or support courses (7-8) 

Total 31-32 

Electives include: 


Ed-R 

582A 

Ed-R 

582 B 

Ed-R 

582C 

Ed-R 

582 D 

Ed-R 

582 E 

Ed-R 

582 F 

Ed-R 

582G 

(1! 

> 

Ed-R 

582 H 

Ed-R 

5821 

Ed-R 

582] 

Ed-R 

582 K 

Ed-R 

582 L 

Ed-R 

582 M 

Ed-R 

582 N 

Ed-R 

5820 

Ed-R 

582 P 

Ed-R 

582Q 

Ed-R 

582R 

Ed-R 

582S 


Analysis of Reading Practices: The ITPA and Reading (1 ) 

Analysis of Reading Practices: Cloze Technique — Its Uses in Teaching Reading (1 ) 
Analysis of Reading Practices: Individualized Reading (1) 

Analysis of Reading Practices: Instructional Technology and Reading (1) 

Analysis of Reading Practices: Research in Reading (1) 

Analysis of Reading Practices: Writing for Publication, Reading (1 ) 

Analysis of Reading Practices: Establishing Reading Laboratories and Learning Centers 

Analysis of Reading Practices: Reading and the Gifted (1 ) 

Analysis of Reading Practices: Assessment of Reading (1) 

Analysis of Reading Practices: Teaching Reading to Adults (1 ) 

Analysis of Reading Practices: Reading and the Ethnically Different Child (1) 
Analysis of Reading Practices: Reading in Early Childhood (1 ) 

Analysis of Reading Practices: The Exceptional Child in Reading (1) 

Analysis of Reading Practices: Vision and Reading (1) 

Analysis of Reading Practices: Comparative Reading (1 ) 

Analysis of Reading Practices: Fieldwork in a Community Reading Clinic (1-3) 
Analysis of Reading Practices: Evaluation of Textbooks (1 ) 

Analysis of Reading Practices: Elementary Reading Curriculum (1) 

Analysis of Reading Practices: Secondary Reading Curriculum (1 ) 


READING COURSES 

101 Reading Development (1) 

An elective course for students who wish to improve their reading efficiency. May be repeated for 
a maximum of three units of credit. 

103A Assessment of Reading Skills (1) 

Participants will be diagnosed in a five-week course. Assessment of reading and study skills, vision 
and perceptual screening, personal conferences, time-study management and scheduling. 

103B Textbook Mastering (1) 

An introductory five-week course in the application of systematic procedures for more effective 
study. Includes techniques for reading chapters as well as entire books more effectively. 

103C Note-taking Skills (1) 

An introductory modular course on listening and note-taking skills with emphasis on memory and 
comprehension in auding skills and note-taking. 

103D Preparing for and Taking Examinations (1) 

An introductory five-week course designed to develop techniques for attaining examination readi- 
ness, taking essay tests, objective tests, open book tests and oral tests. Allows students practical 
application of the principals. 

103F Vocabulary Development (1) 

An introductory modular class with emphasis on vocabulary development, study of derivatives and 
root words, spelling improvement, and dictionary study. 

103G Critical Reading (1) 

An introductory five-week course designed to develop critical reading skills. Through exposure to 
a wide variety of written material the student will practice detecting fact and opinion, analyze 
author s purpose, tone and bias, making critical judgments and drawing inferences. 

201 Study Skills (3) 

Development and application of a variety of advanced study techniques, including the analysis of 
textbook and other reading materials, and advanced note-taking skills of both oral and written 
presentation of information. 

202 Vocabulary Building (3) 

Development of individual vocabulary through study of characteristics of the language usage, word 
formation exercises, dictionary practice. Selected reading. 


Reading 175 


320 Power Reading (3) 

Intensive approach to reading improvement intended for the upper division student, with particular 
emphasis on improvement of rate and comprehension, study skills and critical analysis. Not 
intended for student who has taken Ed-R 201 or has more than one unit of credit for Ed-R 101 . 

480 The Teaching of Reading (4) 

Curriculum and methods in the teaching of reading in the elementary and secondary schools. 
Examination and analysis of the approaches to reading in teachers' manuals and guides. Practi- 
cal experience in preparing lessons in classroom teaching of reading. 

497 Reading Aide Practicum (3) 

Training for the practical experience as aides in the Cal State Fullerton reading centers. Course 
surveys the fundamentals of reading development, teaches the use of audiovisual equipment, 
and develops the tutor-student relationship. Recommended for students seeking teaching cre- 
dential. May be repeated once for credit. 

507 Current Trends in Secondary and College Reading Programs (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of graduate advisor in reading or instructor. Recent research findings on the 
learner, the teacher, approaches, materials and facilities in the teaching of reading at secondary 
and college levels. 

508 Teaching Reading in Today's Elementary School (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of graduate adviser in reading or instructor. Current trends in the teaching of 
elementary reading, focusing on the teacher as diagnostician and the reading process as con- 
tinuous and developmental for all learners. 

516 Etiology of Reading Difficulties (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of graduate adviser in reading or instructor. Studies of the factors underlying 
learning disabilities in reading in children, adolescents and young adults. 

517 Educational Testing and Reading Instruction (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of graduate adviser in reading or instructor. Survey of individual and group 
intelligence, achievement, interest, aptitude, vocational and personality tests. Theory and practi- 
cal application of individual and group tests used with students having learning problems. 

519 The Principal's Role in the Effective School Reading Program (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of graduate adviser in reading or instructor. Includes techniques for developing 
the philosophy, goals and objectives of the school reading program consistent with the PPBS 
format procedures for assessing and developing students' reading ability and methods for 
providing faculty inservice experiences in reading. 

581 Analysis of Reading Difficulties (4) 

Prerequisite: consent of graduate adviser in reading or instructor. Analysis and diagnosis of reading 
difficulties. Techniques and methods of prevention and treatment. Individual remediation of 
student. Primary through secondary. 

582A Analysis of Reading Practices: The ITPA and Reading (1) 

Study and application of the Illinois Test of Psycholinguistic Ability to reading development. Course 
will include theoretical background, administration, interpretation and application of the instru- 
ment. 

582B Analysis of Reading Practices: Cloze Technique — Its Uses in Teaching Reading (1) 

Study of the classroom uses of the Cloze Techinque in assessing readability difficulties of material 
and comprehension of specific material by the learner. Practical application of Cloze principles 
in teaching specific reading skills. 

582C Analysis of Reading Practices: Individualized Reading (1) 

Goals and objectives of the individualized program. Assessment, selection and organization of 
materials. Management of the teacher student conferences, skill development, and a variety of 
learning opportunities. Evaluation procedures. 

582D Analysis of Reading Practices: Instructional Technology and Reading (1) 

Overview of instructional technology used in reading such as tachistoscopes, reading pacers, mech- 
anized programmed material. Demonstration and practice in using these materials. Application 
of instruction technology to planning individual and group reading instruction. 

582E Analysis of Reading Practices: Research in Reading (1) 

Participation in seminars, related to student and/or instructor-sponsored research. Involvement in 
action-research projects, including development and evaluation of research procedures. 


176 Reading 

582F Analysis of Reading Practices: Writing for Publication — Reading (1) 

Consideration in depth of the selection, organization and production of publishable materials con- 
cerning problems, strategies, techniques of the teaching of reading improvement. 

582G Analysis of Reading Practices: Establishing Reading Laboratories and Learning Centers 

( 2 ) 

Consideration in depth of the necessities and optional features of a reading center deemed appropri- 
ate to a specific situation within a particular community. 

582H Analysis of Reading Practices: Reading and the Gifted (1) 

Techniques of teaching reading to the underachieving and achieving academically gifted child in 
grades 1-12. Methods of planning and implementing instruction to meet the unique learning 
abilities and needs of the gifted and to develop higher level thinking skills. 

5821 Analysis of Reading Practices: Assessment of Reading Specialist Competencies (1) 

Assessment of competencies of the experienced Reading Specialist in preparation for the Reading 
Specialist credential. 

582J Analysis of Reading Practices: Teaching Reading to Adults (1) 

Analysis and evaluation of current methods of teaching reading to adults, including diagnostic and 
corrective techniques. Analysis of current research and evaluation of materials, with emphasis 
on understanding special needs of the adult learner. 

582K Analysis of Reading Practices: Reading and the Ethnically Different Child (1) 

Graduate seminar designed to survey the affective side of teaching reading to ethnically different 
children. 

582L Analysis of Reading Practices: Reading in Early Childhood (1) 

An overview of basic readiness needs and evaluation instruments with emphasis on techniques and 
materials for increasing concentration, positive socialization, creativity and learning skills of 
preschool children. 

582M Analysis of Reading Practices: The Exceptional Child in Reading (1) 

Survey of the methods and materials to be effectively used in reading instruction with the physically 
handicapped, emotionally disturbed, learning disabled and slow learner in the regular class- 
room. 

582N Analysis of Reading Practices: Vision and Reading (1) 

Study of the relationship between vision factors and reading. Course will include screening tech- 
niques, behavioral symptoms and classroom and instructional accommodations to meet vision 
needs. 

5820 Analysis of Reading Practices: Comparative Reading (1) 

Study of general trends in reading improvement in the United States and in other countries. Emphasis 
on developmental reading programs. 

582P Analysis of Reading Practices: Fieldwork in Community Reading Clinic (1) 

Fieldwork in a community reading clinic for children and adults, including both remedial and 
developmental instruction. May be repeated for a maximum of three units of credit. 

582Q Analysis of Reading Practices: Evaluation of Textbooks (1) 

Formal evaluation of reading textbooks being considered for state adoption. Materials include basals, 
supplementary and recreational materials, levels K-8 for state textbook adoption. 

582R Analysis of Reading Practices: Elementary Reading Curriculum (1) 

Modern curriculum and techniques for teaching basic reading skills, K-6. 

582S Analysis of Reading Practices: Secondary Reading Curriculum (1) 

Modern curriculum and techniques for teaching reading, grades 7-12. 

583A Remedial Reading Casework (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Fieldwork in diagnosis and remediation in reading through case- 
work technique. Conferences with teachers, parents, and administrators. 

583B Remedial Reading Casework (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Fieldwork in assessment and instruction in reading through 
casework technique. Conferences and training in inservice education with teachers, parents, 
consultants, and administrators. Assignment in one of the Cal State Fullerton reading centers. 
Includes grant proposal writing and program development techniques. 

584 Linguistics and Reading (4) 

A study of linguistics and its influence on reading materials and instruction. An analysis of trends 
in reading and changes affected by the science of linguistics. 


School A dministration 1 77 


585 Word Perception Skills in Reading (3) 

Study of word perception skills in the process of learning to read. A developmental hygiene of child 
vision. Visual anomalies and their applications to reading disorders. 

595 Advanced Studies (1-3) 

Graduate seminars designed to develop professional competencies in such areas as behavior, 
teaching strategies, educational technology, program development, communication theory and 
interpersonal relations. May be repeated for credit. 

597 Project (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Individual research on an empirical project, with conferences 
with the instructor, culminating in a project. 

598 Thesis (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Individual research with conferences with the instructor, cul- 
minating in a thesis. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Open to qualified graduate students desiring to pursue independ- 
ent inquiry. 

SCHOOL ADMINISTRATION 

FACULTY 
Walter Beckman 
Coordinator 

Edward Beaubier, William Callison, Gerhard Ehmann, Tracy Gaffey, Robert jenkins, Barbara Peter- 
son, Kenneth Preble, Stanley Rothstein 
PART-TIME 

Edward Dundon, Charles Kenney, John Rajcic, Harold Throop 

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION 
School Administration 

A program of graduate studies leading to the degree of Master of Science in Education with a 
concentration in school administration has been authorized by The California State University and 
Colleges Board of Trustees. The principal objective of the curriculum is to prepare carefully selected 
individuals for certain leadership positions in school administration. 

The program is designed to help these individuals gain the technical knowledge and scholarship 
requisite to high achievement in these positions. This professional program is based on and com- 
bined with sound preparation in the liberal arts and sciences. The curriculum proposes an interdisci- 
plinary approach to the preparation of the professional specialist in public education. Thus, those 
who qualify for the degree should have completed coursework in such fields as philosophy, public 
administration, psychology, political science, biology, English, sociology, economics, anthropology 
or history. 

Prerequisites 

An applicant must meet the university requirements for admission in conditionally classified graduate 
standing: a baccalaureate degree from an accredited institution and a grade-point average of at least 
2.5 in the last 60 semester units attempted (see section on the catalog on admission of graduates 
for comlete statement and procedures). In addition, an applicant should have a successful teaching 
experience in an elementary or secondary school, or community college. If such experience is not 
available, other experience in related fields is a recommended alternative, which must be approved 
by a graduate adviser before starting the program. 

A student who meets the requirements for conditionally classified graduate standing, as well as the 
following requirement, may be admitted as a classified graduate upon the development of an 
approved study plan: at least 2.5 grade-point average in previous academic and related work. 

Programs of Study 

The degree study plan must include 30 units of committee-approved coursework, of which 25 must 
be at the 500 level. A minimum of 22 units must be in school administration; five units may be 
assigned on an interdisciplinary basis from courses related to the needs of individual students. Course 
requirements include field experience and a project. 

No more than nine units of postgraduate work taken prior to classified status may be applied to a 
student's master's degree program. 


178 School A dministration 

Students concentrating in school administration will take Ed-SA 503, Foundations for Administrative 
Leadership, as soon as they identify their interest in this M.S. degree. To continue in the program 
beyond this course, the student must be granted a "letter of admission to the program" and possess 
an official Cal State Fullerton program evaluation. Students who desire only isolated courses from 
the program are normally denied admission to such courses. The adviser-approved 30 units (mini- 
mum) on the study plan will include: 

Units 

Master's degree studies, supporting courses 8 

Ed-RP 510 Research Design and Analysis (3) 

Adviser-approved courses (5) 

Courses for the concentration in school administration 22 

All of the following (No grade below C) 

Ed-SA 505 The Supervision of Curriculum (3) 

Ed-SA 561 Governance, Systems, School and Community (3) 

Ed-SA 563 School Personnel Administration (2) 

Ed-SA 564 Seminar in School Law (2); 

Ed-SA 565 Seminar in School finance, Business Administration and buildings (2) 

Ed-SA 588 Organization Theory and Management (3) 

Ed-SA 567A,B Fieldwork and Project (2,2) 

One of the following: 

Ed-SA 566 Elementary Administration and Supervision (3) 

Ed-SA 586 Secondary Administration and Supervision (3) 

For advisement and further information, consult the Division of Special Programs. See also "The 
Program of Master's Degrees" in this catalog and the Graduate Bulletin. 

INTERNSHIP IN SCHOOL ADMINISTRATION 

A selected number of teachers will be offered the opportunity to study and to practice school 
administration as school interns in administration. A candidate must obtain admission to the pro- 
gram, and agreement must be reached with a sponsoring school or college district to employ the 
candidate as a full-time administrator during the school year. The concept of the internship in 
educational administration is similar to that found in other professional fields. Its basic function is 
to enable the intern to gain the necessary experience in the performance of the critical tasks of his 
profession while under the close supervision of a fully-trained and experienced practitioner. It is an 
opportunity for the university and local school and college systems to work together in training 
well-qualified school administrators. The internship in educational administration is but one phase 
of the program for preparing supervisory and administrative personnel for community college, high 
school, intermediate school, and elementary school positions of leadership. It is an investment in 
training supervisory leadership from which the cooperating school district, the university and the 
intern will derive benefit and in which all three have responsibilities. Cooperation among all three 
is essential to the success of the program. 

Internships are for a full academic year and require of all students the completion of a minimum 
of 21 graduate credits. During the period of the internship the student is required to be a registered 
graduate student at Cal State Fullerton. 

All candidates will be given a temporary credential for supervision and administration according to 
the regulations of the California Administrative Code, Title V, Section 6555. Such candidates should 
register in two courses: Ed-SA 561, Governance, Systems, School and Community, Ed-SA 563, School 
Personnel Administration. 

Both courses must be completed in the summer session if the student is to do his internship beginning 
in the fall semester. Applications for admission to the program should be sent to the chair, Internship 
Program in School Administration, by june 1. Careful planning of electives will enable candidates 
to receive the Master of Science in Education with a concentration in school administration upon 
further study, after completing the requirements for the internship. 

ADVANCED CREDENTIAL PROGRAM 
School Administration 

Candidates in administration, upon completion of the degree requirements for a Master of Science 
in Education, should qualify for certification as a school administrator at any level providing they 
ave taught three years. As certification requirements change yearly, candidates are urged to have 
their adviser check their study program against current requirements. 


School A dministration 1 79 

Candidates in administration accepted in the administrator internship program will be issued the 
Administrative Services Credential. 

OTHER STUDENTS IN SCHOOL ADMINISTRATION 

Experienced school administrators, holding a California administrative credential or a supervision 
credential and exempt from degree requirements, may register for any course in the school adminis- 
tration concentration. Teachers wishing to take courses in school administration directed at helping 
them to understand administration problems are welcome to take selected courses. 


SCHOOL ADMINISTRATION COURSES 

481 Issues in Higher Education (3) 

Seminar in structure, governance, administration and challenges of American higher education. 

483 The American College and University (3) 

Seminar in the development of higher education in the United States with special emphasis on 
purposes, functions, curriculum, and governance. 

485 Introduction to Educational Administration (3) 

Introduction to educational administration. Course directed toward better understanding of adminis- 
trative tasks, processes, and skills involved in the various roles of school personnel in administra- 
tion. Special attention to the role of the teacher in a school administration. 

503 Foundations for Administrative Leadership (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Seminar on cultures and values to which schools must contribute. 
Introduction to community sociology, tax systems and public administration; the literature of 
leadership. Screening for admission to program. Course required of all students during their first 
registration in school administration. 

505 The Supervision of Curriculum (3) 

Prerequisite: Ed-SA 566 or 586. Seminar on development of a quality program of instruction in both 
elementary and secondary schools; appraisal of programs of instruction; advanced principles 
of curricular review and modification. Evaluation of subject matter competence in area of 
supervisory specialization. 

560 Contemporary Problems in School Administration (3) 

Seminar on contemporary problems in school organization and administration with particular em- 
phasis on collective bargaining, the computer as a business and educational tool and the needs 
of urban schooling including the problem of racial isolation. 

561 Governance, Systems, School and Community (3) 

Structure, functions, trends, fiscal responsibilities and issues in respect to the government of educa- 
tion at federal, state, county and local school district levels. Basic principles in school organiza- 
tion and administration. Community involvement and school-community participation; 
communication between school and community. 

563 School Personnel Administration (2) 

Prerequisite: Ed-SA 503 or concurrent enrollment. Seminar on principles of organizational behavior, 
social processes inherent in effective leadership, and techniques of school personnel manage- 
ment. 

564 Seminar in School Law (2) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. School law as a reflection of public policy. California Education 
Code and the California Administrative Code, Title 5, and county counsel opinions as they affect 
administration, instruction, and financial management of public schools. Legal basis for public 
education in California. 

565 Seminar in School Finance, Business Administration and Buildings (2) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Emphasis on school finance, business administration and buildings 
as they implement an effective educational program. A study of financial principles. School 
revenues and expenditures, budgetary procedures and processes, cost analysis, business man- 
agement and salary policies. 

566 Elementary Administration and Supervision (3) 

Prerequisites: Ed-SA 561 and 563. Seminar on leadership roles of elementary school principal and 
supervisor. Pupil personnel and instructional program in elementary school; working relations 
and morale among staff, community and pupils; parent education; relations with central district 
staff; management and recordkeeping functions; teacher evaluation. 


1 80 School A dministration 


567 A, B Fieldwork and Project (2,2) 

Prerequisites: Ed-SA 566 or 586 or concurrent registration and consent of instructor. Includes directed 
fieldwork in selected public schools and district offices. Supervised project or thesis required. 
(4 hours fieldwork, 2 hours conference) May be repeated for credit. 

568 Seminar for Administrative Trainees (3) 

Provides a behavioral analysis approach in the establishment of a sound foundation for educational 
administrators. The culminating offering of the administrator internship program. Objectives 
include (1 ) study of the behavior of human beings and (2) understanding how theory contrib- 
utes to effective administrative practice. 

569 The School in the Community (3) 

Seminar on the changing school in the changing community. The school and the community power 
structure; community involvement and school-community participation; communication 
between school and community; the power of community education and the community 
school. 

586 Secondary Administration and Supervision (3) 

Prerequisites: Ed-SA 561 and 563. Seminar on leadership roles of the secondary school principal and 
supervisor, pupil personnel and instructional program in secondary schools; development and 
administration of vocational education; morale among staff, community and pupils; relations 
with central district staff; management functions; teacher evaluation. 

587 Seminar in Financial Resource Allocation (3) 

Advanced finance, program budgeting, quality controls, expenditure programs, state-county-local- 
federal financing. Decison making in assigning financial resources. Financial accountability. 

588 Organization Theory and Management (3) 

Principles and practices of public school management; planning and practice in task analysis; 
planning and practice in setting of goals and objectives; implementation of plans related to goals; 
management tools, social, political and economic forces affecting education; decision making 
based on factual data as it pertains to education. 

589 Staff Evaluation — Supervision (3) 

Seminar in group work supervision techniques as they apply to improvement of teaching process; 
analyzing and focusing role relationships between supervisors, students, teachers, parents; 
classroom dynamics and role of supervisor in planning and developing educational programs. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Open to qualified students desiring to pursue independent inquiry. 


SPECIAL EDUCATION 

FACULTY 
Calvin Nelson 
Coordinator 

Robert Lemmon, Lester March, Leo Schmidt 
PART-TIME 

james Barton, Dennis Fenton, Marian Jobe, Thalia Larson, Glenn Smith 

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION 

Special Education 

Prerequisites 

An applicant must meet the university requirements for admission in conditionally classified graduate 
standing: a baccalaureate degree from an accredited institution and a grade-point average of at least 
2.5 in the last 60 semester units attempted (see section of this catalog on admission of graduates 
for complete statement and procedures). 

A student who meets the requirements for conditionally classified graduate standing, as well as the 
following requirements, may be admitted as a classified graduate upon the development of an 
approved study plan: (1 ) a grade-point average of 2.5 or better in previous academic and related 
work, (2) an approved major; (3) completion of Ed-SE 371, Exceptional Individual, or alternative 
work on study plan as shown below under "Electives"; (4) satisfactory interview and autobiography. 


School Administration 1 81 


Study Plan 

Students should consult the Graduate Bulletin for information concerning standards for graduate 
study, steps in the master's degree program, and graduate policies and procedures. 

Units 


Supporting course outside special education 3 

Ed-RP 510 Research Design and Analysis (3) 

Courses for the concentration in special education (adviser-approved) 27 

1. Required (10 units): 


Ed-SE 463 Exceptionality: Cognitive-Affective Characteristics (3), or 
Ed-SE 464 Exceptionality: Physical-Sensory Characteristics (3) 

Ed-SE 574 Exceptionality: Noneducational Implications (3) 

Ed-SE 575 Exceptionality: Theory, Philosophy and Research (4) 

2. Electives (14-16 units): 

If Ed-SE 371 has not been taken as a prerequisite, Ed-SE 463 and Ed-SE 464 will both 
be required, with the additional course counted as three of the units of electives. 

3. One of the following (1-3 units): 

Ed-SE 595 Advanced Studies in Special Education (including comprehensive ex- 
amination), 

Ed-SE 597 Project, or 

Ed-SE 598 Thesis. __ 

Total 30 

For advisement and further information, consult the program graduate adviser. See also "The 
Program of Master's Degrees" in this catalog and the Graduate Bulletin. 

ADVANCED CREDENTIAL PROGRAMS 

The curriculum in specialist preparation which appears in this section of the catalog is designed to 
meet the requirements of Teacher Preparation and Licensing Act of 1970 effective in September, 
1974. The curricula are subject to change pending approval by the Commission for Teacher Prepara- 
tion and Licensing. Students are advised to contact the special education office for appropriate 
publications in the event curricular modifications are introduced by commission action. 

Specialist Credentials 

Programs leading to four specialist credentials are available. They are: 

1. Specialist credential to teach the physically handicapped (including the blind and partially 
seeing and orthopedically handicapped) 

2. Specialist credential to teach the learning handicapped (including the learning disabilities, 
behavior disorders and educationally retarded) 

3. Specialist credential to teach the severely handicapped (including the trainable mentally re- 
tarded, severely multiple handicapped, seriously emotionally disturbed and the autistic) 

4. Specialist credential to teach the gifted 

All specialist training programs include a generic component and advanced specialist component, 
both of which must be completed in order that a student be credentialed. Completion of the generic 
component is prerequisite to admission to advanced specialist component training. 
Undergraduates wishing to earn an advanced specialist credential can meet the requirements of the 
generic component of the credential by (a) completing a bachelor's degree with a major in human 
services with a teaching-learning practicum thrust, and/or completing a bachelor's degree with 
another major and electing six units of approved coursework in human services (electives in 
exceptionality), (b) completing the preservice professional training program for a multiple subject 
credential with student teaching divided between the regular classroom and the special classroom. 
For details regarding admission to and completion of the multiple subject credential, consult the 
Division of Teacher Education. 

Graduate students entering the advanced specialist program who have completed multiple or single 
subject preservice training programs with majors other than human service must complete six units 
of courses in human services (electives in exceptionality) and six units of student teaching with 
exceptional children. This requirement may be waived upon submission of satisfactory evidence of 
broad training and experience with exceptional children. 

Advanced specialist programs include coursework specific to the master's degree and the several 
advanced specialist credentials; students may, therefore, elect one of two options upon entry to the 
program. These are: 


1 82 Special Education 


1. Advanced specialist credential program 

2. Master's degree program. 

The advanced specialist program for each credential requires the same course sequence. However; 
different practicum activity sections are designed to meet the specific needs of each credential. 
Students seeking recommendation for any of the four credentials listed must satisfactorily complete 
the following: 

Prerequisites 

1. Bachelor's degree 

2. A multiple subject or single subject credential 

3. The specialist generic component of the program, including student teaching with exceptional 
children (12 units) 

Advanced Specialist Credential Requirements Units 

Ed-SE 463 Exceptionality: Cognitive-Affective Characteristics (3), or 
Ed-SE 464 Exceptionality: Physical-Sensory Characteristics (3) 

Ed-SE 465A,B,C or D* Educational Practices in Exceptionality (4) 

Ed-SE 573A / B / C or D* Advanced Practices in Exceptionality (4) 

Ed-SE 574 Exceptionality: Noneducational Implications (3) 

Ed-SE 575 Exceptionality: Theory, Philosophy and Research (4) 

Total (including 12 prerequisite units) 30 

Advisement is available to any student seeking a credential under the special education program. 
During registration, the student should consult an adviser in the area in which he expects to major, 
as well as an adviser in special education, for assistance in selecting courses in his program. A student 
from another institution should bring transcripts of previous work and a tentative selection of 
courses. Transferred education courses must be of upper-division level and taken within the past 15 
years to be applicable to upper division credential requirements. 


SPECIAL EDUCATION COURSES 

370 The Personal Quest (3) 

An experience-based course exploring the factors contributing to personality. Consideration will be 
made concerning individual needs, how they are met by the individual, other individuals, 
society and society's institutions. One objective will be to explore different life styles and 
attempt to understand how they meet the needs of individuals involved with them. 

371 Exceptional Individual (3) 

The study of children who deviate from the average in the elementary and the secondary schools; 
physically handicapped, mentally retarded, gifted, socially maladjusted, and emotionally dis- 
turbed. Special educational services, curriculum, procedures, and materials necessary to pro- 
mote their maximum development. 

395 Methods and Techniques of Tutoring (3) 

Lecture/ Practicum in tutoring theory and methods, use of diagnostic test and survey questionnaires 
in determining student needs. In conjunction with tutorial practice, student will receive practical 
training, utilize audiovisual equipment and autoinstructional materials at the Learning Assistance 
Resource Center. 

463 Exceptionality: Cognitive-Affective Characteristics (3) 

Seminar in the study of individuals who deviate from the norm with respect to cognitive and 
emotional functioning including the educable mentally retarded, gifted, slow learner, behavior- 
ally disordered and emotionally disturbed. 

464 Exceptionality: Physical-Sensory Characteristics (3) 

Seminar in the study of individuals who deviate from the norm with respect to physical-sensory 
functioning including the visually handicapped, multiply handicapped, physically handicapped, 
and trainable mentally retarded. 

465A Exceptionally Educational Practices with the Learning Handicapped (4) 

Corequisite: Ed-SE 464. Curriculum development, methods and materials for teaching the learning 
handicapped. Lectures, demonstrations and practicum relative to the credential requirements. 

See program publications regarding which sections apply to specific credentials. 


Special Education 183 


465B Exceptionality: Educational Practices for the Severely Handicapped (4) 

Corequisite: Ed-SE 464. Curriculum development, methods and materials for teaching the severely 
handicapped. Lectures, demonstrations and practicum relative to the credential requirements. 

465C Exceptionality: Educational Practices for the Physically Handicapped (4) 

Corequisite: Ed-SE 464. Curriculum development, methods and materials for teaching the physical- 
ly handicapped. Lectures, demonstrations and practicum relative to the credential requirements. 

465D Exceptionality: Educational Practices for the Gifted (4) 

Corequisite: Ed-SE 463. Curriculum development, methods and materials for teaching the gifted. 
Lectures, demonstrations and practicum relative to the credential requirements. 

473 Mental Retardation and Brain Injury (3) 

Prerequisite: Ed-SE 371 . Organic and cultural basis of mental retardation and brain injury, including 
social, psychological, and vocational problems. Child growth, sensory development, learning 
characteristics of mentally retarded and brain injured children, and techniques of working with 
parents will be considered. 

474 Curriculum and Methods for Teaching the Mentally Retarded (3) 

Prerequisite: Ed-SE 473. Curriculum development, methods, and materials for teaching the educa- 
ble and trainable mentally retarded at the elementary and secondary levels. 

475 Observation and Individual Instruction with the Mentally Retarded (3) 

Prerequisite: Ed-SE 474. Supervised observation and participation with the educable and the traina- 
ble mentally retarded at both the elementary and secondary levels of education. (4 hours 
activity, 1 hour lecture and discussion) 

477 The Educationally Handicapped Child (3) 

Prerequisite: Ed-SE 371. Behavioral characteristics of the educationally handicapped child, the 
child with a neurological handicap or a behavioral disorder as defined by the California Educa- 
tion Code. Educational procedures, perceptual and motor training, evaluation, parent guidance. 

478 Innovations in Special Education (3-6) 

Acquaints teachers and administrators with recent, dynamic and innovative methodologies and 
concepts related to the atypical child. Emphasis on assisting participants to update their present 
knowledge and skills through implementing new thought as it relates to special education. 

495 Innovative Teaching/Learning Seminar/Practicum (1-3) 

Prerequisite: Ed-SE 395 or consent of instructor. Seminar/practicum in developing and field testing 
innovative teaching/ learning strategies for educationally disadvantaged and other students. 
Includes assessment of individual tutee's entry skills, specification of terminal behaviors, devel- 
opment, implementation of instructional objectives and evaluation of instructional outcomes. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: senior or graduate standing and consent of instructor. Student will complete individual 
studies under the direction of faculty member. Studies include experimental, library, or creative 
projects. Only students of demonstrated capacity and maturity will be approved. 

514 Graduate Seminar: Behavioral Research on Children with Learning Disorders (3) 

Prerequisite: Ed-RP 510. Critical analysis of behavioral research on children with learning disorders. 
Resources, criteria for evaluation of studies with exceptional children, historical view of re- 
search. Research relating to learning, handicapping conditions, and efficacy of special methods. 

521 Group Processes in the Classroom (3) 

Prerequisite: Ed-SE 371 or consent of instructor. Exploration of group interaction, teacher sensitivity, 
and their relevance to educational planning and management. Emphasis: emotionally disturbed, 
educationally handicapped. 

522 Behavior Problems in the Classroom (3) 

Prerequisite: Ed-SE 371 or consent of instructor. Identification and management of social and affec- 
tive disturbances related to school performance. Emphasis: early detection, behavioral modifi- 
cation techniques, parent counseling, interagency cooperation. 

523 Learning Problems in the Classroom (3) 

Prerequisite: Ed-Se 371 or consent of instructor. Identification and educational management of 
learning problems. Emphasis: developmental sequences, related prescriptive teaching and 
remediation techniques. 

570 Graduate Seminar in Educational Psychology: Advanced Developmental Psychology 

(3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Research, theory and practice in the physical-motor develop- 
ment, cognitive-intellectual growth and effective-personality organization of children and 
adolescents. Focus is given to educational interventions as a means of problem solving. 


184 Special Education 

573A Exceptionality: Advanced Practices for the Learning Handicapped (4) 

Prerequisites: Ed-SE 463 and 465A. Advanced instruction in the application of educational practices 
working with the learning handicapped. Seminar and fieldwork practicum will be undertaken 
at selected sites in the community at large. 

573B Exceptionality: Advanced Practices for the Severely Handicapped (4) 

Prerequisites: Ed-SE 464 and 465B. Advanced instruction in the application of educational practices 
working with the severely handicapped. Seminar and field work practicum will be undertaken 
at selected sites in the community at large. 

573C Exceptionality: Advanced Practices for the Physically Handicapped (4) 

Prerequisites: Ed-SE 464 and 465C. Advanced instruction in the application of educational practices 
working with the physically handicapped. Seminar and fieldwork practicum will be undertaken 
at selected sites in the community at large. 

573D Exceptionality: Advanced Practices for the Gifted (4) 

Prerequisites: Ed-SE 463 and 465D. Advanced instruction in the application of educational practices 
working with the gifted. Seminar and fieldwork practicum will be undertaken at selected sites 
in the community at large. 

574 Exceptionality: Noneducational Implications (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to graduate status. Consideration of economic and social implications of 
exceptionality. Advanced investigations regarding different aspects of the adjustment of the 
exceptional individual to society and of society's accommodation to the individual. 

575 Exceptionality: Theory, Philosophy and Research (4) 

Prerequisites: admission to graduate status and consent of instructor. A consideration of theories, 
philosophies and evaluation strategies dealing with exceptional individuals, critical evaluation 
of research on exceptionality and the consideration of investigatory models for studying excep- 
tionality. 

595 Advanced Studies (1-3) 

Graduate seminars designed to develop professional competencies in such areas as behavior, 
teaching strategies, educational technology, program development, communication theory and 
interpersonal relations. May be repeated for credit. 

5% Graduate Educational Practicum (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conduct at a graduate level an educational practicum experience 
with an individual under the direction of a faculty member. May be repeated for a maximum 
of six units. 

597 Project (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Individual research on an empirical project, with conferences 
with the instructor, culminating in a project. 

598 Thesis (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Individual research with conferences with the instructor, cul- 
minating in a thesis. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Open to qualified graduate students desiring to pursue independ- 
ent inquiry. 

779 Student Teaching with Exceptional Children (5-6) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Participation in a class for exceptional children for greater part 
of every school day. Includes a two-hour seminar each week in problems and procedures for 
teaching exceptional children. Students doing student teaching in conjunction with multiple 
subject student teaching will take student teaching for five units. Students entering with multiple 
subject or single subject student teaching completed will enroll for six units which includes one 
unit generic competencies assessment seminar. 

DEPARTMENT OF ATHLETICS 

Neale Stoner, Director 

Leslie Bleamaster, Patrick Callahan, James Colletto, Kristi Conklin, John Culwell, Robert Dye, August 
Garrido, Jerry Lloyd, Donald Matson, Billie Moore, Warren Simmons, Melvin Sims, David Snow, 
V. Richard Wolfe, Ernest Zermeno 


HEPER 185 


DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH EDUCATION, 

PHYSICAL EDUCATION AND RECREATION 

Jean Barrett, Chair 
FACULTY 

Gene Adams, C. Ian Bailey, Katharine Barthels, M. William Fulton, Eric Hanauer, Tracy Hetrick, 
Elmer Johnson, Alexander Omalev, Paul Pastor, Roberta Rikli, Iva Diane Ross, Virginia Scheel, 
Eula Stovall, Carol Weinmann, Ronald Witchey, Michael Yessis 

BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN PHYSICAL EDUCATION 

The Department of Physical Education offers the Bachelor of Science in Physical Education for 
students preparing to teach, for those preparing to pursue graduate work in physical education and 
for those preparing tor careers in business, industry and government service. The degree consists 
of 124 units with a maximum of 12 lower division units and a minimum of 28 upper division units 
in physical education. 

Transfer students must request transcripts of records of all previous scholastic work from each 
university or college attended. These transcripts are in addition to those required for admission to 
the university and must be sent by the issuing institution directly to the chair, Department of Physical 
Education. 

All transfer students must have transcripts evaluated by the department undergraduate adviser prior 
to registration. 

MAJOR IN PHYSICAL EDUCATION 

It is strongly recommended that students take one or more of the following courses to fulfill their 
general education requirements: 

•Chemistry 100, Introductory Chemistry (4); Physics 21 1A, Elementary Physics (4); Modern 
Physical Science (4); Biological Science 101, Elements of Biology (5); Biological Science 361, 


Mammalian Anatomy and Physiology (4); 

Lower Division (maximum of 12 units) Units 

A minimum of six different activity courses elected from PE 100-189 6 

Upper Division (minimum of 28 units) 

Theoretical and practical bases: 

Minimum of two courses 6-7 


PE 300 Principles of Movement (3) 

PE 352 Physiology of Exercise (4) 

PE 360 Movement Anatomy (3) 

PE 363 Developmental Adaptations of Atypical (3) 

PE 371 Theory and Principles of Human Motor Learning (3) 

Contemporary understandings: 

Minimum of two courses 6 

PE 380 History of Physical Education (3) 

PE 381 Cultural Perspectives of Physical Activity (3) 

PE 480 Sport Psychology (3) 

PE 482 Sport Sociology (3) 

Analysis: 

Minimum of three courses 6-7 

Selected from: PE 301-319 

At least two courses must be in individual or dual sports. No more than one analysis 
course in a team sport may apply toward this requirement. 

Upper division physical education courses to complete the required 40 units for the 

major — 

Total 40 

Proficiency Requirements for Major and Minor Students 

Activity courses should be taken to meet the prerequisite requirements for any analysis series course 
the student plans to take. Proficiency screening tests are administered in the analysis classes at the 
beginning of the semester. 

MINOR IN PHYSICAL EDUCATION 

A physical education minor shall consist of 20 units of coursework in physical education with a 
minimum of 12 upper division units which must include work from each of the following areas: 
theoretical and practical bases, contemporary understandings and analysis series. 


186 HEPER 


REQUIREMENTS FOR PHYSICAL EDUCATION MAJORS SEEKING A 
TEACHING CREDENTIAL 

The university program for meeting the basic requirements for the teaching credential with a 
specialization in physical education (K-12) can be found elsewhere in this catalog (see School of 
Education, Division of Teacher Education). Additional requirements of the Department of Physical 
Education are as follows 

1. Required Coursework 

In addition to, or as part of, the requirements for a major in physical education all candidates 
for the credential must complete the following with a minimum of a "C" grade: 

PE 300 Principles of Movement 

PE 371 Theory and Principles of Human Motor Learning 
PE 420 Tests and Measurements in Physical Education 

2. Competency in Subject Matter of Physical Education 

All candidates for the credential must adequately demonstrate their competency in subject matter 
scope and content of physical education. The major areas of emphasis identified by the Physical 
Education Advisory Panel of the Commission for Teacher Preparation and Licensing include: (1 ) 
biological foundations, (2) sociological foundations, (3) psychological foundations, (4) histori- 
cal-philosophical foundations, (5) evaluation and measurement, (6) health and safety concepts 
relating to physical activity and (7) instructional subject matter. 

3. Instructional Subject Matter of Physical Education 

Students seeking a credential with a specialization in physical education from this institution must 
be able to demonstrate their competency in instructional subject matter which is a part of the 
regular physical education program of the public schools. The Department of Physical Education 
specifically requires the following: 

a. Ability to perform and analyze basic movement skills common to a large number of instruction- 
al physical activities. 

b. Adequate background and preparation to demonstrate breadth of understanding of the scope 
and content of physical education. 

c. Strong background and preparation in a minimum of three designated areas of physical 
education * to demonstrate "in-depth" understanding and ability to apply understandings to 
the teaching learning situation. At present the areas identified by the Teacher Education 
Advisory Council of the Physical Education Department include: (1 ) team sports, (2) individ- 
ual sports, (3) dual sports, (4) dance, (5) aquatics, (6) recreational (must be instructional 
in nature), (7) environmental, (8) developmental, (9) special programs and (10) coaching. 

4. Admission to Teacher Education 

In addition to the requirements set forth elsewhere in this catalog, the Department of Physical 
Education requires candidates to submit to an extensive review of qualifications for teaching. This 
review includes additional written documentation, and a personal evaluation by a select interview 
committee. 

Acceptance into the program allows the candidate to enroll in a two semester sequence: 

First semester: Ed-TE 440F, Ed-TE 440S, Ed-TE 440R (optional), PE 442. 

Second semester: Ryan credential — PE 449 A, B 

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN PHYSICAL EDUCATION 

The program of studies is designed: (1) to prepare master teachers at the college level; (2) to 
improve the professional background and competence of those in the field; (3) to prepare scholars 
who wish to pursue a doctoral program in physical education; and (4) to prepare students for sports 
related careers in fields other than teaching. 

Admission to Graduate Standing: Conditionally Classified 

An applicant must meet the university requirements for admission in conditionally classified graduate 
standing: a baccalaureate degree from an accredited institution and a grade-point average of at least 
2.5 in the last 60 semester units attempted (see section of this catalog on admission of graduates 
for complete statement and procedures). 

Admission to Graduate Standing: Classified 

A student who meets the requirements for conditionally classified graduate standing, as well as the 

Students are urged to consult with the teacher education adviser of the department before submitting documents 
required for establishing subject matter competency. 


HE PER 18 7 


following requirements, may be admitted as a classified graduate upon development of an approved 
study plan: 

1 . completion of 24 approved upper division units in physical education 

2. a grade-point average of 3.0 or better, for all upper division work taken in physical education. 
(Contingency provisions: grade point deficiencies in individual courses in physical education may 
be met by taking 6-12 hours of approved courses at Cal State Fullerton, and earning a 3.0 GPA 
in these courses. Such courses, while counted toward the prerequisites for the master of science 
program, may not be used to fulfill the program requirements.) 

3. three satisfactory letters of recommendation 

Study Plan 

The degree study plan normally consists of 30 units of graduate coursework with a GPA of 3.0 or 
better. Coursework shall include a minimum of 18 units of 500-level courses of which 8-10 units are 
required. Further work includes 8-10 units of 500-level physical education courses and a maximum 
of 1 2 units of electives. A thesis or a project and an oral examination at the conclusion of the program 
are required; a written examination may also be required. 

Units 

Required 8-10 

PE 508 Statistical Methods in Physical Education (3) 

PE 510 Research in Physical Education (3) 

PE 598 Thesis (4) or PE 597 Project (2) 

Study plans shall be developed from the following list of approved courses with 
adviser's approval. 

Approved 500-level physical education 6-10 

PE 505 Seminar in Sports Administration (3) 

PE 515 Current Issues in Physical Education (3) 

PE 516 Philosophical Bases of Physical Education (3) 

PE 520 International Physical Education (3) 

PE 530 Administration of Physical Education (3) 

PE 532 Curriculum Design in Physical Education (3) 

PE 533 Facilities Development and Planning (3) 

PE 534 Supervision: Instructional Facilitation (3) 

PE 540 Seminar in Adapted Physical Education (3) 

PE 550 Internship (3) 

PE 551 Advanced Study in Physiology of Exercise (3) 

PE 552 Human Bio-Kinetics (3) 

PE 554 Advanced Study in Motor Behavior (3) 

PE 555 Scientific Bases of Training (3) 

* PE 596 Advanced Studies in Physical Education (1-3) 

* PE 599 Independent Research (1-3) 

Electives 12 

Twelve units of coursework are selected with adviser's approval which would be supportive of the 
individual student's stated goals for graduate study. Coursework may be selected from the following 
categories in any combination: 

1. 500-level coursework in physical education. 

2. 400-level coursework in physical education approved by the department's 
Graduate Studies Committee for graduate students. 

3. Graduate or upper division coursework approved for graduate students from 
other departments within the university. 

Total 30 

For further details, consult the graduate studies adviser, Division of Health Education, Physical 
Education, Recreation and Athletics. 

See also "The Program of Master's Degrees" in this catalog and the Graduate Bulletin. 


PE 596 and 599 may be applied to the major area of study and/or the secondary area of optional electives. 


188 HE PER 


HEALTH EDUCATION COURSES 

101 Personal and Community Health (2) 

Consideration of critical health issues as they relate to modern man. Physical, mental and social 
health and safety issues involved in everyday living are investigated. 

102 Prevention and First Aid (2) 

Study of the hazards in man's environment and the common accidents related thereto. Emphasis 
is placed upon both the care and prevention of accidents. Students (upon successful completion 
of requirements) will be granted standard first aid certification by the American Red Cross. 

321 Drugs and Society (3) 

Critical study of habit-forming substances such as alcohol, tobacco, narcotics and related drugs. 
Social and legal aspects of the drug problem are also considered. 

410 Health Education for Teachers (3) 

Topics will include school health, drug education, family living community health teaching philoso- 
phy and strategy. For students seeking California teaching credential. 


PHYSICAL EDUCATION COURSES 

General Education Requirements: 

Health and Physical Education Electives 

There are no specific health and physical education requirements for students entering the university 
under this catalog. However, courses in health and physical education may be applied toward 
general education requirements in Category ll-D, Electives. Students entering the university prior to 
fall, 1976 should refer to previous catalogs which allow coursework in health and physical education 
to apply toward general education requirements in Category IV, Basic Subjects, in addition to 
Category V, Electives. 

100-169 Activity Courses (1) (Formerly 110 Aquatics; 120 Group Activities; 130 Individual 
Activities) 

May be offered for different skill levels. PE 100 Physical Conditioning; 102 Jogging; 103 Track and 
Field; 104 Horseback Riding; 105 Cycling; 106 Skiing; 107 Ice Figure Skating; 108 Roller Skating; 
1 1 0 Swimming; 1 1 1 Life Saving; 1 1 2 Water Polo; 1 1 4 Skin Diving; 1 1 5 Synchronized Swimming; 
1 16 Springboard Diving; 117 Bowling; 118 Archery; 119 Golf; 120 Gymnastics; 125 Rock Climb- 
ing; 130 Badminton; 131 Tennis; 132 Racketball; 133 Handball; 140 Cheer and Yell; 142 Group 
Games for Elementary; 143 Adapted Physical Education; 144 Exercise Weight Conrol; 150 
Wrestling; 151 Aikido; 152 Karate; 154 Self Defense; 155 Fencing; 156 Sabre; 157 Epee; 160 
Baseball; 161 Softball; 162 Lacrosse; 163 Field Hockey; 164 Volleyball; 165 Soccer; 166 Team 
Handball; 167 Basketball; 169 Flag Football 

170-189 Intercollegiate Sports (2) (Formerly 170 Intercollegiate Sports (W) and 180 In- 
tercollegiate Sports (M) 

Prerequisite: consent of coach. An intercollegiate activity experience in individual or team sports in 
an educational setting under the direction of a coach who directs the activity to meet the needs 
and interest of the student. PE 170 Gymnastics (M) (W);171 Golf (M); 175 Tennis (M) (W); 
176 Wrestling (M); 177 Fencing (M) (W); 178 Basketball (M) (W); 179 Baseball (M); 180 
Soccer (M); 184 Football (M); 185 Volleyball (W). 

190 Team Management (2) 

Prerequisites: consent of coach, undergraduate studies adviser and department chair. Field experi- 
ence in the management of an intercollegiate sport. May be repeated for maximum of eight units 
of credit. 

201 Introduction to Physical Education and Recreation (3) 

Introduction to physical education programs in public and private agencies, personal, social and 
professional requirements of the physical education teacher and recreation leader, includes the 
origin and development of the professions of health education, physical education and recrea- 
tion with emphasis upon their significance and function in contemporary American culture. 

206 Techniques of Officiating Team Sports (2) 

Analysis of officiating techniques and rules necessary for officiating team sports. May be repeated 
for various sports or combination of sports. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

210 Water Safety Instructor (2) 

Prerequisite: PE 111 (Life Saving) or equivalent and consent of instructor. This course prepares the 
student to teach swimming and life saving and to supervise aquatic programs. Successful 


HE PER 189 


completion of this course will qualify the student for certification as an ARC water safety 
instructor. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

214 Basic Scuba (2) 

Prerequisite: PE 114, Skin Diving or ability to swim 400 yards, tread water one minues and swim 25 
yards underwater. Techniques of skin and scuba diving, theory of diving, safety procedures, and 
ocean environment. Successful students will receive NAUI and Los Angeles basic scuba certifi- 
cation. 

220 So You Want To Be a Coach (2) 

Introduction to coaching with emphasis on leadership, teaching and personal traits. Discussion of 
motivation, social, medical and physical hazards of coaching. The novice coach, responsibili- 
ties, administration and effects of superstition and myths. Application procedures, resume and 
interview. Problem areas, co-ed, etc. 

300 Principles of Movement (3) 

Understanding of the basic principles of movement and their application to general movement 
patterns as applied to sport and human movement. 

302-319 Analysis of Sports (2) (Formerly 340, 341, 342) 

Prerequisite: prior experience in the specific sport (s) to be studied. Must demonstrate adequate 
proficiency in such sport(s). Analysis of specific sport(s), including game play and skill per- 
formance. Emphasis on understanding the specific nature of the activity. 302 Analysis of Track 
and Field; 304 Analysis of Swimming; 305 Analysis of Golf; 306 Analysis of Gymnastics; 308 
Analysis of Soccer; 309 Analysis of Badminton/ Racketball; 311 Analysis of Handball, 312 
Analysis of Tennis; 314 Analysis of Wrestling; 31 5 Analysis of Fencing; 316 Analysis of Volleyball; 
317 Analysis of Basketball; 319 Analysis of Softball 

320-339 Techniques of Coaching: Sports (2) (Formerly 320) 

To prepare the student to coach specific individual and team sports. Coaching techniques, condition- 
ing of athletes, budget preparation, purchase and care of equipment, scheduling and design and 
care of facilities. 321 Track and Field; 323 Swimming and Diving; 327 Wrestling; 328 Gymnastics; 
332 Tennis; 334 Baseball; 335 Football; 337 Basketball. 

343 Intermediate Scuba (2) (Formerly 310) 

Prerequisite: basic scuba certification. Application of scuba diving, including photography, naviga- 
tion, salvage, game hunting, night diving and others. Successful students will receive Los Angeles 
County intermediate scuba certification. 

345 Underwater Photography (2) 

Prerequisite: basic scuba certification. Fundamentals of photography in the underwater environment. 
Topics include equipment, underwater camera techniques, flash, and macrophotography. Lec- 
ture and activity. 

347 Organization and Administration of Physical Education (3) (Formerly 325) 

Cases studies involving human physical performance. Sequence of activities, individual needs, 
institutional patterns of organization and programming. 

348 Organization and Administration of Intramural Sports (2) (Formerly 326) 

Organization and administration of intramural sports programs at the elementary, secondary and 
college level. Selected fieldwork is included. 

351 Conditioning for Athletes (3) (Formerly 303) 

Fundamentals of conditioning for those who plan to coach. Includes specific programs such as circuit 
training, nutrition, motivation, weight control and kinesiology factors for women's and men's 
athetics. 

352 Physiology of Exercise (4) (Formerly 370) 

The study of physiological processes in physical activities and the effects of training upon perform- 
ance. (3 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

360 Movement Anatomy (3) 

Description of human movement especially as witnessed in sports. Comprehension of muscle action 
and function in various sports. 

363 Developmental Adaptations of Atypical (3) (Formerly 318) 

The study and selection of activities and programs for students physically unable to participate in 
the regular physical education program. 

365 Prevention and Care of Athletic Injuries (3) (Formerly 301) 

Prerequisites: upper division standing, successful completion of HE 102 (or equivalent) and consent 
of instructor. Designed to assist trainers, coaches, physical education instructors, health educa- 


190 HEPER 


tors, YMCA and playground personnel, and athletes in the prevention and care of athletic 
injuries. Emphasis on practical applications as well as theory. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

371 Theory and Principles of Human Motor Learning (3) (Formerly 324) 

An analysis of current theories of motor learning as related to human performance. Philosophical 
bases are developed from which basic principles are evolved. 

372 Physical Education and Human Development (3) (Formerly 333) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor or department chair required for physical education majors. 
Emphasis on characteristics of the child, particularly as these relate to physical growth and 
development; basic mechanical principles underlying efficient movement; and programs for 
physical needs of children in the elementary school. 

380 History of Physical Education (3) (Formerly 350) 

Historical development of thought and practice in athletics and physical education in American 
education. 

381 Cultural Perspectives of Physical Activity (3) (Formerly 356) 

An interdisciplinary approach to the examination of physical activity in the cultural milieu. Study will 
cover historical and contemporary interpretations of the role of play, games and sports, dance 
and recreation in human life. 

3% Tutorial (1) 

Prerequisites: consent of instructor, tutorial adviser and department chair. Student aide in general 
education activity classes. May be repeated for maximum of six units of credit. 

401 Advanced Study in Performance: Track and Field (2) 

Prerequisites: analysis of track and field or consent of instructor. An in-depth study of skills, tech- 
niques and strategy of top level performance in track and field. Included is the theory and 
analysis of outstanding performance. 

406 Advanced Study in Performance: Gymnastics (2) (Formerly 450B) 

Prerequisites: analysis of gymnastics or consent of instructor. An in-depth study of skills, techniques 
and strategy of top level performance in gymnastics. Included is the theory and analysis of 
outstanding performance. 

412 Advanced Study in Performance: Badminton and Tennis (2) (Formerly 450A) 

Prerequisites: analysis of badminton and tennis or consent of instructor. An in-depth study of skills, 
techniques and strategy of top level performance in badminton and tennis. Included is the 
theory and analysis of outstanding performance. 

420 Tests and Measurements in Physical Education (3) 

A study of the development and use of tests and measurements in physical education in the 
evaluation of objectives, programs and student achievement. 

425 Special Programs: Physical Education (1-3) 

A study of the development and use of tests and measurements in physical education in the 
evaluation of objectives, programs and student achievement. 

442 Teaching Physical Education in the Secondary School (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. Deals with objectives, methods and materials of 
teaching physical education at the secondary school level. Required before student teaching. 
Course is part of the 12-unit education block and may not be taken separately. 

449A Student Teaching Physical Education in the Secondary School (10) 

See description under Division of Teacher Education. 

449B Student Teaching Seminar (2) 

See description under Division of Teacher Education. 

451 Sports Medicine (3) (Formerly 440) 

Prerequisites: upper division standing, PE 352 or its equivalent or consent of instructor. The study 
of advanced athletic training as it pertains to the various factors (environmental, nutritional) 
which alters the typical physiological response to exercise and training. 

461 Biomechanics (3) 

Prerequisite: PE 300 or consent of instructor. An in-depth study of the application of mechanics to 
the analysis of human movement. 

480 Sport Psychology (3) (Formerly 436) 

Discussion and analysis of literature, research and issues dealing with psychological aspects of play, 
games and sport. (Same as Psychology 436) 

482 Sport Sociology (3) (Formerly 437) 

A critical examination of the interrelationships of sport and athletics with other aspects of the culture; 
special emphasis on 20th-century America. 


HEPER 191 


496 Physical Education Practicum (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of supervisor, undergraduate adviser and department chair. Participation as an 
assistant in planning, preparing, coaching, teaching in public school, college, or community 
physical education or recreation programs. May be repeated for a maximum of six units of 
credit. Credit/No credit only. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: upper division standing and consent of instructor supervising the study, undergraduate 
adviser and department chair. Independent inquiry into problems of topics of special interest 
beyond the scope of regular coursework. May be repeated for credit up to six units. 

505 Seminar in Sports Administration (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate status. Management approaches related to the administration of commercial 
and professional sports including office management, radio and TV negotiations, public rela- 
tions, arena and stadium management, ticket sales, the legal aspects and the supervision of the 
medical aspects of professional sports. 

508 Statistical Methods in Physical Education (3) 

Prerequisite: PE 420 or equivalent. Includes statistical theory, data collection procedures, techniques 
or analysis of data and interpretation of data related to physical education. 

510 Research in Physical Education (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate status. The role and functions of research in physical education included are 
the different types of research with tools of and equipment for the respective research. Selection 
and development of research problems and critique of completed studies are stressed. 

515 Current Issues in Physical Education (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate status with a major or minor in physical education. A study of current 
problems and issues in physical eduction through a critical analysis of the literature in the field 
and research findings. 

516 Philosophical Bases of Physical Education (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate status with a major in physical education. Identification of philosophical 
schools of thought as related to physical education including the role of the philosophical 
process. Examination and application of the philosophical process in physical education. 

520 International Physical Education (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate status with a major in physical education. An in-depth study of the theory and 
practice of physical education and sports in selected foreign countries. Evaluation of foreign 
physical education programs in relation to programs witnessed in the United States. 

530 Administration and Supervision of Physical Education (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate status with major in physical education. An in-depth study and critical analysis 
of existing programs in physical education in terms of established evaluative criteria and norms 
of practice. 

532 Curriculum Design in Physical Education (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate status with a major in physical education. Curriculum development models 
and factors influencing curriculum development in physical education. For any professional 
physical educator who may be involved in the curriculum development and/or improvement 
of a physical education program. 

533 Facilities Development and Planning (3) 

Prerequisites: graduate status and a major in physical education. Analysis of new trends and research 
in the development of indoor and outdoor facilities in planning programs in health education, 
physical education and recreation with special emphasis upon design, safety, features, site 
selection, building construction and equipment needs. 

534 Supervision: Instructional Facilitation (3) 

Prerequisite: teaching experience in physical education, PE 532, or consent of instructor. An analysis 
of problems and practices in teacher supervision with special reference to the fields of cur- 
riculum and instruction in physical education, incorporating the use of audio and videotapes 
to analyze and improve teaching and supervisory effectiveness. 

540 Seminar in Adapted Physical Education (3) 

Prerequisite: PE 363. Identification and solutions of problems in planning, organization, administra- 
tion, and evaluation of adapted physical education programs at local, state and national levels. 

550 Internship (3) 

Prerequisite: PE 505 and classified status. On-the-job training experiences under the supervision of 


192 


Teacher Education 


a fully trained practitioner in the field. Requirements include 10 hours per week of on-the-job 
training and 1 hour weekly conference with instructor. May be repeated once for credit. 

551 Advanced Study in Physiology of Exercise (3) 

Prerequisite: PE 352 or equivalent. A study of advanced theories of exercise and physiological 
function. 

552 Human Bio-Kinetics (3) 

Prerequisite: PE 461 or equivalent background in kinesiology. A study of advanced theories and a 
detailed analysis of human movement. 

554 Advanced Studies in Motor Behavior (3) 

Prerequisites: graduate status, PE 371 or consent of instructor. An in-depth study of current issues 
in the area of motor behavior. 

555 Scientific Bases of Training (3) 

Prerequisites: graduate status, coursework in kinesiology, physiology of exercise, bio-kinetics and 
consent of instructor. Detailed study of contemporary training with specific attention to the 
development of those qualities involved in various sports. Experience in evaluation of the effects 
of training. 

5% Advanced Studies: Physical Education (1-3) 

Prerequisite: graduate status. Graduate seminars designed to develop competencies in such areas 
as: historical, philosophical, sociological, psychological, scientific bases of sport and dance. 
Opportunities are provided for individualization of instruction with appropriate experiences. 
May be repeated for credit. 

597 Project (2) 

Prerequisites: PE 508, PE 510 and consent of project committee. Individual work on an empirical 
problem. Conferences with project chair and committee, culminating in a project. 

598 Thesis (4) 

Prerequisites: PE 508, 510 and consent of thesis committee. Individual research on an empirical 
problem. Conferences with thesis chair and committee, culminating in a thesis. 

599 Independent Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: graduate status and consent of the faculty adviser and department chair. Research for 
qualified graduate students desiring to pursue independent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. 

749 Student Teaching in Physical Education in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 

For candidates seeking the Fisher standard credential in secondary teaching. See description and 
prerequisite under Division of Teacher Education. 


RECREATION COURSES 

203 Recreation Programs and Activities (2) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Theory and activity course, leadership in recreation programs, 
activities in recreation agencies. Laboratory experiences and practice included. (1 hour lecture, 
2 hours activity) 

204 Camping and Camp Leadership (3) 

A study of camping designed to make a person become a more skillful camper, to understand better 
the values of camping and to prepare students to organize and discuss camping activities and 
the role of the counselor. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

208 Recreational Film-Making (2) 

The theory and practice of the art of creative film-making as it pertains to the field of recreation. 
(1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

425 Special Programs in Recreation (1-3) 

Investigation and practical study of recreation programs, theory, technique and/or methodology. 
Topic varies according to current offering. May be repeated for credit with different emphasis. 

DIVISION OF TEACHER EDUCATION 

FACULTY 
Paul Kane 
Chair 

Betty jean Barnes, Carol Barnes, Ida Coppolino, James Cusick, Kenneth Doane,* Mildred Donoghue, 
Karen Drinkard, Manuel Escamilla, James Gilmore, Barbara Hartsig, Shirley Hill, Emma Holmes, 

• University administrative officer. 


Teacher Education 193 


Bernard Kravitz, Edith McCullough, Eugene McGarry,* Robert McLaren, Reynaldo Mejia, Bryan 
Moffet, Donald Pease, Fraser Powlison, Nancy Reckinger, Morris Sica, Robert Simpson, Antho- 
ny M-Vega 

SECONDARY EDUCATION TEACHING METHODS FACULTY 

James Alexander (journalism Education), jean Barret (Physical Education), John Benham (Music 
Education), Carol Chadwick (Music Education), John Cooksey (Music Education), Ida Cop- 
polino (Social Science Education), Gerald Gannon (Mathematics Education), Kaye Good 
(Speech Education), Donald Henry (Theatre Education), Tracy Hetrick (Physical Education), 
Jacqueline Kiraithe (Foreign Languages Education), Joseph Landon (Music Education), Edith 
McCullough (Business Education), Benton Minor (Music Education), Sallie Mitchell (Theatre 
Education), David Pagni (Mathematics Education), Albert Porter (Art Education), Nancy 
Reckinger (Social Science Education), Clarence Schneider (English Education), Morris Sica 
(Social Science Education), Eula Stovall (Physical Education), H. Erick Streitberger (Science 
Education), Irene (Nims) Thomas (English Education), John White (English Education), 
Charles Williams (Science Education), George Williams (Art Education), Jon Zimmermann 
(Foreign Languages Education). 

PART-TIME 

Marlita Bellot, William Burns, Dorte Christjansen, Marcia Cook, Margot Coons, Jeanne Fulton, Kathy 
Hammons, Dan Harrington, Margaret Kelley, Mardel Kolls, Ann Pease, Nelson Rowen, Carolyn 
Schultz, Harriet Shultz, Shirley Sulack, Michael Trapp. 

The courses, programs and services of the division are directed toward the following objectives of 
students: 

1 . Master of Science in Education with concentration in elementary curriculum and instruction. 

2. Preservice teacher education (elementary school, secondary school, community college). 

3. Specialist's Credentials (Ryan Act) Bilingual/Cross-Cultural and Early Childhood Education. 

4. In-service teacher education. 

Instruction concentrates on the central principles of the school as a basic institution of our culture, 
the methods and materials associated with effective teaching, and the current and persistent prob- 
lems that confront teachers, and other professional workers in educational institutions. In addition 
to using published source materials and attending class sessions for presentations and discussions, 
many courses require fieldwork in schools, laboratories, clinics and other educational agencies. 

PUBLICATIONS AVAILABLE FROM THE DIVISION OF TEACHER EDUCATION 

1. Master of Science in Education, Elementary Curriculum and Instruction 

2. Admission to Teacher Education Policies 

3. Multiple Subject Instruction (elementary teacher education programs) 

4. General Subject Area Competency (Multiple Subjects Credential) 

5. Single Subject Instruction (Secondary Teacher Education Program) 

6. Specialist's Credentials 

a. Bilingual/Cross-Cultural 

b. Early Childhood Education 

PERSONNEL SERVICES FOR TEACHER EDUCATION STUDENTS 

Advisement concerning teacher education is available in the Division of Teacher Education for 
programs in multiple subject instruction, single subject instruction, the specialist in early childhood, 
and the specialist in bilingual /cross-cultural and the Master of Science in Education with concentra- 
tion in elementary curriculum and instruction. Students should consult with the coordinators of 
elementary or secondary teacher education and other faculty members in selecting courses for the 
basic teaching credential and either of the specialists' credentials. Graduate students interested in 
the master's degree program should consult with the graduate coordinator. Transfer students should 
have transcripts of previous work available. 

Students seeking a Multiple Subjects Credential (elementary teaching) should seek advisement 
regarding competency in general subject areas as soon as they decide to enter the teaching field. 
The general subject area competency requirement may be met by completing the specified list of 
requirements of a degree program with a commission approved waiver or by a satisfactory group 
of scores on the Commons Examination. Students should check with the Division of Teacher 
Education for further information and obtain bulletin "General Subject Area Competency." 
Students seeking the basic teaching credential in single subject instruction should also consult with 
teacher education advisers in the departments of their major. Departments having these advisers are 


7—88930 


194 


Teacher Education 


Art, Communications, English, Foreign Languages and Literatures, Mathematics, Physical Education, 
Music, Science Education, Speech Communication and Theatre. Advisement for the social sciences 
and business education is available in the Division of Teacher Education. 

APPLICATION FOR CREDENTIALS FOR TEACHING 

The teacher education programs meet the requirements of the State of California for the basic 
teaching credential. Upon completion of these requirements, the candidate for the credential can 
submit his application to the Commission for Teacher Preparation and Licensing with the credential 
analyst at the university office of Admissions and Records. On those applications, the student is asked 
about his citizenship status, his professional conduct, and is asked to sign an oath of allegiance. He 
must also submit a statement of his physical and mental condition signed by a qualified physician, 
one fingerprint-identification card and the legal fee, which is currently $20. 

CREDENTIAL PROGRAMS 

MULTIPLE SUBJECTS INSTRUCTION (ELEMENTARY) 

ADMISSION TO THE MULTIPLE SUBJECT PROGRAM 

Before being permitted to enroll in a credential program, the student must have made formal 
application, been screened and been formally admitted to teacher education through the School of 
Human Development and Community Service. The student will be permitted to apply for admission 
to teacher education in the semester previous to beginning his professional program. Students 
interested in the Track I program of the multiple subjects credential will submit their applications 
at the beginning of their second semester of the junior year. Students who want the Track II program 
of the multiple subjects credential will submit their applications at the beginning of the first semester 
of the junior year. A faculty committee will review information concerning the applicant's intellectual 
resources, command of fundamental skills of communication, scholarship, personality and charac- 
ter, interest in teaching and health. When more qualified students apply for admission to teacher 
education than can be accommodated during a given semester, applicants will be ranked and those 
with the highest rank selected. Qualified candidates who are not admitted may reapply during 
subsequent semesters. Information concerning the criteria and the procedures for admission to 
teacher education may be obtained in the Office of Teacher Education. 

CURRICULUM IN ELEMENTARY SCHOOL TEACHER EDUCATION * 

The program leading to the recommendation for the multiple subjects credential includes: 

1. A bachelor's degree from an approved institution. 

2. A fifth year of college or university postgraduate education taken at the upper division or 
graduate level. ( If the student does not complete all requirements, a preliminary credential may 
be awarded at the end of four or more years of work if he has a bachelor's degree from an 
approved institution and has completed the student teaching requirement). 

3. A breadth of knowledge in subject matter to help in teaching. Students who plan to secure the 
multiple subjects credential should acquire breadth of knowledge by taking coursework in each 
of the following areas: 

A. English, including grammar, literature, composition and speech 

B. Humanities and the fine arts 

C. Mathematics 

D. Physical education 

E. Science, including life and physical sciences 

F. Social sciences 

G. Passage of a subject matter examination or a major with an approved waiver. 

Because schools exist in a culturally pluralistic society, teacher candidates are also encouraged 
to take courses in the Chicano studies, Afro-ethnic studies and Indian studies programs. 

4. Professional education requirements which are currently met by the following programs: 
Track I — Two-semester sequence (See note below) 

First Semester: 

Ed-TE 430A Foundations in Elementary School Teaching (3) 

Ed-TE 430B Curriculum and Methods in Elementary School Teaching (3) 

Ed-TE 430C Supervised Fieldwork in Elementary School Teaching (3) 


* Re pubUcations ^ Credential are subject to chan f?e by the state; any curricular changes will be available in later university 


Teacher Education 195 


Ed-TE 433 Reading Instruction in the Public Schools (3) 

The first semester of Track I entails an all-day commitment, from 8:30 a.m. to 3:30 p.m. daily. 
It also requires further time for preparation of assignments. 

Second Semester: 

t Ed-TE 439A Student Teaching in the Elementary School (10) 

Ed-TE 439B Seminar in Elementary School Student Teaching (2) 

The second semester of Track I entails an all-day commitment of time. 

Track II — Three-semester sequence (See note below) 

First Semester 

Ed-TE 407 Principles of Teaching and Learning in the Elementary School (3); 

Ed-TE 433 Reading Instruction in the Public Schools (3) 

The first semester of Track II entails a commitment during the morning hours. It also requires 
further time for preparation of assignments. 

Second Semester 

Ed-TE 435A Strategies of Teaching (4) 

Ed-TE 435B Supervised Fieldwork in Elementary Teacher Education (2) 

The second semester of Track II entails a commitment during the morning hours. It also requires 
further time for preparation of assignments. 

Third Semester 

t Ed-TE 439A Student Teaching in the Elementary School (10) 

Ed-TE 439B Seminar in Elementary School Student Teaching (2) 

The third semester of Track II entails an all-day commitment of time. 

Ed-TE 314 Drugs and Human Development (1), or the equivalent must be taken by all 
multiple subjects candidates. 

ADMISSION TO STUDENT TEACHING 

The credential candidate must submit his application for student teaching by October 15 or March 
1 of the semester preceding the semester in which the student expects a student teaching assignment. 
The application for admission is submitted to either the coordinator of elementary or secondary 
teacher education. 

The application for student teaching is part of the continuous process of evaluating credential 
candidates on their suitability for elementary and secondary school teaching. Information concern- 
ing the criteria and procedures for admission to student teaching, along with the application, may 
be obtained from the Office of Teacher Education. Admission to teacher education does not include 
admission to student teaching. Each student is responsible for meeting the requirements and follow- 
ing the procedures for admission. 

SINGLE SUBjECT INSTRUCTION X (Secondary Cooperative Teacher Education Program) 

1. Admission To The Program 

The application forms for admission to the program are available in the Division of Teacher 
Education. To become a candidate for the secondary school teacher education program the 
student must be enrolled in good standing in the university and must be admitted to teacher 
education through the Office of Admission to Teacher Education. The student may apply for 
admission to teacher education at the beginning of the semester previous to the semester in which 
he is within six units of completing his major (usually as a second semester junior). Admission 
to teacher education is for the semester in which the student begins his professional coursework. 
If the student is admitted and does not enroll in the program, he must reapply in a future semester. 
If the student is not admitted, he may reapply in a future semester. A faculty committee, including 
faculty in the major department; will review information concerning the applicant's intellectual 
resources, command of fundamental skills of communication, scholarship, personality and char- 
acter, interest in teaching, and health. The minimum overall grade-point average and the mini- 
mum grade-point average in the major is 2.5. 

When more qualified students apply for admission to the program than can be accommodated 
during a given semester, applicants will be ranked and those with the highest rank selected. 
Students should consult with advisers prior to making application to the program usually by the 

t Note: Admission to the university does not include admission to the multiple subjects credential program. Admission to 
teacher education does not include admission to student teaching, 
t Regulations governing the credential are subject to change by the Commission for Teacher Preparation and Licensing; 
changes will be available in later university publications. 


196 


Teacher Education 


beginning of the junior year for the purpose of establishing competency in the fundamental skills. 
Courses or examinations are available in the areas of English and speech that will assist in meeting 
specific competencies in fundamental skills. It is also important that credential candidates for 
single subject instruction in majors that are subsumed in the single subjects listed in the basic 
teaching credential (See requirements for the credential listed below) seek advisement on 
coursework outside of their major from teacher education advisers in the departments. This 
coursework can be planned in conjunction with meeting general education requirements or 
planning for completing a minor listed in this catalog: 

Because schools exist in a culturally pluralistic society, teacher candidates are also encouraged 
to take courses in the Chicano studies, Afro-ethnic studies and Indian studies programs. 

2. Requirements and Curriculum in the Secondary Cooperative Teacher Education Program 
The Basic Teaching Credential Under the Ryan Act 

The program leading to the recommendation for the single subjects credential includes the 
following: 

A. A baccalaureate degree or higher degree, except in professional education from an approved 
institution. 

B. A fifth year of study to be completed within five years of the completion of the B.A. or B.S. 
A preliminary credential can be granted upon the completion of the baccalaureate degree and 
student teaching. The fifth year of study must be an institution approved program of study. 

C. An approved program of professional preparation. This refers to the completion of the profes- 
sional program at Cal State Fullerton described in this document. 

D. Passage of a subject matter examination or its waiver. The Ryan Act does not specify majors 
and minors, nor does it specify levels of teaching. Authorization for teaching is specified under 
only one teaching credential in either multiple subjects or in single subjects instruction. 
Multiple subjects instruction means the practice of assignment of teachers and students as is 
commonly practiced in California elementary schools. 

Single subjects instruction means the practice of assignment of teachers and students to 
specified subject matter courses as is commonly practiced in California senior high schools 
and most California junior high schools. 

Although this program is described here as a program in secondary school teacher education, 
it is in fact, the program of preparation for the teaching of single subjects as defined by the Ryan 
Act. Single subjects categories provided for in the Ryan Act related to this university's offerings 
are: English, physical science, life science, mathematics, social science, history, government, 
physical education, business, music, art, and languages including but not limited to French, 
Spanish, Russian and German. Other single subjects included in the Ryan Act but not offered at 
this university are industrial arts and home economics. Other subject matter areas are subsumed, 
as directed by the commission in the above categories. 

3. Subject matter examinations are available through the National Teachers Examinations in 
English, Physical Science, Life Science, Mathematics, Social Studies, Industrial Arts, Physi- 
cal Education, Business, Music, Art, Home Economics, and Languages (French, German and 
Spanish). Applications for these examinations are available in the Division of Teacher 
Education Office. 

Waivers for these examinations are authorized by the Commission for Teacher Preparation and 
Licensing for degree programs at this University. Consult the Office of the Coordinator of Second- 
ary Education for information concerning waivers. 

E. Demonstration of a knowledge of the various methods of teaching reading, to a level deemed 
adequate by the commission, by successful completion of a program of study approved by 
the commission or passage of commission-approved reading examination. 

The course in instruction in reading for secondary school teaching meets this requirement. This 
requirement is optional for candidates in art, music and physical education. It is recommended 
especially for candidates in these fields who seek authorization to teach in other subject fields. 
F. All credential applicants must also have completed a course on the United States Constitution 
or have passed an examination in lieu of this course. 

4. Curriculum in Secondary School Teacher Education (Prerequisite — Admission to Teacher 
Education) 

This is a two-semester program designed around extensive fieldwork in secondary schools. In the 
first semester the candidate for the credential is assigned to a learning center (a cooperating 


Teacher Education 197 


secondary school) daily from 8:30 a.m. to 12 noon. He meets in seminars and workshops on the 
university campus daily from 1 p.m. to 3 p.m. For this semester he is registered in: 

Ed-TE 440F Supervised Fieldwork in Secondary Schools (2) 

Ed-TE 440R Instruction in Reading for Secondary School Teaching (3) 

Ed-TE 440S Foundations of Secondary School Teaching (4) 

Ed-TE 442 Teaching — in the Secondary School (3) (methods class in the major offered 
by either the major department or the School of Education) 

This is a block program integrating field experience and subject matters to meet specific compe- 
tencies required of a secondary school teacher. The entire block must be taken in one semester. 
In the second semester the student registers for full-time student teaching, and in most cases does 
his student teaching in the same learning center to which he was assigned in the first semester. 
Student teaching should be completed in the semester following the block program. Courses in 
the second semester of the two semester program: 

Ed-TE 499A Student Teaching in the Secondary School (10) 

Ed-TE 449B Student Teaching Seminar (2) 

Ed-TE 314 Drugs and Human Development (1) or the equivalent must be taken by all 
single subjects candidates. 

5. Admission to Student Teaching. To be eligible for student teaching the student must have 
completed 12 units work at this university. 

The credential candidate submits a formal application for student teaching by December 1 or May 
1 in the first semester of the two-semester program. This application is part of the continuous 
process of evaluating credential candidates and their suitability for teaching in the secondary 
schools and their progress in acquiring competencies necessary for single subjects instruction. 
These evaluations will come from cooperating teachers and faculty working with the candidates 
in the program. Further information concerning the criteria and procedures for admission to 
student teaching, along with the application, will be available in the Division of Teacher Educa- 
tion. Since student teaching is done on a full-time basis, student teachers will be limited to one 
additional course for that semester. Students may take this course only in the late afternoon or 
evening. 

CREDENTIAL PROGRAMS 

EARLY CHILDHOOD EDUCATION SPECIALIST S CREDENTIAL 

The Early Childhood Specialist's Credential, as authorized by the Teacher Preparation and Licensing 
Law of 1970 (Ryan Act), is granted through the university program approved in 1974 by the 
commission which oversees the law's implementation. The 20-unit program develops competencies 
in teaching and in supervision of educational programs for children at preschool, kindergarten and 
primary levels. The culminating experiences of the credentialing program include work in field setting 
which is planned so as to coordinate with candidates' personal teaching schedules. 

Admission to the Early Childhood Program 

Students with a basic teaching credential (elementary/multiple subjects), or those who are satisfac- 
torily completing work toward it, may declare the Early Childhood Specialist's Credential as an 
objective for postbaccalaureate study and apply for admission to the program. 

Program of Study 

The following coursework will be developed into a study plan in consultation with an adviser: 
Ed-TE 437 Early Childhood Education (3) 

Ed-TE 526 Differentiated Staffing in Public Schools (3) 

Ed-TE 527 Graduate Seminar in Developmental Psychology: the Human from 
Conception Through Eight Years (3) 

Ed-TE 538 Graduate Studies: Early Childhood Education (3) 

Ed-TE 591 A Fieldwork and Seminar in Early Childhood Education (emphasis on 
teaching) (4) 

Ed-TE 591 B Fieldwork and Seminar in Early Childhood Education (emphasis on supervision) 
(4) 

BILINGUAL/CROSS-CULTURAL SPECIALIST'S CREDENTIAL 

The Bilingual/Cross-Cultural Specialist's Credential as authorized by the Teacher Preparation and 
Licensing Law of 1970 (Ryan Act) is granted through the university program approved in 1974. The 
program has been developed cooperatively by the Department of Chicano Studies, the Department 
of Foreign Languages and Literatures, and the School of Human Development and Community 


198 


Teacher Education 


Service working with the university's Board of Bilingual/Cross Cultural Studies. The 24-unit program 
develops specific competencies for teachers and resource personnel in bilingual /cross-cultural 
programs from kindergarten through the 1 2th grade. The credentialing program includes experiences 
in language and culture of the target population, techniques and methods for bilingual/cross-cultural 
education, linguistics, fieldwork and community involvement planned to coordinate with candi- 
dates' personal teaching schedules. 

Admission to the Bilingual/Cross-Cultural Specialist's Credential Program 

Students with (Da basic teaching credential (elementary/multiple subjects or secondary/single 
subjects), or those who are satisfactorily completing work toward it, and (2) a Spanish language 
competency equivalent to at least two years of college or university Spanish, may declare the 
Bilingual/Cross-Cultural Specialist's Credential as an objective for post-baccalaureate study and 
apply for admission to the program. 

Program of Study 

The following coursework will be developed in a study plan in consultation with a adviser. Students 
who have equivalent competencies prior to entry in the program will be advised as to how to obtain 
credit for such competencies. 

Ed-TE 454 Bilingual Education in the United States (3) 

Ed-TE 461 Instructional Techniques in Bilingual Education (3) 

Ed-TE 462 Fieldwork in Bilingual Education (3) 

Spanish 466 Introduction to Spanish Linguistics (3) 

Spanish 467 Dialectology: Current Trends in Modern Spanish (3) or 
Spanish 468 Spanish-English Contrastive Analysis (3) 

Foreign Languages Ed 443 Principles of Teaching English to Speakers of Other 
Languages (3) 

Foreign Languages Ed 450 Spanish Classroom Vocabulary (optional) (3) 

Chicano Studies 450 Chicano Contemporary Issues (3) 

Chicano Studies 445 History of the Chicano (3) 

Chicano Studies 300 Barrio Conversational Spanish (3) 

Chicano Studies 403 Cultural Differences of Mexico and the Southwest (3) 

Chicano Studies 420 Spanish for the Elementary School Teacher of the Barrio (3) 

Chicano Studies 431 The Chicano Child (3) 

Chicano Studies 438 Issues in Bilingual Education in the Chicano Community (3) 

GRADUATE PROGRAMS 

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION 

This degree is reserved for professionally qualified graduate students who desire to prepare for or 
advance their careers in elementary curriculum and instruction. 

Prerequisite 

An applicant must meet the university requirements for admission in conditionally classified graduate 
standing: a baccalaureate degree from an accredited institution and a grade-point average of at least 
2.5 in the last 60 semester units attempted (see section of this catalog on admission of graduates 
for complete statement and procedures). 

A student who meets the requirements for conditionally classified graduate standing, as well as the 
following requirements, may be admitted as a classified student upon the development of an 
approved study plan: a basic teaching credential or equivalent experiences, an approved major 
(minimum of 24 units upper division or graduate), a 2.5 grade-point average on previous academic 
and related work, satisfactory interview, references and an autobiography. Credit will be given for 
previous postbaccalaureate studies when possible. Otherwise well-qualified students may be admit- 
ted with limited subject or grade deficiencies, but these deficiencies must be removed. Grade-point 
average deficiencies may be removed by a demonstration of competency in the graduate program. 
Programs of Study 

The adviser-approved 30 units (minimum) on the study plan will include the following: 

Units 

Coursework outside elementary education 9 

Ed-TE 511 Survey of Educational Research (3) 

Two of the following: 

Ed-RP 510 Research Design and Analysis (3) 

Ed-TE 406 Educational Sociology (3) 


Teacher Education 199 


Ed-TE 436 Child Study Techniques for Teachers (3) 

Ed-TE 501 Philosophy of Education (3) 

Ed-TE 509 Theory and Practice in Educational Measurement (3) 

Ed-TE 526 Differentiated Staffing in Public Schools (3) 

Ed-TE 527 Graduate Seminar in Developmental Psychology (3) 

Ed-TE 529 Graduate Studies: Learning Theory for Classroom Use (3) 

Ed-TE 538 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Early Childhood 
Education (3) 

Coursework in elementary education 

Ed-TE 536 Curriculum Theory and Development in the Elementary School (3) 
Three of the following: 

Ed-TE 530 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Second Languages (3) 

ED-TE 531 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Language Arts (3) 

Ed-TE 532 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Mathematics (3) 

Ed-TE 533 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Science (3) 

Ed-TE 534 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Social Studies (3) 

Ed-TE 535 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Reading (3) 

ED-TE 537 Graduate Studies: Current Issues and Problems (3) 

One of the following: 

Ed-TE 597 Graduate Project (3) 

Ed-TE 598 Thesis (3) 

Ed-TE 594 Research Seminar (3) 

Electives selected with approval of the adviser 
In addition to completing a minimum of 24 of the 30 units in residence at Cal State 
Fullerton, students must enroll for a minimum of six units in each of two consecutive 

semesters 

For further information, consult the chair. 

See also "The Program of Master's Degrees" in this catalog and the Graduate Bulletin 


15 


6 


TEACHER EDUCATION COURSES 

210 The Teaching Experience: Exploration (3) 

Exploration of one's self in relation to other people in the schools and an encounter with the teaching 
experience, through fieldwork. Accompanying seminar to help students extend their observa- 
tions and explore relevant issues. (4 hours fieldwork, 1 hour seminar) 

301 The Educated Man (3) 

Prerequisite: junior standing or consent of instructor. Various conceptions of the nature, concerns 
and activities of a truly educated person are studied: the humanitarian ideal; aspects of human 
freedom; and the relation of science to culture. 

302 The Campus in Transition (3) 

Prerequisite: junior standing or consent of instructor. Study of the history and development of 
American higher education. The roots of change and campus unrest are examined. 

303 Education and Its Critics (3) 

Examination of the criticisms of contemporary education and of proposals for reform. Includes visits 
to a variety of schools. Designed for all students. Not a part of the credential program. 

304 Contemporary Educational Change (3) 

Emphasis on the changing educational scene in elementary and secondary levels. The quest for 
greater flexibility, better methods of teaching, improved staffing patterns and accountability 
serve as the course of foundation. 

305 School and Society (3) 

Stability and change in contemporary society viewed in terms of the decline of traditional values 
and culture and the rise of legal-rational institutions. Urban life, social class, race relations and 
family organization will be examined. 

308 Education of Various Cultural Groups: Early Childhood (3) 

Designed for Head Start personnel and others engaged in the early education of culturally different 
children. Focus will be on development of learning, curriculum content, and methodology. (2 
hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 


200 


Teacher Education 


309 Fieldwork in the Education of Various Cultural Groups (3) 

Observation and participation in classes for various cultural groups. Integrated with coursework in 
Education of Various Cultural Groups. Must be taken concurrently with ED-TE 308. (9 hours 
laboratory) 

310 The Teaching Experience: Participation (3) 

Active participation in school classrooms and analysis of the experience. Accompanying seminar 
will help students to analyze their fieldwork experiences. (4 hours fieldwork, 1 hour seminar) 

312 Human Growth and Development (3) 

Prerequisite: Psychology 101. A comprehensive study of human growth and development with 
emphasis on childhood, adolescence and middle and old age. Includes mental, social, emo- 
tional and physical development. 

314 Drugs and Human Development (1) 

Examines substance abuse in relation to personal development, social stress, and physiological and 
psychological effects. Emphasizes methods of exploring values and making decisions in regard 
to substance abuse. 

332 The Effective Parent (3) 

Principles of effective parent-child relationships. Includes developmental tasks of children and 
parents; social and psychological factors in family structure and communication; major con- 
cerns in child-rearing. 

385 Infancy and Early Childhood (3) 

The physical growth and social and personality deelopment of the human through the sixth year 
of life. 

386 Adolescence (3) 

A study of the physical, social and cultural development of human adolescence and youth. Particular 
attention is given to contemporary factors producing change. 

390 Middle Childhood (3) 

Prerequisite: Psychology 361 or Education 312, or equivalent. Study of physical growth, personality 
development and social participation during middle childhood. Attention is given to patterns 
of cognitive growth and emotional adjustment. 

401 Social Foundations of Education (4) 

Seminar in philosophical, historical and sociological foundations of education, considered in the light 
of their influence on contemporary educational theory and practice in the United States. 

402 Comparative Education (3) 

A seminar centered in study of the various countries' education patterns, as part of the cultural setting 
in which found; designed to deepen insight into our own culture's educational program and 
offer bases for comparative evaluation with other systems. 

403 History of Education (3) 

The main streams of educational history in Europe and America, with particular emphasis on the 
ways these main streams have affected the current scene in the United States. 

404 Teaching Strategies for Open Education (3) 

A course designed to examine principles of open education and effective procedures to follow in 
open classrooms. Emphasis is on practical application of teaching strategies. 

405 Human Relations Skills for Teachers (3) 

Principles and techniques for developing effective human relationships. Emphasis on practical skills 
in classroom settings. Includes techniques of self-evaluation, communication, classroom cli- 
mate, effective teaching behaviors, team development, and working with individuals and 
groups. 

406 Educational Sociology (3) 

The school in the social order; the school as a social system; analysis of cultural factors affecting 
the school; the special culture of the school; roles and role conflicts in the school; policy 
questions flowing from social issues and school-cultural relationships. 

407 Principles of Teaching and Learning in the Elementary School (3) 

Prerequisites: admission to the Teacher Education Program (Elementary). The course relates theo- 
ries of learning and theories of child growth and development to effective teaching in elemen- 
tary schools. The appropriate foundations of instructional practices are examined. Fieldwork in 
the public schools is part of the course. 

408 Ghetto Schools (3) 

A study of the schools in the inner city, including educational issues related to or stemming from 


Teacher Education 201 


poverty, cultural differences, often inappropriate curricula, limited communication between 
parents and the system, and other problems. 

410 The Teaching Experience: Field Investigation (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Development of field investigation in area of interest. Includes 
needs assessment, study proposal, implementation of study and presentation of findings. Ac- 
companying seminar. (4 hours fieldwork, 1 hour seminar) 

429 Individualized Instruction (3) 

The principles and operational components of individualized teaching and learning. Emphasis on 
practical classroom implementation of individualized instructional strategies. 

430A Foundations in Elementary School Teaching (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. A study of children's learning styles, and their overall 
growth and development with the aim of helping future elementary teachers acquire the 
behaviors necessary for effective teaching. To be taken concurrently with Ed-TE 430B,C and 
433. 

430B Curriculum and Methods in Elementary School Teaching (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. A study of elementary school curricula, instructional 
materials, and teaching techniques with the aim of helping future elementary teachers acquire 
the behaviors necessary for effective teaching. To be taken concurrently with ED-TE 430A, C, 
and 433. 

430C Supervised Fieldwork in Elementary Teacher Education (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. Students will serve as teacher participants in an 
assigned elementary school classroom to apply information learned in the following course 
which must be taken concurrently: Ed-TE 430A,B and 433. 

433 Reading Instruction in Public Schools (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. Experiences in the teaching of reading in which 
students will demonstrate the behaviors necessary to work with children in public school. 

435A Strategies of Teaching (4) 

Prerequisites: Ed-TE 407 and 433. A course dealing with implementation of principles of learning and 
teaching in the subject areas taught in the elementary schools. The approach is to focus on 
teacher tasks rather than on subject areas. Examples from the subject areas will be used in the 
examination of teacher tasks. 

435B Supervised Fieldwork in Elementary Teacher Education (2) 

Prerequisites: admission to teacher education, Ed-TE 407 and 433; Ed-TE 435A is to be taken 
concurrently. Students will serve as teacher aids in an assigned elementary school classroom 
to apply information learned in Ed-TE 407, 433 and 435A. 

436 Child Study Techniques for Teachers (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Techniques the classroom teacher may use in understanding 
individual children within his classroom who do not respond to the teacher and his peers in 
typical ways. 

437 Early Childhood Education (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Study of current literature and recent research in the area of 
education of young children through individual and group study. Emphasis will be placed on 
problems centered in cognitive processes, content, structure and instruction at this level. 

439A Student Teaching in the Elementary School (10) 

Prerequisites: Ed-TE 430A,B,C, 433 and admission to student teaching. Participation in a regular 
elementary school teaching program for the full school day. Concurrent enrollment in Ed-TE 
439B is required. 

439B Seminar in Elementary Student Teaching (2) 

Prerequisites: Ed-TE 430A,B,C, 433 and admission to student teaching. Seminar in problems and 
procedures of elementary school teaching. Concurrent enrollment in Ed-TE 439A is required. 

440F Supervised Fieldwork in Secondary Schools (2) 

Prerequisites: admission to teacher education. Observation and participation in instruction in sec- 
ondary school learning centers 3 hours daily. Fieldwork associated with Ed-TE 440R, 440S and 
442. Taken concurrently with the courses. Replaces Ed-TE 340, 496, and 449. 

440R Instruction in Reading for Secondary School Teaching (3) 

Prerequisites: admission to teacher education. Instruction in developmental reading for prospective 
teachers in single subjects. Taken concurrently with Ed-TE 440F, 440S and 442. 


202 Teacher Education 


440S Foundations Secondary School Teaching (4) 

Prerequisites: admission to teacher education. Includes development of teaching competencies 
related to adolescent development, the learning process and diagnosis of learning problems, 
evaluation of pupil achievement, and cultural differences in secondary school youth. Taken 
concurrently with ED-TE 440F, 440R and 442. Replaces Ed-TE 411. 

442 Teaching — in the Secondary School (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. Required before student teaching of students present- 
ing major in following areas or subjects. 

Art Ed 442 Teaching Art in the Secondary School (3) 

Ed-TE 442 Teaching Business in the Secondary School (3) 

Ed-TE 442 Teaching Social Science in the Secondary School (3) 

Engl Ed 442 Teaching English in the Secondary School (3) 

For Langs Ed 442 Teaching Foreign Languages in the Secondary School (3) 

Journ Ed 442 Journ Ed 442 Teaching Journalism in the Secondary School (3) 

Math Ed 442 Teaching Mathematics in the Secondary School (3) 

Mu Ed 442 Principles and Methods of Teaching Music in the Public Schools (3) 

PE 442 Teaching Physical Education in the Secondary School (3) 

Sci Ed 442 Teaching Science in the Secondary School (3) 

Speech Ed 442 Teaching Speech in the Secondary School (3) 

Theatre Ed 442 Teaching Theatre in the Secondary School (3) 

445 Junior High School Education (3) 

Prerequisite: Ed-TE 442 or 331 . Seminar on principles of junior high education. Purposes, curriculum, 
and organization of the junior high school including examination of recent innovations and 
proposals. For students with elementary or secondary backgrounds interested in this level. 

446 Secondary School Curriculum (3) 

Prerequisite: student teaching or teaching experience or consent of instructor. Fundamentals of 
curriculum development. Seminar on current issues within secondary education. Curricular 
organization and current practices. Survey and evaluation of newer curricular programs. 

448 Social Studies Simulation Games (2) 

A discussion-laboratory course in which students will study simulations, get acquainted with and play 
a number of commercially available simulations, and design and play their own. For teachers 
and prospective teachers of the social studies elementary and secondary schools. 

449A,B Student Teaching in the Secondary School and Seminar (12) 

Prerequisite: admission to student teaching. Full-time student teaching. 

Art Ed 449 Teaching Art in the Secondary School (3) 

Ed-TE 449 Teaching Business in the Secondary School (3) 

Ed-TE 449 Teaching Social Science in the Secondary School (3) 

Engl Ed 449 Teaching English in the Secondary School (3) 

For Langs Ed 449 Teaching Foreign Languages in the Secondary School (3) 

Journ Ed 449 Teaching Journalism in the Secondary School (3) 

Math Ed 449 Teaching Mathematics in the Secondary School (3) 

Mu Ed 449 Principles and Methods of Teaching Music in the Public Schools (3) 

PE 449 Teaching Physical Education in the Secondary School (3) 

Sci Ed 449 Teaching Science in the Secondary School (3) 

Speech Ed 449 Teaching Speech in the Secondary School (3) 

Theatre Ed 449 Teaching Theatre in the Secondary School (3) 

451 Principles of Educational Measurement (3) 

Development, validation, and application of the principles of educational measurement. Construc- 
tion and use of informal and standardized achievement tests. Summary and interpretation of 
results of measurement. 

454 Bilingual Education in the United States (3) 

Prerequisites: Some knowledge of bilingual education. Helpful, but not necessary ability to converse 
in another language (preferably Spanish). Study of bilingual education in the United States; the 
literature, the laws, the history and the impact such educational programs have had on the 
speaker of the foreign languages in the United States. 

461 Instructional Techniques in Bilingual Education (3) 

Designed to develop instructional techniques in bilingual education. Analyzes purposes, philoso- 
phies and concepts of bilingual education. Identifies theories of language learning, cultural 
differences in learning processes and methodologies of bilingual instruction. 


Teacher Education 203 


462 Fieldwork in Bilingual Education (3) 

Fieldwork in bilingual settings, designed for the student in the Bilingual/Cross-Cultural Specialist 
Credential. The student must be enrolled in the program and be in the second semester of 
training. 

491 Audiovisual Education (2) 

Media in communication, psychological bases, development, curricular function, evaluation. Survey 
of equipment and materials available, preparation of instructional materials for classroom use. 
(1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

492 Television in the Classroom (2) 

Television as a vehicle for instruction, information and enrichment. General theory of media in 
classroom, psychological bases, curricular capabilities and limitations of equipment. Responsi- 
bility of the classroom teacher, practice in utilization process. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

493 Production of Audiovisual Materials (2) 

Exploration and development of audiovisual materials. Students will participate in scriptwriting, 
story-board, photography and tape production. Experience will be provided in producing 
graphics, charts and bulletin boards. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

496 Senior Educational Practicum (1-3) 

Conduct at an advanced level an educational practicum experience with an individual under the 
direction of a faculty member. May be repeated for a maximum of six units of credit. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: senior or graduate standing, consent of instructor and division prior to registration. 
Individual investigation under supervision of a faculty member. Only students of demonstrated 
capacity and maturity will be approved; adequate prerequisite study necessary. May be repeat- 
ed for credit. 

501 Philosophy of Education (3) 

Prerequisites: postgraduate standing and Ed-TE 339 or 439A,B or 749, or consent of instructor. Uses 
of theories of knowledge, value and reality in dealing with educational problems; application 
of contemporary systems of thought to education. 

509 Theory and Practice in Educational Measurement (3) 

Introduction to concepts, theory, and procedures for construction of informal and standarized tests. 
Application of measurement theory and statistical techniques toward problems of analysis, 
scaling, norming and interpretation. Practice in item writing for tests and analysis of commercial 
standardized tests. 

511 Survey of Educational Research (3) 

Review of descriptive statistics and statistical inferences as used in educational research. Analysis 
of representative research papers. Principles of research design. Prepare papers using research 
findings. 

525 Seminar for Secondary Education (3) 

Prerequisite: teacher credential or consent of instructor. Persistent problems in secondary education 
and survey of related literature, causes of and solutions for these problems. Application of 
scientific method to educational problems, sources of educational research, and to techniques 
of cooperative thinking. 

526 Differentiated Staffing in Public Schools (3) 

Prerequisite: teaching credential or consent of instructor. Seminar in the study of the processes and 
techniques in working with parents, paraprofessionals, specialists and community people. In- 
cludes basic principle of supervision and interaction with adults. 

527 Graduate Seminar in Developmental Psychology: The Human from Conception Through 
Eight Years (3) 

Prerequisites: teaching, credential or consent of instructor. The physical, social, cognitive-intellectual 
and emotional development of human individuals from conception to middle childhood is the 
subject of this seminar. Current problems, theories and research are given emphasis. 

529 Graduate Studies: Learning Theory for Classroom Use (3) 

Major theories of learning. The use of major theoretical positions in planning and interpreting 
classroom practices. Educational research findings supporting major theories, implications for 
curriculum developments and teaching practices. 

530 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Second Languages (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Seminar for the study of pertinent investigations and their applica- 
tion in the classroom together with significant curriculum developments and organization in the 


204 


Teacher Education 


area of second language learning in the elementary school, including English as a foreign 
language. 

531 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Language Arts (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Seminar for advanced study of trends and problems in teaching 
the fundamental skills of communication in the elementary school. Analysis of research in the 
language arts and related disciplines as background for curriculum development. 

532 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Mathematics (3) 

Prerequisites: Math Ed 103A, Ed-TE 439A,B or consent of instructor. Seminar for the study of 
significant research, curricular developments and materials, criteria for planning and improving 
mathematics programs and instruction. 

533 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Science (3) 

Prerequisite: Ed-TE 439A,B, or consent of instructor. Seminar for the study of significant research in 
elementary school science. Criteria for planning and improving science programs and the 
development of materials. 

534 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Social Studies (3) 

Prerequisite: Ed-TE 339 or 439A,B, or consent of instructor. Seminar for the study of significant 
research developments and materials, criteria for planning and improving social studies pro- 
grams and current techniques of teaching. 

535 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Reading (3) 

Prerequisite: Ed-TE 339 or 439A,B, or consent of instructor. Seminar in advanced study of trends and 
issues in teaching reading in elementary schools. Analysis of research or background for cur- 
riculum development and instructional procedures. 

536 Curriculum Theory and Development in the Elementary School (3) 

Prerequisite: Ed-TE 439A,B, or consent of instructor. Seminar for the study of the elementary school 
curriculum including the forces operating on the curriculum and the participants involved in 
curriculum building. Emphasis also placed on the process of curriculum building. 

537 Graduate Studies: Current Issues and Problems (3) 

Prerequisite: Ed-TE 439A,B, or consent of instructor. A study of problems and issues in elementary 
education, their causes and possible solutions. 

538 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Early Childhood Education (3) 

Prerequisite: teaching credential or consent of instructor. Exploration of the implications of research 

for curriculum development and instructional planning. Study of the ways in which different 
views of human development and learning have affected programs in early childhood educa- 
tion. 

591A Fieldwork and Seminar in Early Childhood (4) 

Prerequisite. Ed-TE 538 or consent of instructor. Provides candidates with an opportunity to demon- 
strate instructional abilities in working with children, parents, professions, and members of the 
community. 

591B Fieldwork and Seminar in Early Childhood (4) 

Prerequisite: Ed-TE 538 or consent of instructor. Provides candidates with opportunities to demon- 
strate supervisory, coordinating and administrative abilities in working with children, parents, 
professionals and members of the community in the development of early childhood education 
programs. 

594 Research Seminar (3) 

The preparation, evaluation, development, and presentation of curriculum research proposals. In- 
dividuals and groups will participate in critiquing proposals and research results. 

595 Advanced Studies (1-3) 

Graduate seminars designed to develop professional competencies in such areas as behavior, 
teaching strategies, educational technology, program development, communication theory and 
interpersonal relations. May be repeated for credit. 

597 Project (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Individual research on an empirical project, with conferences 
with the instructor, culminating in a project. 

598 Thesis (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Individual research with conferences with the instructor, cul- 
minating in a thesis. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequsites: a teaching credential and one year of teaching experience. Designed for independent 
inquiry. 


Teacher Education 205 


701 Credential Studies (0) 

A course for students admitted to teacher education who find it impossible to maintain continuous 
enrollment while they are completing the 30 units beyond the baccalaureate. 

709 Supervision of Student Teaching (3) 

Prerequisites: a teaching credential and one year of teaching experience. Designed for teachers who 
supervise student teachers. Emphasis on principles and procedures of effective supervision and 
research. 

721 Philosophy and Objectives of Community College Education (2) 

Prerequisite: postgraduate standing. College movement in higher education in the United States. 
Socioeconomic forces creating needs for different post-high school education; community 
college education objectives, relationships to secondary and higher education; curriculum 
development and organization. 

744 Principles of Community College Teaching (3) 

Prerequisite: postgraduate standing. Psychological foundations of community college teaching, 
measurement and evaluation of learning. Educational and philosophical bases for instructional 
procedures in the community college. Instructional procedures including audiovisual materials, 
community college class observations. (2 hours seminar, 3 hours fieldwork) 

749 Student Teaching in — in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 

(For candidates for the Fisher standard teaching credentials in secondary teaching) 

Prerequisite: admission to student teaching. Student teaching for the standard teaching credential 
with specialization in secondary school teaching. Student teaching program for half-days for a 
full semester. Includes a 2 hour seminar each week. (Minimum of 15 hours a week.) 

Art Ed 749 Student Teaching in Art in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 

Ed-TE 749 Student Teaching in Business in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 

Ed-TE 749 Student Teaching in Social Science in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 
Engl Ed 749 Student Teaching in English in the Secondary School and Seminar 
For Langs Ed 749 Student Teaching in Foreign Languages in the Foreign Languages in the 
Secondary School and Seminar (6) 

Journ Ed 749 Student Teaching in Journalism in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 
Math Ed 749 Student Teaching in Mathematics in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 
Mu Ed 749 Student Teaching in Music in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 

PE 749 Student Teaching in Physical Education in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 
Sci Ed 749 Student Teaching in Science in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 
Speech Comm Ed 749 Student Teaching in Speech in the Secondary School and Seminar 
( 6 ) 

Theatre Ed 749 Student Teaching in Theatre in Secondary School and Seminar (6) 
















HUMANITII 
AND SOCIAL 5CIIENCI 


ill ill 

o o 


208 


SCHOOL OF HUMANITIES 
AND SOCIAL SCIENCES 

Dean: Leland J. Bellot 

Associate Dean: Don A. Schweitzer 


The curricula of the School of Humanities and Social Sciences are designed to provide opportunities 
for the student to expand his general knowledge, to develop a beginning specialization, to investigate 
areas of intellectual interest, and, if he chooses, to prepare himself for specialized professional 
studies. 

The School of Humanities and Social Sciences is presently comprised of 22 departments and 
programs offering undergraduate majors leading to the Bachelor of Arts or Bachelor of Science 
degree and master's programs leading to the Master of Arts, Master of Science or Master of Public 
Administration. 


DEPARTMENT OF AFRO-ETHNIC STUDIES 

FACULTY 
Wacira Gethaiga 
Department Chair 

Cheryl Armstrong, William Coffer, Carl Jackson, Boaz Namasaka 

The required minimum for the major is 36 units: Afro-Ethnic Studies 103,* 107 and 240 plus six 
additional units from lower division offerings and a minimum of 24 units in upper division courses. 
The purpose of the program is to provide a specialization in Afro-American studies within the 
framework of a more generalized and comprehensive ethnic studies perspective; to acquaint stu- 
dents with the problems, successes and failures of America's largest minority group; to help students 
understand the nature of contemporary ethnic and social turmoil and guide them into constructive 
modes of thought about current issues; to enable students to see the black experience in America 
in a world setting; and to enable students to lead more effective lives in a culturally pluralistic and 
rapidly changing society. 

To accomplish this, it is important that prospective majors and others interested in a minor consult 
with the Afro-Ethnic faculty for advice. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN AFRO-AMERICAN STUDIES OPTION OF ETHNIC STUDIES 

This degree program is designed to provide an effective vehicle for meeting a variety of needs in 
contemporary higher education: extending opportunities for university education to students who 
have long been under-represented due to cultural differences between their experiences and the 
cultural emphasis of higher education; providing for personal consultation between faculty and 
students of diverse cultural backgrounds; and revising curriculum and promoting research to give 
all students and faculty an understanding of the interaction of ethnic groups in past and contempo- 
rary civilizations. 

Required 

103 Effective Communication (3) * 

107 Introduction to Afro-American Studies (3) 

240 Afro-American History (3) 

Lower Division electives; (6 units required) 

101 Introduction to Ethnic Studies (3) 

104 Swahili (4) 

105 Swahili (4) 

108 Linguistics and Minority Dialects (3) 

230 The Native American (3) 

240A Afro-American History to 1865 (3) 

240B Afro-American History from 1865 to Present (3) 

245 Black Political History (3) 

250 Cultural Scars of Oppression (3) 

Students can be exempted from Afro-Ethnic Studies 103 by an examination and/or consent of department. 


A fro- Ethnic Studies 209 


255 The Age of Malcolm X (3) 

260 Cultural Identity and the Contemporary Black (3) 

270 The Amer-Asian (3) 

Upper division electives: (24 units required including at least 9 units from 309, 335, 346, 385 
and 410) 

300 Black Man/Black Woman (3) 

301 Afro-American Culture (3) 

302 The Evolution of Pan Africanism (3) 

303 Ancient and Modern African Culture (3) 

304 African Religion and Philosophy (3) 

305 Community Organizations (3) 

309 The Black Family (3) 

311 Intracultural Socialilzation Patterns (3) 

314 Pan-African Dance and Movement (3) 

315 Pan-African Art (3) 

330 American Indian Languages (3) 

331 Tribalism and Reservation Life (3) 

332 American Indian Leaders (3) 

334 Equal Employment Opportunity Laws (3) 

335 History of Racism (3) 

346 The African Experience (3) 

352 African Literature (3) 

385 Schools and Minority Groups (3) 

400 The Black Man and Reconstruction (3) 

401 Black American and Contemporary Issues (3) 

402 Africa and Self-Determination (3) 

406 Southeastern Indians (3) 

410 Afro-American Literature (3) 

411 Black Writers' Workshop (3) 

412 American Indian Women (3) 

420 Philosophy of Black Radical Thought (3) 

422 Psychology of the Afro-American (3) 

431 Southwestern Indians (3) 

432 Indians of the Plains (3) 

434 American Indian Education (3) 

444 Civil Rights Laws (3) 

450 American Minorities (3) 

460 Afro-American Music (3) 

463 Black Music Ensemble (3) 

483 Black Child and the Educational Systems (3) 

495 Selected Topics (3) 

497 Ethnic Internship (3) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

MINOR IN AFRO-AMERICAN STUDIES 

Students interested in the Afro-American studies minor are required to take a minimum of 21 units. 
This includes six units of lower division courses including Ethnic Studies 107 or 101 and an additional 
course. Fifteen units of upper division courses including Ethnic Studies 301 and 309 also must be 
taken. 


AFRO-ETHNIC STUDIES COURSES 

101 Introduction to Ethnic Studies (3) 

A survey of the basic concepts and problems involved in an examination of the perspective through 
which black and brown people have come to see themselves in terms of their own heroes, 
culture, and contributions to societies in which they live and world society in general. 

103 Effective Communication (3) 

A methodical presentation of the basic skills, emphasizing writing and communication skills, stressing 
the use of idioms, proper pronunciation, intonation, and correct English patterns. 


210 Afro-Ethnic Studies 


104 Fundamental Swahili (4) 

(Same as Swahili 101 ) 

105 Fundamental Swahili (4) 

(Same as Swahili 102) 

107 Introduction to Afro-American Studies (3) 

Introduction to the aims and objectives of the Afro-American studies program. The course will define 
and explore the basic terms and references that give substance to Afro-American studies. It will 
provide uniform purpose and direction for students who seek an education in Afro-American 
studies. 

108 Linguistics and Minority Dialects (3) 

(Same as Linguistics 107) 

230 The Native American (3) 

A study of the American Indian experience in the United States as seen from the Indian's point of 
view in comparison with that of the white man. Special attention will be focused on the 
problems of American Indians today. 

240A Afro-American History to 1865 (3) 

A survey of the economic, political and social history of black Americans in the United States, African 
origins, the slave trade, slavery, religion, abolition, slavery and territory and the Civil War. 

240B Afro-American History from 1865 to Present (3) 

A survey of the social, economic, political and cultural history of black Americans. Among the topics 
will be the black reconstruction role, jim Crow, the relationship between black workers and 
white workers and labor unions, lynching, black protest, World War I, black emigration, the 
Harlem renaissance, the New Deal, World War II, the intensification of the black emigration, 
the civil rights movement, the Korean War, Vietnam War, the black power movement and 
cultural developments. 

245 Black Political History (3) 

Background in the political development of the United States and the influence of slavery there on 
to the present date. Included is a survey and analysis of the U.S. Constitution showing separate 
political development of white and black. 

255 The Age of Malcolm X (3) 

The ideas and ideals of Malcolm X will be explored, focusing on their roots, their impact on local, 
state, national and international levels. W.E.B. DuBois and Martin Luther King figure in the focus 
comparatively. 

270 The Amer-Asian (3) 

A survey of the Asian-American experience from the early 19th century. Includes: analysis of the 
discriminatory legislation as reflected in immigration quotas; investigation of the fallacies sur- 
rounding the Asian-American experience; and study of present day attitudes in the Asian 
community. 

300 Black Man/Black Woman (3) 

A study of black value systems, double standards, machismo figure, communication barriers caused 
by predefined roles, stereotype expectations according to the traditional class status, and how 
they affect individual abilities and self-esteem. 

301 Afro-American Culture (3) 

A survey of African cultural characteristics in the New World, as they relate to contemporary events, 
including art, ideas, dance and literature. 

302 The Evolution of Pan Africanism (3) 

The historical origins and development of the Pan-African ideology, the philosophical basis of the 
Pan-African concept, its cultural and political implications and the current conflict among those 
who advocate class-race struggle. 

303 Ancient and Modern African Culture (3) 

Prerequisite: advanced sophomore or upper division standing. A survey of the African cultures, 
specifically West African contrasted with East African before the period of exploration and after 
colonization. A look at the present-day American black culture and an estimation of the 
carry-over cultures. 

304 African Religion and Philosophy (3) 

An analysis of African life, the relationship between man, Cod and nature, the systems of African 
philosophical thought in terms of Cod, man, ethics, justice, morals, good and evil, life and death, 
and their interrelationships. 


Afro-Ethnic Studies 211 


305 Community Organizations (3) 

A study of organization agencies, such as Partners for Progress, fair housing, SER, Urban League and 
the local welfare systems and their relevancy to the minority community. Students will be 
involved in field research and assess the goals and accomplishments of an organization selected 
for study. 

309 The Black Family (3) 

A study of the American social conditions that shaped the black family from the African cultural 
patterns that were destroyed during slavery to the family that exists today. Special attention will 
be given to the roles of poverty, racism and discrimination. 

311 Intracultural Socialization Patterns (3) 

Patterns of role learning as they vary within subpopulations; changes over time in the values, 
attitudes, and goals of both the general culture and of subcultures; stereotypes and realities; 
understanding and dealing with cultural variation as well as cultural "norms." 

314 Pan-African Dance and Movement (3) 

Theory and practice of movement of African and Haitian peoples. An investigation of how move- 
ment (dance) acts as quasi-language in perpetuating the life style of African cultures and 
cultures of African descent. 

315 Pan-African Art (3) 

A study of African and Afro-American art from prehistoric to contemporary times, including African 
influences in other art forms and a stylistic analysis of drawings, sculpture and paintings. 

331 Tribalism and Reservation Life (3) 

The role of tribalism in contemporary Indian affairs, with special reference to Indian self-determina- 
tion on reservations in terms of political, economic and social lifeways relative to the dominant 
society: Will include field trips to local reservations. 

332 American Indian Leaders (3) 

The diverse philosophies of American Indian leaders from various Indian nations, the political, 
sociological and religious aspects of their lives, and the impact on Indian-white relationships. 

334 Equal Employment Opportunity Laws (3) 

Designed to give insight into Civil Rights laws and legislation of equal employment (Affirmative 
Action) laws, it will deal with Title VII, Civil Rights Act of 1964 Executive 11246 and 11375. 

335 History of Racism (3) 

An examination of the current dynamics of racism in terms of the historical roots of that racial 
phenomenon both in American society and the world setting. 

346 The African Experience (3) 

A survey of major themes of African history from the origin of the black man and traditional African 
civilization through the African diaspora to the institutional realities of Africa today. 

352 African Literature (3) 

(Same as English 352) 

385 Schools and Minority Groups (3) 

A study of the prevailing educational practices in regard to minority groups in elementary school 
through college, including minority students' failure patterns, what is being done to change 
failures, and the outcomes of these practices. 

400 The Black Man and Reconstruction (3) 

An examination of the first attempt to bring about the realization of an interracial democratic 
American society. Special attention will be given to the conduct, achievements and contribu- 
tions of those Afro-Americans who participated in that short lived experiment. 

401 Black American and Contemporary Issues (3) 

Analysis and discussion of the socioeconomic and political problems confronting black Americans, 
with an emphasis on problem solving. Particular focus will be placed on the effects American 
social attitudes and institutions have had on the black community. Research will focus on these 
areas. 

402 Africa and Self-Determination (3) 

Prerequisite: Afro-Ethnic Studies 303. A study of the national characters of African nations, how they 
shed labels like "tribes" and united to demand the independence they had lost. 

410 Afro-American Literature (3) 

A study of the literary endeavors of Afro-Americans and their cultural impact, especially in relation- 
ship to the social and psychological evolution of the Afro-American. 


212 American Indian Studies 


411 Black Writers' Workshop (3) 

Practice in writing prose, fiction, drama, short stories, book reviews, poetry and essays from the 
perspective of the black experience. 

420 Philosophy of Black Radical Thought (3) 

The philosophy of black radical thought as it emerged from the black experience in America through 
slavery, Reconstruction, post-Reconstruction, pre-World War II and contemporary times and 
as it is expressed through music, sermons, literature, social movements, drama and political 
action. 

422 Psychology of the Afro-American (3) 

Psychological aspects of black identity and the life styles that have risen from racism. The socioeco- 
nomic, political, cultural conditions which have fostered the blackness concept and the psycho- 
logical devices used by blacks to survive. 

431 Southwestern Indians (3) 

The various Indian tribes of the Southwestern United States beginning with the Anasazi, Mogollon 
and Hobokam cultures and their evolution to contemporary times, including cultural changes 
and assimilation. 

434 American Indian Education (3) 

Prerequisites: Afro-Ethnic Studies 230 and 331 or consent of instructor. The education of American 
Indian youth. Legislation which affects the education will be closely reviewed. Field activities 
will be utilized. Observations in public and government facilities will be required. 

444 Civil Rights Laws (3) 

A historical focus on civil rights laws in U.S., showing the causes and impact of these laws upon 
ethnic human relationships. The Declaration of Independence, the U.S. Constitution, civil rights 
amendments, civil rights executive orders and the Affirmative Action policy will figure in the 
focus. 

450 American Minorities (3) 

Prerequisite: junior standing or consent of instructor. Intensive study of the experiences of American 
minorities: Asians, blacks, Chicanos, Indians, jews, women, etc. and their responses to segrega- 
tion, exploitation and socialization. 

460 Afro-American Music Appreciation (3) 

A survey of black music in America; the sociological conditions that help produce various forms of 
black music; and influential black music in America. 

463 Black Music Ensemble (3) 

Prerequisite: Vocal or instrumental experience or consent of instructor. In-depth appreciation of 
black music by concentrating on black musical styles such as spirituals, blues, soul and jazz. 
Appreciation will result in a vocal and instrumental concert of these styles. 

483 Black Child and the Educational System (3) 

The cultural impact of traditional American educational system upon the black child, focusing also 
on civil rights acts and the black child, separate and equal doctrine, desegregation school plan, 
Article 3.3, the Stull Act, and sociological and psychological problems in the black community. 

495 Selected Topics (3) 

Prerequisite: junior status or consent of instructor. Special seminar in selected topics in Afro- 
American studies. 

497 Ethnic Internship (3) 

Interdepartmental course to acquaint minority students with career opportunities in industry and 
social services. Students work up to 20 hours per week and meet weekly for guidance. Supervi- 
sion provided by instructor and cooperating agencies. Can be repeated for credit. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: senior level and acceptance of the subject by department chair and instructor directing 
the study. 

AMERICAN INDIAN STUDIES PROGRAM 

FACULTY 
William Coffer 

The American Indian studies program brings faculty members and students (Indian and non-Indian) 
together in a mutual effort to provide instruction on the status, condition and destiny of Indians in 
contemporary America. The program includes Indian-oriented courses dedicated to an Indian inter- 
pretation of tribal experience in America as well as related courses on Indian themes. 


American Studies 


213 


COURSES 

Afro-ethnic Studies 230 The Native American (3) 

English 320 Literature of the American Indian (3) 

Anthropology 321 The American Indian (3) 

Afro-ethnic Studies 330 American Indian Languages (3) 

Afro-ethnic Studies 331 Tribalism and Reservation Life (3) 

Afro-ethnic Studies 332 American Indian Leaders (3) 

Economics 334 Economics of Poverty, Race and Discrimination (3) 

Afro-ethnic Studies 406 Southeastern Indians (3) 

Anthropology 407 California Indian Languages (3) 

Afro-ethnic Studies 412 American Indian Women (3) 

Afro-ethnic Studies 431 Southwestern Indians (3) 

Sociology 431 Minority Group Relations (3) 

Afro-ethnic Studies 432 Indians of the Plains (3) 

Afro-ethnic Studies 434 American Indian Education (3) 

Art 461 Art of North American Indian (3) 

DEPARTMENT OF AMERICAN STUDIES 

FACULTY 
E. James Weaver 
Department Chair 

John Ibson, Karen Lystra, Robert Porfirio, Michael Steiner 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN AMERICAN STUDIES 

The degree in American studies is an interdisciplinary program designed for students with a special 
interest in the American experience, including the overseas experience. It permits, through intensive 
study of the United States, greater perception of American society, both contemporary and histori- 
cal. By providing students with an opportunity to discover the larger relationships among disciplines, 
the student may receive a better sense of the whole. 

American studies is also useful for any career in which an understanding of American culture is 
important, such as law, government, business, journalism, library work and other services, as well 
as serving as a foundation for advanced study at the graduate level. 

Since two alternative programs are available, the student interested in becoming a major must 
consult with an American studies counselor to develop a course of study mutually satisfactory. The 
major consists of 36 units distributed as follows between the core program and either Plan a or b: 

I. Core program (12 units) required of all majors. 

201 Introduction to American Studies (3) 

301 The American Character (3) 

350 Seminar in Theory and Method of American Studies (3) 

401 Proseminar in American Studies (3) 

II. Alternative plans (24 upper division units in either plan — electives in American studies may 
be used in conjunction with courses in other departments) 

a. The student may choose to work in two but not more than three disciplines related to the 

American experience; for example: 

1. history and literature or 

2. sociology, anthropology and political science. 

b. The student may choose to pursue a specialized theme or subject; for example: 

1. mass culture 

2. women in America 

3. urbanization 

4. ethnic groups in American society 

5. the child and the family 

6. 20th-century American problems 

7. law and society 

Students interested in the American studies major must consult with the department chair before 
establishing an individual course of study. 

AMERICAN STUDIES AND THE RYAN ACT 

The American studies major has been approved for the multiple subject credential option of the 
Teacher Preparation and Licensing Law of 1970 (Ryan Act), and for the single subject options in 
history and in the social sciences. Students who have properly selected their undergraduate courses 


214 American Studies 


are eligible for a waiver which excuses them from taking the State Licensing Examination for each 
of these credentials. Contact the American Studies Department for further information. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN AMERICAN STUDIES 

The Master of Arts in American Studies is designed for qualified students in the arts, humanities and 
social sciences who are interested in an interdisciplinary approach to American society and culture. 
The program puts a general emphasis on the processes of social and cultural change. Particular areas 
of faculty concentration within the program include: popular culture, white ethnicity, regionalism, 
film-art-architecture as cultural image, Puritanism, sexuality and American culture, and American 
cultural radicalism, though the student is encouraged to draw upon the knowledge and expertise 
available to him in any relevant area of the arts, humanities and social sciences. The interdisciplinary 
form of training, with a focus on a unified approach to American materials, seeks to provide the 
student with a full vision of our particular complex industrial culture. 

Admission to Graduate Standing: Conditionally Classified 

A student must meet the all-university requirements for admission to conditionally classified graduate 
standing. ( Please consult the appropriate section of the Graduate Bulletin for complete information. ) 
In addition, a student must (1 ) hold a bachelor's degree with a major, or its equivalent, in American 
studies or in an appropriate discipline of the humanities or social sciences, (2) have a grade-point- 
average of at least 3.0 in upper-division major courses, and (3) submit two satisfactory letters of 
recommendation from instructors in upper-division major courses. 

Students whose undergraduate program indicates certain limited subject, grade, or breadth deficien- 
cies may be considered for admission, at the discretion of the graduate coordinator, with approval 
of the department's graduate committee. In such cases, a student must make up deficiencies, in 
consultation with the graduate coordinator, and must complete all required courses with at least a 
B average before classified graduate standing may be considered. 

Admission to Graduate Standing: Classified 

Students will be classified upon fulfillment of the above prerequisites, and after development of an 
approved study plan. 

Study Plan 

The program requires 30 units of graduate study: nine units of required courses and 21 units of 
structured electives chosen in consultation with the graduate coordinator and approved by the 
department's graduate committee. 


I. Required courses 9 units 

American Studies 501 Graduate Seminar in the Theory and Methods of American Studies (3) 
American Studies 502 Graduate Colloquium in American Studies: Selected Topics (3) 
American Studies 598 Thesis (3) 

II. Electives 21 units 


A. Two graduate seminars in American studies, anthropology, comparative literature, English, 
geography, history, political science or sociology (6) 

B. Additional upper-division or graduate work in American studies (6) 

Note: At least 6 units of the 12 required from A and B must come from courses with a 
cross-cultural focus. 

C. Additional upper-division or graduate work in anthropology, comparative literature, English, 
geography, history, political science or sociology (6) 

Note: These six units must be chosen from one of the departments selected in A for course- 
work, except American studies. 

D. Skill (3) 

A student must demonstrate proficiency in a methodological skill appropriate to his or her 
scholarly interests. In consultation with an adviser, the student will select the skill to be 
developed. Proficiency in a foreign language, quantitative methods or linguistics would, for 
example, be appropriate. If prerequisite work is necessary before a student can develop 
proficiency through three units of coursework, that preliminary work will not be counted 
toward the 30 units required for the M.A. degree. 


American Studies 215 


AMERICAN STUDIES COURSES 

201 Introduction to American Studies (3) 

With the concept of culture as a unifying principle, focus is on four separate time periods in order 
to provide the framework for an understanding of American civilization. Several different kinds 
of documents will be used to illustrate the nature and advantages of an interdisciplinary ap- 
proach. 

301 The American Character (3) 

Studies the changing national character. Reading reflects an interdisciplinary approach; from poetry 
to sociology. Attention is paid to the Afro-American, native American and other ethnic minori- 
ties in addition to the transplanted European. 

320 The Dark Age of American Film, 1941-1960 ( 3) 

American film prevalent in the decade following World War II. The style and attitudes of a specific 
genre of film, ( "film noir") will be examined within a sociocultural framework. Course involves 
weekly film-viewing, lecture and discussion, and occasional guests from the film industry. 

333 Visual Arts in Contemporary America (3) 

Visual phenomena in America as they reveal changes in recent American culture. Areas covered 
include the "high" arts (painting, sculpture) as contrasted with the "low" arts (advertising, 
television); the artist as innovator, alienation, the business world, and American values in art. 

350 Seminar in Theory and Method of American Studies (3) 

Prerequisites: American Studies 201 and 301 ; or History 170A or B; or consent of instructor. Designed 
to provide the American studies major with an understanding and appreciation of methodology, 
theories of society and images of man as they effect American studies contributions to scholar- 
ship. 

386A American Social History, 1750-1860 ( 3) 

(Same as History 386A) 

386B American Social History, 1865-1930 (3) 

(Same as History 386B) 

401 Proseminar in American Studies (3) 

Prerequisites: American Studies 201 and 301 ; or History 1 70A or B; or consent of instructor. Designed 
to permit students to examine the relationship between theory and application. Emphasis on 
analytic readings and research. Topics will be announced each semester. Check the Class 
Schedule for topics being considered each semester. 

402 Religion in the Development of American Society (3) 

The changing role of religion in shaping, reflecting, and challenging dominant American values and 
institutions. Focus is on the 19th and 20th centuries, although some attention will be paid to 
the colonial period. 

410 Irish-Americans and the Cult of Success (3) 

Irish-American subculture from the potato famine emigration to the present. Focuses on quality and 
extent of the "Americanization" process: retention, repression, and loss of Irish ethnicity as a 
"test case" in the study of cultural diversity in America. 

411 The White Ethnic in America (3) 

A historical and contemporary look at the white, but not Anglo, ethnic groups in America. Among 
topics will be ethnic stereotypes, loss and survival in Amerka of national and religious heritages, 
the origins, breadth and depth of prejudice against non-white among these groups. 

412 Freedom and Repression in American Culture (3) 

This course focuses on pre-industrial American culture and compares certain taken-for-granted 
features of modern industrial American culture to that earlier "world we have lost." Special 
attention is given to such issues as privacy, social control, sexual expression, child rearing and 
aggression. 

413 The Shifting Role and Image of the American Male (3) 

An interdisciplinary study of the effect of economic, social, political and cultural changes on Ameri- 
can males. Although some attention will be paid to the 17th and 18th centuries, emphasis will 
be on the 19th and 20th centuries. 

415 The Hero in American Popular Culture (3) 

Nineteenth and 20th-century materials including dime novels, pulps, detective fiction, comic strips, 
and films, will be utilized to examine the role of the hero in American imagination. 

425 Darwinism in American Literature (3) 

(Same as English 425) 


216 Anthropology 

450 Women in American Society (3) 

An effort to explain the rise and decline of feminism in America. The first half of the course will be 
lecture. The second half will be devoted to discussion aimed at comparing and contrasting the 
contemporary woman's movement with its predecessors. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Supervised research projects in American studies to be taken with the consent of instructor and 
department chair. May be repeated for credit. 

501 The Search for Method in American Studies: Concept and Culture (3) 

Analyzes the American studies movement, both in terms of its conceptual and methodological 
development, and also in terms of the way this development was affected by and in turn 
reflected larger trends in the culture itself. 

502 Practicum in Interdisciplinary Methods in American Studies (3) 

Focuses on a particular problem or topic as a case study in the use of interdisciplinary methods in 
American studies. Problems of integration and synthesis, disciplinary expertise, jargon and 
technical language barriers, impressionistic versus methodological self-consciousness will be 
explored. 

598 Thesis (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing in American studies and consent of graduate coordinator. The writing 
of a thesis based on original research and its analysis and evaluation. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing in American studies and consent of graduate coordinator. May be 
repeated for credit. 

DEPARTMENT OF ANTHROPOLOGY 

FACULTY 
judy Suchey 

Department Chair 

Aileen Baron, Lawrence Christensen, Marlene Dobkin de Rios, David Evans, Christopher Hulse, E. 
T. jacob-Pandian, Leroy Joesink-Mandeville, Roger Joseph, Fred Katz, Hans Leder, Ngapare 
Mills, Otto Sadovszky, * Richard See, Wayne Untereiner, Wayne Wanke, Corinne Wood, Jack 
Zahniser 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN ANTHROPOLOGY 

The major in anthropology is designed for students desiring a broad generalist background, students 
preparing to become teachers of social sciences, and students preparing for graduate work in 
anthropology and in advanced specializations in particular areas (Africa, Asia, etc.) or with crosscul- 
tural and international emphasis. 

The required minimum for the major is 45 semester units, in addition to those units taken for the 
general education requirement. Anthropology 201, 202 and 203 are required, and the remaining 36 
units must be in upper division courses. Of the 45 units, a minimum of 27 must be within the 
department, and a maximum of 36 within the department may be counted toward the major (any 
figure from 27 through 36 includes the nine units of introductory courses). Thus, depending on the 
variable of 27-36 units within anthropology, nine to 18 units of outside upper division courses will 
be taken to fulfill the major. A maximum of six units in directed studies (499 ) may be counted toward 
the major requirements, but this does not prohibit taking additional 499 units. 

The broad scope of anthropology permits a student to plan a program tailored to his goals. In 
consultation with the major adviser, each student must formalize his program with the adviser before 
the program of study is begun. Only those courses on the approved study plan will count toward 
the major. Changes in the program are permitted, but must have adviser approval. The student must 
see his adviser as soon as possible in the first semester of declaring the major, but no later than the 
end of that semester. 

Students considering advanced professional careers in research, teaching, or applications of an- 
thropology are urged to explore and sample widely from course offerings in the other social sciences, 
the biological and natural sciences and the humanities and arts. Through a judicious selection of 
these courses it is hoped that anthropology majors will broaden their interests and diversify and 
develop their skills in working towards a variety of individualized career objectives. 


* University administrative officer 


Anthropology 217 


MINOR IN ANTHROPOLOGY 

The minor in anthropology is intended as a second field for persons completing a major in another 
discipline. Twenty-one units must be taken in anthropology; 15 of these in upper division courses. 
Anthropology 201 or 203, 202, and 480 are required. Two additional courses must be selected from 
areal offerings in the field: 

Anthropology 303, 321, 322, 324A, 324B, 325, 326, 328, 340, 341, 342, 345, 346, 347, 350, 351, 352, 
360 and 361. Another course must be selected from theoretical/institutional courses in the field: 
Anthropology 305, 315, 369, 403, 404, 405, 406, 409, 410, 411, 412, 413, 415, 417, 418, 420, 421, 423, 
424, 425, 426, 428, 429, 430, 440, 441, 442, 450, 455, 456, 460, 462, 465, 466, 470, 490 and 491. A 
final course must be either Anthropology 401 or 481. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN ANTHROPOLOGY 

The program offers advanced study of general anthropology, while simultaneously encouraging 
specialization in one (or more) of the traditional subdisciplines, archaeology, cultural anthropology, 
linguistics and physical anthropology. Opportunities for field and laboratory research and for other 
related learning experiences permit students to enlarge upon formal classroom training and to work 
independently with original data. 

Prerequisites 

An applicant must meet the university requirements for admission in conditionally classified graduate 
standing: a baccalaureate degree from an accredited institution and a grade-point average of at least 
2.5 in the last 60 semester units attempted (see section of this catalog on admission of graduates 
for complete statement and procedures). 

A student who meets the requirements for conditionally classified graduate standing, as well as the 
following requirements, may be admitted as a classified graduate upon the development of an 
approved study plan: 

1 . A bachelor's degree with a minimum of 27 units in anthropology, including the following courses 
or their equivalents. 

201 Introduction to Physical Anthropology (3) 

202 Introduction to Cultural Anthropology (3) 

203 Introduction to Archaeology (3) 

401 Ethnographic Field Methods (3 ) or 

403 Archaeological Fieldwork (3) 

406 Descriptive Linguistics (3 ) or 
409 Anthropological Linguistics (3) 

480 History of Anthropology (3) 

481 Contemporary Anthropology (3) 

One areal course (e.g., Anthropology 328, Peoples of Africa) 

One theoretical or topical course (e.g., Anthropology 41 5, Culture and Personality: Psychological 
Anthropology) 

Reading courses and special examinations may be substituted for some of these prerequisites by 
the department. 

2. A GPA of 3.0 (B) for all work taken in anthropology. 

3. Evaluation and acceptance by the Graduate Study Committee. The applicant must submit a letter 
of intent and at least two letters of recommendation and may be required to attend a personal 
interview at the discretion of the Graduate Study Committee. 

Students with limited subject or grade deficiencies may be considered for admission to the 
program if they agree to complete additional courses, selected by the Graduate Study Committee, 
with at least a 3.0 (B) average. Students entering from other colleges and universities and/or from 
fields other than anthropology may discuss appropriate course substitutions with the Graduate 


Study Committee. 

Study Plan 

The study plan for the degree must include the following: Units 

1. Anthropology 501 Seminar: Methodology of Anthropological Research 3 

2. Anthropology 502 Contemporary Theory in Cultural Anthropology 3 

3. EITHER Anthropology 598 Thesis or Anthropology 597 Project 6 

4. Two additional graduate seminars in anthropology 6 

5. Upper division or graduate work in anthropology 6 

6. Upper division or graduate work in anthropology or related fields 6 


218 A nthropology 

Any adviser-approved 300- or 400-level course taken as a graduate student may be used for 
requirements 5 and 6. Anthropology 599, Independent Graduate Research, may be used for require- 
ment 5 and/or 6. 

For continuation in the program an average of 3.0 (B) for all work in the study plan must be 
maintained. 

A thesis or a project must be completed for the degree. Normally a student will register for thesis 
or project two times, for three units each semester. Students must demonstrate reading knowledge 
of an appropriate (adviser-approved) foreign language prior to completion of the degree. Occasion- 
ally, the Graduate Study Committee will entertain a petition for the substitution of an appropriate 
alternative skill, such as computer programming. The core courses, Anthropology 501 and 502, must 
be taken within the first 1 y 2 years of graduate work. 

The progress of graduate students will be reviewed early in each fall and spring semester. 

For further information, consult the Department of Anthropology. 

See also 'The Program of Master's Degrees" in this catalog and the Graduate Bulletin. 


ANTHROPOLOGY COURSES 

201 Introduction to Physical Anthropology (3) 

Man as a biological organism and in evolutionary perspective. Concepts, methods, findings and 
issues in the study of the order primates, including the relationships between fossil monkeys, 
apes and man, and the significance of genetic diversity between modern populations. 

202 Introduction to Cultural Anthropology (3) 

The nature of culture and its significance for man. Uniformities and variations in human cultures. 
Cultural analyses of major institutional forms such as the family, economy, government, religion 
and art with an emphasis on preliterate peoples. A consideration of central problems of cultural 
comparison and interpretation. 

203 Introduction to Archaeology (3) 

Relationship of archaeology, culture history and culture process, including some discussion of field 
methods and analysis of archaeological data; the uses and abuses of archaeology. A survey of 
world culture history from Pleistocene beginnings to the threshold of civilization. 

204 Man's Many Faces (3) 

The study and analysis of a broad selection of human societies, which will provide a perspective 
on how human problems have been solved and the possibilities for new solutions to our own 
problems. 

303 Woman in Cross-Cultural Perspective (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202. A description, analysis and survey of the influence of biological 
determinants as they are shaped by cultural factors such as beliefs, values, expectations and 
socially defined roles for women. The changing role of women in industrial society will form 
an important analytical segment. 

305 Anthropological Simulation Games (3) 

Description, criticism, construction and participation in games simulating a variety of sociocultural 
situations. 

315 Jazz: Past, Present and Future (3) 

Jazz — its primitive and European roots; cross-cultural description of improvisation. Lectures, demon- 
strations, some concerts. 

321 The American Indian (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. A cultural survey of North American Indians 
north of Mexico; origins, languages, culture areas, cultural history; the impact of European 
contacts. 

322 Peoples of Mesoamerica (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. General survey of the ethnology of the 
Mesoamerican culture-area, with treatment of various Indian societies representing the principal 
sub-areas. 

324A The Ancient Maya (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. The archaeology and ethnohistory of the 
Maya area of Southern Mesoamerica, focusing on the problems of initial settlement of the area 
and the "rise" and dynamics of ancient Maya civilization. 


Anthropology 219 


324 B Prehistory of Northern Mesoamerica (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Archaeological survey of the principal 
pre-Columbian cultures of Mesoamerica outside the Maya area, emphasizing the Central High- 
lands, Oaxaca, the Gulf Coast region (including the Olmec) and West Mexico. 

325 Peoples of South America (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. A cultural survey of Central and South 
America. Description of selected cultures representative of different cultural areas before and 
after contacts with Western countries. 

326 Prehistory of South America (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Archaeological, physical and ethnohistorical 
survey of the various natural zones and culture areas of South America, lower Central America 
and the West Indies. 

328 Peoples of Africa (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. A cultural survey of Africa with special 
emphasis on social change and contemporary African problems. 

340 Aboriginal Peoples of Asia (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Survey of cultural areas outside the centers 
of high civilizations of China and Japan. Emphasis on steppe-nomadism, Siberia, and ethnic 
splinter groups between India and the Philippines, with focus upon their influence on the 
cultural centers and vice versa. 

341 Peoples of China and Japan (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Description and analysis of the religious, 
social and technological systems of the civilizations of Japan and China, as well as the impact 
of nomadic herders of North and Central Asia upon those centers. Also, a comparison of 
community studies on these regions. 

342 Peoples of India (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Physical and social anthropology of India, 
development of regional cultural traditions; continuity and changes in patterns and processes 
of village religion, politics, and economy; transformation of cultural traits in urban /village 
interaction. 

345 Peoples of the Middle East (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. A cultural survey of the Middle East with 
descriptions of selected cultures (Arab urban, nomadic, Jewish, Turk, Berber, Kurd). 

346 Archaeology of Palestine (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 203 or consent of instructor. Survey of culture history of ancient Palestine 
from the Paleolithic to historic times, with emphasis on changes through time in settlement 
patterns, resource base, and sociopolitical organization. 

347 Peoples of the Pacific (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. A cultural survey of the indigenous peoples 
and cultures of the Pacific Islands, including Australia. Special attention is given to the forces 
and processes contributing to social change in island communities and current problems being 
faced by them. 

350 Peoples of Western Europe (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Representative groups considered in mod- 
ern and historical perspective, stressing especially rural-urban relationships and the dynamics 
of change. 

351 Peoples of Eastern Europe (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Peasant cultures of Russia, Southeast Europe, 
Poland, Czechoslovakia and the Baltic area, their traditional way of life and the impact of 
industrialization and Communist ideology. 

352 Peoples of Ancient Europe (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. A survey of the cultural and social institu- 
tions of the peoples of pre-Christian Europe. Particular attention will be paid to the Greek, Italic, 
Germanic and Celtic peoples, and readings will be drawn largely from original ancient writers. 

360 Contemporary American Culture (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Application of anthropological methods, 
categories of analysis, and types of interpretation to American culture. Survey and critique of 
selected community studies and other kinds of relevant research. 


220 Anthropology 


361 Afro-American Culture (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. An introduction to African culture. A survey 
of African cultural characteristics in the New World, as they relate to contemporary events, 
including art, ideas, dance and literature. 

401 Ethnographic Field Methods (3) 

Prerequisites: Anthropology 202 and six additional units of anthropology or consent of instructor. 
Anthropological field research by students on various problems using participant observation 
techniques. 

403 Archaeological Fieldwork (3) 

Prerequisites: Anthropology 202 or 203 and consent of instructor. Excavation of a local archaeologi- 
cal site. Archaeological mapping, photography and recording. Laboratory methods of catalog- 
ing, preservation, description and interpretation of archaeological materials. Saturday field 
sessions. May be repeated once for credit as an elective. (1 hour lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

404 Analytical Methods in Archaeology (3) 

Prerequisites: Anthropology 203 and 403. The employment of various physical data collecting 
techniques (e.g., photographic, palaeo-magnetic) in the field and the analysis of artifact collec- 
tions and data from previous field operations in the laboratory. May be repeated once for credit 
as an elective. (1 hour lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

405 Methods in Visual Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisites: Anthropology 201, 202 and 203, or consent of instructor. Investigation of theory and 
uses of visual anthropology. The course integrates anthropological field research and audiovis- 
ual techniques. Students shall participate in field projects using various photographic equipment 
in conjunction with anthropological analysis. 

406 Descriptive Linguistics (3) 

(Same as Linguistics 406) 

409 Anthropological Linguistics (3) 

Nature and functions of language; language structure and change; classification of languages; use of 
linguistic evidence in anthropology. (Same as Linguistics 409) 

410 Language and Culture (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. The study of language as a factor in culture. 
Trends in the study of language and culture. (Same as Linguistics 410) 

411 Folklore (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. An introduction to the study of folktales, 
myths, legends, proverbs, riddles and other forms of the verbal traditions of peoples. Major 
concepts and theories and research methods in the study of folklore. 

412 Myth, Legend and Folktale 

A comparative survey of oral literature and its role in society. The types of oral narratives, their 
themes, meanings, and functions will be analyzed. 

413 Ethnological Music (3) 

Music, music making and musicians in various nonliterate societies. 

415 Culture and Personality: Psychological Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisites: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Comparative study of the relationship 
between the individual and his culture. Child training in nonwestern cultures. Survey of impor- 
tant concepts, studies, and research techniques. 

417 Life Quests (3) 

An examination of contemporary ways to wisdom and humanness in cross-cultural and historical 
perspectives. A consideration of some new and comparative approaches to understanding the 
life cycle, development and fulfillment of individual personalities. 

418 Mental Illness in Cross-Cultural Perspective (3) 

Problems in the cross-cultural definition and treatment of mental illness. Cross-cultural perspectives 
on symptomatology and etiology, culture bound disorders, the folk healer, and the relationship 
between cultural change and mental disorders. 

420 Primitive Value Systems (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Study of what properly is considered 
"common sense" in the everyday life of people living within differing sociocultural environ- 
ments. 


Anthropology 221 


421 Anthropology of Religion (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Examination of beliefs and practices in the 
full human variation of religious phenomena, but with an emphasis on primitive religions. The 
forms, functions, structures, symbolism, and history and evolution of man's religious systems. 

422 |ewish and Comparative Mysticism (3) 

A description and analysis of jewish mysticism, and its comparison with other systems of mysticism 
from different cultures. 

423 Comparative Aesthetics and Symbolism (3) 

An analysis of the metaphysical and mystical systems underlying the "grammars" of the art, poetry, 
languages, myths, music and rituals of various nonliterate and literate peoples and their develop- 
ment into creative experiences. 

424 Hallucinogens and Culture (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202. A cross-cultural survey of mind-altering drugs, especially hallucino- 
gens, as they have been utilized in religion, healing, divination, witchcraft and magic. 

425 Anthropology of Law and Government (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Sources of law-government in primitive 
societies; the cultural background of law; the functions and development of law and govern- 
ment in primitive politics; transitions to and comparisons with classical and modern legal and 
political systems. 

426 Urban Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202. A cross-cultural investigation of sociocultural similarities and differ- 
ences in urbanism with an emphasis on current theoretical and methodological perspectives in 
the study of urban social forms and processes. 

428 Social Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. A study of the social organization of 
preindustrial societies; religious, political and economic institutions; status and value systems; 
conditions and theories of change. 

429 Kinship and Social Organization (3) 

Prerequisites: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Kinship systems in primitive society and 
their significance in the organization of social life. Theories of kinship, marriage regulations, and 
kinship role patterns. 

430 Economic Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Analysis of anthropological concepts of 
economy, ecology, and technology; relationship between habitat, economy, and culture. A 
survey of the different types of economic systems found throughout the world; outline of the 
economic development of mankind. 

440 Human Evolution (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 201 . Biological Science 404 is suggested. Advanced primate evolution 
with emphasis on the origin of Homo sapiens as evidenced in the fossil record and through 
biochemical and molecular studies. Evolutionary theory and problems in human evolution. (2 
hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

441 Human Variation (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 201. Biological Science 313 and 412 are suggested. A survey of the 
processes underlying and the theories for the existence of the present variation between and 
within human populations. The genetics of human populations and the study of the significance 
of racial classifications. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

442 Medical Anthropology (3) 

A survey of human health and disease and their relationship to cultural practices, beliefs and 
environmental factors; histories of various diseases as factors of cultural change; examinations 
of varying health care delivery systems. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

450 Culture and Education (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or Education 301 or consent of instructor. The transmission of values, 
implicit cultural assumptions, and the patterning of education in cross-cultural perspective, with 
special attention to American culture and development problems. 

455 Ethno-ecology (3) 

Prerequisites: Anthropology 202 and consent of instructor. A comparative study of culture determin- 
ing man's impact on his environment. Our factual knowledge, different major approaches, 
important research issues, and methods of study will be the subject of this survey. 

456 Anthropology of Ethnicity (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. A comparative study of social groupings that 
are formed on the basis of ethnicity, and includes an analysis of contemporary plural societies. 


222 Anthropology 


460 Culture Change (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Interrelations between cultural, social and 
psychological processes in the dynamics of culture growth and change. Impact of western 
technology on tribal and peasant societies. Anthropological contributions to the planning of 
directed sociocultural change in selected areas. 

462 Applied Anthropology (3) 

The uses of anthropological skills and sensitivities in approaching contemporary human problems. 
Includes examination of issues related to directed cultural change, organizational development, 
program planning and evaluation, the consultant's role, and professional ethics. 

465 Alternative Futures (3) 

A study of the growing literature on the future and a consideration of its implications for anthropolo- 
gy and the other social sciences and humanities. 

466 Myths, for Moderns (3) 

A comparative multidisciplinary exploration of the nature and needs for mythic types of belief 
systems in contemporary life. Examination and interpretation of selected myths. 

470 Philosophical and Behavioral Foundations of Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 and open to lower division students with the consent of instructor. 
Consideration of basic assumptions and contexts of anthropological work. The synthesis of 
ideas and methods into professional skills and careers. 

480 History of Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. A history of the principal contributions of 
leading anthropologists 1850-1950; review of evolutionary, diffusionist, historical, particularist, 
configurationalist, and culture and personality approaches in anthropology. 

481 Contemporary Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. A study of the principal contributions of 
anthropologists from 1950 to the present; review of neoevolutionist, sociological, structuralist, 
psychological and symbolic approaches in anthropology. 

490 Undergraduate Seminar in Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Topics in anthropology selected by the faculty and students 
participating in the course. May be repeated for credit. 

491 Internship in Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisites: 18 upper division units in anthropology and/or related fields. Career opportunities in 
anthropology. On-the-job training under faculty supervision will provide opportunity to trans- 
late theoretical concepts into vocational activity through museum, industry or governmental 
service. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: at least 15 units of anthropology and consent of adviser. Student selection of an 
individual research project involving either library or fieldwork. Conferences with the adviser 
as necessary, and the work results in one or more papers. May be repeated for credit. 

501 Seminar: Methodology of Anthropological Research (3) 

Prerequisites: Anthropology 202, 401 and consent of instructor. Examination, analysis and evaluation 
of the contemporary methodological spectrum in anthropology and of new trends in research 
planning and implementation. Consideration and critique of specific cases involving differing 
research designs. 

502 Contemporary Theory in Cultural Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 480 or consent of instructor. Critique of the basic assumptions and 
theoretical positions of leading contemporary anthropologists. 

504 Seminar: Selected Topics in Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisites: completion of undergraduate major in anthropology and/or graduate standing or 
consent of instructor. The topic chosen and a general outline of the seminar is circulated prior 
to registration. May be repeated. 

505 Phonological Analysis (3) 

(Same as Linguistics 505) 

507 Grammatical Analysis (3) 

(Same as Linguistics 507) 

508 Modern Theories of Syntax (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 507 or Foreign Languages 507 or Linguistics 507 or consent of instructor. 


Chicano Studies 223 


Speech 404 and Anthropology 410 recommended. Study of contemporary theories of grammar, 
with special emphasis on transformational, generative, logical and electromechanical bases and 
techniques of utterance analysis. (Same as Linguistics 508) 

592 Field Methods in Linguistics (3) 

Prerequisites: Anthropology 505 and 507 or consent of instructor. Methods of analysis and descrip- 
tion of language structures. Data elicited from informants will be analyzed and described. 
Controlled study of a live informant's language. (Same as Linguistics 592) 

597 Project (3-6) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing and consent of instructor. The completion of a project derived from 
original field or laboratory research, and/or on library study, and usually its analysis and 
evaluation. May be repeated for credit. 

598 Thesis (3-6) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing and consent of instructor. The writing of a thesis based on original 
field or laboratory research, and/or on library study, and its analysis and evaluation. May be 
repeated for credit. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of adviser. Individual research on a field, laboratory, or library study, with 
conferences with a project adviser as necessary, and resulting in one or more papers. May be 
repeated for credit. 

DEPARTMENT OF CHICANO STUDIES 

FACULTY 
Isaac Cardenas 
Department Chair 

Dagoberto Fuentes, Joseph Platt, Adolfo Ortega 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN THE CHICANO STUDIES OPTION OF ETHNIC STUDIES 

The degree program in Chicano studies is designed to provide an effective vehicle in fulfilling a 
variety of pressing needs in contemporary higher education. Among these needs are to educate 
students to the culture, language, education, history, politics, and socioeconomics of the Chicano 
population in the United States. 

The program emphasizes preparation for: (1) those interested in bilingual-bicultural education to 
meet elementary, secondary and cross-cultural specialist credentials; (2) students pursuing ad- 
vanced degrees (M.A. and Ph.D.); (3) those entering a variety of occupations in urban affairs, 
government, social work, school administration, counseling, business, criminology, law, foreign 
service and other related areas; and (4) majors in other academic fields such as liberal studies, 
history, sociology, psychology, literature, anthropology, who wish to include additional scope to 
their field. 

The Chicano studies major consists of 36 units, 12 lower and 24 upper division.* 

Units 

Lower Division 12 

Required: 

106 Introduction to Chicano Studies (3) 

220 Mexican Heritage (3) 

Electives: 

102 Communication Skills (3) 

120 Bilingual Oral Expression (3) 

200 Chicano Movement (3) 

213 Spanish for the Spanish Speaking (3) 

215 Chicano Creative Writing (3) 

218A Survey of Chicano Culture (3) 

218B Survey of Chicano Culture (3) 

Upper Division 24 

Required: (6 units to be selected from the following) 

430 The Evolution of Mexican Literature (3) 

440 Mexican Intellectual Thought (3) 

445 History of the Chicano (3) 


Students must consult with their advisers to develop an approved study plan. 


224 Chicano Studies 

453 Mexico since 1906 ( 3) 

Electives: 

233 Introduction to Mexican Folk Dance for Elementary and Secondary Teachers (3) 

300 Barrio Conversational Spanish (3) 

302 Ancient Mexican Culture (3) 

305 The Chicano Family (3) 

306 Barrio Studies (3) 

307 Barrio Studies (3) 

320 Chicano Art (3) 

336 Main Trends in Spanish-American Literature (3) 

337 Contemporary Chicano Literature (3) 

403 Cultural Differences in Mexico and the Southwest (3) 

406 La Chicana (3) 

411 Mexican Arts and Mexican Society (3) 

415 Chicano Music Appreciation (3) 

420 Spanish for the Elementary School Teacher in the Barrio (3) 

430 The Evolution of Mexican Literature (3) 

431 The Chicano Child (3) 

432 The Chicano Adolescent (3) 

433 Mexican Literature Since 1940 (3) 

438 Issues in Bilingual/Cross-Cultural Education (3) 

440 Mexican Intellectual Thought (3) 

441 Religion in the Chicano Society (3) 

445 History of the Chicano (3) 

450 The Chicano and Contemporary Issues (3) 

453 Mexico Since 1906 (3) 

460 The Chicano and Politics (3) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Total 36 

MINOR IN CHICANO STUDIES 

The minor in Chicano studies consists of 24 units in the following areas: 

Required lower division courses (6 units) 

106 Introduction to Chicano Studies (3) 

220 Mexican Heritage (3) 

Required upper division courses (6 units) 

430 The Evolution of Mexican Literature (3) 

440 Mexican Intellectual Thought (3) 

453 Mexico Since 1906 (3) 

Approved electives 

Twelve units of approved coursework in lower and upper division classes that are selected by the 
adviser. 

TEACHER CREDENTIAL REQUIREMENTS 

The B.A. in Chicano studies are approved by the State Board of Education for those seeking a single 
subject or multiple subject (Ryan) teaching credential. Additionally, the department has been 
approved for waiver of the examination requirement for Chicano studies major with a multiple 
subject credential objective. 

Students should consult an adviser in the department and in the School of Education for meeting 
teaching credential requirements and waiver information. 

THE BILINGUAL/CROSS-CULTURAL SPECIALIST CREDENTIAL PROGRAM 

Requirements for this credential are described in a brochure available at the offices of the Depart- 
ment of Chicano Studies, the Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures, or the School of 
Education. The Chicano studies component of the specialist credential program requires nine units 
from the following Chicano studies courses: 

300 Barrio Conversational Spanish (3) 

403 Cultural Differences in Mexico and the Southwest (3) 

420 Spanish for the Elementary School Teacher in the Barrio (3) 

431 The Chicano Child (3) 


Chicano Studies 


225 


432 The Chicano Adolescent (3) 

438 Issues in Bilingual /Cross-Cultural Education (3) 
445 History of the Chicano (3) 

450 The Chicano and Contemporary Issues (3) 


CHICANO STUDIES COURSES 

102 Communication Skills (3) 

A methodical presentation of the basic communication skills emphasizing oral and written expres- 
sion which shall include a unit on the mechanics of writing and reporting on a term paper. 

106 Introduction to Chicano Studies (3) 

A study of the role of the Chicano in the United States. Special emphasis on the Chicano's cultural 
values, social organization, urbanization patterns, and the problems in the area of education, 
politics and legislation. 

200 The Chicano Movement (3) 

The history of the Chicano movement, its present activists and their intellectual philosophies. 

213 Spanish for the Spanish-Speaking (3) 

The Spanish language as it is spoken in the United States today. Designed to improve the basic 
communication skills in Spanish for students from Spanish-speaking backgrounds; emphasis on 
vocabulary building, syntactical analysis and conversation. Designed for Chicano students but 
not restricted to them. 

215 Chicano Creative Writing (3,3) 

Chicano creative writing utilizing the barrio's trilingual expressions. Student work as well as the work 
of contemporary Chicano writers will be analyzed. 

218A,B Survey of Chicano Culture (3) 

The Chicano's cultural heritage from the pre-Cortesian period to the present. A historical analysis 
of the music, literature, art and dance of the Chicano. A — Literature and art. B — History, music 
and dance. 

220 Mexican Heritage (3) 

Introduction to the basic characteristics of the Mexican, especially the Chicano society and culture 
and its ramifications in the United States today. Covers the period of 1519 to the present day. 
Emphasis on the arts, literature and history of Mexico and the Chicano in the United States. 

233 Introduction to Mexican Folk Dance for Elementary and Secondary Teachers (3) 

A variety of basic folk dances indigenous to various regions in Mexico that can be applied in 
elementary and secondary classroom settings. No previous knowledge of dance skills required. 

300 Barrio Conversational Spanish (3) 

Analysis of the Calo language of the southwestern states of the United States. Students will study 
the bicultural language of the Chicanos, origin, development and contemporary use in the 
barrios. 

301 La Raza Unida and Third Party Politics (3) 

The role of La Raza Unida as a political instrument of the Chicano community. The party's leader- 
ship, ideologies and differing political strategies in various states and at the national level. 

302 Ancient Mexican Culture (3) 

A historical and cultural survey of the principal pre-Columbian cultures of Mexico and their signifi- 
cance for Mexican society. 

305 The Chicano Family (3) 

The Chicano family development as an American social institution. Historical and cross-cultural 
perspectives. The socio- and psychodynamics of the Chicano family. 

306 Barrio Studies (3) 

Prerequisite: Chicano Studies 200 or 220 or consent of instructor. Classroom instruction covering the 
major characteristics of the barrio. Supervised fieldwork in the barrio is required. Analysis of 
the barrio or agency wil be made after fieldwork is completed. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours 
fieldwork) 

307 Barrio Studies (3) 

Prerequisite: Chicano Studies 306. Classroom instruction covering the major characteristics of the 
barrio and supervised fieldwork in the local barrios. An analysis of the barrio or agency will be 
made after fieldwork is completed. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours fieldwork) 

8—88930 


226 


Chicano Studies 


320 Chicano Art (3) 

An overview of Mexican art forms from pre-Cortesian epochs to the contemporary artists, with 
emphasis on the use of oil painting techniques as employed by modern Mexican and Chicano 
artists. 

336 Main Trends in Spanish-American Literature (3) 

The main currents of Spanish American literature emphasizing contemporary works. Close attention 
given to the relation between the artistic expression and the ideological values of the period. 

337 Contemporary Chicano Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: Chicano Studies 101 or 106, or 220, or 237, or consent of instructor. The modern 
Chicano writers in the United States. Special emphasis will be given to Allurista, Corky Gonzales, 
Octavio Romano, el treatro campesino and the major Chicano magazines and newspapers. 

403 Cultural Differences in Mexico and the Southwest (3) 

The cultural conflicts in Mexico as seen by the contemporary thinkers of Mexico and the United 
States. Special emphasis will be given to the urban and rural problems. 

406 La Chicana (3) 

An analysis of the cultural influences that the family, religion, economic status and community play 
upon the lifestyles, the values and the roles held by Chicanas. 

415 Chicano Music Appreciation (3) 

A survey of Mexican music ranging from the pre-Cortesian period to the present in Mexico and in 
the southwestern states of the United States. The history and music are presented by lectures 
and recordings. 

420 Spanish for the Elementary School Teacher in the Barrio (3) 

Designed to improve the oral expression of teachers in the barrio elementary schools. Special 
emphasis will be given to the language patterns of the Chicano students and their parents. 

430 The Evolution of Mexican Literature (3) 

Survey and analysis of the Nahautl, Mexican and Chicano literature from the pre-Columbian period 
to the present. The latter part of the course will focus on contemporary Chicano writers. 

431 The Chicano Child (3) 

Study of the Chicano child from preschool through grade six. Emphasis on motor, physical, social, 
intellectual and emotional growth and development and their effect on school adjustment and 
achievement. Observation of preschool and grade school children will be arranged. 

432 The Chicano Adolescent (3) 

A survey of the Chicano adolescents' social, intellectual and emotional growth and development. 
Special emphasis will be placed on the bicultural pressures from the barrio, family structure, 
school and achievement values. 

433 Mexican Literature Since 1940 (3) 

An in-depth study and analysis of the literature of Mexico since 1940. Emphasis on the works of 
Carlos Fuentes, Luis Spota, Rodolfo Usigli, Xavier Villarrutia, Juan Jose Arreola, Octavio Paz, 
Roberto Blanco Moheno and Luis G. Basurto. 

438 Issues in Bilingual/Cross-Cultural Education (3) 

An examination of the Chicano community involvement in issues of bilingual-bicultural education. 
Chicano education literature, legislation, court decisions, political issues and programmatic 
efforts will be emphasized. 

440 Mexican Intellectual Thought (3) 

Prerequisite: reading knowledge of Spanish and Chicano Studies 237 and 302 recommended. Study 
and discussion of the emergence of the Chicano movement dealing with political, economic 
and sociological facets. Analyzes the writings of the Nahautl, Spanish, Spanish-American and 
Chicano writers with special attention on the contemporary writers. 

441 Religion in the Chicano Society (3) 

Prerequisite: Chicano Studies 220 or consent of instructor. A comparative study of American Protest- 
ant and Mexican Catholic thought and their influence on the values held by Anglos and 
Chicanos. Special emphasis will be placed on the contemporary issues. 

445 History of the Chicano (3) 

History of the Chicano from the pre-Columbian period to the present. Special emphasis on the 
Chicano's changing role in the United States, his cultural identity crisis and his achievements. 

450 The Chicano and Contemporary Issues (3) 

Analysis and discussion of the socioeconomic and political problems confronting the Chicano with 
emphasis on proposed solutions. Particular focus on the effect that social institutions have had 
on the Chicano community. Study and research will be made in these areas. 


Communications 227 


453 Mexico Since 1906 (3) 

Prerequisite: upper division class standing. A study of the Mexican Revolution of 1910 stressing the 
political, economic and social features of this period. Special emphasis on the Revolution and 
its contributions in the fields of art, literature and social reforms. 

460 The Chicano and Politics (3) 

Theory of urban politics and evaluation of issues that affect the Chicanos and American society. 
Evaluations and surveys will be made on political organizations in the Hispanic-surnamed 
communities. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: senior level and approval by the department chair and instructor (s) in charge of 
directing the study. An opportunity to do independent study under the guidance of the faculty, 
of a subject of special interest to the student. 

DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS 

FACULTY 
Kenward Atkin 
Department Chair 

james Alexander, Fenton Calhoun, Ronald Dyas, james Fields, George Fukasawa, Mary Lynn Hart- 
man, Teresa Hynes, Carolyn Johnson, Raynolds Johnson, Frank Kalupa, Martin Klein, Mary 
Koehler,* George Mastroianni, J. William Maxwell, Rick Pullen, Marvin Rosen, Ted Smythe, 
Harry Sova, Edgar Trotter, Don Williams 

The program leading to the Bachelor of Arts in Communications emphasizes study of broad princi- 
ples of communications, functions of the mass media in a democratic society, and theories relevant 
to informing, instructing, and persuading through communications media. It may serve as prepara- 
tion for careers in mass media, business, industry, government and education; and as a preparation 
for graduate and professional schools. 

A master of arts program in communications provides advanced study in communications and 
related disciplines for those seeking professional careers in teaching, research and development, and 
mass media. 

Programs in the department are designed to provide both theory and practice in the use of print, 
broadcast and film media of communication to inform, instruct and persuade. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN COMMUNICATIONS 

A communications major is required to take 15 units of core requirements in addition to 21 units 
in a chosen emphasis. The department offers six emphases to choose from: advertising, news 
(journalism), photocommunications, public relations, technical and business communications, and 
telecommunications. Special emphases designed to meet the needs and interests of individual 
students also may be arranged. 

Collateral requirements: Twelve units of upper division coursework in other departments approved 
by the adviser are also required. Collateral courses for each emphasis are recommended by the 
emphasis coordinator. The major totals 48 units. 

COMMUNICATIONS CORE 

Coordinator: J. William Maxwell 
Nine units of required coursework: 

Com 233 Mass Communication in Modern Society (3) 

Com 407 Communications Law (3) 

Com 425 History and Philosophy of American Mass Communication (3) 

Plus six units selected from the following: 

Com 410 Principles of Communications Research (3) 

Com 426 World Communication Systems (3) 

Com 427 Current Issues in Mass Communication (3) 

Com 428 Communications and Social Change (3) 

Com 431 Mass Communications in Communist Systems (3) 

Com 480 Persuasive Communications (3) 

* University administrative officer 


228 Communications 


COMMUNICATIONS EMPHASES 

Every communications major must select and complete 21 units of coursework in a major emphasis. 
ADVERTISING 
Coordinator: Fenton Calhoun 
Com 101 Communications Writing (3) 

Com 350 Introduction to Advertising (3) 

Com 353 Advertising Copy and Layout (3) 

Com 356 Advertising Production (3) 

Com 439 Mass Media Internship (3) 

Com 446 Advertising and Media Management (3) 

Plus three units selected from the following: 

Com 354, 359, 361, 380, 381, 451, 453 

AndM collateral units of upper division courses beyond general education approved by adviser. 
NEWS COMMUNICATIONS (JOURNALISM) 

Coordinator: James Alexander 
Com 101 Communications Writing (3) 

Com 102 Communications Writing (3) 

Com 217A,B Introduction to Black-and-White Photography (2) 

Com 319 Communications Photography (2) 

Com 332 Copy Editing and Makeup (3) 

Com 335 Reporting of Public Affairs (3) 

Com 338 Newspaper Production (3) 

Com 439 Mass Media Internship (3) 

AndM collateral units of upper division courses beyond general education which must be selected 
from the following list of approved courses, and this selection must represent at least one course 
from each of four departments: English 332, 462, 463, 464; History 476; Sociology 341, 345, 348; 
Political Science 300, 310, 350, 413; Economics 332, 333, 334 and 350. 

PHOTOCOMMUNICATIONS 

Coordinator: Marvin Rosen 

Six units of writing courses selected from the following: 

Com 101, 102, 301, 334, 353, 362, 403. 

Com 240 History of Photojournalism (3) 

Com 217A,B Introduction to Black-and-White Photography (2) 

Com 319 Communications Photography (2) 

Com 306 Photocommunications Production (2) 

Com 439 Mass Media Internship (3) 

Plus four units selected from the following: 

Com 217C, 220A,B,C, 321, 311, 338, 340, 359 

AndM collateral units of upper division courses beyond general education approved by adviser. 
PUBLIC RELATIONS 
Coordinator: Frank Kalupa 
Com 101 Communications Writing (3) 

Com 361 Theories and Principles of Public Relations (3) 

Com 362 Public Relations Writing (3) 

Com 439 Mass Media Internship (3) 

Com 463 Public Relations Methods (3) 

Plus six units selected from the following: 

Com 217A,B,C; 301; 332; 338; 350; 358; 359; 363; 446; 465; 497 
And M collateral units of upper division courses beyond general education approved by adviser. 
Recommended departments include Management, Marketing, Psychology, Sociology, Political 
Science and Speech Communication. 

TECHNICAL AND BUSINESS COMMUNICATIONS 

Coordinator: Martin Klein 
Com 101 Communications Writing (3) 

Com 439 Mass Media Internship (3) 

An additional six units from the following: 

Com 102 Communications Writing (3) 

Com 301 Writing for Telecommunications (3) 


Communications 229 


Com 334 Feature Article Writing (3) 

Com 358 Graphic Communications (3) 

Plus nine units selected from the following: 

Com 217A,B; 303; 332; 359; 375; 380; 403 

And 1 2 collateral units of upper division courses beyond general education approved by adviser. 
•TELECOMMUNICATIONS 
Coordinator: George Mastroianni 
Com 301 Writing for Telecommunications (3) 

Com 371 Radio Television News and Public Affairs (3) 

Com 380 Introduction to Radio and Television (3) 

Com 390 Introduction to Telecommunications Production (3) 

Com 439 Mass Media Internship (3) 

Plus six units selected from the following: 

Com 217A,B; 220; 290; 311; 335; 375; 381; 411; 473; 475; 477; 479; 490 
And 12 collateral units of 

upper division courses beyond general education approved by adviser. 

SPECIAL EMPHASIS 

Coordinator: Marvin Rosen 

Students whose interests involve more than one emphasis may seek approval of a special emphasis. 
Minimum requirements for the special emphasis are the same as for other emphases: 

15 units of core requirements; 21 units of coursework in communications, at least six of which will 
be in writing courses and 12 in upper division; and 12 collateral units of upper division courses in 
other departments. Approval of the special emphasis plan must be sought in advance from the 
Department of Communications. For further details, contact the special emphasis coordinator. 

INTERNSHIP PROGRAM 

The Department of Communications has developed an internship program designed to provide 
academic and practical experience for students in all emphases. The student must apply for work 
experience one semester in advance of the senior level semester in which the internship is to be 
completed. Supervision is provided by the internship coordinators and the cooperating agency. 
(C/NC only.) 

TEACHER CREDENTIAL REQUIREMENTS 

The department offers major and minor programs approved by the State Board of Education for 
those seeking an elementary or secondary teaching credential. For advisement, consult the depart- 
ment and an adviser in the School of Education. 

Elementary 

Communcations majors may earn the multiple subject credential under the Ryan Act without being 
required to take the teacher examination. All departmental emphases qualify for this program under 
an approval granted by the California State Commission for Teacher Preparation and Licensing. 
Interested students should consult the department's multiple subject credential adviser at an early 
date to develop an approved study plan. 

Secondary 

Communications majors planning a teaching career at the secondary level must complete the 
communication core and News Communication emphasis. 

In addition, it is recommended that a student have at least one semester of Communications 358 
or 359. The student must also fulfill professional education course requirements. Both Journalism 
Education 442 and 749 (Student Teaching) are offered by the department. (See "journalism Educa- 
tion.") 

MASTER OF ARTS IN COMMUNICATIONS 

The Master of Arts in Communications is designed to provide advanced study in communications 
and related disciplines and to develop a research emphasis or option related to the processes and 
effects of communications. These options are: advertising, journalism education, news, public rela- 
tions, technical communication or telecommunication. 

•Telecommunications students who wish to emphasize film in broadcasting should take six units of writing including Com 
301; Com 290A or 290B; 311; 375; 411; and 439. 


230 Communications 


Students completing the Master of Arts in Communications with an emphasis in journalism education 
research are eligible for journalism teaching positions in high school or community college. 

Prerequisites 

An applicant must meet the university requirements for admission to conditionally classified graduate 
standing: a baccalaureate degree from an accredited institution and a grade-point average of at least 
2.5 in the last 60 semester units attempted (see section of this catalog on admission of graduates 
for complete statement and procedures), and completion of the Graduate Record Examination 
Aptitude test, (see Graduate Bulletin ). 

A student who meets the requirements for conditionally classified graduate standing, as well as the 
following requirements, may be admitted as a classified graduate upon the development of an 
approved study plan: an undergraduate grade-point average of 2.75 or 3.0 in the major; and satisfac- 
tory coursework appropriate for the emphasis selected. Subject matter deficiencies and prerequi- 
sites, as determined by the emphasis adviser and approved by the department graduate adviser, are 
to be removed prior to advancement to candidacy. 

Study Plan 

Students are required to complete a minimum of 30 units of approved study, half of which must be 
in 500-level communications courses and 15 units of emphasis-related courses. Six of the 15 units 
of graduate level communications courses are applicable to the thesis or project requirement. 

For further information, consult the Department of Communications. See also "The Program of 
Master's Degrees" in this catalog and the Graduate Bulletin. 


COMMUNICATIONS COURSES 

100 Introduction to Communications (3) 

A survey of the mass media and their relationship to society today. 

101 Communications Writing (3) 

An introductory course covering principles of reporting and writing, with emphasis on content 
organization, conciseness, and clarity. Typing ability required. 

102 Communications Writing (3) 

Prerequisite: Com 101 or consent of instructor. Concentration on reporting and writing of more 
advanced material. Typing ability required. 

103 Applied Writing (3) 

Principles and practice in organizing and preparing letters, reports, documents, and proposals 
required in most occupations. Designed especially for non-communications majors. 

217A Introduction to Black and White Photography (1)* 

Camera, accessories, materials, exposure, processing, printing, finishing and composition. 

217B Introduction to Black and White Photography (1) 

Prerequisite: Com 21 7A or concurrent enrollment. Filters, flash, studio techniques and composition. 

217C Introduction to Black and White Photography (1) 

Prerequisite: Com 21 7B. May not be taken concurrently. Composition, subject treatments, special 
techniques and applications. 

220A Introduction to Color Photography (1) * 

Prerequisite: Com 217 or concurrent enrollment. Theories of light and color. Principles of color 
photography. Students use commercially processed color transparency film. (No laboratory) 

220B Introduction to Color Photography (1) * 

Prerequisite: 220A or concurrent enrollment. Color slides in communication. Developing theme and 
story in slide presentations. (No laboratory) 

220C Introduction to Color Photography (1) 

Prerequisite: 220B or concurrent enrollment. Theory and principles of color film and print processing. 
Limited laboratory practice in negative and positive film processing. 

233 Mass Communication in Modern Society (3) 

Basic structure and interrelationships of newspapers, magazines, films, radio and television, in terms 
of their significance as social instruments and economic entities in modern society. 

* Students wishing a non-laboratory introduction to photography may enroll in Com 220A.B 


Communications 231 


234 Sports Writing (3) 

Preparation and writing of sports articles for specific audiences. 

240 History of Photojournalism (3) 

Historical analysis of documentary photography as mass communication, social force and form. 
Traces development of photojournalistic styles from early 19th century to present by study of 
significant historical and contemporary photojournalists. Individual projects. 

290A,B History and Aesthetics of Motion Pictures (3,3) 

History and development of the motion picture as an art form and social force. A — the motion 
picture from its origins until 1945. B — the contemporary cinema from 1945 to present. (Same 
as Theatre 290A,B) 

* 301 Writing for Telecommunication (3) 

An introduction to theory and principles of writing employed in the broadcast and film media. 

303 Business Communications (3) 

Design and implementation of communications systems for various business enterprises. Utilizes 
graphic analysis and analytical techniques. Includes practice in producing messages and chan- 
neling them to avoid ambiguities. 

306 Photocommunications Production (2) 

Prerequisite: seven units of photography or consent of instructor. Advanced production of photo- 
graphs and photographic communications for the mass media, business, education, govern- 
ment, industry and science. (1 hour lecture, 3 hours activity) 

311 Introduction to Motion Picture Production (3) 

Prerequisite: Com 217A,B or equivalent. Introduction to theory and practice of motion picture 
photography and film production. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

319 Communications Photography (2) 

Prerequisite: Com 217A,B or consent of instructor. Creative aspects and techniques of making 
photographs for publication: newspaper and magazine news, advertising, feature, sports and 
women's pages. (1 hour lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

321 Advanced Color Photography (2) 

Prerequisites: Com 217A,B,C. Positive and negative color film processing, sensitometry, and color 
printing. 

332 Copy Editing and Makeup (3) 

Prerequisites: Com 101 and 102 or consent of instructor. Principles and practice of newspaper 
editing: copy improvement, headline writing, news photos and cutlines, wire services, typogra- 
phy, copy schedules and control, page design and layout, law and ethics. 

334 Feature Article Writing (3) 

Nonfiction writing for newspapers and magazines, including study of sources, methods and markets. 

335 Reporting of Public Affairs (3) 

Prerequisites: Com 101 and 102, or consent of instructor. Com 407 recommended. Reporting public 
interest news such as courts, education, finance, government, police and urban problems. 

338 Newspaper Production (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. A lecture activity course in which members of the class constitute 
the editorial staff of the university newspaper. The group meets four hours per week for critiques 
in news reporting, writing, editing and makeup, followed by production. With consent of 
instructor, the course may be repeated for a maximum of nine units of credit. (More than 9 
hours laboratory) 

340 Photography in Advertising and Public Relations (2) 

Prerequisite: a basic course in photography. Trends and practices in advertising and public relations 
photography. Materials and techniques for producing color and black-and-white photographs 
with visual impact suitable for photoreproduction. Techniques for shooting outdoors and in- 
doors under studio and natural conditions. Students prepare a portfolio of photographs. (1 hour 
lecture, 3 hours activity) 

350 Introduction to Advertising (3) 

Survey of advertising in America. Emphasis on the language and art of advertising and its role in 
marketing. 

353 Advertising Copy and Layout (3) 

Prerequisite: Com 101, 350 or consent of instructor. Writing of copy and layout of advertisements, 
based on study of sales appeals, attention factors and illustrations. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours 
laboratory) 


232 Communications 


354 Retail Advertising (3) 

Prerequisite: Com 350, 353, 356 or consent of instructor. Principles and procedures of retail advertis- 
ing and sales; supervised field assignments in the analysis of specific advertising needs. (1 hour 
lecture, 4 hours activity) 

356 Advertising Production (1) 

Prerequisite: Com 350 or consent of instructor. Preparation of advertisements for the university 
newspaper and magazine. Advertising accounts assigned to each student. Weekly critique 
sessions. Individual consultation with instructor. (5 hours laboratory) 

358 Graphic Communications (3) 

A lecture/activity class covering basic principles of graphic communication. Areas studied include 
printing processes, publication formats, copy preparation, copy-fitting techniques, layout princi- 
ples, paper selection and distribution methods. (1 hour lecture, 4 hours activity) 

359 Publications Production (2) 

Prerequisite: Com 358 or consent of instructor. A production class for development of student 
publications, including the university magazine, authorized by appropriate university authori- 
ties. Activities include writing articles, editing copy, taking photographs and preparing layouts. 
(More than 6 hours laboratory) 

361 Principles of Public Relations (3) 

Examination of the social, behavioral, psychological, ethical, economic and political foundations of 
public relations, as well as the theories of public relations as a communications discipline. 

362 Public Relations Writing (3) 

Prerequisite: Com 101 or consent of instructor. A course in the practice of writing for business, 
industry and nonprofit organizations. Emphasis on creating effective forms of public relations 
communication. 

363 Publications Editing (3) 

Prerequisites: Com 361 and 362 or consent of instructor. Theory and practice of editing functions 
and techniques involved in creative development of publications for business, industry and 
nonprofit organizations and institutions. Emphasis on magazines, newspapers, newsletters and 
brochures. 

371 Radio-Television News and Public Affairs (3) 

Prerequisites: Com 101 or 301 and 380 or equivalent (or concurrent enrollment). Theory and 
practice of covering news events and public affairs for radio and television. (6 hours activity) 

375 The Documentary Film (3) 

Purpose, development, current trends, critical analysis and production requirements of the docu- 
mentary film. Future of the medium in business, government, education and television. 

378 Introduction to Audio Production (3) 

Prerequisite: Communications majors only. A lecture and laboratory course in the fundamental 
theory and practice of audio production as it pertains to radio broadcasting, commercial 
production and recording, television and film audio. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

381 Broadcast Advertising (3) 

Prerequisite: Com 350 or consent of instructor. Study of television and radio as advertising media. 
Planning advertising campaigns, costs and coverage. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

390 Introduction to Telecommunications Production (3) 

Prerequisite: Com 380. Basic theory and practice of radio and television program production. (2 
hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

401 Report Writing (3) 

Planning, organizing, and writing of reports for business, education and government. Practice will 
be given in use of graphic aids and preparation of copy for reports that are to be printed. 
Recommended for non-majors. 

407 Communications Law (3) 

The Anglo-American concept of freedom of speech and press; statutes and administrative regulations 
affecting freedom of information and publishing, advertising and telecommunication. Libel and 
slander, rights in news and advertising, contempt, copyright and invasion of privacy. 

410 Principles of Communication Research (3) 

Survey of research methods used to assess the effects of print, broadcast and film communications 
on audience attitudes, opinions, knowledge and behavior. Basic concepts of research design 
and data analysis in communications research. 


Communications 233 


411 Advanced Motion Picture Production (3) 

Prerequisites: Com 21 7A or 218, 311, 301 or concurrent enrollment, or consent of instructor. Ad- 
vanced theory, procedures and practice in film production: motion picture (silent and sound), 
script-writing, transfer and mixes, production, distribution and financing. 

420 Writing the Nonfiction Book (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Step-by-step instruction to assist and guide serious writers in topic 
selection, outline preparation, research organization and writing of nonfiction books suitable for 
publication. 

425 History and Philosophy of American Mass Communication (3) 

American mass communication, beginning with newspapers and periodicals and continuing through 
radio and television, includes ideological, political, social and economical aspects. 

426 World Communication Systems (3) 

Major mass communication systems, both democratic and totalitarian, and the means by which 
news and propaganda are conveyed internationally. 

427 Current Issues in Mass Communication (3) 

Mass media regulation by the government, "objective" versus "interpretive" news reporting and 
ethical and legal questions of particular cases. 

428 Communications and Social Change (3) 

Study of how innovations — ideas, products, and practices perceived as new — are communicated 
to members of a social system. Examines the roles of adopters, opinion leaders, change agents, 
and communications as they relate to the diffusion of innovations and consequent changes in 
social systems. 

430 Newspaper Management (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Organization, operation and administration of a newspaper's 
departmental activities: advertising, business, circulation, mechanical, news-editorial, and pro- 
motion. (3 hours lecture, field trips, detailed study of one selected newspaper department) 

431 Mass Communications in Communist Systems (3) 

Mass media in Communist societies, particularly the U.S.S.R., the People's Republic of China, Poland 
and Yugoslavia. Emphasis on the interrelationships of the mass media, people and party. 

435 Editorial and Critical Writing (3) 

Prerequisite: Com 101 and upper division writing course. The roles and responsibilities of the editorial 
and critical writer and opinion columnist provide the general scope of the course, with emphasis 
upon techniques of editorial writing and aspects of critical thinking. (2 hours lecture, 1 hour 
laboratory and fieldwork) 

436 Investigative and Specialized Reporting (3) 

Prerequisites: Com 332, 335 or consent of instructor. Investigative and interpretive reporting of 
complex or specialized subjects to place news in perspective or to clarify situations writing for 
specific audiences. 

439 Mass Media Internship (3) 

Prerequisite: senior standing, communications major. Student serves supervised internship, accord- 
ing to emphasis, with newspaper, magazine, radio or television station, press association, public 
relations firm or advertising agency. Application must be made through department coordinator 
one semester prior to entering program. (C/NC only) 

442 Film Directors and Genres (3) 

Prerequisite: Com 290A or B or consent of instructor. An examination of films of significant directors, 
specific nations, or film genres, concentrating on historical, social and aesthetic qualities. 

446 Advertising and Media Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Com 350 or Marketing 354. Principles and problem-solving techniques underlying the 
management of the advertising function; procedures and processes leading to sound decisions 
in solving advertising problems and utilization of the mass media. 

451 National Advertising Campaigns (3) 

Prerequisite: Com 350 or consent of instructor. Advanced study of advertising campaigns and 
utilization of mass media — such as television, newspapers and magazines — in national advertis- 
ing programs. Design of complete campaigns from idea to production readiness. 

453 Advanced Advertising Copywriting (3) 

Prerequisites: Com 350 and 353. An intense discussion/activity course in the practical problems and 
creative solution of professional advertising copywriting. Interpreting the marketing strategy for 
creative platform, theme and execution in writing advertising copy for the mass media. In-class 
assignments on real accounts. 


234 Communications 


463 Public Relations Methods (3) 

Prerequisite: Communications 361 or consent of instructor. Techniques used for effective public 
relations in both personal and mass communications. 

465 International Public Relations (3) 

Public relations principles applied to international operations, both private and public. 

473 Telecommunications Regulation (3) 

Prerequisite: Com 380. Self-regulation, governmental regulation and international regulation of 
broadcast programming. 

475 Telecommunications Programming 

Prerequisite: Com 380. Theory and practice of programming for television and radio. 

477 Telecommunications Station Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Com 380. Management functions and policies of broadcasting stations and networks. 
Effects of government, public opinion, employee groups and ownership. Technical, legal, finan- 
cial and other obligations. 

479 Advanced Telecommunication Production (3) 

Prerequisite: Com 380 and 390 or consent of instructor. Advanced techniques in producing televi- 
sion-radio programs. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

480 Persuasive Communications (3) 

Processes and effects of persuasive communications applied to mass communication. Interaction of 
the communicator, audience, message content and structure, and social context in influencing 
attitudes, beliefs, and opinions. 

481 Mass Communication and Conflict (3) 

Study of changes and similarities in the mass communication of selected conflict issues over the past 
75 years, including war and peace, the role of women, and various reform movements. 

482 Communication and Popular Culture (3) 

Prerequisite: Com 233 or consent of instructor. Analysis of various critical positions regarding mass 
communication and popular culture, specifically those critical views which interrelate both. 
Course includes an exploration of some significant themes in American popular culture from 
a mass communication perspective. 

485 Film Production (3) 

Prerequisites: Com 311, 375 and 411 or consent of instructor. Fundamentals of documentary film 
production planning and execution. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

489 Television Production Activities (3) 

Prerequisite: six units of television courses or equivalent and/or consent of instructor. Honors course. 
Students develop, write, produce and direct regular programs of information, instruction or 
diversion for distribution on the campus-wide closed-circuit television system and area cable 
systems. 

490 Film Theory (3) 

Prerequisite: Com 290A and/or 290B or equivalent or consent of instructor. Analytical and compara- 
tive study of theories relating to film-making; nature of the film medium. 

4% Student-to-Student Tutorial (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor and previous superior performance in a similar or equivalent 
course. Under faculty supervision, student provides tutorial assistance to students in a communi- 
cations course. Tutoring may involve small group demonstrations and discussions, individual 
tutoring, and evaluation of student performance as appropriate. (May be repeated to a max- 
imum of 9 units) 

497 Seminar in Public Communications Practices (3) 

Prerequisite: Com 463 and consent of instructor. Examination of the vital role of public relations in 
contemporary society. Emphasis on ethics, social responsibilities and future trends in the emerg- 
ing profession. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of department chair. Individually supervised mass media projects and research 
on campus and in the community. May involve newspaper and magazine publishers, radio and 
television stations and public relations agencies. May be repeated. 

500 Theories and Literature of Communication (3) 

Theoretical study and review of research on communication processes and effects in terms of 
source, media, message, audience and content variables. Types, sources, and uses of communi- 
cation literature. 


Comparative Literature 235 


503 Practicum in Instructional Communication (3) 

Principles of programmed instruction applied to achieve training objectives through the use of the 
communication media. Includes development and empirical tryout of short programs in print, 
film, and/or broadcast media utilizing behavioral analysis of typical audiences to assess program 
effects. 

508 Humanistic Study of Communications (3) 

Prerequisites: Com 410, 500 or concurrent enrollment and classified status. Seminar in humanistic 
methods of study in communications: historical research and critical analysis applied to prob- 
lems, issues, and creative works in communication. 

509 Seminar in Communication Research (3) 

Prerequisites: Com 410, 500 and classified status. Principles of social-scientific research design and 
analysis applied to the study of communication processes and effects. 

510 Advanced Seminar in Communication Research (3) 

Prerequisite: Com 508 or 509 and classified status. Problems in theoretical, applied and evaluative 
research in communication. 

512 Graduate Seminar in Journalism Education (3) 

Study of selected problems in journalism education with emphasis on individual research. 

515 Professional Problems in Specialized Fields (3,3,3) 

Prerequisite: Com 500. Selected topics and issues in the fields of (A) advertising and public relations 
(B) journalism and (C) telecommunications. (May be repeated for credit with different subject 
matter. ) 

597 Project (3 or 6) 

Completion of a creative project in an emphasis beyond regularly offered coursework. 

598 Thesis (3 or 6) 

Completion of a thesis in an emphasis beyond regularly offered coursework. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of department chair. Individually supervised mass media projects or research 
for graduate students. May be repeated. 


JOURNALISM EDUCATION COURSES 

422 Teaching Journalism in the Secondary School (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. Theory and technique of advising school newspaper 
and yearbook staffs and teaching journalism. Relation of classroom instruction to staff assign- 
ments. 

449 A, B Journalism Education (12) 

Prerequisite: admission to student teaching. Full-time student teaching. A — Student teaching in the 
secondary school. B — Seminar. 

749 Student Teaching in Journalism in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 

See description and prerequisite under Division of Teacher Education. 

COMPARATIVE LITERATURE PROGRAM 

The program in comparative literature is an interdisciplinary program directed by the Committee on 
the Program in Comparative Literature. The committee is responsible for formulating curricular 
policies, approving courses and advising students. The chair of the English Department administers 
the program, and the courses are taught by faculty from the English Department and other depart- 
ments whose courses are approved by the committee. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN COMPARATIVE LITERATURE 

The major in comparative literature provides professional competence and personal enrichment for 
students with an exceptional concern and appreciation for the study of the interrelationships 
between the languages and literatures of varioius civilizations. The program offers courses in literary 
form and content, theory and philosophy, genres and movements, providing insight into the back- 
grounds of mankind's worldwide culture and literature. The comparative literature courses are 
conducted in English and required reading is available in English. 

Upper Division Requirements (42 units) 

1 . Eighteen units selected from courses listed under comparative literature. 


236 Comparative Literature 

2. Reading competence in a foreign language, demonstrated by successfully completing an adviser- 
approved 400-level course offered by the Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures, 
provided it is not taught in translation. This requirement can be met through examination. 
Information on the examination is available in the Department of English office. 

3. Six units selected from literature courses listed under English and numbered 300 or above. 

4. Six units of anthropology, history, art history, music history or philosophy approved by the adviser 
and aimed at enlarging total perspective. 

5. The remainder of the required 42 units selected from any 300- or 400-level literature course in 
comparative literature, English, French, German, Italian, Russian or Spanish. 

Distribution 

1 . Of these 42 units, 1 5 must span the chronological range of the literary continuum, one in each 
of the following literary periods: Classical or medieval; Renaissance; Neoclassical or Baroque; 
Medieval; Romantic; Contemporary (1850- ). 

2. One course in a literary genre. 

3. One course in a major figure. 

It should be noted that (2.) and (3.) can perform the dual function of also satisfying (1.) e.g., 
a senior seminar in Hugo would satisfy both the major figure and the Romantic Period require- 
ments). 

More detailed information on the comparative literature major can be obtained from the brochure 
available in the Department of English office. The importance of close consultation with an adviser 
cannot be stressed enough for comparative literature, since the diversity of language specialities and 
other factors may necessitate individual tailoring in any given case. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN COMPARATIVE LITERATURE 

The objectives of the master's degree program in comparative literature are to promote the under- 
standing of other literatures, peoples, and cultures in various historical periods, including the present, 
and to prepare the student for more advanced work in comparative literature, leading to the Ph.D. 
degree. The program also prepares teachers of world literature in the high schools and community 
colleges and provides a liberal arts background preparation for library studies. 

Students must meet the university and school requirements (a bachelor's degree from an accredited 
institution and a minimum CPA of 2.5 in the last 60 semester units attempted) for admission to 
conditionally classified standing with the declared objective of this degree. Admission to classified 
standing requires: 

1. An undergraduate major in comparative literature, English or foreign language with a GPA of 3.0 
or better in the major courses and a CPA of 2.5 in all other college and/or university work. If 
the student's degree is in another field, he must have completed a total of 24 units of upper 
division work in comparative literature, English or foreign language, with a CPA of 3.0. 

If the student lacks the prerequisite number of courses, he must make them up before he can begin 
work in the master's degree program, and he must earn at least a 3.0 in such makeup coursework. 
In the event that the student's CPA in these probationary courses is 3.0 or better, he may be 
admitted (classified). Courses taken to remove qualitative and quantitative deficiencies may not 
be applied to the M.A. program. 

2. Satisfactory completion of a written examination in an approved foreign language, or satisfactory 
completion of an upper division course taught in an approved foreign language. 

3. Development of an approved study plan. 

Study Plan 

A minimum of 30 units of coursework must be completed with a minimum CPA of 3.0 to be 


distributed as follows: 

1. A minimum of 18 units in 500-series courses: Units 

Courses at the 500-level in comparative literature (one adviser-approved 500- 

level course in English may help satisfy this requirement) 15 

A course at the 500 level in a related area _3 

Total 18 

2. Upper division courses: 

Adviser-approved courses in comparative literature 6 

Adviser-approved courses in a related area 6 

(At least 3 units of related coursework must be in foreign literature, read in the 
original language.) 

Total 12 


Comparative Literature 237 

At the conclusion of his coursework, the student will take a comprehensive examination for the 
master's degree. 

Thesis Option 

The M.A. candidate in comparative literature may elect to write a thesis. For further information 
consult the graduate adviser. 

For further information, consult the Department of English. 

See also "The Program of Master's Degrees" and the Graduate Bulletin. 


COMPARATIVE LITERATURE COURSES 

(Offered by the Department of English) 

202 Short Story (3) 

(Same as English 202) 

257 Writing Haiku (1-3) 

(Same as English 257) 

305 The Hebrew Prophets (3) 

(Same as Religious Studies 333) 

306 Images of Jesus (1) 

A five week examination of the complex personal figure of Jesus Christ as presented in the four gospel 
portraits. Comparisons of this primary impression with later, secondary images in western 
literature. Evaluation of this composite Christ figure as influence on western culture. 

311 Myths of Creation and Fall (1) 

Five weeks intensive study from ethnic groupings round the world, ancient to contemporary. Read- 
ings are selected from primary texts in translation, with emphasis on archetypal patterns and 
themes. 

312 The Bible as Literature (3) 

A comprehensive survey of Biblical literature emphasizing intrinsic literary qualities as well as the 
influence of major themes of both Old and New Testament writings upon Western literary 
traditions. 

314 The Oral Tradition in Literature (3) 

A study of storytelling as an art, particularly as developed through the media of the folktale. 

315 Classical Mythology and Early Irish Literature (3) 

A basic study of those Greek and Roman myths which have been of continuing significance in 
Western world literature. 

316 Celtic Mythology in World Literature (3) 

A survey of early Irish literature and of Irish and Welsh mythological literature, with discussion of 
comparative and archeological relationships. 

317 Indie Mythology (3) 

A study of the mythologies embodied in the Mahabharata, The Ramayana, the Vedas and the 
Sathapartha Brahamana of Indian, and in the Abast, A vesta, and Sha Namah of Persia, and their 
relation to the principal mythologies of Europe. 

318 Baltic and Slavic Mythology (3) 

A study of the principal myths of the Balts and Slavs and their relationship to the Indo-European 
inheritance. 

319 African Mythology (3) 

A study of the principal myths of sub-Saharan Africa, together with their reflections in African art 
and custom. 

320 Greek and Roman Literature (3) 

Readings in English translation from the literature of classical Greece and Rome. 

321 Germanic Mythology and Saga Literature (3) 

A study of Geramanic mythology, including comparative myth and archeological relationships, and 
an introduction to Icelandic saga. 

324 World Literature to 1650 (3) 

Selected readings in Oriental and western literature from the beginning to 1650. 


238 Comparative Literature 


325 World Literature 1650 to Present (3) 

Selected readings in Oriental and western literature from 1650 to the present. 

332 Medieval Literature of Western Europe (3) 

Selected readings in modern English translation from the medieval literature of England and the 
continent from St. Augustine to Sir Thomas Malory. 

333 Literature of the Renaissance (3) 

Major phases of the Renaissance as a literary movement, from Erasmus to Montaigne and Cervantes. 

343 The Literature of the Romantic Period (3) 

Backgrounds in romanticism and study of major figures of European and American romanticism, 
such as Pushkin, Rousseau, Leopardi, Goethe, Thoreau, Schiller, Byron and Emily Bronte. 

352 African Literature (3) 

(Same as English 352) 

355 Images of Women (3) 

(Same as English 355) 

360 Irish Literature (3) 

Selected writings representative of Irish literature from the early Middle Ages to the present. 

371 Masters of French Literature through Neoclassicism (3) 

Survey of representative works of French literature in translation from the Middle Ages through the 
18th century. 

372 Masters of French Literature from the Romantics to the Present (3) 

Survey of representative works of French literature in translation from the romantics to the present. 

373 Masters of Russian Literature (3) 

Reading, discussion and interpretation of selected works by Pushkin, Dostoyevsky, Tolstoy, Chek- 
hov, Pasternak and others, and their relationship to western literature. 

374 Modern Russian Literature (3) 

A study of literary trends and representative works of Russian writers from Maxim Gorky to the 
present. Special consideration of the Soviet literary theory and its impact upon their literature. 
Lectures and readings in English. 

375 Hispanic Literature (3) 

A study of selected translations from Hispanic literature and their relations to world literature. 
Readings in the picaresque novel, Cervantes, Golden Age Drama, Galdos, Unamuno, Lorca. 

376 Main Trends in Spanish-American Literature (3) 

An introduction to the main currents of Spanish-American literature, emphasizing contemporary 
writers, such as Alegria, Asturias, Borges, Fuentes, Neruda. Close attention will be given to the 
relation between the artistic expression and the ideological values of the same period. 

402 Art, Literature, and the Development of Conscioiusness (3) 

An application of theories of consciousness, particularly existential and Jungian, to poems, paintings 
and musical compositions. Intensive encounters between the individual and the art work; 
opportunities at checking one's own responses against those of others and exploring the 
significance of the differences. 

403 The Quest for Self: East and West (3) 

A comparative study of quest narratives which exemplify the Eastern and Western man's search for 
self-identity and fulfillment. Religious, psychological and literary texts will be used to help 
illuminate the comparison. 

404 The Nature of Love: Plato to Joyce (3) 

An examination of the various dimensions of love as found in notable philosophical, psychological 
and literary works. 

410 Theory and Method of Comparative Literature (3) 

Introduction to the theories and methods of comparative literature and the problems of translation. 

424 Chinese Literature (3) 

A study of selected translations of Chinese literature. 

425 Indian Literature (3) 

A study of selected works of Indian literature. 

426 Japanese Literature (3) 

A study of selected translations of Japanese literature. 

427 Modern Japanese Fiction (3) 

A study of major writers and literary movements in 20th-century Japanese fiction. 


Comparative Literature 239 


430 Persian and Arabian Literature (3) 

A survey course on the nature and distribution of the classics of western Asia in English translation, 
with lectures, readings and discussion. 

445 Literature of the Americas: Contemporary Novelists (3) 

A study of the interdependency of the contemporary fiction of North and South America. Focuses 
on direct influences, such as Hemingway's and Faulkner's on Latin American writers, and 
Borges' influence on North American writers. Examines several parallels in techniques and 
themes as they reflect relationships in and between the Northern and Southern cultures. 

450 The Naturalists (3) 

A study of naturalism in the works of Turgenev, Balzac, the brothers Goncourt, Maupassant, Zola, 
Huysmans, Ibsen, Verga; and also the works of Gissing, Moore, Hardy, Garland, Crane, Norris, 
Dreiser, London and O'Neill. 

453 The Novel in France and Germany (3) 

Reading, discussion, and interpretation of outstanding novels in translation with a view toward 
determining some principles of the narrative arts. Emphasis on Goethe, Stendhal, Flaubert, 
Mann, Kafka, Proust and others. 

454 Contemporary Movements in European Literature (3) 

A study of modern literary movements, including naturalism, realism, symbolism, expressionism and 
surrealism, with reading and discussion of selected examples. 

457 The Experimental Novel (3) 

A study of contemporary novels, including examples of surrealism and the nouveau roman , as well 
as other novels not readily classified. 

458 The Spanish Novel (3) 

A study of major Spanish novels in translation. 

473 World Drama (3) 

Reading, discussion, and interpretation of great plays in translation from the beginning to 1850. 

474 World Drama (3) 

Reading, discussion, and interpretation of great plays in translation from 1850 to the present. 

482 Senior Seminar: Major Writers (3) 

Directed research and writing, group discussion, and lectures involving intensive study of major 
writers. The student should consult his adviser and the schedule of classes for the sections 
available. This course number may be repeated with different content for additional credit. 

483 Senior Seminar: Greek Tragedy (3) 

Fifth century Greek tragedy through the extant works of Aeschylus and Sophocles, and 10 plays of 
Euripides, (same as Theatre 492) 

491 Senior Seminar: Special Studies in Comparative Literature (3) 

Directed research and writing, group discussion, and lectures devoted to significant periods, move- 
ments and themes in world literature. May be repeated with different content for additional 
credit. 

492 Literature of Action in 20th-Century France (3) 

(Same as French 492) 

492 German Literature in Translation (3) 

(Same as German 492) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

550 Graduate Seminar: Medieval Literature (3) 

Directed research and writing, group discussion and lectures, concerning special problems such as 
the development of medieval narrative, the growth and development of the Arthurian legend, 
lyric poetry, allegory and devotional literature. 

551 Graduate Seminar: The Renaissance and Baroque (3) 

Comparative investigation of a theme, genre, or major figures in western literature for the Renais- 
sance and Baroque Period. Directed research and writing, group discussions, independent 
study. Since the topic each year will vary, depending upon the specialized interests and 
publications of the instructor, this course may be repeated with different content for additional 
credit. 

552 Graduate Seminar: The Enlightenment (3) 

553 Graduate Seminar: Romanticism (3) 


240 


Criminal Justice 


554 Graduate Seminar: Studies in the Modern Period (3) 

571 Graduate Seminar: The Novel (3) 

Offers directed research and writing, group discussion, and lectures concerning the genre of the 
novel. An ability to read the novels in the original language will be helpful. May be repeated 
with different content for additional credit. 

572 Graduate Seminar: Poetry (3) 

573 Graduate Seminar: Drama (3) 

580 Graduate Seminar: Major Figures in World Literature (3) 

Directed study and research on a major figure in world literature. Students will write reports and 
a long paper on approved topics. 

582 Graduate Seminar: Dante (3) 

591 Seminar in Comparative Literary Criticism (3) 

598 Thesis (3) 

599 Independent Study (1-3) 


CRIMINAL JUSTICE PROGRAM 

FACULTY 
W. Garrett Capune 
Program Coordinator 
Betty Haven, William Hobbs 

The program leading to the Bachelor of Arts in Criminal justice is designed to acquaint preservice 
and inservice students with the principles and practices of criminal justice in America. Although the 
program's curriculum allows for the development of depth in one of the subject's substantive 
subsystems (i.e., law enforcement, courts or corrections), the overriding objective is to familiarize 
students with activities in the above areas. 

The program is both academic and professional in that it is an interdisciplinary attempt to relate 
professional and practitioner perspectives to the challenge of crime in a free society. In this regard, 
the program provides the student with preparation for employment with a related agency and/or 
further study. 


ADVISEMENT 

Students are urged to see a program adviser prior to their first semester at the university as a criminal 
justice major. This is particularly important for community college transfers. Failure to do so may 
delay graduation. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN CRIMINAL JUSTICE 

Every student must complete the core courses ( 1 5 units) and a minimum of 1 2 units in the concentra- 
tion curriculum. In addition, each student is required to complete 12 units in a correlated curriculum. 
For current information regarding the criminal justice program and its courses, students are advised 
to consult the program's bulletin board. 


Core Curriculum (15 units) 

Criminal Justice 300 Criminal Justice in America: An Analysis 
Criminal Justice 31 0A Criminal Law (Substantive) 

Criminal Justice 320 Criminal Justice Administration: A Survey 

Criminal Justice 330 Crime and Delinquency 

Criminal Justice 340 Criminal Justice Research Methodology 


Concentration Curriculum (12 units) 


Criminal Justice 310B 
Criminal Justice 415 
Criminal Justice 425 
Criminal Justice 435 
Criminal Justice 445 
Criminal Justice 455 
Criminal Justice 465 
Criminal Justice 470 
Criminal Justice 475 
Criminal Justice 480 
Criminal Justice 485 


Criminal Law (Procedural) 

The Enforcement Function 

Juvenile Justice Administration 

Adjudication and the Judiciary 

Corrections: Institutional and Community Programs 

Comparative Criminal Justice Systems 

Criminal Justice Planning 

Sex and the Criminal Justice System 

Topics in Administration of Justice: A Seminar 

Courtroom Evidence 

Search and Seizure and Interrogation 


Criminal Justice 241 


Criminal Justice 495 Internship 
Criminal Justice 499 Independent Study 

Correlated Curriculum (12 units) 

Courses for the related fields shall be selected in consultation with the student's adviser. The purpose 
of this requirement is to allow for the establishment of an emphasis, such as public administration 
or counseling. Upper-division courses in the following fields can be considered in this regard: 
accounting, business administration, communications, computer studies, finance, human services, 
law, management, philosophy, political science, psychology, public administration, quantitative 
methods, social welfare, sociology, technological studies. 


CRIMINAL JUSTICE COURSES 

300 Criminal Justice in America: An Analysis (3) 

Analysis of the institutions involved in the administration of criminal justice (i.e., law enforcement, 
courts and corrections), examination of some specific agencies and a review of the system's 
problems, policies and purposes as they relate to the processes of arrest, adjudication, etc. 

310 A Criminal Law: Substantive (3) 

The general doctrines of criminal liability in the United States and the classification of crimes as 
against persons, property and the public welfare. Emphasis will be on the concept of govern- 
mental sanction of the conduct of the individual. 

310B Criminal Law: Procedural (3) 

Legal problems associated with the investigation of crime, the acquisition of evidence, the com- 
mencement of a criminal proceeding, the prosecution and defense of charges sentencing and 
appeal. Principal concern is with the development of existing procedures and examination of 
current efforts for reform. 

320 Criminal Justice Administration: A survey (3) 

An analysis of justice administration as a "single system"; a review of modern management materials 
as applied to the involved institutions; a specific study of line, staff, and auxiliary activities both 
in principle and practice, and an examination of the associated administrative theories. 

330 Crime and Delinquency (3) 

The nature and extent of criminality; a review of traditional and topical theories regarding etiology, 
with a concern for research methods as well as the contribution's content (although physiologi- 
cal causes will be considered, the emphasis will be on the sociological and psychological 
theories). 

340 Criminal Justice Research Methodology (3) 

An introduction to elementary statistics including descriptives, measurements and tests; a review of 
data collection methods for effort evaluation and program prediction; and a survey of systems 
analysis techniques. 

415 the Enforcement Function (3) 

Prerequisite: Criminal Justice 300 or comparable coursework. The historical and philosophical devel- 
opment of the enforcement function as it operates at federal, state and local levels; community 
controls, political pressures and legal limitations pertaining to law enforcement agencies at each 
level of government; examination of police policies and problems vis-a-vis the administration 
of justice as a system. 

425 Juvenile Justice Administration (3) 

Prerequisite: Criminal Justice 300 or comparable coursework. Development of our definitions of 
"delinquency" and the related reponses of the interested institutions (police, courts and correc- 
tion), with special reference to the juvenile court (past and present), and prevention and 
correction programs (practicing and proposed). 

435 Adjudication and the Judiciary (3) 

Prerequisite: Criminal Justice 300 or comparable coursework. Development of the associated soci- 
olegal doctrine and institutions at the federal, state and local levels; political controls and legal 
limitations pertaining to each; a study of the nature of the judicial process and an examination 
of the participants' roles and their relationship to the administration of justice as a system. 

445 Corrections: Institutional and Community Programs (3) 

Prerequisite: Criminal Justice 300 or comparable coursework. The historical and philosophical devel- 
opment of our corrections concern; analysis of correctional institutions as total intitutions for 


242 English 

prisoners and personnel; the theory and practice of probation and parole, with a consideration 
of rehabilitation and the alternative attitudes; a reveiw of current research and experimental 
programs. 

455 Comparative Criminal Justice Systems (3) 

Prerequisite: Criminal justice 300 or comparable coursework. Comparative analysis of criminal 
justice systems of other states and selected other countries throughout the world. The systems, 
their theories and associated problems will be examined. 

465 Criminal Justice Planning 83) 

Prerequisite: Criminal justice 300 or comparable coursework. Principles of social planning; sources 
and uses of criminal, demographic and economic data; examination of existing planning- 
coordinating agencies, basic research and evaluation techniques including mathematical analy- 
sis and model building. 

470 Sex and the Criminal Justice System (3) 

Prerequisite: Criminal Justice 300 or comparable coursework. Analysis of rationale for law's concern 
with sexual conduct, developed via discussion of selected offenses and offenders. Lectures and 
guest speakers will also present opposing perspectives regarding the role of law enforcement, 
courts and corrections. Research and reform will be reviewed. 

475 Topics in Administration of Justice: A Seminar (3) 

Prerequisite: Criminal Justice 300 or comparable coursework. An examination of current social, legal 
and practical problems confronting the police, the courts and corrections as segments within 
a system concerned with such matters as riots, organized crime, recidivism. A "variable topic" 
class with specific subjects to be announced each semester. 

480 Courtroom Evidence (3) 

Prerequisite: Criminal Justice 300. An examination of the rules of evidence in the context of a criminal 
trial in a California court. A study of the rules, their application and their rationale, through 
lecture, discussion and simulated courtroom situations. 

485 Search and Seizure and Interrogation (3) 

Prerequisite: Criminal Justice 300 or comparable coursework. An examination of the rules of law that 
apply to searches, seizures and interrogations in California. A study of specifically what the rules 
are, how they have changed and where they are going. 

495 Internships (3) 

Prerequisites: Criminal Justice 300 or comparable coursework and consent of instructor. Designed 
to acquaint student with criminal justice professions. Each individual works 8-20 hours per week 
as a supervised intern in a public agency or related organization. In addition to the job experi- 
ence, interns meet in a weekly three-hour seminar. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: at least 1 2 hours of criminal justice and consent of adviser. Student selects an individual 
research project, either library or field. Conferences with adviser as necessary, culminating in 
one or more papers. May be repeated for credit. 

DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH 

FACULTY 
Joseph Gilde 
Department Chair 

Don Austin, Arthur Bell, Rosemary Boston, John Brugaletta, Ronald Clapper, Miriam Cox, Sherwood 
Cummings, Catherine Firman, George Friend, Cynthia Fuller, Stephen Garber, Joan Greenwood, 
Ann Haaker, Jean Hall, Mary Hayden, Joseph Hayes, Dennis Hengeveld, Jane Hipolito, Robert 
Hodges, Michael Holland, Wayne Huebner, Charlotte Hughes, Helen Jaskoski, Dorothea (de- 
France) Kenny, Dorothy Kilker, Thomas Klammer, William Koon, Joanne Lynn, Willis McNelly, 
Russell Miller, Maria Montano-Harmon, Keith Neilson, Pricilla Oaks, Paul Obler, Rita Oleyar, 
Urania Petalas, June Salz Poliak, Orrington Ramsay, Sally Romotsky, William Rubinstein, Joseph 
Sawicki, Clarence Schneider, Muriel Schulz, John Schwarz, Alice Scoufos, Donald Sears, How- 
ard Seller, Som Sharma, George Spangler, Alexander Stupple, Irene Thomas, Elena Tumas, 
Martha Vogeler, M. John Wagner, John White, Helen Yanko 
The English Department offers courses designed to acquaint the student with the nature and develop- 
ment of our language, with the literatures of England and America, and with the disciplines involved 
in the various kinds of writing. Except for freshmen English offerings, courses in world literature in 
English translation are listed separately, under Comparative Literature. In addition the Department 
of English offers some specialized professional courses for the preparation of teachers. On the senior 


English 243 


and graduate levels, various opportunities are provided for seminar work and independent study. 
The English Department offers a flexible program, designed to reflect various approaches to the study 
of language and literature. In planning a program to fit their particular interests, all students are urged 
to consult one of the two English Department undergraduate advisers or another faculty member. 
A pamphlet, "The Bachelor of Arts in English: Information for Students," is available in the depart- 
ment office. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN ENGLISH 

Requirements: 42 units in addition to English 100 or 103 or 105, or their equivalents. 

Lower Division (maximum of 12 units) 

Any 200 level course. 

Upper Division (minimum of 30 units) 

All students must complete 12 units of basic requirements. They may choose Core I or Core II. 


Core / Units 

English 334 Shakespeare 3 

Survey of literature, selected from among the following, and including at least one 

course in an earlier period and at least one course in a later period 9 


English 311 Masters of British Literature to 1760 

English 312 Masters of British Literature from 1760 

English 321 American Literature to Whitman 

English 322 American Literature from Twain to the Moderns 


Comp Lit 324 World Literature to 1650 

Comp Lit 325 World Literature from 1650 — 

Total 12 

Core II Units 

English 334 Shakespeare 3 

English 300 Analysis of Literary Forms 3 

English 301 Advanced Composition or 

English 364 Seminar in Writing 3 

English 302 Introduction to the English Language or 
English 303 Structure of Modern English or 
English 305 American Dialects or 

English 490 History of the English Language _3 

Total 12 


Electives to complete a minimum of 42 units shall be selected from additional courses in language 
and composition, period courses, literary criticism, senior seminars and comparative literature. 
Comparative literature offerings are listed separately but count toward an English major. 

Students are urged to consult an English Department undergrduate adviser or a faculty member when 
selecting a core of basic requirements, when choosing electives or when seeking evaluation of work 
completed at other institutions. 

English majors who intend to pursue graduate study are urged to acquire proficiency in at least one 
foreign language, and most graduate programs in English assume that the student has had a broad 
background in the study of major literary figures, periods and critical approaches, as well as some 
training in English language and linguistics. Such students are advised therefore to take the following: 
English 333 Chaucer 
English 341 Milton 

At least one course in language and linguistics, to be selected from: 

English 302 Introduction to the English Language 
English 303 Structure of Modern English 
English 490 History of the English Language 
and courses in a wide range of periods and genres. Both breadth and depth of 
preparation are important 

Students seeking a secondary teaching credential must complete the following: 

English 301 Advanced Composition; and 
English 302 Introduction to the English Language or 
English 303 Structure of Modern English 

The following courses are required for the credential, but do not count toward the 42 units of major: 


244 English 


English Education 442 Teaching English in the Secondary School 

English Education 449 Student Teaching in English in the Secondary School and Seminar 
(Ryan Credential) or 

English Education 749 Student Teaching in English in the Secondary School and Seminar 
(Fisher Credential) 

MINOR IN ENGLISH 

Requirements: a total of 21 units 

A minimum of 12 units in Core I or Core II, described above in basic requirements, and nine units 
of electives. In choosing their core of basic requirements as well as their electives, students seeking 
a minor in English should consult an English Department undergraduate adviser or a faculty member. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN ENGLISH 

The Master of Arts in English is designed to give the student a fuller understanding of English and 
American literature and language. The degree is useful to those teaching in high schools or commu- 
nity colleges, to those seeking careers in writing and publishing, and to those intending to take further 
graduate work. 

Students must meet the university and school requirements (a bachelor's degree from an accredited 
institution and a minimum CPA of 2.5 in the last 60 semester units attempted) for admission to 
conditionally classified standing with the declared objective of this degree. 

To qualify for classified graduate standing in the program for the Master of Arts in English, a student 
must hold a bachelor's degree in English from an accredited institution at which he has maintained 
at least 3.0 grade-point average in the major courses provided that he has a minimum of 24 units 
of upper-division coursework; or if he holds a bachelor's degree in another major, he must have 
completed 24 units of upper-division coursework in English with at least a 3.0 grade-point average. 
If the student lacks the prerequisite number of English courses, he must make them up before he 
may begin work in the master's degree program, earning at least a 3.0 in such makeup coursework. 
In the event that the student's CPA in prerequisite English courses is less than 3.0, he may be allowed 
to take from six to nine units of probationary, adviser-approved coursework. If his CPA in these 
probationary courses is 3.0 or better, he may be admitted (classified). Courses taken to remove 
qualitative and quantitative deficiencies may not be applied to the M.A. program. 

A student is required to have two years of one foreign language at the college or university level 
or six units of study in comparative literature. If taken as graduate work, these six units may be 
applied to the master's degree under "units in subjects related to English." 

A study plan must be developed and approved for admission to classified graduate standing. 


Study Plan: Units 

Minimum units in English courses restricted to graduate students (500 series) 18 

(with the permission of the graduate adviser, 3 of these 18 units may be taken in 
a comparative literature graduate seminar) 

Maximum units in specified upper-division courses in English 6 

Units in subjects related to English _6 

Total 30 


At the conclusion of his program he will take the written comprehensive examination for the master's 
degree. A student who fails the examination may retake the failed parts only once. 

Note: The student is strongly advised to take the steps necessary for admission to the program before 
registering for his first graduate courses. Part of the admission process is to confer with the graduate 
adviser, who will analyze prerequisites and designate those courses which will apply to the degree 
program. Courses taken by a conditionally classified student do not necessarily apply toward a 
degree. At the time the student achieves classified standing, no more than nine units of postgraduate 
coursework may be applied to the master's degree program. 

For further information, consult the Department of English. 

See also "The Program of Master's Degrees" and the Graduate Bulletin. 


ENGLISH COURSES 

For world literature in English translation see courses under comparative literature. 


English 245 


100 Composition (3) 

A basic course in composition in which students practice the writing of expository prose. The course 
carries no credit toward the major. 

103 Seminars in Writing (3) 

A course for the student with some proficiency in composition. Readings on a relevant topic are 
meant to motivate the student to express his thoughts in a meaningful, disciplined manner. The 
course carries no credit toward the major. 

105 Introduction to Creative Writing (3) 

An exploratory creative writing course in which the student is given the opportunity to write in 
various genres. The course carries no credit toward the major. 

110 Literature of the Western World from Ancient through Medieval Times (3) 

The study of representative writers and works from the ancient through the medieval world. 

111 Literature of the Western World from the Renaissance through the 19th Century (3) 

The study of representative writers and works from the Renaissance through the 19th century. 

112 Modern Literature of the Western World (3) 

The study of representative writers and works of modern literature. 

202 The Short Story (3) 

A course designed to introduce the student to the study of the structure and technique of the short 
story. Emphasis on critical analysis of selected American and European short stories. (Same as 
Comparative Literature 202) 

205 Introduction to Drama (3) 

A course designed to introduce the students to the study of dramatic literature. Emphasis on close 
analysis of individual plays. 

206 Introduction to Poetry (3) 

A course designed to increase students' understanding and appreciation of the art of poetry. The 
primary activity will be close reading of poems written in English. 

210 Studies in Literature (3) 

Selected readings and discussion of English and American writers, emphasizing a particular theme, 
genre, trend or the works of individual writers. Section topics will vary according to special 
interests of instructor. 

257 Writing Haiku (1-3) 

After a brief study of the development of haiku in Japan, students will write and revise haiku in English 
and share them with the class. With consent of instructor, may be repeated for no more than 
three units of credit. (Same as Comparative Literature 257) 

300 Analysis of Literary Forms (3) 

The main literary forms — prose fiction, poetry and drama — are studied and analyzed. Various critical 
methods are applied to representative works mainly from English and American literature. 
English majors should schedule this basic course as early in their program as possible. 

301 Advanced Composition (3) 

Prerequisites: English 100, 103, or their equivalents. Exercises in creativity, analysis, and rhetoric as 
applied in expository writing. Required of English majors seeking the secondary credential. 

302 Introduction to the English Language (3) 

A basic course in language emphasizing the history, structure and dialects of American English in 
its social, cultural and educational contexts. This course or English 303 required of English 
majors seeking a secondary credential and must be taken before student teaching. 

303 The Structure of Modern English (3) 

Prerequisite: junior standing. The grammar of contemporary English. Modern English usage. This 
course or English 302 required of English majors seeking a secondary credential and must be 
taken before student teaching. 

305 American Dialects (3) 

An examination of the principles of dialectology. Emphasis on the description of modern American 
dialects and their role in social, cultural and educational issues of today. (Same as Linguistics 
305) 

311 Masters of British Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: sophomore standing or consent of instructor. An introduction to major periods and 
movements, major authors and major forms through 1760. 

312 Masters of British Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: sophomore standing or consent of instructor. An introduction to major periods and 


246 English 

movements, major authors and major forms from 1760 through modern times. 

320 Literature of the American Indian (3) 

A study of the prose and poetry of the American Indian, focusing on the literatures of the North 
American tribes. 

321 American Literature to Whitman (3) 

Emphasis on major writers: Hawthorne, Poe, Melville, Emerson, Thoreau, Whitman and others. 

322 American Literature from Twain to the Moderns (3) 

Emphasis on Twain, James, Crane, Hemingway, Faulkner, O'Neill, Frost, Eliot. 

325 American Ballad and Folksong (3) 

A survey of Anglo-American balladry and folksong, with attention to historical development, ethnic 
background and poetical values. 

326 The American Frontier in Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: any courses in American literature, American studies or American history. The moving 
American frontier from the beginnings to the close of the 19th century. Accounts of explorers 
and naturalists will be examined beside artistic, literary and popular treatments to identify the 
myths and symbols created by the fact of a frontier in American life. 

332 Medieval English Literature (3) 

An introduction to the literature of medieval England exclusive of Chaucer. Readings in modern 
English versions of representative major works and genres from Beowulf to Malory. 

333 Chaucer (3) 

A study of The Canterbury Tales and of Chaucer's language, with particular emphasis upon the 
understanding of the vocabulary, pronunciation, grammar, and syntax of the East Midland 
dialect of Middle English, as indispensable to literary appreciation. 

334 Shakespeare (3) 

An introduction to Shakespeare's art through a detailed study of the more famous plays. 

335 Elizabethan and Jacobean Drama (3) 

Studies of representative English dramatists of the late 16th and early 17th centuries. Emphasis on 
the development of the dramatic tradition in the plays of Marlowe, Jonson, Webster, Beaumont 
and Fletcher, and others. 

336 Elizabethan Poetry and Prose (3) 

A study of the nondramatic literature of the English Renaissance from More to Campion. Emphasis 
on Renaissance thought and the works of Spenser. 

337 17th-Century Poetry and Prose (3) 

A survey of the major writers of the period from 1603 to 1660 exclusive of Milton. 

338 The Drama of the Restoration and the 18th Century (3) 

A study of representative plays of the Restoration and the 1 8th century. Emphasis will be placed on 
the development of such dramatic movements as the heroic play, Restoration comedy and 
sentimental drama. 

339 Restoration Literature (1660-1770) (3) 

Butler, Rochester, Dryden, Pepys, and selected minor writers. 

340 18th-Century Poetry and Prose (3) 

Swift, Addison and Steele, Pope, Boswell, Johnson, and selected minor writers. 

341 Milton (3) 

An intensive study of the poetry and prose in the light of Milton's intellectual development. 

343 The Romantic Movement in English Literature (3) 

Burns, Blake; Wordsworth, Coleridge; Byron, Shelley, and Keats. The reaction against rationalism, 
the rise of revolutionary and liberal thought, humanitarianism, and emphasis on individual 
creativity. 

344 Victorian Literature (3) 

A study of literature in its relationship to the problems which emerge from the social, cultural, 
scientific and industrial revolutions of the Victorian period. 

345 The Development of the English Novel through Jane Austen (3) 

A study of the English novel from its beginnings to the 19th century considering such novelists as 
Defoe, Richardson, Fielding, Sterne and Austen. 

346 The Development of the 19th-Century English Novel (3) 

A study of such novelists as the Brontes, Thackeray, Dickens, Eliot and Hardy. 


English 247 


349 Fantasy Fiction (3) 

Readings of selected authors from Ariosto to Brautigan, exploring the importance of fantasy in 
literature and in self-understanding. 

350 Detective Fiction (3) 

A study of detective fiction from Edgar Allan Poe to the present, including writers such as Sayers, 
Christie, Chandler, Hammet and Ross Macdonald. 

351 Science Fiction (3) 

The study of science fiction as a genre, including future-scene fiction, the utopian novel, the 
superman novel and short fantasy stories. 

352 American Literature (3) 

African literature written in the English language, with special emphasis on the fiction, poetry and 
drama of the new nations. (Same as Comparative Literature 352) 

353 Black Writers in America (3) 

A study of black American writers from Frederick Douglass to the present Concentration on impor- 
tant figures such as Wright, Ellison and Baldwin. 

355 Images of Women in Literature (3) 

Images of women in various genres, such as autobiography, poetry, drama and the novel. A 
conventional literary period (Victorian, Modern, etc.) and specific cultures (Great Britain or 
the United States, etc.) at the discretion of instructor. 

364 Seminar in Writing (3) 

Prerequisites: evidence of student's previous interest in creative writing and consent of instructor. 
Study of superior models, development of style, and group criticism and evaluation of each 
student's independent work. May be repeated for credit. (Same as Theatre 364) 

375 Literature and Film (3) 

Critical study of works of literature and the films adapted from them. Literature/film adaptation 
theories, critical theory and terminology, and the comparative nature of the two media will be 
considered. 

391 Traditions of English Literary Criticism (3) 

The principal statements of the major English critics, from the Renaissance to the beginning of the 
20th century, studied in their relationship to the classical theories of criticism. 

392 Modern Literary Criticism (3) 

A study of the major movements in 20th-century British and American criticism. 

421 Minority Images in American Literature (3) 

An examination of 19th- and 20th-century literature written by and about racial groups in America. 
Includes Unde Tom's Cabin , Soul on Ice and Laughing Boy. 

425 Darwinism in American Literature (3) 

Prerequisites: junior standing and consent of instructor. An examination of selected writings of 
Darwin and of such Darwinians as Spencer and Huxley; then a study of the literary adaptations 
and assimilations of Darwinism. (Same as American Studies 425) 

433 Children's Literature (3) 

Reading and discussion of works from world literature designed primarily for children, including 
material from the oral tradition, realistic fiction, fantasy and poetry. Designed for the general 
student as well as for elementary credential candidates. 

434 Adolescent Literature (3) 

The evaluation, selection, and interpretation of fiction, nonfiction, drama, and poetry reflecting the 
broad range of interest of students from 12 to 17 years of age. Designed for the general student, 
as well as candidates for the library services or secondary teaching credential. 

435 Studies in Shakespeare (3) 

Prerequisite: English 334 or consent of instructor. An intensive study of selected plays with primary 
emphasis upon problems of dramatic structure and artistic meanings. 

445 The American Tradition in Poetry (3) 

A study of selected American poems from the 17th century to 1914. Emphasis on the close reading 
of individual poems. 

446 The American Novel to 1914 (3) 

A study of selected novelists from C. B. Brown, through Melville and Twain, to Dreiser. 

451 Philosophical Backgrounds of Modern Literature (3) 

The connection between representative writers and such thinkers and philosophers as Freud, Spen- 
gler, Schopenhauer, Nietzsche and Kierkegaard. 


248 English 

462 Modern British and American Novels (3) 

Prerequisite: survey of English, American or world literature; an upper division literature course; or 
consent of instructor. Development of modern British and American novels from 1900 to 1950. 

463 Contemporary British and American Novels (3) 

The novel in English since World War II. 

464 Modern British and American Drama (3) 

Prerequisite: survey of English, American or world literature; an upper divsion literature course; or 
consent of instructor. The development of British and American drama from 1900 to 1950. 

465 Contemporary British and American Drama (3) 

British and American drama from 1 950 to the present. 

466 Modern British and American Poetry (3) 

Prerequisite: survey of English, American or world literature; an upper division literature course; or 
consent of instructor. The development of British and American poetry from 1900 to 1950. 

467 Contemporary British and American Poetry (3) 

British and American poetry from 1950 to the present. 

480 Seminar in Old English (3) 

Study of the elements of Old English language, with cultural backgrounds and critical reading of lyrics 
and short prose pieces. % 

490 History of the English Language (3) 

Prerequisite: senior or graduate standing. The historical development of English vocabulary, 
phonology, morphology and syntax from Indo-European to modern American English. 

491 Senior Seminar (3) 

Prerequisite: an undergraduate course in the area to be studied, a B average or better in English 
courses, or consent of instructor. Directed research and writing, group discussion, and lectures 
covering selected topics from language studies, intensive studies of major writers, criticism, and 
literary types, periods, and ideological trends. 

499 Independent Study (3) 

Open to advanced students in English with consent of department chair. May be repeated for credit. 

570 Graduate Seminar: Language Studies (3) 

Directed research and writing, group discussion, and lectures covering philology, historical develop- 
ment, and structure of English. Individual offerings under this course number may deal with only 
one aspect of language studies. May be repeated with different content for additional credit. 

571 Graduate Seminar: Major Writers (3) 

As appropriate to the specialized research and publication of instructor, this course will offer directed 
research and writing, group discussion, and lectures covering major figures such as: Shakes- 
peare, Milton, Chaucer, Melville, Twain, Hawthorne, Joyce and Coleridge. May be repeated 
with different content for additional credit. (Same as Theatre 571 ) 

572 Graduate Seminar: Literary Genres (3) 

As appropriate to the specialized research and publication of instructor, this course will offer directed 
research and writing, group discussion and lectures, covering such major literary types as: the 
epic, the novel, the short story, lyric poetry, tragedy, comedy and historical drama. May be 
repeated with different content for additional credit. (Same as Theatre 572) 

573 Graduate Seminar: Cultural Periods (3) 

As appropriate to the specialized research and publication of instructor, this course will offer directed 
research and writing, group discussion, and lectures covering the literature of a particular 
cultural period from the Anglo-Saxon to modern times. May be repeated with different content 
for additional credit. 

574 Graduate Seminar: Special Problems in Literature (3) 

As appropriate to the specialized research and publication of the instructor, this course will offer 
directed research and writing, group discussion and lectures covering special problems such as: 
the detailed critical study of varying influences on literature, including philosophical, religious, 
scientific, geographic and other ecological viewpoints. May be repeated with different content 
for additional credit. 

575 Graduate Seminar: Topics in High School Teaching (3) 

Specific topics will vary from semester to semester. 

579 Graduate Seminar: Problems in Criticism (3) 

Directed research and writing, group discussion, and lectures covering historical development and 
schools of criticism. Individual offerings within this course number may deal with only one 
aspect of critical problems. May be repeated with different content for additional credit. 


249 


Foreign Languages and Literatures 

599 Independent Graduate Research (3) 

Research projects in areas of specialization beyond regularly offered coursework. Oral and written 
reports. May be repeated with different content for additional credit 


ENGLISH EDUCATION COURSES 

442 Teaching English in the Secondary School (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. Principles, methods and materials of teaching English 
in the secondary school. 

449A English Education (10) 

Student Teaching in the Secondary School. The candidate, in the field for four and one-half days 
each week, has the same instructional hours of responsibility as the master teacher. 

449B English Education (2) 

One afternoon a week the candidate partcipates in a seminar with the university supervisor. 

749 Student Teaching in English in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 

See description and prerequisite under Division of Teacher Education. 

DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES 
AND LITERATURES 

FACULTY 
Nancy Baden 
Department Chair 

Linda Andersen-Bensimon, Oswaldo Arana, Gerald Boarino, Daniel Brondi, Samuel Cartledge, Mo- 
desto Diaz, Leon Gilbert, Arturo jasso, Jacqueline Kiraithe, Walter Kline, G. Bording, Mathieu, 
Harvey Mayer, Doris Merrifield, Ervie Pena, Marcial Prado, Charles Shapley, Curtis Swanson, 
Marjorie Tussing, Eva Van Ginneken, Stephen Vasari, Jon Zimmermann 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN FRENCH, GERMAN OR SPANISH 

Several options are offered: 

1. French major. Requirements: French 101, 102, 203, 204, 230, 240, or their equivalents; plus a 
minimum of 27 units of upper division courses including 305, 315, 317, 325, 415, 425 and six units 
of 475 A,B,C,D. 

2. German major. Requirements: German 101, 102, 203, 204, 213, 214, or their equivalents; plus 24 
units of upper division coursework, which must include 315, 317, 375 and three of the following 
literature courses: 430, 440, 450, 460 

3. Spanish major: Lower division requirements: Spanish 101, 102, 203, 204, 213, 214, or their 
equivalents. Upper division requirements for: 

A. Standard major: Spanish 315, 316, 317 or 318, 375; plus 15 units of upper division Spanish 
which must include 430, 441 and 461. 

B. Bilingual emphasis major: Spanish 315 or 316, 317 or 318, 375, 400 (or its equivalent), 466, 
467, 468, plus two additional courses in Spanish at the 400 level, to be taken in consultation 
with the adviser. 

TRANSFER STUDENTS 

In accordance with university rules, all transfer students must complete 24 units in residence at Cal 
State Fullerton. Of these 24 units, the transfer student majoring in French, German or Spanish is 
required to complete 12 upper division units, i.e., 300, 400 or 500 level courses, in the major on the 
Cal State Fullerton campus. The specific courses will be determined in consultation with the student's 
adviser and approved by the chair. 

MINOR IN A FOREIGN LANGUAGE 

Requirements : Courses 101 , 102, 203, 204, 213, 214 or their equivalents, completed satisfactorily; plus 
nine units in upper division courses selected in consultation with the adviser. Minor concentrations 
are offered in French, German, Portuguese, Russian and Spanish. 

PROGRAMMED COURSES IN UNCOMMONLY TAUGHT LANGUAGES 

The department has available a number of programmed courses in languages which cannot be 
regularly taught, such as Turkish. For details see Foreign Languages 198. 


250 Foreign Languages and Literatures 


STANDARD TEACHING CREDENTIAL, SPECIALIZATION IN SECONDARY EDUCATION 

All prospective teachers, before being admitted to a credential program, must pass a proficiency 
examination in which their skills of listening, speaking, reading, writing and knowledge of linguistic 
principles will be tested. Students should make arrangements with the department to take the test 
during their junior year. 

INTERNATIONAL PROGRAMS 

In accordance with recommendations made by the Modern Language Association of America, the 
Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures encourages all majors interested in a teaching 
career to participate in a study-abroad program. This will enable a student to perfect his mastery 
of the language and afford him additional insights into the foreign culture. To this end The California 
State University and Colleges' International Programs offer a wide variety of study opportunities on 
the junior, senior and graduate level. 

While the department encourages students to study overseas to provide an "externship" in language 
and culture, language majors are required to complete the following minimum of courses on campus 
before departure for, or upon return from, overseas: 

A. for the B.A.: 12 units of upper division courses consisting of a minimum of nine units at the 400 
level in the major 

B. for the M.A.: 15 units consisting of a minimum of 12 units at the 500 level in the area of 
specialization. 

THE LANGUAGE LABORATORY 

Students enrolling in courses 101, 102, 203, 204 are required, in addition to the regular class periods, 
to practice for the minimum of prescribed time in the language laboratory. The 30-station laboratory 
operates like a library; students may use it at a time most convenient to them preferably every day 
in sessions of 15 to 30 minutes. Further details will be announced by each instructor and by the 
supervisor of the language laboratory. 

Students are invited to make use of the collection of literary and cultural recordings in French, 
German, Portuguese Russian and Spanish available in the language laboratory. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN FRENCH, GERMAN OR SPANISH 

An applicant must meet the university requirements for admission in conditionally classified graduate 
standing: a baccalaureate degree from an accredited institution and a grade-point average of at least 
2.5 in the last 60 semester units attempted (see section of this catalog on admission of graduates 
for complete statement and procedures). 

A student who meets the requirements for conditionally classified graduate standing, as well as the 
following requirements may be admitted as a classified graduate upon the development of an 
approved study plan: a major in French, German or Spanish (as appropriate) consisting of 24 units 
(or equivalent) of upper-division studies with above-average scholarship. (A candidate presenting 
a B.A. which has fewer than 24 upper division units in the major language, or is otherwise inadequate, 
normally will be required to take additional courses to build a full undergraduate major before 
beginning the graduate program. The student must also demonstrate proficiency in English, either 
by examination or a three-unit upper division course in English grammar. 

The degrees of Master of Arts in French, German and Spanish require a minimum of 30 semester 
units beyond the bachelor's degree including a minimum of 15 units in 500-level courses. 

The basic study plans are as follows: 

FRENCH 

A. Core courses (6 units) 

French 500 (Graduate Seminar: Advanced Structure and Style) or substitute 

French 510 (Graduate Seminar: Phonology), 520 (Old French) or 530 (Graduate Seminar: 

Historical Linguistics) 

B. Graduate seminars in literature (9 units) 

C. Other electives (15 units) 

May be chosen from either 400- or 500-level French courses. A maximum of six units may be taken, 
with approval of the adviser, in a related field. 

With the approval of his graduate committee, a student may elect to substitute a thesis for a part 
of the units required in Section C. 

A bibliographic project is to be completed prior to classification. A reading project is to be completed 
prior to advancement to candidacy. A reading list must be covered by all students. Final evaluation 
is by a comprehensive written and oral examination, including fluency in the French language. 


Foreign Languages and Literatures 251 


GERMAN 

A. Core courses (6 units) 

German 466 (Introduction to German Linguistics) or 530 (Graduate Seminar: Historical Lin- 
guistics) 

German 500 (Graduate Seminar: Advanced Structure and Style) or substitute 

B. Graduate seminars in literature (9-12 units) 

C. Other electives (12-15 units) 

May be chosen from either 400- or 500-level German courses. A maximum of six units may be taken, 
with approval of the student's graduate committee, in a related field. 

With the approval of his graduate committee, a student may elect to substitute a thesis for a part 
of the units required in Section C. A reading list must be covered by all students. Final evaluation 
is by a comprehensive written and oral examination, including fluency in the German language. 

SPANISH 

A. Core courses (6 units) 

Spanish 500 (Graduate Seminar: Advanced Structure and Style) or substitute. 

Spanish 530 (Graduate Seminar: Historical Linguistics) 

B. Graduate seminars in literature (9 units) 

C. Other electives (15 units) 

May be chosen from either 400- or 500-level Spanish courses. Up to six units may be taken, with 
approval of the adviser, in a related field. 

With the approval of his graduate committee, a student may elect to substitute a thesis for a part 
of the units required in Section C. A reading list must be covered by all students. Final evaluation 
is by a comprehensive written and oral examination, including fluency in the Spanish language. 
The candidate for the M.A. degree must consult a graduate adviser before beginning his program. 
Before being advanced to candidacy for the degree, he must demonstrate proficiency in the language 
to a faculty committee appointed for that purpose. 

For further information, consult the Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures. 

See also "The Program of Master's Degrees" in this catalog and the Graduate Bulletin. 


FOREIGN LANGUAGES COURSES 

1% Student-to-Student Tutorials (1-3) 

See page 87. 

198 Programmed Courses in Uncommonly Taught Languages (1-3) 

Intensive individualized programmed instruction in specific languages other than those regularly 
offered by the Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures, such as Turkish or Hindi. 
Designed to develop the skills of auditory comprehension and speaking in the language to form 
a basis for later development of the reading and writing skills. A minimum of 3 hours per week 
in the learning laboratory as well as regular sessions with native informants, are required for 
each unit of credit. May be repeated for credit. 

4% Student-to-Student Tutorials (1-3) 

See page 87. 


FOREIGN LANGUAGES EDUCATION COURSES 

100 Introduction to Foreign Languages and Cultures (3) 

Introduction to cultures and languages of other peoples by examining their ethnic origins, customs 
and linguistic traits. The course will deal with more than one language and culture. 

105A,B English as a Second Language (4) 

A course in English for non-native speakers. Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, 
reading and writing to improve control of the basic sounds and structures of English. Language 
laboratory assignments are included. 

442 Teaching Foreign Languages in the Secondary School (3) 

Prerequisites: French, German or Spanish 466; and admission to teacher education or consent of 


252 Foreign Languages and Literatures 

instructor. The theory and practice of language learning and language teaching with special 
emphasis on the audiolingual method. Conducted in English, with practice by students in the 
language they plan to teach. Required before student teaching. (2 hours lecture, plus fieldwork) 

443 Principles of Teaching English to Speakers of Other Languages (3) 

Prerequisite: junior standing or above. New and recent trends, including the expanded use of 
electromechanical aids, programmed instruction, problems of bilingualism, and selected prob- 
lems in the psychological and linguistic foundations of modern teaching of English to speakers 
of other languages. 

449A Teaching Foreign Languages in the Secondary School (10) 

See description under Division of Teacher Education. 

449B Student Teaching Seminar (2) 

See description under Division of Teacher Education. 

450 Spanish Classroom Vocabulary (2) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 317 or 318 or equivalent, or consent of instructor. For the teacher or potential 
teacher in bilingual classroom situations. Provides practice in Spanish classroom vocabulary at 
the primary and secondary levels. 

545G German Culture in the Language Classroom (2) 

Prerequisite: German 315 or consent of instructor. A thorough review of the geography, social 
organization, political structure, contemporary patterns of culture and value systems of German 
speaking lands. Emphasis on the resources and techniques available to the teacher of German. 

749 Student Teaching in Foreign Languages in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 

For candidates seeking the Fisher standard credential in secondary teaching. See description and 
prerequisite under Division of Teacher Education. 


ARABIC COURSES 

101 Fundamental Arabic-A (4) 

Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and writing to develop control of 
the sounds and the basic forms and structures of modern standard Arabic. 

102 Fundamental Arabic-B (4) 

Prerequisite: Arabic 101 or equivalent. Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, 
reading and writing to develop control of the sounds and the basic forms and structures of 
modern standard Arabic. 


CHINESE COURSES 

101 Fundamental Chinese — A (4) 

Practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and writing to develop control of the sounds 
and the basic structure of Chinese. Audiological assignments will be prepared in the language 
laboratory. Conducted in Chinese. 

102 Fundamental Chinese — B (4) 

Prerequisite: Chinese 101 or equivalent. Practice in listening-comprehension, speaking, reading and 
writing to develop control of the sounds and the basic forms and structure of Chinese. Audiolin- 
gual assignments will be prepared in the language laboratory. Conducted in Chinese. 


FRENCH COURSES 

101 Fundamental French — A (5) 

Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and writing to develop control of 
the sounds and the basic forms and strucutre of French. Audiolingual assignments in the 
language laboratory are an integral part of the course. Conducted in French. 

102 Fundamental French — B (5) 

Prerequisite: French 101 or equivalent. Practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and 
writing to develop control of the sounds and basic structure of French. Assignments in the 
language laboratory are an integral part of the course. Conducted in French. 


Foreign Languages and Literatures 253 


203 Intermediate French — A (3) 

Prerequisite: French 102 or equivalent. Intensive practice in speaking, understanding, reading, and 
writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to sentence. 
Conducted in French. 

204 Intermediate French — B (3) 

Prerequisite: French 203 or equivalent. Intensive practice in speaking, understanding, reading and 
writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to sentence. 
Conducted in French. 

230 Intermediate Diction and Phonetics (2) 

Practice in oral delivery of cultural and literary materials. Detailed analysis of individual problems 
in pronunciation followed by intensive work in class and the language laboratory. May be taken 
concurrently with French 203. Conducted in French. 

240 Intermediate Composition (2) 

Practice in written expression based on cultural and literary materials. May be taken concurrently 
with French 204. Conducted in French. 

300 French Conversation (3) 

Prerequisite: French 204 or equivalent. Designed to enable the student to develop further his oral 
control of the language in the context of his own or contemporary concerns. Conducted in 
French. 

305 Introduction to Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: French 204 or equivalent. Examination of what is known about the nature of human 
language, the literary use of language, literary creation, reading, and what critics are able to say 
about literary works. Reading and discussion of some typical, mainly contemporary, texts. 
Conducted in French. 

315 Origins of Modern France (3) 

Prerequisite: French 204 or equivalent. The social, intellectual and artistic origins of French civiliza- 
tion: feudal society becoming the ancien regime; the medieval world-view transformed by the 
Renaissance. Literary selections will be read in modern French translation. Conducted in French. 

317 Advanced Composition and Grammar (3) 

Prerequisite: French 204 or equivalent. Emphasis on free oral and written expression. Conducted in 
French. 

318 Advanced Composition and Grammar (3) 

Prerequisite: French 317 or equivalent. Designed to give the student special competence in the 
control of French as an instrument for free oral and written expression. Conducted in French. 

325 Contemporary French Civilization (3) 

Prerequisite: French 204 or equivalent. Reading and discussion to develop understanding of the 
social and intellectual problems, trends, and contributions of present-day France, while at the 
same time strengthening facility with the language. Conducted in French. 

399 Advanced French Phonetics (2) 

Prerequisite: French 230 or consent of instructor. Analysis of students' specific problems in pronun- 
ciation, followed by work in class and the language laboratory until articulatory proficiency is 
achieved. 

400 French for Advanced Students and Teachers (3) 

Prerequisite: French 317 or consent of instructor. Intensive review of spoken French, while develop- 
ing the student's powers of self-expression in the spoken and written language. Conducted in 
French. 

415 French Classicism (3) 

Prerequisite: French 305 and 317. The decisive moment in French experience. Focus on literature 
of the Classic period ( 1 660-1 685 ) , but open to both ends to include the formation and perenni- 
ally of French Classicism. Conducted in French. 

425 French Romanticism (3) 

Prerequisites: French 305 and 317. The revolution in feeling and intellect in 19th-century France. 
Emphasis on the Romantic period (1820-1850) but the course may include material preceding 
or following those dates. Conducted in French. 

466 Introduction to French Linguistics (3) 

The analytical procedures of general linguistics as applied to French, with special attention to 
structural contrasts between French and English. Emphasis on the application of linguistic 
analysis to the teaching of modern foreign languages. 


254 Foreign Languages and Literatures 

475A,B,C,D Seminar in 20th-Century French Literature (3,3,3, 3) 

Prerequisite: French 305, 315, 317, and 415 or 425. If 415 or 425 has not been completed, one must 
be taken concurrently. Organizes the study of 20th-century French literature around four major 
themes. Conducted in French. 

475 A Exploration of the Self (3) 

Search for identity and the quest for personal authenticity. The role of the conscious and unconscious 
mind and of artistic creativity. Proust, Cide, Mauriac, Valery, etc. 

475B In Search of the Real (3) 

The surrealist revolt against bourgeois logic, mores and literature. From Dada to automatic writing 
to Revolution to I'amour fou. Includes precursors and kindred spirits (e.g. Lautr£amont, jarry). 

475C The Individual and Society (3) 

Attitudes toward personal freedom; the existential sense of responsibility toward one's fellow man. 
Saint-Exupery, Malraux, Sartre, Camus, etc. 

475D Beyond Despair (3) 

Writers after World War II seeking tough-minded visions of man to replace the humanism of the 
'30's, new kinds of hope "beyond despair", (Sartre's "la vraie vie commence au-dela du 
desespoir"). 

485 Senior Seminar in French Literature (3) 

Prerequisites: French 305, .315, 317 and senior standing. Exploration of a literary current, period, 
author, genre or problem. Subject will change each time course is given and may be repeated 
for credit. Conducted in French. 

490 Oral Interpretation of French Dramatic Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: French 317 or consent of instructor. Group and individual reading of selected dramatic 
works to develop oral and interpretative skills. Conducted in French. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Supervised projects in French language or literature to be taken with the consent of the instructor 
and department chairman. May be repeated for credit. 

500 Graduate Seminar: Advanced Structure and Style (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in French. 

510 Graduate Seminar: Phonology (3) 

Prerequisite: French 466 or consent of instructor. Conducted in French. 

520 Graduate Seminar: Old French (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Readings in the medieval literature of northern France represent- 
ing a wide variety of dialects and centuries. Conducted in French. 

530 Graduate Seminar: Historical Linguistics (3) 

Prerequisite: French 466 or consent of instructor. Some previous study of Latin is highly recommend- 
ed. Studies in the phonetic, morphological, syntactic and semantic changes that characterize 
the development of Latin into the French of today. Conducted in French. 

557 Graduate Seminar: French Poetry (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in French. 

571 Graduate Seminar: French Prose (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in French. 

575 Graduate Seminar: French Drama 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in French 

576 Graduate Seminar: Major Writers (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. May be repeated for credit. Conducted in French. 

598 Thesis (3-6) 

Prerequisite: recommendation of student's graduate committee. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: fluency in French and consent of instructor. Supervised research projects in French 
language or literature. May be repeated for credit. 


GERMAN COURSES 

100A-J Personalized Instruction in Fundamental German (3-10) 

Covers material equivalent to German 101 or 102. Students may enter at any level but must initially 


Foreign Languages and Literatures 255 


register for a minimum of three units. Course is divided into 1 0 one-unit modules. Students work 
independently and meet individually with instructors for consultation and tests. 

101 Fundamental German — A (5) 

Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and writing to develop control of 
the sounds and the basic forms and structures of German. Audiolingual assignments prepared 
in the language laboratory are an integral part of the course. 

102 Fundamental German — B (5) 

Prerequisite: German 101 or equivalent. Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, 
reading, and writing on a basic level. Audiolingual assignments prepared in the language 
laboratory are an integral part of the course. 

203 Intermediate German — B (3) 

Prerequisite: German 102 or equivalent. Intensive practice in speaking, understanding, reading, and 
writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to sentence. 
Conducted in German. 

204 Intermediate German — B (3) 

Prerequisite: German 203 or equivalent. Intensive practice in speaking, understanding, reading and 
writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to sentence. 
Conducted in German. 

213 Intermediate Reading (2) 

Prerequisite: German 102 or equivalent. Practice in skills to develop reading comprehension. Re- 
quired for major and minor. May be taken concurrently with German 203. Conducted in 
German. 

214 Intermediate Reading (2) 

Prerequisite: German 203 or equivalent. Continuation of German 213. Practice in skills to develop 
reading comprehension. Required for major and minor. May be taken concurrently with Ger- 
man 204. Conducted in German. 

301 Readings in German for the Non-Major (3) 

Prerequisite: German 102 or equivalent. Readings reflecting a broad spectrum of writing in the 
sciences and humanities. Special attention given to rapid reading and recognition of structure 
and vocabulary. 

315 Introduction to German Civilization (3) 

Prerequisite: German 204 or equivalent. Open to lower division students with consent of instructor. 
Readings and discussions in German literature, arts and institutions to develop insights into 
German culture, while strengthening facility with the language. Conducted in German. 

317 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3) 

Prerequisite: German 204 or equivalent. Open to lower division students with consent of instructor. 
Emphasis on free oral and written expression. Conducted in German. 

318 Advanced Composition and Grammar (3) 

Prerequisite: German 317 or consent of instructor. Designed to give the student special competence 
in the control of German as an instrument for free oral and written expression. Conducted in 
German. 

325 Current Trends in Culture of German-Speaking Peoples (3) 

Prerequisite: German 204 or equivalent. Open to lower division students with consent of instructor. 
Readings and discussion designed to acquaint the student with a broad range of German 
contributions to present-day civilization while strengthening facility with German language. 
Conducted in German. 

375 Introduction to Literary Forms (3) 

Prerequisite: German 317 or consent of instructor. Introduction to the principal literary forms, prose 
fiction, poetry, drama and the essay and to the major concepts of literary techniques and 
criticism. Close analysis and interpretation of various texts. Conducted in German. 

390 Group Reading and Oral Interpretation (3) 

Prerequisite: German through fourth semester or consent of instructor. Oral reading of Horspide, 
dramatic literature and poetry in groups. Emphasis on practice in reading aloud, with simultane- 
ous discussion of surface, inner and personal meaning of the works. Conducted in German. 

399 German Phonetics (2) 

Prerequisites: junior standing and consent of instructor. Detailed analysis of individual problems in 
pronunciation followed by intensive work in class and the language laboratory. May be repeated 
for credit. Conducted in German. 


256 Foreign Languages and Literatures 

400 German for Advanced Students and Teachers (3) 

Prerequisites: German 317 or consent of instructor. Intensive review of German while developing 
the student's powers of self-expression in the spoken and written language. Conducted in 
German. 

430 German Literature and Culture to the Baroque (3) 

Prerequisite: German 315, 317 and 375 or consent of instructor. Masterpieces of German literature 
from the Hi/debrands/ied to Der Abenteuerliche Simplicissimus and their relationship to cultural, 
historical and intellectual developments between ca. 800-1670 A.D. Conducted in German. 

440 18th-Century German Literature and Culture (3) 

Prerequisite: German 315, 317 and 375, or consent of instructor. The principal authors and move- 
ments (Enlightenment, Storm and Stress, Classicism, early Romanticism) of the 18th century. 
Conducted in German. 

450 19th-Century German Literature and Culture (3) 

Prerequisite: German 315, 317 and 375, or consent of instructor. Significant impulses in 19th-century 
German literature from Romanticism to Naturalism, including examination of decisive philo- 
sophic, political, and economic influences. Conducted in German. 

460 20th-Century German Literature and Culture (3) 

Prerequisite: German 31 5, 317, 375, or consent of instructor. Major German prose, drama and poetry 
of the 20th century. Conducted in German. 

466 Introduction to German Linguistics (3) 

The analytical procedures of general linguistics as applied to German, with special attention to 
structural contrasts between German and English. Emphasis on the application of linguistic 
analysis to the teaching of modern foreign languages. 

482 German Literature and Culture in Film (3) 

Prerequisite: advanced standing in literature or consent of instructor. A critical study of literary works 
and their film adaptations. Significant works of German literature will be analyzed and com- 
pared in both art forms. 

485 Senior Seminar in German Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: senior standing in German. Research and discussion in depth of a literary movement, 
a genre or an author. Subject varies and is announced in the Class Schedule. May be repeated 
for credit with a different topic. Conducted in German. 

490 Oral Interpretation of Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Group and individual reading of various types of literature to 
develop oral and interpretative skills. Conducted in German. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Supervised research projects in German Language or literature to be taken with consent of instructor 
and department chair. May be repeated for credit. 

500 Graduate Seminar: Advanced Structure and Style (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in German. 

510 Graduate Seminar: Phonology (3) 

Prerequisite: German 466 or consent of instructor. Conducted in German. 

530 Graduate Seminar: Historical Linguistics (3) 

Prerequisite: German 466 or consent of instructor. Conducted in German. 

550A,B,C Interpretation of Literature (2,2,2) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Interpretation of literary works in advanced language classes. 
Conducted in German. A — the narrative, B — the drama, C — poetry. 

571 Graduate Seminar: German Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Subject will vary and will be announced in the Class Schedule. 
May be repeated for credit with a different topic. Conducted in German. 

576 Graduate Seminar: Major Writers (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Subject will vary and will be announced in the Class Schedule. 
May be repeated for credit with a different topic. Conducted in German. 

598 Thesis (3-6) 

Prerequisite: recommendation of student's graduate committee. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: fluency in German and consent of instructor. Supervised research projects in German 
language or literature. May be repeated for credit. 


Foreign Languages and Literatures 257 


GREEK COURSES 

101 Fundamental Greek — A (3) 

Intensive practice to develop a comprehensive reading knowledge and a fundamental writing ability 
in ancient Greek. 

102 Fundamental Greek — B (3) 

Intensive practice to develop a comprehensive reading knowledge and a fundamental writing ability 
in ancient Greek. 


HEBREW COURSES 

101 Fundamental Hebrew — A (4) 

Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and writing to develop control of 
the sounds and the basic structure of Hebrew. 

102 Fundamental Hebrew — B (4) 

Prerequisite: Hebrew 101. Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and 
writing to develop control of the sounds and the basic structure of Hebrew. 

203 Intermediate Hebrew — A (3) 

Prerequisite: Hebrew 102 or consent of instructor. Intensive practice in speaking, understanding, 
reading and writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to 
sentence. Conducted in Hebrew. 

204 Intermediate Hebrew — B (3) 

Prerequisite: Hebrew 203 or consent of instructor. Intensive practice in speaking, understanding, 
reading and writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to 
sentence. Conducted in Hebrew. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Supervised projects in Hebrew language or literature to be taken with consent of instructor and 
department chair. May be repeated for credit. 


ITALIAN COURSES 

101 Fundamental Italian — A (4) 

Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking and writing to develop control of the sounds 
and the basic structure of Italian. Audiolingual assignments are an integral part of the course 
and are to be prepared in the language laboratory. Conducted in Italian. 

102 Fundamental Italian — B (4) 

Prerequisite: Italian 101 or equivalent. Practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and 
writing to develop control of the sounds and basic structure of Italian. Audiolingual assignments 
are an integral part of the course. Conducted in Italian. 

203 Intermediate Italian — A (3) 

Prerequisite: Italian 102 or equivalent. Intensive practice in speaking, understanding, reading and 
writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to sentence. 
Conducted in Italian. 

204 Intermediate Italian — B (3) 

Prerequisite: Italian 203 or equivalent. Intensive practice in speaking, understanding, reading and 
writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to sentence. 
Conducted in Italian. 


JAPANESE COURSES 

101 Fundamental Japanese — A (3) 

Practice in listening-comprehension, speaking and writing to develop control of the sounds and the 
basic structure of Japanese. Audiolingual assignments will be prepared in the language labora- 

9—88930 


258 Foreign Languages and Literatures 


tory. Conducted in Japanese. 

102 Fundamental Japanese — B (3) 

Prerequisite: Japanese 101 or equivalent. Practice in listening-comprehension, speaking and writing 
to develop control of the sounds and the basic structure of Japanese. Audiolingual assignments 
will be prepared in the language laboratory. Conducted in Japanese. 


LATIN COURSES 

101 Fundamental Latin — A (3) 

Intensive practice to develop a comprehensive reading knowledge and a fundamental writing ability 
in Latin. Modern techniques of language instruction will be applied. 

102 Fundamental Latin — B (3) 

Prerequisite: Latin 101 or equivalent. Intensive practice to develop a comprehensive reading knowl- 
edge and a fundamental writing ability in Latin. Modern techniques of language instruction will 
be applied. 

203 Intermediate Latin (3) 

Prerequisite: Latin 102 or equivalent (two years of high school Latin). Intensive reading and writing. 
Selected prose and poetry from the Golden Age. Audiolingual techniques of language learning 
are used when applicable. 

203 Intermediate Latin — A (3) 

Supervised projects in Latin language and Roman literature. To be taken with consent of department 
chair as a means of meeting special curricular problems. Subject matter will vary. May be 
repeated for credit. 

204 Intermediate Latin — B (3) 

Prerequisite: Latin 203 or equivalent (three years of high school Latin). Intensive reading and writing. 
Selected prose from the Silver and Middle Ages. Audiolingual techniques of language learning 
are used when applicable. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Supervised projects in Latin language and Roman literature. To be taken with consent of department 
chair as a means of meeting special curricular problems. Subject matter will vary. May be 
repeated for credit. 


PORTUGUESE COURSES 

101 Fundamental Portuguese — A (4) 

Listening comprehension, speaking, reading comprehension, and writing to develop control of the 
sounds and the basic forms and structures of Portuguese. Enrollment restricted to students with 
previous study of a Romance language. Conducted in Portuguese. 

102 Fundamental Portuguese — B (4) 

Prerequisite: Portuguese 101 or equivalent. Listening comprehension, speaking, reading comprehen- 
sion, and writing to develop control of the sounds and the basic forms and structures of 
Portuguese. Enrollment restricted to students with previous study of a Romance language. 
Conducted in Portuguese. 

315 Introduction to Luso-Brazilian Culture and Civilization (3) 

Prerequisite: Portuguese 102 or equivalent, reading knowledge of Portuguese or consent of instruc- 
tor. Insights into the main currents of Portuguese culture and civilization and Brazil's intellectual 
and artistic development from discovery to Independence. Conducted in Portuguese. 

317 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3) 

Prerequisite: Portuguese 102 or equivalent. Open to lower division students with consent of instruc- 
tor. Emphasis on free oral and written expression. Conducted in Portuguese. 

318 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3) 

Prerequisite: Portuguese 102 or equivalent. Open to lower division students with consent of instruc- 
tor. Designed to give the student special competence in the control of Portuguese as an 
instrument for free oral and written expression. Conducted in Portuguese. 

325 Contemporary Brazilian Civilization (3) 

Prerequisite: Portuguese 315 or consent of instructor. Readings and discussion toward developing 


Foreign Languages and Literatures 259 

an understanding of the social and intellectual problems, trends, and contributions to Brazil 
since Independence. Major emphasis on present day Brazil. Conducted in Portuguese. 

431 Portuguese Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: Portuguese 315 or consent of instructor. Portuguese literature from the Middle Ages to 
the present. The major works of Gil Vicente, Luis de Camoens, Eca de Queiroz and others 
examined from an aesthetic and cultural standpoint. Conducted in Portuguese. 

441 Brazilian Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. The literature of Brazil from the Colonial period to the present. 
Conducted in Portuguese. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Supervised projects in Portuguese language or literature to be taken with consent of instructor and 
department chair. May be repeated for credit. 


RUSSIAN COURSES 

101 Fundamental Russian — A (5) 

Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and writing to develop control of 
the sounds and the basic forms and structure of Russian. Audiolingual assignments are an 
integral part of the course and are to be prepared in the language laboratory. 

102 Fundamental Russian — B (5) 

Prerequisite: Russian 101 or equivalent. Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, 
reading and writing on a basic level. Audiolingual assignments are an integral part of the course 
and are to be prepared in the language laboratory. 

203 Fundamental Russian — A (3) 

Prerequisite: Russian 102 or equivalent. Intensive practice in speaking, understanding, reading, and 
writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to sentence. 
Conducted in Russian. 

204 Intermediate Russian — B (3) 

Prerequisite: Russian 203 or equivalent. Intensive practice in speaking, understanding, reading and 
writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to sentence. 
Conducted in Russian. 

316 Russian Civilization and Culture (3) 

Insights into the main currents of Russian institutions, culture, and civilization and Russia's intellectual 
and artistic development. Conducted in English. 

317 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3) 

Prerequisite: Russian 204 or equivalent. Open to lower division students with consent of instructor. 
Emphasis on free oral and written expression. Conducted in Russian. 

318 Advanced Composition and Grammar (3) 

I Prerequisite: Russian 317 or equivalent. Designed to give the student special competence in the 
control of Russian as an instrument for free oral and written expression. Conducted in Russian. 

375 Introduction to Literary Forms (3) 

Prerequisite: Russian 317 or consent of instructor. Introduction to the principal literary forms, prose 
fiction, poetry, drama and essay, and to the major concepts of literary techniques and criticism. 
Close analysis and interpretation of various texts. Conducted in Russian. 

441 The Works of Tolstoy and Dostoevsky (3) 

Prerequisite: Russian 315 or consent of instructor. Major works of Tolstoy and Dostoevsky in their 
intellectual and historical setting and their impact on Russian and world literature. Conducted 
in Russian. 

451 The Golden Age of Russian Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: Russian 315 or consent of instructor. A study of major literary works of the first half 
of the 19th century which exemplify cultural and intellectual movements in Russia. Conducted 
in Russian. 

461 Russian Literature from 1917 (3) 

Prerequisite: Russian 315 or consent of instructor. Representative works of outstanding modern 
Russian writers. Analysis and discussion of their prose and poetry in the light of the social 
problems of present-day Russia. Conducted in Russian. 


260 Foreign Languages and Literatures 

466 Introduction to Russian Linguistics (3) 

Prerequisite: Russian 317 or consent of instructor. The analytical procedures of general linguistics 
as applied to Russian with special attention to structural contrasts between Russian and English. 
Emphasis on the application of linguistic analysis to the teaching of modern foreign languages. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Supervised projects in Russian language or literature to be taken with consent of instructor and 
department chair. May be repeated for credit. 


SPANISH COURSES 

101 Fundamental Spanish — A (5) 

Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and writing to develop control of 
the sounds and the basic forms and structure of Spanish. Assignments in the language laboratory 
are an integral part of the course. Conducted in Spanish. 

102 Fundamental Spanish — B (5) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 101 or equivalent. Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, 
reading and writing to develop control of the sounds and the basic forms and structures of 
Spanish. Assignments in the language laboratory are an integral part of the course. Conducted 
in Spanish. 

103 Intensive Review of Fundamental Spanish (5) 

For students who have completed 1-2 years of high school Spanish or equivalent and need an 
intensive review of first-year Spanish, equivalent to Spanish 101 and 102. Assignments in the 
language laboratory are an integral part of the course. Conducted in Spanish. 

203 Intermediate Spanish — A (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 102 or equivalent. Intensive practice in speaking, understanding, reading and 
writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to sentence. 
Conducted in Spanish. 

204 Intermediate Spanish — B (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 203 or equivalent. Intensive practice in speaking, understanding, reading and 
writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to sentence. 
Conducted in Spanish. 

213 Intermediate Conversation (2) 

Practice in oral expression based on a variety of materials. May be taken concurrently with Spanish 
203. Conducted in Spanish. 

214 Intermediate Composition (2) 

Practice in written expression based on cultural and literary materials. May be taken concurrently 
with Spanish 204. Conducted in Spanish. 

299 Spanish Phonetics (2) 

Prerequisite: junior standing and consent of instructor. Detailed analysis of students' specific prob- 
lems in pronunciation followed by intensive work in class and the language laboratory until 
articulatory proficiency is achieved. May be repeated for credit. Conducted in Spanish. 

300 Spanish Conversation (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 204 or equivalent. Designed to enable the student to develop further his oral 
control of the language in the context of his own or contemporary concerns. No credit for 
major. Conducted in Spanish. 

315 Introduction to Spanish Civilization (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 204 or equivalent. Open to lower division students with consent of instructor. 
Readings and discussions in Spanish literature, arts and institutions to develop insights into 
Spanish culture, while strengthening facility with the language. Conducted in Spanish. 

316 Introduction to Spanish-American Civilization (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 204 or equivalent. Open to lower division students with consent of instructor. 
Readings and discussion in Spanish-American literature, arts and institutions to develop insights 
into Spanish-American literature and culture while strengthening facility with the language. 
Conducted in Spanish. 

317 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 204 or equivalent. Open to lower division students with consent of instructor. 
Emphasis on free oral and written expression. Conducted in Spanish. 


Foreign Languages and Literatures 261 

318 Advanced Spanish Syntax and Composition (3) 

Emphasis on linguistic problems encountered by the Spanish/English bilingual student in connection 
with his written expression. Conducted in Spanish. 

375 Introduction to Literary Forms (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 317 or consent of instructor. Introduction to literary forms and concepts of 
literary techniques and criticism. Analysis and interpretation of various texts to increase the 
students' abilities in reading, language, and literary criticism. Conducted in Spanish. 

400 Spanish for Advanced Students and Teachers (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 317 or consent of instructor. Intensive study of spoken and written Spanish. 
Designed to develop the student's powers of self-expression and his ability to analyze the 
structure of the written language. Conducted in Spanish. 

415 Contemporary Spanish Culture (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 315 or consent of instructor. An analysis and study of the cultural — social, 
economical, political — characteristics of contemporary Spanish life. Conducted in Spanish. 

430 Spanish Literature to Neoclassicism (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 315 and 375. Spanish literature from its beginnings to 1700, with special 
emphasis on the outstanding representative works of each genre. Conducted in Spanish. 

440 Spanish-American Literature (3) 

Prerequisites: Spanish 316 and 375 or consent of instructor. Spanish-American Literature from The 
Conquest to 1888. Conducted in Spanish. 

441 Spanish-American Literature (3) 

Prerequisites: Spanish 315 and 375 or consent of instructor. Spanish-American Literature from 
modernismo to the present. Conducted in Spanish. 

461 Spanish Literature Since Neoclassicism (3) 

Prerequisites: Spanish 315 and 375 or consent of instructor. Representative works of 19th- and 
20th-century Spain. Conducted in Spanish. 

466 Introduction to Spanish Linguistics (3) 

The analytical procedures of general linguistics as applied to Spanish, with special attention to 
structural contrasts between Spanish and English. Emphasis on the application of linguistic 
analysis to the teaching of modern foreign languages. 

467 Dialectology: Current Trends in Modern Spanish (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 317 or 318, 400 or equivalent and 466, the latter of which may be taken 
concurrently. Focuses on the differences in phonology, morphology, syntax and lexicon in 
linguistic patterns in all Spanish-speaking regions. 

468 Spanish-English Contrastive Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 317 or 318, 400 or equivalent, and 466, the latter of which may be taken 
concurrently. Theory and performance techniques for contrasting phonological, grammatical 
and lexical structures of Spanish and English. 

475 Senior Seminar: Contemporary Literature of Spain (3) 

Prerequisite: Senior standing in Spanish. Selected readings from the most outstanding writers of the 
Generation del 98 and the 20th century. Conducted in Spanish. 

485 Senior Seminar: Hispanic Topics (3) 

Prerequisite: senior standing in Spanish. Exploration of literary or cultural topics of Spain or Spanish 
America. Subject matter will change in alternate semesters. May be repeated for credit. Con- 
ducted in Spanish. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Supervised research projects in Spanish language or literature to be taken with consent of instructor 
and department chair. May be repeated for credit. 

500 Graduate Seminar: Advanced Structure and Style (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 466 or equivalent. Conducted in Spanish. 

510 Graduate Seminar: Phonology (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 466 or equivalent. Conducted in Spanish. 

530 Graduate Seminar: Historical Linguistics (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 466 or equivalent. Conducted in Spanish. 

556 Graduate Seminar: Spanish Poetry (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 430 or 461 or equivalent. Conducted in Spanish. 

557 Graduate Seminar: Spanish-American Poetry (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 441 or equivalent. Conducted in Spanish. 


262 Geography 


567 Graduate Seminar: Spanish-American Novel (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 441 or equivalent. Conducted in Spanish. 

571 Graduate Seminar: Spanish Prose (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 430 or 461 or equivalent. Conducted in Spanish. 

575 Graduate Seminar: Spanish Drama (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 430 or 461 or equivalent. Conducted in Spanish. 

576 Graduate Seminar: Hispanic Topics (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 430 or 441 or 461 or equivalent. May be repeated for credit with different 
subject matter. Conducted in Spanish. 

598 Thesis (3-6) 

Prerequisite: recommendation of student's graduate committee. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: fluency in Spanish and consent of instructor. Supervised research projects in Spanish 
language or literature. May be repeated for credit. 


SWAHILI COURSES 

101 Fundamental Swahili (4) 

Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking and writing to master the basic structure of 
Swahili and the requisite skills for both oral and written communication. Conducted in Swahili. 
(Same as Afro-Ethnic Studies 104) 

102 Fundamental Swahili (4) 

Prerequisite: Swahili 101 or equivalent. Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking and 
writing to master the basic structure of Swahili and the requisite skills for both oral and written 
communication. Conducted in Swahili. (Same as Afro-Ethnic Studies 105) 


DEPARTMENT OF GEOGRAPHY 


FACULTY 

William Ketteringham 
Department Chair 

Arthur Earick, Peter Eilers, Wayne Engstrom, Glenn George, Gary Hannes, Ronald Helin, Tso-Hwa 
Lee, Bill Puzo, Gertrude Reith, Imre Sutton, Barbara Weightman 
The major in geography provides knowledge concerning variety and change in the earth's physical 
foundation and in man's economic, cultural and political relationship to that foundation. In doing 
so it contributes to a broad, liberal education and furnishes sound preparation for employment in 
business, planning, and government service. The field also provides a foundation for teaching on the 
elementary and secondary levels and for advanced geographic study on the graduate level leading 
to university teaching and research. 

Students and counselors are advised that departmental offerings are numbered according to instruc- 


tional level and course content. These criteria are applied in the following ways: 

Instructional level 

survey courses designed pimarily for non-majors 100-199 

survey courses designed primarily for majors 200-299 

courses designed for students with general needs and not normally applicable to 

graduate programs in geography 300-399 

courses designed for students with special needs; prerequisites cited are strictly 

interpreted 400-499 

courses for graduate students and qualified undergraduate students 500-599 


Course content 
general courses: 
physical courses: 
regional courses: 
human courses: 
technical courses: 
special studies: 

BACHELOR OF ARTS 


00-09 (e.g., Geography 100 or 500) 
10-29 (e.g., Geography 211 or 323) 
30-49 (e.g., Geography 344 or 433) 
50-79 (e.g., Geography 250 or 367) 
80-89 (e.g., Geography 280 or 381 ) 
90-99 (e.g., Geography 499-599) 

IN GEOGRAPHY 


The major consists of at least 42 units of geography, including: 
A. A 10-unit geography core (211, 250, 280) 


Geography 263 

B. A 12-unit breadth requirement in upper division geography, including one course from each 
of the following groups — physical, regional, human, technical. 

C. A six-unit requirement in 400-level geography, excluding the 490s. 

Students may satisfy requirements A, B and C with equivalent course work taken at other institutions; 
they may also transfer into the major an additional six units of lower division geography and an 
unlimited amount of upper division geography. A three-unit non-laboratory course in introductory 
physical geography taken at another institution will be accepted in place of Geography 211, the 
four-unit laboratory course offered at this university. 

No unit credit toward the major will be allowed for geography courses in which a grade of D is 
received. Content credit for such courses may be allowed by the student's adviser. 

TEACHING CREDENTIAL PROGRAMS 

The curricula designed for single and multiple subject examination waiver in geography /social 
science are under review. Students should consult the departmental undergraduate adviser as to the 
potential changes in the geography major under the provisions of the Ryan Act. 

MINOR IN GEOGRAPHY 

The minor in geography serves students who wish to pursue a second field related to interdisciplinary 
studies or an elective concentration. Interested students should take at least 21 units of geography, 
including the core (211, 250, 280) and a minimum of nine units of upper division work from at least 
three of the following groups — physical, regional, human, technical. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN GEOGRAPHY 

This program provides advanced study in geographic concepts, techniques and methods. Through 
seminars and research it develops the analytical and interpretive abilities of the student, and provides 
requisite background for employment in teaching, government and business. 

Prerequisites 

Students must meet the university and school requirements for admission to conditionally classified 
graduate standing with the declared objective of this degree. Please see the section of this catalog 
on admission of graduates. 

Classified standing requires the equivalent of 33 semester units in geography, including the following: 
(1) nine units in introductory geography; (2) nine units in upper division physical and human 
geography, including at least three units in physical and three units in human geography; (3) three 
units in upper division geographic techniques; (4) three units in upper division regional geography; 
and (5) nine units of geography electives, of which six units must be the equivalent of 400-level. 
A 3.0 (B) average in all geography courses is required prior to classification in the program. Course 
or grade deficiencies may be made up with consent of the departmental graduate committee. After 
completion of all prerequisites and removal of deficiencies, if any, the student is reviewed for 
classification into the program by the departmental graduate committee, which then supervises the 
student in the formulation of an official study plan. 

A study plan must be developed and approved for admission to classified graduate standing. 

Study Plan 

Requirements for the completion of the degree program include: 

A. 30 units of approved upper division and graduate-level work distributed as follows: 

Units 

Geography seminars (Minimum of) 9 

Geography 597, Project, or Geography 598, Thesis 6 

Elective upper division or graduate work in geography (for which up to 6 units may 

be taken in related fields) including techniques 15 

Total 30 

B. A technique requirement equivalent to nine units, completed prior to Advancement to Candida- 
cy. This includes the three units used as prerequisite. The remaining six units may be upper 
division undergraduate and/or graduate level. 

Candidacy is attained on the satisfactory completion of the following: (1)12 approved units of work 
with B or better in all, including at least three units in a 500-level seminar; (2) the technique 
requirement; (3) selection of a field of specialization and an appropriate adviser as chair of the 
student's graduate committee. Each candidate will prepare either two three-unit projects or a six-unit 
thesis. Before registering for Geography 597 or 598, a candidate must have topic (s) approved by 
the student's graduate committee. The candidate must submit to the committee a detailed written 


264 Geography 

research proposal which indicates knowledge of the appropriate literature and of techniques of data 
collection and analysis. The committee will then discuss this proposal with the candidate, to deter- 
mine his/her competence to pursue the topic as outlined, and assure that both the student and the 
committee understand what is to be done. The committee can modify, accept or reject the proposal. 
Students interested in foreign area studies are expected to demonstrate a proficiency in a suitable 
foreign language. 

All graduate students are to confer with the departmental graduate adviser sometime during the first 
two weeks of each semester; for further information, consult this adviser. 

See also "The Program of Master's Degrees" in this catalog and the Graduate Bulletin. 


GEOGRAPHY COURSES 

100 Man and the Land (3) 

An introduction to world geography, with emphasis on the world's major regions and on their use 
and modification by man. 

150 Environment in Crisis (3) 

A geographic analysis and approach to the problems of man and his environment, dealing with man's 
interpretation of the environment and his use and misuse thereof. Factors of discussion will 
include population, nutrition, health, settlement, pollution, resource utilization and local envi- 
ronmental problems. 

211 Physical Geography (4) 

A study of the basic elements of the physical environment (e.g. weather, climate, landforms, 
vegetation and soils) and an analysis of their world distribution and interrelationships. (3 hours 
lecture, 2 hours activity) 

250 Human Geography (3) 

A topical and thematic interpretation of world human occupancy, with emphasis on population 
patterns, cultural diversity, livelihood, and settlement. Discussions consider the varying role of 
perception, human organization and technology in the modification of the earth environment. 

280a-f Introduction to Geographical Analysis (1) 

Prerequisite: minimum of one other core course in geography (e.g., 211 or 250) or consent of 
instructors. Selective studies in the technical interpretation of physical and human features and 
activities in the landscape. Majors must take a total of three units. 

280a Interpretation of Maps and Aerial Photographs (1) 

An introduction to the uses of maps and aerial photographs in geographic research. Emphasis is 
placed on types of data which can be obtained from these sources as well as on rudimentary 
measurement techniques. 

280b Introduction to Field Methods (1) 

A basic introduction to the study of geographic phenomena in their actual setting — "the field." 

280c Introduction to Quantitative Methods (1) 

Basic introduction to the use of descriptive statistics in geography. Review of the relationships of 
graphs, functions and equations, logarithms and exponents, and an overview of the linear 
regression model. 

280d Terrain Measurement Techniques (1) 

An introduction to methods of measuring selected aspects of land surface form in the field and from 
topographic maps. 

280e Library Techniques for Geographers (1) 

An introductory study of library research for geographic inquiry, with emphasis on how and where 
to find the needed information as well as the uses of such information. 

280f Geographic Writing (1) 

A workshop providing writing experience relevant to the training of geographers. 

312 Geomorphology (3) 

Prerequisite Geography 21 1 or Earth Science 101. A study of the development of landforms through 
an analysis of the processes that construct and modify them. 

323 Weather and Climate (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 21 1 or consent of instructor. A study of atmospheric elements and controls, 
fronts, severe weather, and climatic classification systems. 


Geography 265 


325 Plant Geography (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 211 or consent of instructor. A geographic analysis of world distribution, 
ecology and description of vegetation patterns including reference to human influences. 

330 Geography of California (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 100 or upper division standing. Description and analysis of the geographic 
regions of California — their environmental diversity, occupance patterns, and current problems. 

332 Geography of Anglo- America (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 100 or consent of instructor. A regional study of the United States and 
Canada emphasizing the interrelated physical and cultural features that give geographic person- 
ality to the individual regions. 

333 Geography of Latin America (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 100 or consent of instructor. A systematic and regional survey of Middle 
and South America with particular emphasis on the interrelationships of the physical and social 
factors of the area. 

336 Geography of Europe (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 100 or upper division standing. A survey of the basic physical and human 
lineaments of Europe and of the elements that distinguish and give character to its major regional 
division. 

338 Geography of the Soviet Union (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 100 or upper division standing. A study of the geographic factors, cultural 
and physical, that are basic to an understanding of the historical development of Russia and 
of the contemporary economic and cultural geography of the U.S.S.R. and its regions. 

341 Geography of Asia: Selected Regions (3) (Formerly 340A,B) 

Prerequisite: Geography 100 or consent of instructor. A regional geography of various countries or 
groups of countries (e.g., China, Japan, India, Southeast Asia) in terms of physical and cultural 
characteristics and interrelationships. May be repeated once for credit so long as the region 
discussed is different. 

344 Geography of Africa (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 100 or consent of instructor. The physical, human and regional geography 
of Africa with emphasis on Saharan borderlands and East Africa. 

346 Australia and the Pacific Islands (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 100 or consent of instructor. The physical, cultural and regional geography 
of Australia, New Zealand, Melanesia, Micronesia and Polynesia. 

350 Conservation and Ecology in Contemporary America (3) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. A survey of resource-use problems and the principles of 
conservation and ecology with discussions of philosophy, ethics, public policy and environmen- 
tal law, and technology. 

355 Population Perspectives (3) 

Prerequisites: upper division standing. A systematic approach to the geography of population within 
a regional framework. Investigation of historical and contemporary demographic patterns and 
processes in terms of cultural, economic and environmental factors of population growth, 
mobility and distribution. 

360 Economic Geography (3) 

A systematic inquiry into the spatial distribution of economic activities: agriculture, extractive and 
manufacturing industries, and tertiary services. 

367 Political Geography (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 250 or consent of instructor. A systematic inquiry into the geographic bases 
of political territories, from the municipal to the international level with an emphasis on sover- 
eign states. Special consideration will be given to perception of political units and to relation- 
ships among political territories. 

370 Urban Geography (3) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. The city as a geographic unit; urban settlements as regional 
centers; city-region relationships; the structure of villages, towns and cities, and their historical 
developments; case studies. 

381 Cartography (3) 

Prerequisite: geography core or consent of instructor. Compilation and construction of maps and 
graphs as geographic tools, with emphasis on the principles of effective cartographic representa- 
tion. (1 hour lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 


266 Geography 


384 Airphoto and Image Interpretation (3) (Formerly 484) 

Prerequisite: geography core or consent of instructor. Use of aerial photography, space photography 
and other remote sensors as tools and research sources. Emphasis on interpretation of physical 
and cultural elements of the landscape. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

386 Data Processing for Geographic Information (3) 

Prerequisite: geography core or consent of instructor. An introduction to the use of a digital computer 
in solving geographical problems. Includes the acquisition of basic computer programming skills 
and the investigation of spatially-oriented problems. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

412 Regional Geomorphology of the United States (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 312. A seminar examining the major physiographic provinces of the United 
States. Special emphasis is placed on the record that present and past geomorphic processes 
have left on the landscape. 

423 Physical Climatology (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 323 or consent of instructor. A seminar on selected topics in atmospheric 
science, including heat-transfer, radiation laws, atmospheric motion, vorticity concepts, and 
urban effects. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

426 Man and the Coastal Environment (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 211; 325 and 312 recommended. A seminar for students in geography, 
related disciplines, and in environmental studies. An ecological approach to man's impact on 
coastal environments, emphasizing the West Coast of North America. 

431 Man's Impact on the California Environment (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 330 or upper division standing. A seminar analyzing selected geographic 
problems which have resulted from man's impact on the land and its resources, with particular 
emphasis on southern California. 

432 Geography of Eastern America (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 332 or History 170A or consent of instructor. A seminar on the geography 
of Eastern America eastward from the Great Plains. Emphasis will be on the natural setting, 
patterns of movement and settlement, population characteristics, economic development, and 
urbanization. 

433 Man and Geographic Relationships in Latin America (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 333 or consent of instructor. A seminar for advanced students in Latin 
American studies or geography. Studies of contemporary interest dealing with man and his 
development in the area of Latin America. Specific content of the course will vary from year 
to year but major stress will be placed upon the larger countries of the region. 

453 Cultural Ecology (3) (Formerly 425) 

Prerequisite: Geography 150 or 250 or consent of instructor. A seminar for students in geography, 
related disciplines, social science, or environmental studies. A topical treatment of the ecologi- 
cal approach to man-land relationships (e.g., environmental change, nutrition, land systems). 

457 Social Geography (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 250. A seminar on man's social milieu from a spatial perspective. Emphasis 
will be placed on the subjective spatial constructs of various social groups in order to illuminate 
extant similarities and differences in the design of earth occupance. 

458 Spatial Dynamics (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 355, or 360, or 370, or consent of instructor. A seminar on the sociogeo- 
graphic approach to the dynamic processes of migration and diffusion with emphasis on the 
spread of people, ideas and technology in modern societies. 

464 Transportation Geography (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 360 or 370 or consent of instructor. An inquiry into spatial patterns of both 
regional and urban transportation networks; use the elementary graph theory in geographic 
research, transportation planning and methodology. 

468 Law and Environment (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 350 or consent of instructor. An interdisciplinary seminar in the role of law 
in the allocation, management, and administration of resources and the environment. Relevant 
studies relate to conservation law, land tenure, water rights, environmental health and other 
topics. 

472 Urban Growth and Planning (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 370 or consent of instructor. A seminar on urban development with an 
emphasis on the decentralizing forces operating in contemporary urban space; identification of 
trends in the planning process. 


History 267 


482 Advanced Cartography — Thematic Mapping (3) 

Prerequisites: Geography 381 and consent of instructor. Application of photographic techniques and 
cartographic analysis to advanced problems in map compiliation and design. (1 hour lecture, 
6 hours laboratory) 

485 Quantitative Geography (3) 

Prerequisite: geography core or consent of instructor. An introduction to spatial analysis and geo- 
graphic application of basic concepts of descriptive and inferential statistics. Includes some use 
of the electronic computer. (2 hours activity) 

487 Ecology of the Santa Ana Mountains (3) 

Prerequisite: geography core and consent of instructor. Field study, laboratory analysis and discus- 
sions of environmental factors of a wild region within urbanizing Southern California. 

488 Land Use Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: geography core and consent of instructor. Analysis and interpretation of ujrban and 
rural land use and settlement with specific references to geographic field problems. Application 
of geographic techniques and tools to local field studies. Saturday field sessions. 

495 Internship in Applied Geography (3) 

Prerequisite: senior standing and consent of instructor. Students work specified number of hours in 
appropriate public or private organizations under the supervision of their staff and as coordinat- 
ed by departmental faculty. Interns meet with instructor by arrangement. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Open to advanced students. Student must have consent of instructor under whom study will be 
undertaken before enrolling. May be repeated for credit. 

500 Seminar in the Evolution of Geographic Thought (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing or consent of instructor. An inquiry into the nature, scope, and 
development of the geographic discipline. 

510 Seminar in Physical Geography (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing or consent of instructor. A seminar on selected topics pertaining to 
physical geography. May be repeated once for credit. 

530 Seminar in Regional Geography (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing or consent of instructor. A seminar on selected regions or selected 
topics within a regional setting. May be repeated once for credit. 

550 Seminar in Human Geography (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing or consent of instructor. A seminar on selected topics pertaining to 
cultural, political or social geography. May be repeated once for credit. 

560 Seminar in Resource Geography (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing or consent of instructor. A seminar on selected problems in resource 
utilization, land use planning and economic geography. May be repeated once for credit. 

571 Seminar in Urban Problems (3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing and consent of instructor. An in-depth study of selected urban 
problems. Topics will vary from semester to semester and will allow for concerns of the 
participants. May be repeated once for credit. 

580 Seminar in Geo-Techniques (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing or consent of instructor. A seminar on selected topics pertaining to 
geographic techniques. May be repeated once for credit. 

597 Project (3) 

Prerequisites: advancement to candidacy and consent of adviser. May be repeated once for a 
maximum of six units of credit. 

598 Thesis (3 or 6) 

Prerequisites: advancement to candidacy and consent of adviser. May be repeated up to a maximum 
of six units of credit. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Open to graduate students by consent of instructor. May be repeated for credit. 


268 History 


DEPARTMENT OF HISTORY 

FACULTY 
Thomas Flickema 
Department Chair 

Gordon Bakken,* Warren Beck, Leland Bellot,* Lauren Breese, Giles Brown,* Jack Crabbs, Lawrence 
de Graaf, Jack Elenbaas, George Etue, Robert Feldman, Charles Frazee, George Giacumakis, 
Arthur Hansen, B. Carmon Hardy, Harry Jeffrey, Sam Kupper, Sheldon Maram, Michael Meisel- 
man, Frederic Miller, Mougo Nyaggah, Michael Onorato, David Pivar, Charles Povlovich, 
Jackson Putnam, Ronald Rietveld, Danton Sailor, Symour Scheinberg, Gary Shumway, Cameron 
Stewart, Ernest Toy,* David Van Deventer, Nelson Woodard, James Woodward, Kinji Ken 
Yada, Cecile Zinberg. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN HISTORY 

The undergraduate major in history is designed to provide cultural enrichment, a sense of alternative, 
and perspectives especially relevant to a society confronted with widespread institutional change. 
The department offers courses which expose the student to man's rich and diverse experience. In 
addition to subject matter, the department gives particular emphasis to various methodologies and 
ways of thinking about mankind's past. The major may be pursued to fulfill various professional and 
cultural objectives common to a liberal arts program. It serves, especially, as a preparation for 
teaching, law, government and other services, and as the foundation for advanced study at the 
graduate level. 

The undergraduate program for the history major contains three well defined levels of study: 
introductory, intermediate and advanced. At the introductory level, the student has the opportunity 
to enroll in topical or survey courses in various fields. At the intermediate level, the student builds 
on the foundations he has established in early study, extending his understanding and moving toward 
greater sophistication in the use of historical materials. At the advanced level, he will devote himself 
to seminar work and independent study in his area or areas of specialization, at which time he will 
be required to apply his knowledge and training in original and challenging ways. 

The undergraduate major requires a total of 40 units: 1 3 in introductory classes and 27 in intermediate 
and advanced courses. At the introductory level, each student is to enroll in History 100, Introduction 
to History. He must also complete four topical or survey offerings. At the intermediate level, History 
399, History Methodology, must be taken along with 18 units, six each in the three fields of United 
States history; European history; and Latin American, Asian or African history. At the advanced level 
the student will be required to enroll in a research seminar and any other elective, at the upper 
division level, which he may choose. 

Except for History 100, all courses offered in the department may be counted toward fulfillment of 
the general education and social science requirement for the bachelor's degree at this university. 
Students majoring in history are encouraged to take work in other of the social sciences and 
humanities. Those intending to do graduate work in history should commence the study of at least 
one foreign language appropriate to the pursuit of advanced study in their particular specialty. 

Program of Study for the Major 

1. Introductory requirements: 13 units 

A. History 100 (prerequisite for intermediate and advanced courses)! 

B. Four courses (100-200 level) from three of the following four fieids. These may be survey 
and/or topical courses: 

1. U.S. history (170A,B and/or 270 topic courses) 

2. European and ancient Mediterranean (11 0A,B, 120 and/or 220, 230 topic courses) 

3. Latin America, Middle East, Asian and African (140, 160, 165 and/or 240, 250, 260 topic 
courses) 

4. World or comparative history (101A,B and/or 210 topic courses) 

2. Intermediate requirements: 21 units 

A. History 399 

B. At least six units of U.S. history 

C. At least six units of European history 

D. At least six units in Latin America, Middle East, Asian or African history 

• University administrative officer 

f Students transferring from accredited institutions who have completed nine or more semester units of work in introduc- 
tory or survey history courses are exempt from this requirement. 


History 269 


3. Advanced requirements: 6 units 

A. History 490 

B. Three units of elective, upper division level 

HISTORY MAJOR AND THE RYAN ACT 

The State Commission for Teacher Preparation and Licensing has approved the department's history 
major for the multiple subject credential option of the Teacher Preparation and Licensing Law of 
1970 (Ryan Act), as well as for the single subject credential option in history and for the single 
subject credential option in the social sciences. The successful completion of any of the three subject 
waivers mentioned above permits a student to receive a credential without taking the State Licensing 
Examination. For further information consult the History Department. 

MINOR IN HISTORY 

The minor in history is composed of units in history exclusive of the general education requirements. 


Recommended minor: Units 

Introduction courses 9 

Electives at the intermediate and advanced levels ]2 

Total 21 

MASTER OF ARTS IN HISTORY 


The Master of Arts in History is designed to improve the student's academic and professional 
competence for educational services at the elementary, secondary and community college levels 
and as preparation for advanced graduate work toward the doctoral degree in history. It is relevant 
to various other specialties in public or private enterprise and general culture or community service. 
The program seeks to deepen the students understanding of man's condition through a careful study 
of human experience. 

Prerequisite 

An applicant must meet the university requirements for admission in conditionally classified graduate 
standing: a baccalaureate degree from an accredited institution and a grade-point average of at least 
2.5 in the last 60 semester units attempted (see section of this catalog on admission of graduates 
for complete statement and procedures). 

A student who meets the requirements for conditionally classified graduate standing, as well as the 
following requirements, may be admitted as a classified graduate upon the development of an 
approved study plan: an undergraduate major in history equivalent to the Cal State Fullerton major 
with at least a CPA of 3.0 in the upper division history courses. Each student's background and record 
are evaluated by the department graduate program adviser. 

Students with limited subject, grade, or breadth deficiencies may be considered for classified 
standing in the program upon completing courses approved by the graduate program adviser in 
history in addition to those required for the degree, with at least a B average. 

Study Plan 

Of the 30 units of adviser-approved graduate courses on the study plan for the degree, 18 must be 
in appropriate work at the 500-level. The remaining 12 units must include a minimum of three units 
in history and, therefore, may include up to nine units in other fields. The required courses for both 
Plan I and Plan II are: 

History 501 Seminar in the Content and Method of History (3) 

History 590 History and Historians (3) 

A research seminar in a field of concentration (3 units) 

Plan I: 

A primary focus in one area in which a field is intensively developed. This results in a specific topic 
of research with a written thesis as the final product (History 598, Thesis: 3-6 units). 

An oral examination on the thesis and the coursework will be required upon completion of the 
coursework but prior to the final draft of the thesis. 

Plan II: 

The focus in this plan is in two fields not found in the same general area. There is a minimum 
requirement of one graduate research seminar besides History 501 and 590. There is also a minimum 
requirement of one graduate reading seminar in the recent interpretations of history in the particular 
fields of interest. 

A written comprehensive in each of the two fields will be required upon completion of the program. 
Students in the History Department's graduate program must demonstrate a broad cultural under- 
standing of one or more foreign countries relevant to the student's area of specialization prior to 


270 History 

advancement to candidacy. This requirement may be met by a reading knowledge of an appropriate 
foreign language usually determined by departmental examination of an approved selection of 
comparative studies ( 1 2 units post-B. A. ) , but the method must be approved by the student's adviser. 
In certain programs, an examination in statistics may be substituted for the language requirement. 
For further information, consult the Department of History. 

See also "The Program of Master's Degrees" in this catalog and the Graduate Bulletin. 

HISTORY MAJOR CATEGORIES 

I. INTRODUCTORY COURSES (for undergraduate students) 

A. Survey Courses (Lower division) 

100 Introduction to History 
101 A World History to 1500 
101 B World History Since 1500 

110A Western Civilization to the 17th Century 

11 0B Western Civilization from 1648 

120 Ancient Civilizations 

140 Latin American Civilizations 

150 African Civilizations 

160 Asian Civilizations 

165 Introduction to the Middle East 

170A United States to 187 

170B United States Since 1877 

B. Topical Courses (Lower division) 

210 Topics in World or Comparative History 

220 Topics in European History 

230 Topics in the History of Science and Technology 

240 Topics in Latin American History 

250 Topics in African History 

260 Topics in Asian History 

270 Topics in American History 

II. INTERMEDIATE COURSES (for undergraduate and graduate students) 

A. Historical Methodology (Upper division) 

399 Historical Methodology 

B. Subject Area Courses (Upper division) 

The Ancient World 

41 2A Ancient Near East — Mesopotamia 

41 2B Ancient Near East — East Mediterranean 

41 5A Classical Greece 

41 5B Hellenistic Civilization 

41 7A Roman Republic 

41 7B Roman Empire 

Europe 

320 France in the Classical Age: 1550-1815 

340 Ancient and Medieval Britain 

341 Tudor-Stuart England 

342 History of England and Great Britain 

400 European Social and Intellectual History to 1500 

401 European Intellectual History from 1 500 to the Present 
410 World at War 

419 The Byzantine Empire 

421 A History of the Christian Church to 1025 

421 B History of the Christian Church from 1025 to the Present 

423 A Medieval Europe, 300-1000 

423B Medieval Europe, 1000-1400 

425A The Renaissance 

425B The Reformation 

426 Rise of Modern Europe, 1648-1763 

427 Europe in the Era of the French Revolution and Napoleon 

428 19th Century Europe 


429 Europe Since 1914 

432 Modern Germany from the 18th Century 

434A Russia to 1890 

434B The Russian Revolution and the Soviet Regime 

436 The Balkans 

437 East Europe 
439 History of Spain 
Latin America 

350A Colonial Latin America 
350B Republican Latin America 

450 Change in Contemporary Latin America 

451 The Andean Nations 
452 A Brazil to 1889 
452B 20th-Century Brazil 
453A Mexico to 1910 
453B Mexico Since 1910 
Africa 

356 Africa to 1850 

357 Africa Since 1850 

455 Contemporary Africa 

456 History of West Africa 

458A Southern Africa to the 20th Century 
458B Southern Africa in the 20th Century 
East Asia 
365 Art of India 

460 Problems of the Contemporary Far East 

426A History of China 

426B History of China 

462C China Since 1949 

463 A History of japan 

463 B History of japan 

464 A History of Southeast Asia to 1850 

464B History of Southeast Asia, 1850-1945 

464C History of Contemporary Southeast Asia 

465A History of India 

465B History of India 

465C History of India 

Middle East 

368 The Arab-lsraeli Conflict 
466A The Arab Ascendancy 
466B The Mongol-Turkish Age 

467 Middle East in the 19th Century 

468 Middle East in the 20th Century 

469 Intellectual and Cultural History of the Middle East 
The United States 

383 History of California 

386A American Social History 1750-1860 

386B American Social History 1865-1930 

470 American Colonial Civilization 

471 The United States From Colony to Nation 

472 jeffersonian Themes in American Society, 1800-1861 

473 Democracy on Trial 1845-1877 

474 The United States— 1876-1914 

475 America Comes of Age, 1914-1945 

476 Age of Power, Affluence and Anxiety Since 1945 

479 The Urbanization of American Life 

480 Development of American Law 

481 Westward Movement in the United States 


272 History 


482 A History of Business in American Society 
482B History of Business in American Society 
483 American Religious History 
484A American Constitutional History to 1865 
484B American Constitutional History from 1865 
485A United States Foreign Relations to 1900 
485B United States Foreign Relations from 1900 
486A United States Cultural History 
486B United States Cultural History 
487A History of Politics in American Society 
487B History of Politics in American Society 
488A Black American From Slavery to jim Crow 
488B Black American Since 1890 

489 The Mexican-American in the Southwest 
Science and Technology 

330 History of Contemporary Science 

430A History of Science: Ancient to Renaissance 

430B History of Science: Copernicus to the Present 

World or Comparative 

303 Historical Dimension of Liberal Studies 

405 History of the Jews 

407 War and Civilization 

III. ADVANCED COURSES (for undergraduate and graduate students) 

A. Seminars (Upper division) 

490 Senior Research Seminar 

491 Proseminar in Special Historical Topics 

492 Community History 

493 Oral History 

494 Special Research Techniques 

495 Colloquium in History 

498 History Internship 

B. Individualized Study (Upper division) 

499 Independent Study 

IV. GRADUATE COURSES (for graduate students) 

501 Seminar in the Content and Method of History 

505 Seminar in Recent Interpretation in History 

520 Seminar in European History 

550 Seminar in Latin American History 

560 Seminar in Afro-Asian History 

570 Seminar in American History 

585 Seminar in the History of United States Foreign Relations 
590 History and Historians 

598 Thesis 

599 Independent Graduate Research 


HISTORY COURSES 

100 Introduction to History (1) 

Designed to introduce the new history major to his academic discipline through exposure to the 
following topics: the uses and significance of history; the nature of history; areas and fields of 
history; the language and vocabulary of history; and methods of studying history. Required of 
all lower division majors. 

101 A World History to 1500 (3) 

The history of mankind from earliest times to 1500 A.D. Special attention is given to the definition, 
evolution, and interaction of the major civilizations. 

101 B World History Since 1500 (3) 

Global history during the past four centuries, with special emphasis on the interaction between the 


History 273 


expanding West and the non-Western areas of the world. 

110A Western Civilization to the 17th Century (3) 

The study of man and Western institutions fr.om their beginnings until the middle of the 1 7th century. 

110B Western Civilizations from 1648 (3) 

The study of man and the modernization of Western Institutions from 1648 to the present. 

120 Ancient Civilizations (3) 

History of the ancient Near East, classical and Hellenistic Greece and Rome. The development of 
art, literature, science and political and economic history. 

140 Latin American Civilizations (3) 

Latin America, its people, politics, and culture from the conquest of Mexico to the overthrow of 
Salvador Allende, with emphasis on the 20th century. Lectures combined with discussion 
groups, films and talks by specialists in Latin American studies. 

150 African Civilizations (3) 

A study of various themes of African social and cultural history, covering basic philosophies and 
institutions, the Nile and Niger civilizations, as well as migrations, state building, Islam, slave 
trade, imperialism and colonialism, nationalism and independence, and racial conflicts. 

160 Asian Civilizations (3) 

A study of the people and culture of East, South and Southeast Asia from historical times to the 
present. 

165 Introduction to the Middle East (3) 

The historical development of the Middle East from the Prophet Mohammed to the present. The 
Islamic religion, art, philosophy, poetry and key political conflicts of modern times. 

170A United States to 1877 (3) 

A survey of the political, social, economic and cultural development of the United States to 1877. 
Attention is given to Old World background, rise of the new nation, sectional problems, the 
Civil War and Reconstruction. Satisfies the state requirement in U.S. history. 

170B United States Since 1877 (3) 

A survey of U.S. history from the late 19th century to the present. Attention is given to economic 
transformation, political reform movements, social, cultural, and intellectual changes, and the 
role of the United States in world affairs. Satisfies the state requirement in U.S. history. 

210 Topics in World or Comparative History (3) 

Introductory world or comparative history courses. 

220 Topics in European History (3) 

Introductory Euopean history courses. 

230 Topics in the History of Science and Technology (3) 

Introductory science and technology history courses. 

240 Topics in Latin American History (3) 

Introductory Latin American history courses. 

250 Topics in African History (3) 

Introductory African history courses. 

260 Topics in Asian History (3) 

Introductory Asian history courses. 

270 Topics in American History (3) 

Introductory American history courses. 

303 Historical Dimension of Liberal Studies (3) 

An introduction to the origins and development of important modes of thought and forms of 
expression in the three core areas of liberal studies, the natural sciences, the social sciences, 
and the arts and humanities. 

320 France in the Classical Age: 1550-1815 (3) 

A survey of French political, economic, social and cultural systems during what this course will 
define "the classical age." 

340 Ancient and Medieval Britain (3) 

The history of Britain from 55 B.C. to 1485. Emphasis on the constitutional, institutional and cultural 
aspects of Roman, Celtic, Anglo-Saxon, Norman and Plantagenet Britain. 

341 Tudor-Stuart England (3) 

The history of England from the accession of Henry VII to the Glorious Revolution. Emphasis on the 
political, institutional, ecclesiastical and cultural aspects of the period of the Tudors and Stuarts. 


274 History 

342 History of England and Great Britain (3) 

A study of the political, economic and social history of Great Britain from the later Stuarts to the 
present. Particular stress on the modification of the parliamentary system and the growth of 
economic and social democracy within Britain and upon the development of responsible 
political systems in the dependent territories. 

350A Colonial Latin America (3) 

A survey of the pre-Columbian cultures; the conquests by Spain and Portugal and the European 
background of these countries; the development of the socioeconomic, cultural, and govern- 
mental institutions in colonial life; the background of revolutions and the wars for independ- 
ence. 

350B Republican Latin America (3) 

A survey of the Latin American republic since 1826, emphasizing the struggle for responsible 
government, socioeconomic, and cultural changes, and the role of U.S. foreign policy. 

356 Africa to 1850 (3) 

The history of tropical Africa from earliest times to the colonial era. 

357 Africa Since 1850 (3) 

A study of the impact of the colonial period upon the peoples of tropical Africa including a 
comparative analysis of the various systems of colonial administration; the factors contributing 
to the rise of African nationalism and the achievement of independence; and the problems 
encountered by these new nations. 

365 Art of India (3) 

(Same as Art 341 ) 

368 The Arab-lsraeli Conflict (3) 

Nature and origins of the conflict between Israel and the Arab states. Includes the four major wars 
fought in the area, the issues which divide the two sides and diplomatic efforts as a solution 
to the problem. 

383 History of California (3) 

A survey of the political, economic, and social history of California from the aboriginal inhabitants 
to the present, tracing the development of contemporary institutions and the historical back- 
ground of current issues. 

386A American Social History 1750-1860 

A social history of the United States to the Civil War with emphasis on reform movements, temper- 
ance, moral purity, women's rights, anti-slavery, spiritualism and their importance to the forma- 
tion of a modern society. 

386B American Social History 1865-1930 (3) 

A social history of the United States from the Civil War with emphasis on reform, social organization 
and values. Attention will be given to the woman's movement, censorship, divorce, the child 
and the limits of reform movements in an organizational society. 

399 Historical Methodology (3) 

A study of historical knowledge in relation to general knowledge; an introduction to the plurality of 
approaches in the analysis of history through the social sciences and humanities. Special 
emphasis will be placed upon the application of theory in historical investigations and upon 
forms of historical communication. Required of all majors. 

400 European Social and Intellectual History to 1500 (3) 

A survey of the history of ideas from Antiquity to the Renaissance. Particular attention is given to 
the development of western thought, its foundations in Graeco-Roman and judao-Christian 
tradition and its impact on the shaping of European society and culture. 

401 European Intellectual History from 1500 to the Present (3) 

The history of the competing ideas in European history from 1 500 to the present which have entered 
into the formation of modern European institutions. 

405 History of the Jews (3) 

History of the jewish people from the post-biblical period to the present. Emphasis on the literature 
of each period as well as the relationships which exist between the Jewish communities and 
the societies in which they exist. 

407 War and Civilization (3) 

The political and social implications of modern warfare, of the development of military technologies 
and of changing concepts of military organizations. 


History 275 


410 World War II (3) 

A history of World War II based, in part, on films and documentaries. Lectures and discussion amplify 
the films and tapes. 

41 2 A Ancient Near East — Mesopotamia (3) 

A study of the political, socioeconomic, religious, and literary history of Mesopotamian culture from 
the rise of the Sumerian city-states to Alexander the Great; a period of over three millennia. 
This will include discussion of the Sumerians, Assyrians, Babylonians, Hurrians and Persians. 

412B Ancient Near East — East Mediterraneans (3) 

A study of ancient Egypt from early dynastic times in the third millennium B.C. to the conquest of 
Alexander the Great. The history of the Syro-Palestinian region will be studied in light of its 
migrations and international culture. A careful study of the Hebrews and their contributions to 
modern civilization will be included. 

41 5 A Classical Greece (3) 

A study of the civilization of ancient Greece. This course traces the rise and flourishing of the classical 
city-states; considerable attention is devoted to the literary and philosophic contributions to our 
modern civilization. 

415B Hellenistic Civilization (3) 

A study of the hellenistic synthesis and the new patterns in government, the arts and sciences, 
philosophy and literature that appeared between the Macedonian conquest and the interven- 
tion of Rome. 

417A Roman Republic (3) 

A study of the development of Roman social and political institutions under the republic. 

417B Roman Empire (3) 

A study of Roman imperial institutions and culture. Attention is also given to the rise of Christianity. 

419 The Byzantine Empire (3) 

An historical study of the East Roman Empire from Constantine to the Ottoman conquest of 1453. 
Special attention to institutional aspects of Byzantine society: church, state, the economy, law 
and culture. 

421A History of the Christian Church to 1025 (3) 

This course traces the Christian Church from its origins in the apostolic preaching through the Middle 
Ages in both the East and West. 

421 B History of the Christian Church from 1025 to the Present (3) 

This course studies the western church as an institution from 1025 to the present. Orthodoxy, 
Catholicism and Protestantism are presented in historical perspective. 

423A Medieval Europe, 300-1000 ( 3) 

The genesis of European society from the decline of Rome to the age of the Vikings. Attention is 
given to the emergence of western Europe; to the barbarian migrations which culminated in the 
Carolingian Empire; and to Roman, Germanic and Celtic influences in early medieval civiliza- 
tion. 

423B Medieval Europe, 1000-1400 ( 3) 

A topical approach is employed with particular attention given to Normandy and the Norman 
Conquest, technology and social change, Romanesque and Gothic art and Scholasticism. 

425A The Renaissance (3) 

The history of Europe from 1400 to 1525 with emphasis upon the beginnings of capitalism, the 
beginnings of the modern state, humanism, the pre-Reformation and the church on the eve of 
the Reformation. 

425B The Reformation (3) 

The history of Europe from 1525 to 1648; deals with the Protestants and Catholic Reformations; the 
religious wars; the price rise; royal absolution; the rise of science. 

426 Rise of Modern Europe, 1648-1763 (3) 

Prerequisite: History 1 1 0B. European diplomatic history and the balance of power from 1 648 to 1 763. 
Attention is given to the social and philosophical developments of the period. 

427 Europe in the Era of the French Revolution and Napoleon (3) 

A survey of European history from 1763 to 1815. Emphasis is placed on the politics, society, and 
culture of the Old Regime, the influence of the Enlightenment, the impact of the French 
Revolution on Europe, and the establishment of French hegemony by Napoleon. 

428 19th-Century Europe (3) 

Europe from 1815 to 1914. An examination of the political, economic, social, and cultural trends in 
European history from the Congress of Vienna to the outbreak of World War I. Special attention 


276 History 


is given to the emerging forces of nationalism, liberalism, socialism, and secularism. 

429 Europe Since 1914 (3) 

Survey of events from the beginning of World War I to the present. Special emphasis given to the 
economic, political, social, diplomatic, and intellectual trends of 20th-century Europe. 

430A History of Science: Ancient to Renaissance (3) 

An examination of the origin and development of western science and its role in culture from the 
third millennium B.C. through the beginnings of the Scientific Revolution of the 16th and 17th 
centuries. The hellenic, hellenistic and later medieval periods will receive special attention. 

430B History of Science: Copernicus to the Present (3) 

A study of the development of science from the 1 6th century to the present. Particular emphasis 
will be placed on the scientific revolutions of the 17th and 20th centuries. The interaction 
between science, technology and culture will be discussed in some detail. 

432 Modern Germany from the 18th Century (3) 

A survey of German history from the era of Frederick the Great to the present. 

434A Russia to 1890 ( 3) 

An analysis of the historical developments from the establishment of the Russian state at Kiev through 
the great reforms, the revolutionary movement and reaction of the 19th century. Emphasis is 
placed upon the shaping of contemporary Russia. 

434B The Russian Revolutions and the Soviet Regime (3) 

An evaluation of the 1905 and 1917 revolutions and the subsequent consolidation of power under 
the Communist regime. Chief emphasis is placed upon the continuity and change in Russian 
social political, cultural institutions and foreign policy effected by the impact of Marxist-Lennist- 
Stalinist ideology. 

436 The Balkans (3) 

The Balkan peoples from the Middle Ages through the Ottoman Conquest to the present. Emphasis 
is placed on the role religion, nationalism, and communism have played in the development 
of modern Balkan consciousness. 

437 East Europe (3) 

The political and social history of the central East European peoples. 

439 History of Spain (3) 

Development of Hispanic civilization from the earliest times to the present. 

450 Change in Contemporary Latin America (3) 

An analysis of political, social, and economic change in present-day Latin America. 

451 The Andean Nations (3) 

The social history of Ecuador, Peru, Bolivia and Chile. 

45 2 A Brazil to 1889 (3) 

The development of Brazil from the beginning of the colonial period through the overthrow of the 
Brazilian monarchy in 1889. The emergence and development of a ''colonial" economy and 
the contribution of the African, Amerindian, and Portuguese to Luso-Brazilian civilization. 

452B 20th Century Brazil (3) 

The historical development of Brazil from 1889 to the present. Equal attention is given to social, 
economic and cultural trends and to the nation's political evolution. Approximately 40 per cent 
of the course focuses on Brazil after 1945. 

453A Mexico to 1910 (3) 

A history of Mexico from the pre-Columbian period to 1910. The course stresses the Indian heritage, 
the impact upon the native civilizations of the Spanish Conquest and the blending of Hispanic 
institutions with those of the first Mexicans. 

453B Mexico Since 1910 (3) 

A study of the background of the Mexican Revolution of 1910 and the revolution itself from 1910 
to 1921 stressing the political, economic, and social features; special attention will be paid to 
the Revolution as the first of the great upheavals of the 20th century. 

455 Contemporary Africa (3) 

African history since 1945. Problems preceeding independence, postindependence, internal and 
external problems concerning economics, politics, boundaries, pan-Africanism, apartheid, ra- 
cial conflicts and others. 

456 History of West Africa (3) 

Major themes of West African history, including development of legitimate trade and states, colonial- 
ism, nationalism and post independence achievements and problems. 


History 277 


45 8 A Southern Africa from Earliest Times to the 20th Century (3) 

A study of the culture and history of the indigenous peoples of southern Africa; and the development 
and impact of European interests in this area with particular emphasis on the history of South 
Africa to the Union of 1910. 

458B Southern Africa in the 20th Century (3) 

A survey of 20th-century developments in the Union (Republic) of South Africa, Central Africa (the 
Rhodesias and Nyasaland) and the Portuguese colonies with emphasis on the political, eco- 
nomic and social ramifications of race relations. 

460 Problems of the Contemporary Far East (3) 

A study of the post- World War II history of East, South and Southeast with emphasis upon problems 
of nationalism, communism and economic development. 

462A History of China (3) 

Chinese history from ancient times to the middle of the 17th century, with special attention to the 
development of society, thought, economy and political institutions. 

462B History of China (3) 

Chinese history from the middle of the 17th century to the 1950s. A study of China's internal 
developments and foreign intrusion, with special attention to the rise of modern Chinese 
nationalism and intellectual developments in the Republican period, as well as the attempts at 
modernization and the triumph of communism. 

462C China Since 1949 (3) 

History of China from 1949 to the present. A study of the Communist Party, political institutions, 
ideology, economic modernization and foreign relations of China. 

463A History of Japan (3) 

A study of the social, political, and economic history of japan until 1868, with emphasis upon the 
Tokugawa era. 

463B History of Japan (3) 

A study emphasizing the rise of the modern Japanese state, Japanese imperialism and the postwar 
era. 

464A History of Southeast Asia to 1850 (3) 

A study of Southeast Asia since early historical times to the establishment of the colonial empires 
of the West in the mid-19th century. 

464B History of Southeast Asia, 1850-1945 ( 3) 

A study of Southeast Asia under the impact of the imperialism and the effects of the Pacific War 
on the European empires. 

464C History of Contemporary Southeast Asia (3) 

A study of Southeast Asia since the Pacific War to the present. Emphasis will be placed on the 
problems of the area and American involvement in Southeast Asia. 

465A History of India (3) 

A survey of the history of the Indian subcontinent from ancient times to the fall of the first Islamic 
empire in India, 1526. In addition to political developments, the course includes a detailed 
examination of evolving religious and social institutions: Hinduism, Buddhism, Jainism, class and 
caste. 

465B History of India (3) 

A survey of the history of the Indian subcontinent from the beginning of the Mughul Empire, 1526 
to the Indian Mutiny of 1857. The course includes an examination of European intrusions and 
the crystallization of British supremacy in India. 

465C History of India (3) 

A survey of the history of India from 1857 to 1947 emphasizing India's struggle for independence. 

466A The Arab Ascendancy (3) 

Events transpiring in the Middle East from the rise of Islam to the Mongol invasions of the 13th 
century; the impact of Islamic civilization upon Middle East society. 

466B The Mongol-Turkish Age (3) 

The post-caliphai period with emphasis on the Mongol invasions of the Middle East and their effects; 
early modern Muslim empires — Ottoman, Safavid and Moghul — up to A.D. 1800. 

467 The Middle East in the 19th Century (3) 

Western penetration of the Middle East and the reaction to it, modernization, the growth of national- 
ist movements and revolutionary disturbances ending with World War I. 


278 History 

468 Middle East in the 20th Century (3) 

Social, political and economic changes in the Middle East since World War I. Particular emphasis 
on the period after World War II and recent independence movements. 

469 Intellectual and Cultural History of the Middle East (3) 

Major Muslim achievements in the social and natural sciences belles-lettres, theology and philoso- 
phy, art and architecture from the advent of Islam to the 20th century. 

470 American Colonial Civilization (3) 

Prerequisite: History 170A or consent of instructor. This course analyzes the creation of societies 
in English North America from 1607-1754, stressing the emergence of economic, social and 
political patterns and structures in a maturing Anglo-American culture. 

471 The United States from Colony to Nation (3) 

Prerequisite: History 170A or consent of instructor. This course analyzes and describes the social, 
economic, political and intellectual developments in 18th century America, stressing the Anglo- 
American imperial problems leading to the revolution, the origins of American nationalism, the 
social structure of the new nation, the formation of the Constitution and the rise of a party 
system. 

472 Jeffersonian Themes in American Society, 1800-1861 (3) 

Prerequisite: History 170A or consent of instructor Analyzes Jeffersonian values and their impact 
upon the social, political and cultural life of the nation during the era of their greatest relevance. 

473 Democracy on Trial 1845-1877 (3) 

Prerequisite: History 170A or consent of instructor. The study of America's "great national crisis" 
and the impact of slavery, civil war and national reconstruction upon the democratic process 
of the republic. 

474 The United States 1876-1914 (3) 

The organization of American industry and its impact upon American life. Special consideration is 
given to the populist and progressive reform movements. 

475 America Comes of Age, 1914-1945 ( 3) 

A multi-topic analysis of major trends in U.S. domestic policy, foreign policy, economy and soceity 
from World War I through World War II. Course will concentrate on conflicting values and 
ideals of domestic policy and U.S. role in world affairs. 

476 Age of Power, Affluence and Anxiety Since 1945 (3) 

Multi-topic analysis of U.S. History from 1945 to the present stressing the interrelationship of foreign 
policy, economic prosperity, deomestic tensions and protest movements. 

479 The Urbanization of American Life (3) 

The historical development of urban life in America with special emphasis on the colonial town, the 
western town and the industrial city. 

480 Development of American Law (3) 

Prerequisite: History 170A or 170B. A survey of the development of selected areas of American law 
with emphasis upon contracts, property, commercial law, criminal law, corporations, torts, civil 
procedure and the legal profession. 

481 Westward Movement in the United States (3) 

A survey of the expansion of the United States population and sovereignty from the eastern seaboard 
to the Pacific, colonial times to 1900, and a history of regional development during the frontier 
period. 

482A History of Business in American Society (3) 

The course explores the interaction of social and economic factors upon each other in the develop- 
ment of American society. Special attention is given to the role of business and labor in 
economic change. The first semester covers the development of a colonial economy and the 
early national economy. 

482B History of Business in American Society (3) 

The course continues to explore the interaction of social and economic factors upon each other in 
the development of American society beginning with the "takeoff stage of economic develop- 
ment" and ending with contemporary America. Special attention is given to the role of business 
and labor in economic change. 

483 American Religious History (3) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. The vitality and creativity of American religious life and the 
proliferation of religious organizations as the result of the transplanting of European Christianity 
and its modification in the new environment. 


History 279 


484A American Constitutional History to 1865 (3) 

Prerequisite: History 170A, English and colonial origins, the growth of democracy, the slavery 
controversy, and the sectional conflict as they reflect constitutional development. 

484B American Constitutional History from 1865 (3) 

Prerequisite: History 170B. Constitutional problems involved in the post-Civil War era, the expansion 
of business, World War I, the New Deal, World War II, and civil rights in the postwar era. 

485 A United States Foreign Relations to 1900 (3) 

A comprehensive survey of the foreign relations of the United States from the beginning of the nation 
until 1900. Particular attention is given to bases of policy, critical evaluation of major policies 
and relationships between domestic affairs and foreign policy. 

485B United States Foreign Relations from 1900 ( 3) 

Relations from 1900 to the present. An analysis of the rise of the United States as a world power 
in the 20th century with special emphasis on the search for world order and the diplomacy of 
the atomic age. 

486A United States Cultural History (3) 

A study of the social and intellectual development of the United States from the Puritans to the Civil 
War. 

486B United States Cultural History (3) 

A study of the social and intellectual development of the United States from the Civil War to the 
present. 

487A History of Politics in American Society (3) 

This course traces political developments from the Colonial Period to the end of the Civil War. Its 
primary focus is upon political patterns of behavior, institutional development and the response 
of the American political system to changing social demands and needs. 

487B History of Politics in American Society (3) 

This course traces political developments from Reconstruction to Lyndon Baines johnson. Its primary 
focus is upon political patterns of behavior, institutional development and the response of the 
political system to changing societal demands and needs. 

488A Black American From Slavery to Jim Crow (3) 

A history of black Americans from African backgrounds through the era of slavery and the Civil War 
to the post-Reconstruction era. 

488B Black American Since 1890 (3) 

History of black Americans from Booker T. Washington to present, stressing both their culture and 
role in American life and the issues involved in their relations with other segments of the 
population in various regions. 

489 The Mexican-American in the Southwest (3) 

Historical role of the Mexican-American in the Southwest stressing the cultural uniqueness, contribu- 
tions, with special emphasis upon migration, education, and economic changes since 1945. 

490 Senior Research Seminar (3) 

Directed research seminar with class discussions applied to specific topics and areas as schedule 
and staff allow. Designed to give students experience in original research and writing. Required 
of all history majors. 

491 Proseminar in Special Historical Topics (3) 

Intensive study of trends, phenomena, themes or periods of history involving occasional lecture, 
discussion, directed reading, and student research. 

492 Community History (3) 

A study of the historical development of communities in general, and of the Orange County area 
in particular. Special emphasis on techniques of gathering and processing local historical data, 
including oral interviews and other archival materials. 

493 Oral History (3) 

Utilization of tape recorded interviews to document significant events in 20th-century history. 
Training will be given in interviewing techniques, tape recording interviews and historical editing 
of the typed transcripts of interviews. May be repeated for a total of six units if student wishes 
to pursue a different emphasis. 

495 Colloquium in History (3) 

Interpretation and analysis of significant documents and works of history aimed at broad synthesis 
and mastery of major interpretations in an area. Involves extensive directed reading and discus- 
sion. Themes will vary according to instructor. 


280 Latin American Studies 


498 History Internship (3) 

The internship program offers students community work experience directly related to the history 
academic program. The interns gain a more complete education by working, usually without 
pay, outside the university for 10 hours each week of the semester. This course may only be 
used in the upper division elective section of the major. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Open to advanced students in history with consent of department chair. May be repeated for credit. 
501 Seminar in the Content and Method of History (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. 

505 Seminar in Recent Interpretations in History (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. 

520 Seminar in European History (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. 

550 Seminar in Latin American History (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. 

560 Seminar in Afro-Asian History (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. 

570 Seminar in American History (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. 

585 Seminar in the History of United States Foreign Relations (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. 

590 History and Historians (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. A study of the writings, personalities, and philosophies of repre- 
sentative historians from Herodotus to the present. 

598 Thesis (3 or 6) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. May be repeated for credit. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Open to graduate students in history with consent of department chair. May be repeated for credit. 

LATIN AMERICAN STUDIES PROGRAM 

FACULTY 
Sheldon Maram 

Program Coordinator 
PROGRAM COUNCIL 

Oswaldo Arana (Foreign Languages), Nancy Baden (Foreign Languages), Warren Beck (History), 
Harvey Blend (Physics), Isaac Cardenas (Chicano Studies), James Dietz (Economics), Thomas 
Flickema (History), Dagobert Fuentes (Chicano Studies), Ron Harmon (Foreign Languages), 
Arturo Jasso (Foreign Languages), Leroy Joesink-Mandeville (Anthropology), Paul Kane (Edu- 
cation), William J. Ketteringham (Geography), Jackie Kiraithe (Foreign Languages), Martin 
Klein (Communications), John Lafky (Economics), Neil Maloney (Earth Science), Lon 
McClanahan (Biological Science), Adolfo Ortega (Chicano Studies), Joseph Platt (Chicano 
Studies), Edgar Wiley (Management), Jon Yinger (Political Science). 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN LATIN AMERICAN STUDIES 

The Latin American studies program is designed for students desiring a general education with 
specific focus on Latin America. Students planning careers which will involve residence in, or a 
knowledge of Latin America (such as teaching, business, government, scientific research, engineer- 
ing, or journalism) will profit immensely from this program. Moreover, the program provides a sound 
base for students who will teach Spanish or the social sciences in the secondary schools. The 
program also prepares the student for graduate work in Latin American studies or in other disciplines 
involving a specialization in Latin America. 

Teachers 

The Latin American studies program has been approved for the single subject examination waiver 
in the social sciences and for the multiple subject waiver, under provisions of the Ryan Act. 

Foundation Courses 

All students should develop a language proficiency level which is the equivalent of Spanish 204 and 
Portuguese 102. 

Students with no language background should take: 

Spanish 101 Fundamental Spanish (5) 

Spanish 102 Fundamental Spanish (5) 


Latin American Studies 281 


Spanish 203 Intermediate Spanish (3) 

Spanish 204 Intermediate Spanish (3) 

Portuguese 101 Fundamental Portuguese (4) 

Portuguese 102 Fundamental Portuguese (4) 

However, a student with a knowledge of Spanish and/or Portuguese may be able to meet part or 
all of the foundation course requirements by taking a test administered by the Department of Foreign 
Languages and Literatures. 

Required Core Courses (12 units) 

Language (3 units): 

Spanish 317 or 318 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3) (318 is designed for bilingual 
students ) or either 

Portuguese 317 or 318 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3) 

Literature (3 units): 

Spanish 441 Spanish American Literature from Modernismo to Present (3) or 
Portuguese 441 Brazilian Literature (3) 


History and Culture ( 9 units): 

Spanish 316 Introduction to Spanish American Civilization (3) or 
Portuguese 325 Contemporary Brazilian Civilization (3) 

History 350A Colonial Latin America (3) 

History 350B Republican Latin America (3) 

Recommended Selected Concentrations 

Fifteen units selected from three or more of the following groupings: 

/. Culture: 

Portuguese 315 Introduction to Luzo Brazilian Culture and Civilization (3) 
Portuguese 317 or 318 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3) or 
Spanish 317 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3) 

Portuguese 325 Contemporary Brazilian Civilization (3) or 
Spanish 316 Introduction to Spanish American Civilization (3) 
Anthropology 322 Peoples of Mesoamerica (3) 

Anthropology 324A The Ancient Maya (3) 

Anthropology 324B Prehistory of Northern Mesoamerica (3) 
Anthropology 325 Peoples of South America (3) 

Anthropology 326 Prehistory of South America (3) 


II. Fine Arts and Literature: 

Portuguese 441 Brazilian Literature (3 ) or 
Spanish 441 Spanish American Literature from Modernismo to the Present (3) 
Spanish 440 Spanish American Literature from the Conquest to 1888 (3) 

Spanish 466 Introduction to Spanish Linguistics (3) 

Spanish 485 Senior Seminar: Hispanic topics (3) (with consent of program director) 


III. History and Politics: 

History 450 Change in Contemporary Latin America (3) 

History 451 The Andean Nations (3) 

History 452A Brazil to 1889 (3) 

History 452B 20th-Century Brazil (3) 

History 453A Mexico to 1910 (3) 

History 453B Mexico since 1910 (3) 

Political Science 431 Government and Politics of Latin America (3) 
Political Science 452 Latin American Foreign Policies (3) 


IV. Geography and Economics 
Geography 333 Geography of Latin America (3) 

Geography 433 Man and Geographic Relationships in Latin America (3) 
Economics 330 Comparative Economic Systems (3); 

Economics 333 Economic Development: Analyses and Case Studies (3) 


V Senior Seminar: 

Latin American Studies 401 Contemporary Latin America (3) 


282 


Liberal Studies 


LATIN AMERICAN STUDIES COURSES 

100 Introduction to Latin America (3) 

A team-taught introductory course on topics relevant to contemporary Latin America which uses 
an interdisciplinary approach. Core areas will include man, environment, society, instituitons 
and culture. The exact content will vary depending upon the faculty and existing conditions 
within Latin America. 

401 Contemporary Latin America (3) 

An interdisciplinary team-taught senior seminar on topics relevant to contemporary Latin America. 
The exact content of the course will vary depending upon the faculty and present conditions 
within Latin America. May be repeated for credit. 

LIBERAL STUDIES PROGRAM 

FACULTY 
Ronald Clapper 
Acting Program Coordinator 

Herbert Booth (Speech Communication), Caylen Carlson (Science Education), Daniel Crary 
(Speech Communication), David Depew (Philosophy), Robert Emry (Speech Communica- 
tion), Joseph Hayes (English), Carl Jackson (Afro Ethnic Studies), Helen Jaskoski (English), 
Anne Jennings (Anthropology), Dorothea Kenny (English), Fraser Powlison (Education), Rich- 
ard Smith (Philosophy), Eric Streitberger (Science Education), Michael Tang (Liberal Studies), 
Frank Verges (Philosophy), Charles Williams (Science Education), Norman Zimmerman (Lib- 
eral Studies). 

PROGRAM COUNCIL 

Ronald Clapper, Chair, Leland Bellot (Dean of the School of Humanities and Social Sciences), 
Dennis Berg (Sociology), Dale Caine (student), Gerald Gannon (Mathematics), Israel Garcia 
(Chicano Sudies), Charlotte Hughes (English), Teresa Hynes (Communications), Karen Lystra 
(American Studies), Fraser Powlison (Eduction), Gloria Rock (Philosophy), Otto Sadovszky 
(Director of Academic Advisement), Eric Streitberger (Science Education), Curtis Swanson 
(Foreign Languages and Literature), Marceline Villarreal (student), Lee Wettengel (student), 
James Woodward (History). 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN LIBERAL STUDIES 

The B.A. in Liberal Studies is an interdisciplinary program designed for students with diverse interests 
who feel that a specialized major is inappropriate for the kind of university experience they would 
like to achieve. The program is designed to help students synthesize and integrate their knowledge 
and experience by focusing on a meaningful problem, issue, or theme that is broad in scope and 
cuts across the traditional lines of the academic disciplines. The 48 units required for the liberal 
studies major are distributed in three major phases. 

1. The Liberal Studies Core Courses (18 units) 

History 303 Historical Dimension of Liberal Studies (3) 

Philosophy 304 Methods of Inquiry (3) 

Speech Communication 305 Liberal Studies in Communication Processes (3) 

Liberal Studies 306 Liberal Studies in the Humanities and Arts (3) 

Liberal Studies 307 Liberal Studies in the Sciences (3) 

Liberal Studies 308 Liberal Studies in the Social Sciences (3) 

2. The Individualized Coordinated Program (24 units) 

The student develops his/her own study plan based on an interdisciplinary problem, issue, or 
theme by selecting 12 units of upper division courses from the University's current offerings in 
one of the three areas of human knowledge — the humanities and arts, the sciences, and the social 
sciences — and six units of upper division courses in each of the remaining areas. 

3. The Thesis Sequence (6 units) 

The student produces a major work — a project, thesis, or creative work — based on the knowledge 
he/she has gained from the Individualized Coordinated Program by enrolling in: 

Liberal Studies 480 Practicum in Liberal Studies ( 1 ) 

Liberal Studies 490 Seminar in Liberal Studies (1) 

Both the practicum and the seminar are accompanied by 2 units of Independent Study (499) 
taken in the department of the professor with whom the student chooses to work. 

MULTIPLE SUBJECTS CREDENTIAL WAIVER PROGRAM 

The liberal studies program has been granted a waiver right by the Commission for Teacher Prepara- 


Library Science 283 

tion and Licensing which means that liberal studies majors, providing they follow an acceptable 
program of courses, can be granted the multi-subject (elementary) credential without having to take 
the state examination otherwise required by the Ryan Act. 

ADVISEMENT 

Students are urged to see a program adviser prior to their first semester at the uni